CN109923503A - Device and card-type device - Google Patents

Device and card-type device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CN109923503A
CN109923503A CN201780024053.9A CN201780024053A CN109923503A CN 109923503 A CN109923503 A CN 109923503A CN 201780024053 A CN201780024053 A CN 201780024053A CN 109923503 A CN109923503 A CN 109923503A
Authority
CN
China
Prior art keywords
code
information
pattern
physical quantity
dot
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
CN201780024053.9A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
吉田健治
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
IP Solutions Inc
Original Assignee
IP Solutions Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2016057723A external-priority patent/JP6031689B1/en
Application filed by IP Solutions Inc filed Critical IP Solutions Inc
Priority claimed from PCT/JP2017/006018 external-priority patent/WO2017142093A2/en
Publication of CN109923503A publication Critical patent/CN109923503A/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Abstract

The present invention relates to the laminal devices for the panel (display screen etc. of smart phone) for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity.Laminal device includes non-conductive base material, to be lamellar, is formed with blank part in inside；Multiple first conductive pattern components are formed on the first face for acting on panel of non-conductive base material；Second conductive pattern component, both set a distance is formed above in distance the first face；And first circuit, by the hole that is formationed in the first face has the part of the first conductive pattern component to be open, the first conductive pattern component of connection and the second conductive pattern component.

Description

Device and card-type device
Technical field
The present invention relates to device and card-type devices.
Background technique
There is a kind of technology in the past, record had to the prepaid card of the authentication codes based on conductor and non-conductor configuration pattern, Close to the electronic equipment (such as smart phone) for carrying touch panel, so that conductor and idioelectric configuration pattern are by touch surface Plate detection, is based on the testing result, and authentication codes identify (referring to patent document 1) by electronic equipment.
Existing technical literature
(patent document)
Patent document 1: special open 2015-035051 bulletin
Summary of the invention
(technical problems to be solved)
But wants to make code successively to change although having and utilize the hope of the electronic equipments such as smart phone identification, conduct Conventional art including patent document 1 can not comply with corresponding hope.
The present invention is exactly to research and develop in light of this situation, it is therefore an objective to so that even if changing code successively, it also being capable of benefit It is identified with electronic equipments such as smart phones.
(means solved the problems, such as)
To reach the purpose, a kind of device of form of the present invention includes:
Arrival amount test section detects the arrival amount per unit time of the external external energy to arrive；
Information obtains circuit and obtains the defeated of set form based on the variation of the arrival amount per unit time Enter information；
Acting surface is arranged with 1 or more element for generating the physical quantity variation that can be detected in forward surface；
Physical quantity control unit is 1 or more, causes the physical quantity variation of described 1 or more element respectively；And
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, from described 1 or more element, Xiang Suoshu 1 or more physics Amount control unit exports the output information of set form.
In addition, to reach the purpose, the device of another form of the present invention includes:
A kind of for example described device of form of the present invention is known in identification information memory portion, memory with other devices Other identification information；And
Encoded information is occurred circuit and is encoded based on the identification information and the input information of the acquirement Information；
The information output part output includes the output information of the encoded information.
(The effect of invention)
According to the present invention, it even if changing code successively, can also be identified using the electronic equipment of smart phone etc..
Detailed description of the invention
Fig. 1 is to show that one that the appearance of information processing system associated with a kind of implementation form of the present invention is constituted is shown The figure of example.
Fig. 2 is to read set information until occurring and corresponding set letter in the processing for the information processing system for showing Fig. 1 Cease a series of figure of the outline of processing of relevant code.
Fig. 3 is a series of processing of the code in the processing for the information processing system for showing Fig. 1, until identifying output The figure of outline.
Fig. 4 is shown in the information processing system of Fig. 1, the exemplary ideograph that code generating device is constituted.
Fig. 5 is shown in the information processing system of Fig. 1, and the hardware of code identification device constitutes exemplary block diagram.
Fig. 6 be shown in touch panel and can detect multiple spot in the case where dot configuration pattern specific example figure.
Fig. 7 is the figure shown by the specific example of the situation of output pattern code (information) in the form of symbol.
Fig. 8 is to show that code generating device (1) obtains the mode of the appearance for the dot code (information) that display device is shown Figure.
Fig. 9 is the dot code shown in the touch panel for show code generating device (1) acquirement code identification device The ideograph of the appearance of (information).
Figure 10 is to show the exemplary ideograph of the composition of static capacity control system.
Figure 11 is that the composition for the various semiconductor switch for showing that the static capacity control system of Figure 10 can use is exemplary Figure.
The explanatory diagram of the summary of static capacity minimization when Figure 12 is about the semiconductor switch Off for making Figure 11.
Figure 13 is the example for the circuit for being not provided with power supply and being constituted switch with transistor.
Figure 14 is the exemplary ideograph for showing the code generating device (1) with information judging device and constituting.
Figure 15 is the exemplary ideograph for showing the code generating device (1) of no information judging device and constituting.
Figure 16 is the exemplary ideograph for showing the code generating device (1) of no information judging device and constituting.
Figure 17 configures dot (on the basis of 13-1 to 13-5), by information judging device with being shown in non-rotational symmetry End is configured at so that user easily identifies the symbol pattern specific example of interpretation position, is display touch panel (31) energy The figure of the specific example of the symbol pattern without symbol code interpretation enough in the case where detection multiple spot.
Figure 18 is the figure of the position identification for input medium symbol pattern and display.
Figure 19 is the figure for showing the embodiment that personal authentication's service of the invention is utilized.
Figure 20 is to show the figure that the embodiment that ticket purchase of the invention/lottery ticket obtains service is utilized.
Figure 21 is to show that the figure that lottery ticket service (dot mark) was bought/obtained to ticket of the invention is utilized.
Figure 22 is to show that ticket of the invention/lottery ticket the output for printing service figure is utilized.
Figure 23 is to show that lottery ticket/integral of the invention, which is utilized, to attract customers the figure of service.
Figure 24 is to show the figure that electronic accumulation card service of the invention is utilized.
Figure 25 is to show the figure that the information service of the invention based on print media is utilized.
Figure 26 is to show the figure that the communication sales service of the invention based on print media is utilized.
Figure 27 is to show the figure that entertainment service of the invention is utilized.
Figure 28 is to show the figure that information transmission service of the invention is utilized.
Figure 29 is to show that the figure that dot code of the invention forms medium information link is utilized.
Figure 30 is used to illustrate that the implementation form of information dot, figure (A) to show that first case, figure (B) show second Example, figure (C) show third example, and figure (D) shows the 4th, and figure (E) shows the 5th.
Figure 31 is used to illustrate that the implementation form of dot code distribution format, figure (A) to show that first case, figure (B) are aobvious Show that second case, figure (C) show third example.
Figure 32 is used to illustrate the implementation form of the first case (" GRID0 ") of dot pattern.
For the second case to dot pattern, (" GRID5 " Figure 52 is used for the basic circle to dot pattern (GRID5) to Figure 33 The configuration of point or virtual point is illustrated.
Figure 34 is for illustrating that dot pattern is read, and figure (A) shows the first interpretation example, and figure (B) shows that second sentences Read example.
Figure 35 hookup 34, for illustrating that dot pattern is read, the figure illustrates third interpretation examples.
Figure 36 is the figure for showing the use example of card-type device.
Figure 37 is an exemplary ideograph of the composition of display device inboard.
Figure 38 is an exemplary ideograph of the composition of display device table side.
Figure 39 is shown in an exemplary ideograph of the composition of the apparatus surface of the conductive film in surface.
Figure 40 is the exemplary ideograph that display device is constituted.
Figure 41 is shown in the exemplary ideograph that the device of the conductive film in surface is constituted.
Figure 42 is display device with the composition of the contact surface of an information equipment exemplary ideograph.
Figure 43 is the figure of the output example of display pattern code.
Figure 44 is the figure of the output example of display pattern code.
Figure 45 is device to the flow chart of the processing example of information equipment output information.
Figure 46 is information equipment to the flow chart of the processing example of device output information.
Figure 47 is to show an exemplary mode for being received the device Inner Constitution of power supply by means of light-to-current inversion Figure.
Figure 48 is to show an exemplary mode for being received the device Inner Constitution of power supply by means of electromagnetic wave Figure.
Figure 49 is to show an exemplary mode for being received the device Inner Constitution of power supply by means of piezoelectric transduction Figure.
Figure 50 is to show an exemplary mode for being received the device Inner Constitution of power supply by means of thermoelectric (al) inversion Figure.
Figure 51 is the flow chart for sending the processing example of the identification information encrypted according to the moment.
Figure 52 is the process for sending the processing example of the identification information encrypted according to the input information from information equipment Figure.
Figure 53 is to show based on the variation of heterogeneous light arrival amount and obtain the device Inner Constitution for inputting information One exemplary ideograph.
Figure 54 is to start the flow chart with the processing example of the communication of information equipment according to detection information.
Figure 55 is to execute the exemplary flow chart of processing according to the input information from information equipment.
Figure 56 (A) is an exemplary ideograph for showing the composition inside card-type device, and figure (B) is display card-type dress An exemplary ideograph of the composition on surface is set, (C) is the exemplary mode for showing the hardware of card-type device and constituting Figure.
Figure 57 is an exemplary ideograph for showing the composition inside the card-type device with touch pad.
Figure 58 is an exemplary ideograph for showing the composition on the card-type device surface with touch pad.
Figure 59 is the exemplary ideograph for showing the hardware of the card-type device with touch pad and constituting.
Figure 60 (A) display has an exemplary ideograph of the composition inside the card-type device of touch pad, (B) It is an exemplary ideograph for showing the composition on the card-type device surface with touch pad, (C) is that display has touch The exemplary ideograph that the hardware of the card-type device of input board is constituted.
Figure 61 be graphical representation of exemplary by 3 wavelength of RGB implement light-to-current inversion the components of photo-electric conversion arrangement, by examining Survey the figure of the input information of the time change decision of the light quantity variation of components of photo-electric conversion arrangement.
The figure of the message code for the input information that Figure 62, which is graphical representation of exemplary, to be inputted by 3 channels.
Figure 63 is the figure of the light emitting region of graphical representation of exemplary light code.
Figure 64 is shown in the exemplary figure for installing rgb light electric diode in element additional.
Figure 65 is figure of the graphical representation of exemplary using the light code of rgb light electric diode detection.
Figure 66 is the figure of the variation of the light emitting region of graphical representation of exemplary light code.
Figure 67 is information equipment to carry out specific and carries out light code and shine to the position of the rgb light electric diode of device Handle the flow chart of example.
Figure 68 is the flow chart for the processing example that device is received the light code from information equipment by rgb light electric diode.
Figure 69 is the figure of the output example of display pattern code.
Figure 70 is an exemplary ideograph for showing the composition of the light-receiving surface of card-type device.
Figure 71 is the figure of the light code of graphical representation of exemplary input rgb light electric diode.
The pattern code that Figure 72 is another configuration example of the constituent element inside device, is exported according to the configuration example Example.
Another structure for the photodiode that Figure 73 is graphical representation of exemplary element and message input device (optical sensor) includes At figure.
The pattern code that Figure 74 is another configuration example of the constituent element inside device, is exported according to the configuration example Example.
Figure 75 is that graphical representation of exemplary is installed on inside seal cut code generating device bottom surface or card-type device (contact touch-control The side of panel) front button, rear button figure.
Figure 76 is the figure of graphical representation of exemplary special pattern.
Figure 77 be the device of graphical representation of exemplary variation, detection device physical quantity variation touch panel figure.
Figure 78 is the detection alternating message source that graphical representation of exemplary is directed to touch panel, and the AC signal of inverted image occurs The figure that alternating message source (B) is constituted.
Figure 79 is the plan view from the light-receiving surface of optical sensor.
Figure 80 is the plan view from the light-receiving surface of the optical sensor with 6 photodiodes.
Figure 81 is the sectional view of optical sensor.
Figure 82 is the sectional view of optical sensor.
Figure 83 is the sectional view of optical sensor.
Figure 84 is an exemplary ideograph for showing the composition of the contact surface of digital sealing and information equipment.
Figure 85 is the figure for showing the output example by means of the pattern code of digital sealing.
Figure 86 is the figure for showing the output example by means of the pattern code of digital sealing.
Figure 87 is the figure of the existing credit card of graphical representation of exemplary.
Figure 88 is the figure for showing the use example of card-type device.
Figure 89 is the figure for showing the use example of card-type device.
Figure 90 is the figure for showing the G-Card use example for the tablet computer for implementing personal authentication.
Figure 91 is the figure for showing the G-Card use example for the smart phone for implementing personal authentication.
Figure 92 is the figure for showing the use example of the G-Card utilized in product guarantee.
Figure 93 is the exemplary figure for showing the identification by means of G-Card.
Figure 94 is the exemplary figure for showing the identification by means of G-Card and security code input.
Figure 95 is the figure for showing the use example of G-Card module.
Figure 96 is the figure for showing the clearing example by means of G-Card.
Figure 97 is the exemplary figure shown when the ticket by means of G-Card/lottery ticket uses.
Figure 98 is the figure shown to the example of display G-Card usage history.
Figure 99 is the exemplary figure for showing the offers services such as integral based on G-Card.
Figure 100 is the figure shown to display by means of the example of the state of the integral service of G-Card.
Figure 101 is the figure shown to display by means of the example of the service content such as the lottery ticket of G-Card.
Figure 102 is the exemplary figure for showing the dedicated accumulating card that G-Card is used as to specific shop.
Figure 103 is to show G-Card being used as the exemplary figure of common accumulating card in multiple shops.
Figure 104 is to show the exemplary figure for add/calculate to the seal or integral that record in G-Card.
Figure 105 is to show according to the direction of G-Card load and execute the exemplary figure of different disposal.
Figure 106 is the figure for illustrating the game example based on card-type device.
Figure 107 is the figure for illustrating the game example based on card-type device.
Figure 108 is the figure for illustrating the game example based on card-type device.
Figure 109 is the figure for illustrating the game example based on device of different shapes.
Figure 110 is the figure of the composition of graphical representation of exemplary game card the inside.
Figure 111 is the figure of the composition on graphical representation of exemplary game card surface.
Figure 112 is the figure for showing the card use example in tablet computer terminal.
Figure 113 is the sectional view of game card.
Figure 114 is the sectional view of game card.
Figure 115 is the bottom view of game card.
Figure 116 is the sectional view of the variation of game card.
Figure 117 is the example of game card.
Figure 118 is the example of game card.
Figure 119 is the sectional view of game card.
Figure 120 is the sectional view of game card.
Figure 121 is the sectional view of another game card relevant to variation.
Figure 122 is the sectional view of another game card relevant to variation.
Figure 123 is the example of game card.
Figure 124 is the example that the processing of drawing application program is executed using game card.
Figure 125 is the processing example of games.
Figure 126 is the figure of graphical representation of exemplary information transmitting processing.
Figure 127 is the figure of graphical representation of exemplary information transmitting processing.
Figure 128 is the figure of graphical representation of exemplary information transmitting processing.
Figure 129 is the plan view of optical sensor relevant to implementation form 18.
Figure 130 is the plan view of optical sensor relevant to implementation form 18.
Figure 131 is the sectional view of optical sensor relevant to implementation form 18.
Figure 132 is the processing example that color code is obtained by means of optical sensor relevant to implementation form 18.
Figure 133 is the figure for showing the configuration example of pattern code relevant to implementation form 19.
Figure 134 is the figure for showing the configuration example of pattern code relevant to implementation form 19.
Figure 135 is the plan view from the inside of device relevant to implementation form 20.
Figure 136 is the plan view from the inside of device relevant to implementation form 20.
Figure 137 is the figure that graphical representation of exemplary electric mechanism region is constituted.
Figure 138 is that the circuit of graphical representation of exemplary device relevant to implementation form 21 constitutes the figure of details.
Figure 139 is the photodiode of implementation form 21 and the configuration example of element.
Figure 140 is the figure of the communication steps between exemplary diagram showing device and information equipment.
Figure 141 is the synchronous timing diagram with light code and the relationship of pattern code of graphical representation of exemplary.
Figure 142 is an example of the wrong check method of implementation form 21.
Figure 143 is another example that pattern code exports again.
Figure 144 is the synchronous timing diagram with light code and the relationship of pattern code of graphical representation of exemplary.
Figure 145 is the figure of another composition inside exemplary diagram showing device.
Figure 146 is the figure of graphical representation of exemplary pattern code.
Figure 147 is to the example for touching mobile progress error detection.
Figure 148 is the figure of processing of the graphical representation of exemplary for reducing the mobile error detection of touch.
Figure 149 is the figure of graphical representation of exemplary pattern code output processing (device side synchronous communication).
Figure 150 is that graphical representation of exemplary replaces information equipment output is synchronous to be synchronized by device output with light code and used pattern The figure of the processing of code.
Figure 151 graphical representation of exemplary and synchronization pattern code synchronisation, device is to the place of information equipment input information pattern Reason.
Figure 152 is the figure of graphical representation of exemplary information pattern synchronism output processing details.
Figure 153 is another exemplary figure for showing information pattern synchronism output processing details.
Figure 154 is the figure of exemplary diagram showing device processing of output information pattern after synchronous pattern code.
Figure 155 is that mistake verifies the processing example run after pattern code column output.
Figure 156 is the flow chart of the processing of deferred run when mistake verifies than 1 time pattern code output.
Figure 157 is the flow chart of the synchronous communication processing of graphical representation of exemplary information equipment side.
Figure 158 is the processing for the information equipment (200) for showing with independently inputting pattern code whether there is or not reference pattern detection Figure.
Figure 159 is the flow chart of the processing of the synchronous input processing details of graphical representation of exemplary information pattern.
Figure 160 is the processing example of information equipment when input device for information instrument is synchronized with pattern code.
Figure 161 is that information equipment exports according to the pattern code from device and sends the position coordinates on touch panel Processing example.
Figure 162 is the flow chart that position coordinates receive processing.
Figure 163 is the figure of the processing for the physical quantity output valve that graphical representation of exemplary adjusts device output between information equipment.
Figure 164 is the flow chart that graphical representation of exemplary detected and determined the processing of appropriate example according to test pattern.
Figure 165 is the figure that graphical representation of exemplary is constituted with the inside of the contact touch panel of the relevant device of implementation form 22.
Figure 166 is the change that graphical representation of exemplary is constituted with the inside of the contact touch panel of the relevant device of implementation form 22 Shape example.
Figure 167 graphical representation of exemplary with inside the device of the contact touch panel of the relevant information equipment of implementation form 23 Appearance.
Figure 168 is the sectional view of the A section of device.
Figure 169 is the sectional view of the B section of device.
Figure 170 is the sectional view of the C section of device.
Figure 171 is the variation of the A section of device.
Figure 172 is the variation of the B section of device.
Figure 173 is that graphical representation of exemplary is referred to as the section of honeycomb structure for the figure of the situation of hexagon.
Figure 174 is the variation of device relevant to implementation form 23.
Figure 175 is the variation of device relevant to implementation form 23.
Figure 176 is the composition of graphical representation of exemplary laboratory holder and the figure of experimental sequence.
Figure 177 be element diameter be 7mm when experimental result.
Figure 178 be element diameter be 7.5mm when experimental result.
Figure 179 be element diameter be 7.5mm when experimental result.
Figure 180 is the composition of the laboratory holder of the boundary value of ON impedance of the graphical representation of exemplary to SW and the figure of experimental sequence.
Figure 181 is the experimental result of the boundary value of the ON impedance to SW.
Figure 182 is the pattern generation that the inside element of exemplary diagram showing device contact touch panel is constituted and exported from element The figure of code.
Figure 183 (A) is the figure of the composition of information defined in graphical representation of exemplary combinations of patterns, and (B) is graphical representation of exemplary surprise The figure of even parity check pattern setting.
Figure 184 is the figure of signal receiving step when mistake occurs from the pattern that element exports for graphical representation of exemplary.
Figure 185 is the figure for the pattern code that graphical representation of exemplary is sent.
Figure 186 is the processing example that information equipment obtains the pattern code exported from device.
Figure 187 is the figure of the acquirement processing details of graphical representation of exemplary detecting event.
Figure 188 is flow chart of the graphical representation of exemplary without the panel input processing of even-odd check.
Figure 189 is the flow chart for the pattern output processing that graphical representation of exemplary is changed based on device physical amount.
Figure 190 is the figure of the deformation of graphical representation of exemplary panel input processing.
Figure 191 is the flow chart of the variation of the communication process between display information device and device.
Figure 192 is the figure of the signal reception relationship of exemplary diagram showing device and information equipment.
Figure 193 is the figure of the deformation of exemplary diagram showing device.
Figure 194 (A) is the plan view of element (111), each portion and contact are led in graphical representation of exemplary element (111) plan view The figure of the connection of body and semiconductor switch, (B) are the sectional views of element.
Figure 195 is the flow chart of the processing for the information equipment that graphical representation of exemplary executes calibration.
Figure 196 is the figure for showing the processing of information equipment relevant to variation.
Figure 197 is the figure that graphical representation of exemplary element is constituted.
Figure 198 is the figure that graphical representation of exemplary element is constituted.
Figure 199 is the figure that graphical representation of exemplary element is constituted.
Figure 200 is the sectional view of device.
Figure 20 1 is the plan view of device.
Figure 20 2 is the plan view from the upside of device.
Figure 20 3 is the sectional view of device.
Figure 20 4 is the plan view from the upside of device.
Figure 20 5 is the sectional view of device.
Figure 20 6 is the figure of the composition of exemplary diagram showing device.
Figure 20 7 is the variation of device.
Figure 20 8 is the figure of the composition of exemplary diagram showing device.
Figure 20 9 is the plan view from the upside of device.
Figure 21 0 is the section plan from the effect surface side for applying the apparatus to touch panel.
Figure 21 1 is the sectional view of device.
Figure 21 2 is the flow chart of card authentication processing.
Figure 21 3 is the flow chart of card authentication processing.
The figure of the state of device when Figure 21 4 is graphical representation of exemplary experiment.
Figure 21 5 is the measurement result for changing the ON time.
Figure 21 6 is the measurement result for making conductor length 10cm.
Figure 21 7 is the result using the measurement of 2 elements (111).
Figure 21 8 is the result for changing conductor length and measuring.
Figure 21 9 is the result for changing conductor length and measuring.
Figure 22 0 is the figure of the composition of the device of graphical representation of exemplary implementation form.
Figure 22 1 is the figure of the details of graphical representation of exemplary power switch.
Figure 22 2 is the figure of the boot sequence of exemplary diagram showing device.
Figure 22 3 is the flow chart of the processing of exemplary diagram showing device.
Figure 22 4 (A) is the figure of the composition of the uper side surface of the device of graphical representation of exemplary implementation form, and (B) is to device The figure that a part of sectional view is combined.
Figure 22 5 (A) is the figure that joint surface of the graphical representation of exemplary before the dielectric layer of lower layer forms element is constituted, and (B) is The sectional view of device.
Figure 22 6 (A) is the figure that joint surface of the graphical representation of exemplary after the dielectric layer of lower layer forms element is constituted, and (B) is The sectional view of device.
Figure 22 7 (A) is the figure that the inside of the device of graphical representation of exemplary implementation form is constituted, and (B) is graphical representation of exemplary engagement The figure of the section summary of device after electricity Jie of upper layer and lower layer.
Figure 22 8 (A) is the top view on the upper layer joint surface of the dielectric layer of the device of graphical representation of exemplary implementation form Figure, (B) is the figure of the sectional view of virtual portfolio device.
Figure 22 9 (A) is the figure for the state that graphical representation of exemplary forms element inside the dielectric of lower layer, and (B) is exemplary It is shown in the figure that the state of element is formed inside the dielectric of lower layer.
Figure 23 0 (A) is the figure that the inside of the device of graphical representation of exemplary implementation form is constituted, and (B) is graphical representation of exemplary engagement The figure of the section summary of device after the dielectric of upper layer and lower layer.
Figure 23 1 (A) is the figure of the composition of the uper side surface of the device of graphical representation of exemplary implementation form, and (B) is to device The figure that a part of sectional view is combined.
Figure 23 2 (A) is the top view on the lower layer joint surface of the dielectric layer of exemplary diagram showing device, and (B) makes device The figure of a part of sectional view combination.
Figure 23 3 (A) is the figure of the device the inside composition after graphical representation of exemplary engagement upper layer and lower layer, and (B) is exemplary diagram The figure of device section summary after showing the dielectric of engagement upper layer and lower layer.
Figure 23 4 (A) is the figure that the upper surface of the device of graphical representation of exemplary implementation form is constituted, and (B) is make device one The figure of fragmentary cross-sectional view combination.
Figure 23 5 (A) is the figure that the lower layer joint surface of exemplary diagram showing device is constituted, and (B) is a part of section for making device Scheme combined figure.
Figure 23 6 (A) is the top view of composition inside the device of graphical representation of exemplary engagement upper layer and lower layer, and (B) is that display connects The section for closing the device of layer and lower layer constitutes the figure of summary.
Figure 23 7 is the figure that the inside of the device of graphical representation of exemplary implementation form is constituted.
Figure 23 8 is the figure that the inside of the device of graphical representation of exemplary implementation form is constituted.
Figure 23 9 is the embodiment of the member card of multiplicity.
Figure 24 0 is the embodiment of observation card.
Figure 24 1 is the embodiment of learning card.
Figure 24 2 is the embodiment of game card.
Figure 24 3 is the raw figure for illustrating device relevant to implementation form of example.
Figure 24 4 is the embodiment for changing conductor sizes.
Figure 24 5 is the figure that graphical representation of exemplary device relevant to implementation form 36 is constituted.
Figure 24 6 is the figure that virtual graphical representation of exemplary is constituted without the device of coupling conductor and SW.
Figure 24 7 is the figure of exemplary simulated diagram SW.
Figure 24 8 is the figure of the specific composition of exemplary simulated diagram SW.
Figure 24 9 is the variation of Figure 24 8.
Figure 25 0 is the figure of the connection of the coupling conductors, SW, element and CPU in exemplary diagram showing device.
Figure 25 1 is the variation of Figure 25 0.
Figure 25 2 is the variation of Figure 25 0.
Figure 25 3 is the variation of Figure 25 0.
Figure 25 4 is that graphical representation of exemplary detects threshold values when physical quantity according to touch panel, determined according to threshold values Determine the figure of result.
Figure 25 5 is the arrangement example (Class1) of element (111).
Figure 25 6 is the arrangement example (type 2) of element (111).
Figure 25 7 is the figure for illustrating the region ID and touch area of configuration element.
Figure 25 8 is the figure for illustrating the recognizer of ID area code.
Figure 25 9 is the explanatory diagram of the coordinate system on touch panel.
Figure 26 0 is the figure for finding out the region ID relative to the rotation angle of touch panel.
Figure 26 1 is the figure of coordinate value of the graphical representation of exemplary through coordinate transform.
Figure 26 2 is graphical representation of exemplary ID area coordinate value-ID number code table figure.
Figure 26 3 is the figure of the details of graphical representation of exemplary algorithm.
Figure 26 4 is figure of the graphical representation of exemplary as the coordinate shape of touch area.
Figure 26 5 is the example for making card-type device (110) rotation load on touch panel.
Figure 26 6 is the figure of graphical representation of exemplary rotation angle.
Figure 26 7 is the figure of graphical representation of exemplary coordinate transform.
Figure 26 8 is the figure of the coordinate value combination of graphical representation of exemplary benchmark.
Figure 26 9 is the figure of graphical representation of exemplary algorithm details.
Figure 27 0 is the structural example of device.
Figure 27 1 is the structural example of device.
Figure 27 2 is the structural example of device.
Figure 27 3 is the structural example of device.
Figure 27 4 is the structural example of device.
Figure 27 5 is the structural example of device.
Figure 27 6 is the structural example of device.
Figure 27 7 is the structural example of device.
Figure 27 8 is the structural example of device.
Figure 27 9 is the structural example of device.
Figure 28 0 is the structural example of device.
Figure 28 1 is the structural example of device.
Figure 28 2 is the structural example of device.
Figure 28 3 is the structural example of device.
Figure 28 4 is the structural example of device.
Figure 28 5 is the structural example of device.
Figure 28 6 is the structural example of device.
Figure 28 7 is the structural example of device.
Figure 28 8 is the structural example of device.
Figure 28 9 is the structural example of device.
Figure 29 0 is the structural example of device.
Figure 29 1A is the structural example of device.
Figure 29 1B is the structural example of device.
Figure 29 1C is the structural example of device.
Figure 29 1D is the structural example of device.
Figure 29 1E is the structural example of device.
Figure 29 1F is the structural example of device.
Figure 29 2 is the structural example of device.
Figure 29 3 is the structural example of device.
Figure 29 4 is the structural example of device.
Figure 29 5 is the structural example of device.
Figure 29 6 is the structural example of device.
Figure 29 7 is the movement of the touch sensor on the touch panel of graphical representation of exemplary control circuit scanning information equipment Ideograph.
Figure 29 8 be graphical representation of exemplary using between information equipment and device light code and information pattern (static capacity generation Code) communication sequence timing diagram.
Figure 29 9 is the flow chart of the processing for the device (110) that graphical representation of exemplary executes phototiming communication.
Figure 30 0 is the flow chart of the processing for the information equipment (200) that graphical representation of exemplary executes phototiming communication.
Figure 30 1 is the device (110) that the information pattern for having synchronization signal is inputted information equipment (200) by graphical representation of exemplary Processing flow chart.
Figure 30 2 is that graphical representation of exemplary obtains the information equipment (200) for having the information pattern of synchronization signal from device (110) The flow chart of processing.
Figure 30 3 is the example that serial transistor is become to the circuit of ON.
Figure 30 4 is by the circuit of base earth.
Figure 30 5 is the circuit for verification result.
Figure 30 6 be in the circuit of bipolar junction transistor, by capacitor (Ccb) be connected to subordinate connection transistor (X1, X2 between base stage/collector).
Figure 30 7 be in FET circuit, by capacitor (Cdg) be connected to the FET (X3, X4) of subordinate grid/drain-gate it Between.
The equivalent circuit of Figure 30 6 when Figure 30 8 is transistor ON.
Figure 30 9 is the user for replacing Figure 30 6, is connected in parallel the circuit of reference capacitor (Cref) Yu resistance (Rref).
Equivalent circuit when Figure 31 0 is the transistor ON of Figure 30 9.
Figure 31 1 is the circuit in the circuit of Figure 30 9 in addition to reference capacitor (Cref).
Figure 31 2 is in the circuit of Figure 30 9 except the electricity of the capacitor (Ccb) between transistor (X1, X2) base stage/collector Road.
Figure 31 3 is the circuit for being 1 section with transistor.
Equivalent circuit when Figure 31 4 is transistor (X2) ON.
Equivalent circuit when Figure 31 5 is transistor (X2) OFF.
Figure 31 6 is the perspective view of code generating device.
Figure 31 7 is the main view of code generating device.
Figure 31 8 is the bottom view of code generating device.
Figure 31 9 is the bottom view of code generating device.
Figure 32 0 is the figure of the internal structure of graphical representation of exemplary removal code generating device (1A) shell.
Figure 32 1 be not touch area install via hole, conductive contact and in touch area installation dielectric post immediately below The example of device.
Specific embodiment
With reference to the accompanying drawings, implementation form of the invention is illustrated.
<implementation form 0>
[summary of information processing system]
Fig. 1 is to show that one that the appearance of information processing system associated with a kind of implementation form of the present invention is constituted is shown The figure of example.
Information processing system shown in FIG. 1 includes: the code generating device (1) that code occurs, assigns about respective code The card of set information etc. medium (2), identify the code identification device (3) of respective code and execute about respective code The server (4) of set processing.
Code identification device (3) is connect with server (4) by the given network (N) of internet etc..
Fig. 2 is to read set information until occurring and corresponding specified letter in the processing for the information processing system for showing Fig. 1 Cease a series of figure of the outline of processing of relevant code.
As shown in Fig. 2 (A), the medium (2) blocked etc. is endowed and code dependent set information (C).
Wherein, set information (C) as long as the readable information of code generating device (1), can be in respective code generating device (1) information of code occurs in, form etc. is not particularly limited.For example, QR code (registered trademark) or item can be used Shape code, colour coding etc. are used as set information (C).
But, in this embodiment, corresponding dot code is shown using dot code as set information (C) Dot pattern is formed on medium (2).
Wherein, " dot pattern " refers to the pattern encoded according to the placement algorithm of multiple dots to message code.
In addition, the numerical information (code) for reading the dot pattern and finding out is dot code, generally speaking, including The pattern being marked with dot code.It is same afterwards.
For the message code encryption algorithm based on dot pattern, the Grid Onput of Ge Ruimake company can use The known algorithms such as the Anoto Pattern of (registered trademark), An Nuotuo company.
In addition, for the Grid Onput (registered trademark) of Ge Ruimake company in dot pattern, behind will specifically It is bright.
Dot pattern encryption algorithm itself is read in the situation read by means of visible light and by means of infrared ray It is general under situation, thus be not particularly limited.
In addition to this, dot pattern naked eyes are invisible or the degree of simple grain pattern is only identified as naked eyes are visible , any dot pattern can be used.
In addition, dot pattern by defining coordinate value, can carry out the message code different because of the position that it reads Coding.In turn, in dot pattern, there is the direction become for benchmark needed for carrying out encoding and decoding to message code, By reading the direction, rotation angle of the code generating device (1) relative to dot pattern can be obtained.On the other hand, if made Code generating device (1) forms medium inclination relative to dot pattern, then can also be taken according to the brightness change of shooting image Must be make generating device (1) to which direction, with which kind of inclination.
As shown in Fig. 2 (B), code generating device (1) has information judging portion (11).
Information judging portion (11) shoots the dot pattern (set information (C)) formed on medium (2), as a result, being based on The image data of the dot pattern of acquisition identifies dot code.
In addition, information judging portion (11) have the function of reading the set information (C) for assigning medium (2), as described above, It can be according to the form of set information (C), using the form of various kinds colors.
As shown in Fig. 2 (C), code generating device (1) also has code generating unit on the basis of information judging portion (11) (12), code output section (13).
Pattern code occurs for code generating unit (12), and it is with 1 that the pattern code, which is the code about set information (C), At least code of the configuration pattern displaying of side in the direction in space and time orientation of a above symbol.Wherein, symbol is text Word, figure, grain pattern or their combination use dot in this embodiment.
That is, code generating unit (12) is whenever by means of information judging portion (11) and when new set information (C) of interpretation, Pattern code occurs respectively.
Code output section (13), according to the configuration pattern of display corresponding pattern code, makes when occurring pattern code Capacitive position input pickup (touch panel) is changed whether being directed to the reaction of each 1 or more dot, to export Corresponding pattern code.
In addition, being carried out for the specific example of pattern code or its output later with reference to Fig. 6, Fig. 7 and Figure 10 to Figure 13 Narration.
Fig. 3 is a series of processing of the code in the processing for the information processing system for showing Fig. 1, until identifying output The figure of outline.
As shown in Fig. 3 (A), code identification device (3) is made of the smart phone etc. with touch panel (31).Touch-control Panel (31) by display unit (display unit (57) of aftermentioned Fig. 5) and the display surface for being laminated in corresponding display unit condenser type position Set input pickup (the touch operation input unit (56) of aftermentioned Fig. 5) composition.In touch panel (31), detection is shown Region (SP) region (SP) (hereinafter referred to as " code detection region (SP) ") of dot group, the dot group represented by means of generation Code generating device (1) and export pattern code.
As shown in Fig. 3 (B), code identification device (3) is used as functional block, has test section (32) and identification part (33).
In addition, functional block can also be made of hardware single, but in this embodiment, by means of software and hardware (after The CPU (51) of the Fig. 5 stated) and constitute.That is, test section (32) and identification part (33) are cooperateed with by software and hardware, to play Following function.
Test section (32) is directed to the code detection region (SP) of touch panel (31), by means of code generating device (1) Code output section (13), whether the reaction of position input pickup changed 1 or more dot in contact with or close to when, with Based on the testing result of position input pickup, the configuration pattern of corresponding 1 of detection or more dot.
The configuration pattern of 1 or more dot of the identification part (33) based on detection is identified by means of code generating device (1) Code generating unit (12) and occur pattern code.
The pattern code is sent to server (4) as needed.
Server (4) executes various processing based on corresponding pattern code, which is sent to code identification Device (3).The image for representing corresponding executed result is shown in touch panel (31) by code identification device (3).
Fig. 4 is an exemplary ideograph for showing the composition of code generating device (1).
Specifically, Fig. 4 (A) is the exemplary side view for showing the appearance of code generating device (1) and constituting.Fig. 4 It (B) is the exemplary bottom view for showing the appearance of code generating device (1) and constituting.Fig. 4 (C) is that display code fills Set an exemplary figure of the Inner Constitution on the surface of (1).Fig. 4 (D) is the inside for showing the inside of code generating device (1) The exemplary figure constituted.
In addition, the exemplary code generating device (1) of Fig. 4 is particularly referred to as " seal type code generating device (1) ", with Just it can be distinguished with the example of aftermentioned Fig. 8 or Fig. 9.
In addition, below by the lower section in Fig. 4, that is, will be placed in opposite directions relative to medium (2) or code identification device (3) Direction explanation be " following ".
As shown in figure 4, seal type code generating device (1) is in the information judging portion (11), code generating unit (12) And on the basis of code output section (13), also there is operation button (14), power knob (15), seal portion (16), CPU (Central Processing Unit, central processing unit) 17, internal storage (18), PCBA (19), USB terminal (20), Loudspeaker (21), button switch (22), from master switch (23), wireless device (24) and power supply unit (25).
In Fig. 4 (A), operation button (14) is provided to code generating device (1) upper end, for operating set information (C) Interpretation instruction, pattern code output ON/OFF instruction etc. to the button of the instruction of code generating device (1) various controls. Specifically, such as shown in Fig. 4 (C), being built in the internal button of code generating device (1) if pressing the operation button (14) Switch (22) is switched to the state of the other side in ON or OFF state from side.Alternatively, it is also possible in operation button (14) Setting LED in inside shows various states with the corresponding LED color to shine or luminous pattern.In addition, operation button (14) is in generation It is not required in code generating device (1) to constitute.In addition, operation button (14) also can be set in side.
Power knob (15) is configured at the side of code generating device (1), is for switch code generating device (1) Power source ON/OFF button.
Seal portion (16) such as shown in Fig. 4 (A), is provided to the lower end of code generating device (1).Seal portion (16) such as Fig. 4 (B) it shown in, equipped with the code output section (13) for being configured to predetermined pattern by multiple dots and being constituted, is formed in the central portion There is hole.The bore portion becomes by means of information judging device (11) the information judging region (IA) of the set information of interpretation (C).
On multiple dot peripheries, the protection component such as rubber or silica gel can be set, so as not to make code identification device (3) The display devices such as touch panel (31) come to harm.In addition, scheming if moving seal portion (16) on the display apparatus The bottom surface (then also including corresponding protection component if there is protecting component) in chapter portion (16) is suitble to the silica gel low using coefficient of friction Equal materials.But if moving seal portion (16) on the display apparatus, it is suitble to the rubber etc. high using coefficient of friction Material.
In the interpretation of set information (C), as shown in Fig. 2 (B), seal portion (16) are configured at the dot pattern of medium (2) On (set information (C)).As a result, as shown in Fig. 4 (C), set information (C) is by interpretation region (IA) by information judging portion (11) interpretation.
In addition, when output pattern code, as shown in Fig. 3 (B), seal portion (16) are in contact with or close to code identification device (3) the code detection region (SP) of touch panel (31).More accurately, the code output section that seal portion (16) are equipped with (13) multiple dots in contact with or close to code identification device (3) touch panel (31) code detection region (SP).Its In, multiple dots are made of electric conductor etc., according to pattern code, whether controlling the reaction of touch panel (31) (whether energization). That is, touch panel (31) only detects the dot (its position coordinates) for having reaction in multiple dots.Based on the dot so detected Configure pattern etc., identification icon code.
In addition, being chatted later with reference to Fig. 6 and Fig. 7 to the identification specific example of the pattern code based on multiple dots It states.
In Fig. 4 (C), CPU (17) executes the whole control processing of code generating device (1), for example, executing about both Determine the various processing of information (C) interpretation, pattern code output, program update, input/output unit control etc..Pass through CPU (17) With set software collaboration, so that the various functional blocks such as code generating unit (12) of Fig. 2 (C) function.
The various data that the program or CPU (17) that internal memory (18) memory is run by means of CPU (17) use Deng.
PCBA (19) is to add code generating device (1) for various electricity needed for executing various processing shown in Fig. 2 The basis on road.
USB terminal (20) when carrying out the program update of code generating device (1), data input and output, charging etc., with Other devices (not shown) are connected in a manner of USB.In addition, USB terminal (20) is not required in code generating device (1) It constitutes.
Loudspeaker (21) is when set information (C) (dot pattern) is read out, carries out various operation instructions, broadcasting packet When including the content of sound etc., various sound are exported.
Button switch (22) be as described above according to the pressing operation of operation button (14) and in ON and OFF state from Side is transformed into the switch of the other side.
From master switch (23) be using self weight and make pattern code output section (16) start switch.Wherein, so-called to open It is dynamic, it is according to pattern code, to be established to the anti-of touch panel (31) by the multiple dots for constituting pattern code output section (16) The state of (conduction/non-conduction) whether answering.In addition, seal portion (16) are in the dot for being configured at medium (2) as shown in Fig. 2 (B) When on pattern (set information (C)), started from master switch (23) using self weight, set information (C) passes through interpretation region (IA) And it is read by information judging portion (11).The mechanism started from master switch (23) using self weight, makes the pattern code for needing electric power Output or the interpretation of dot pattern are only in the feelings that code generating device (1) is loaded on to touch panel (31) and/or medium (2) Just start under condition, so as to seek biggish power conservation.In addition, from master switch (23) in code generating device (1) It is not required to constitute.
In Fig. 4 (D), wireless device (24) is carried out wireless communication with server (4), for the set information of interpretation (C), the dress of the various information utilized in carrying out the controls processing such as output of control treatment with server (4) etc. is received It sets.
Power supply unit (25) is the part for code generating device (1) supply electric power such as dry cell.Therefore, power supply unit (25) It is not necessary to must be dry cell, it be also possible to rechargeable battery.At this point, charging method is not particularly limited, can both use The charging method based on USB connection in USB terminal (20), can also be using method furthermore.
Fig. 5 is that the hardware of code identification device (3) is prompted to constitute exemplary block diagram.
Code identification device (3) has CPU (51), ROM (Read Only Memory, read-only memory) 52, RAM (Random Access Memory, random access memory) 53, bus (54), input/output interface (55), touch operation are defeated Enter portion (56), display unit (57), input unit (58), memory portion (59), communication unit (60) and driver (61).
CPU (51) is according to the program recorded in ROM (52) or is loaded into the program of RAM (53) from memory portion (59) and holds The various processing of row.
In RAM (53), data needed for also suitably memory CPU (51) executes various processing etc..
CPU (51), ROM (52) and RAM (53) are connected with each other by bus (54).It is also connected in the bus (54) Input/output interface (55).Touch operation input unit (56), display unit (57), input are connected in input/output interface (55) Portion (58), memory portion (59), communication unit (60) and driver (61).
Capacitive position input sensing of the touch operation input unit (56) for example by being laminated in the display surface of display unit (57) Device is constituted, and detection carries out the coordinate of the position of touch operation.
Wherein, so-called touch operation, refer to object to touch operation input unit (56) in contact with or close to operation.Phase For touch operation input unit (56) carry out in contact with or close to object, the usually finger or felt pen etc. of user, at this It is the multiple dots for constituting the code output section (13) of code generating device (1) in implementation form.In addition, will be made below touching The position for touching operation is known as " touch location ", and touch position coordinates are known as " touch coordinate ".
Display unit (57) is constituted by means of display devices such as liquid crystal, shows the various images such as Fig. 2 or image shown in Fig. 3.
As described above, in this embodiment, constituting institute by means of touch operation input unit (56) and display unit (57) The touch panel (31) stated.
Input unit (58) is made of various hardware buttons etc., is operated according to the instruction of player, is inputted various information.
Memory portion (59) is by DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory, dynamic RAM) etc. It constitutes, remembers various data.
Communication unit (60) (is service in the example of fig. 1 with other devices by the network (N) including internet, control Device (4)) between communicate.
Driver (61) is installed as needed.In driver (61), suitably install additional by disk, CD, photomagneto disk or The removable media (71) of the compositions such as semiconductor memory.It is read by means of driver (61) from removable media (71) Program is installed on memory portion (59) as needed.In addition, removable media (71) can also equally be remembered with memory portion (59) Recall the various data remembered in memory portion (59).
Referring to Fig. 6, to the output form (the configuration pattern of dot) of the pattern code of seal type code generating device (1) Specific example be illustrated.
Fig. 6 shows that the configuration pattern of dot is (hereinafter referred to as " more in the case where touch panel (31) can detect multiple spot Dot pattern ") concrete example.
In the example of fig. 6, as shown in its figure (A), (13-1 to 13-5) by being configured to circumferential at equal intervals for 5 dots The pattern of shape is adopted to basic pattern.
In addition, basic pattern is not particularly restricted to, by dot, (13-1 to 13-5) is configured to the circular shape of Fig. 6 (A) Pattern, such as shown in Fig. 6 (B), (13-1 to 13-5) can be configured to non-rotational symmetry to dot.Furthermore it is possible to using dot is made (13-1 to 13-5) configures the pattern of the arbitrary shapes such as rectangular grain pattern.In addition, the number of dot is also not particularly limited in Fig. 6 (A) example can arbitrarily determine.
Fig. 6 (B) is the display non-rotational symmetry ground configuration symbols (figure of the symbol pattern of 13-1 to 13-5).It is non-rotating right Claim ground configuration symbols (13-1 to 13-5), to (after 13-1 to 13-5) ON, accord with even if only having as shown in Fig. 6 (A) in symbol Number (13-1) not ON, can also be with the forward direction of distinguished symbol pattern.Wherein, so-called non-rotational symmetry makes symbol (13-1 to 13- 5) when rotating the rotation angle in addition to 360 degree, can not become in geometrically identical pattern, thus can be with distinguished symbol (13-1 to the direction of 13-5).
In addition, as shown in Fig. 6 (C), for include in the basic pattern of Fig. 6 (A) each dot (13-1 to 13-5), Given moment (given time timing) at the time of opposite in (t1 and t25), definition has " output (ON) " or " OFF ".
In the example of fig. 6, since touch panel (31) is able to detect multiple points, thus no matter the moment (t1 and Which of) t25 timing, " output (ON) " allow dot (any combination of 13-1 any number into 13-5).
Wherein, it in Fig. 6 (D), in each timing of moment (t1 and t25), depicts in the basic pattern of Fig. 6 (A) only The unit cell pattern for thering is the dot of " output (ON) " to be painted.
This unit cell pattern (in the example of Fig. 6 (D), preparing 25 types) for preparing multiple types, in time orientation Each position (each timing at moment (t1 and t25)), various unit cell patterns respectively configure 1, to define generating object pattern generation Code.
In addition, in this embodiment, dot (the respective ON/OFF switching of 13-1 to 13-5), by means of Fig. 4's (C) The control of CPU (17) and realize.The method for successively switching the constituent parts pattern of Fig. 6 (D) is not particularly limited, for example, in this implementation In form, both it can also use and utilize using the method for operation button (14) pressing operation that Fig. 4 (A) is repeated Loading surface is self-possessed by means of seal portion (16) and the method for self weight button (23) output of operating.
(opposite time) claims at the time of the seal portion (16) of code generating device (1) is loaded on touch panel (31) For moment (t1).It is dot (13-1 to 13-5) whole OFF shown in the unit cell pattern such as Fig. 6 (C) and Fig. 6 (D) at moment (t1) Pattern.
Wherein, the interval at moment (t1) to moment (t2) can arbitrarily determine.That is, code generating device (1) reading is set Information (C), both can be by 1 or more set dot (Fig. 6 when loading on touch panel (31) after pattern code occurs Example in for dot, (13-1 to 13-5)) at once " output (ON) ", also can be set given time and carry out " output (ON) ".
There are 5 dots, (in the example of Fig. 6 of 13-1 to 13-5), at moment (t2), (13-1 to 13-5) is complete for dot Portion's " output (ON) ".In other words, (unit cell pattern that 13-1 to 13-5) all " is exported (ON) " is configured at the moment to benchmark dot (t2)。
The identification part (33) of code identification device (3) identifies these dot positions, remembers reference pattern.In addition, all circles Point (13-1 to 13-5) " output (ON) ", so as to identify that touch panel (31) normally detects each dot (13-1 to 13-5). Thus, it is possible to confirm whether code identification device (3) can normally start.
In next moment (t3), dot (13-1 to 13-5) whole OFF.
In moment (t4), dot (13-1,13-3,13-5) " output (ON) ".
The identification part (33) of code identification device (3) utilizes this 3 dots (13-1,13-3,13-5), recognition unit figure The direction of case.Wherein, dot (13-1) is highest point, and from dot, (13-1 to the center of 13-5), identification part (33) are by dot (13-1) is identified as forward direction.
Dot (13-2 to 13-5) OFF except next moment (t5), the dot (13-1) of highest point.
Then, only on the basis of the dot (13-1) of highest point, continue " output (ON) ", utilize dot (13-2 to 13- 5) ON/OFF and output information (a part of information of pattern code).
In the touch panel (31) for being loaded with seal portion (16), there are seal portion (16) loaded surfaces slide and it is straight The mobile situation of line.Even in this case, identification part (33) can also know according to the movement of the dot (13-1) on vertex Other which dots of other constituent parts pattern are " output (ON) ".
As long as being rotated and being recognized in the moment seal portion (16) of load in general, not applying spinning movement consciously To be few, accordingly ensure that identification precision, so as not to the wrong identification to move linearly.The unit cell pattern Direction can certainly identify seal portion (16) relative to touch panel (31) face with the load of which kind of rotation angle.
By means of dot, (ON/OFF of 13-2 to 13-4) defines 1bit with 1 dot, set with being spatially arranged 4 dots of distance configuration define information, so as to define 4bit with 1 unit cell pattern.Therefore, if along time orientation 8 unit cell patterns (unit cell pattern ON/OFF8 times) are configured, then can export the information of 32bit (about 4,000,000,000 code).
Wherein, in this embodiment, can not Fig. 6 (E) show another concrete example of symbol pattern.
Claim (at the time of opposite) at the time of the seal portion (16) of code generating device (1) is loaded on touch panel (31) For moment (t1).It is the symbol (pattern of 13-1 to 13-5) whole OFF shown in the unit cell pattern such as Fig. 6 (E) at moment (t1).
In moment (t2), symbol (13-1 to 13-5) all " output (ON) ".In other words, (13-1 is extremely for fiducial mark 13-5) all the unit cell pattern of " output (ON) " is configured at moment (t2).
The identification part (33) of code identification device (3) identifies these character positions, remembers reference pattern.In addition, all symbols Number (13-1 to 13-5) becomes " output (ON) ", and so as to identify each symbol of touch panel (31) normal inspection, (13-1 is extremely 13-5).Thus, it is possible to confirm whether code identification device (3) can normally start.
Then, symbol (13-1) alternate repetition ON/OFF (flashing).Therefore, symbol (13-1) can be used as to synchronous letter Number.
Wherein, in this embodiment, the fact that can not be by the code exported from code generating device (1) is obtained, from generation Code recognition device (3) is sent to code generating device (1).Therefore, code generating device (1) executes the defeated of pattern code repeatedly (configuration of the time orientation of multiple unit cell patterns) out, so as to send pattern code really.
In addition, this implementation form only example, thus can also be with wireless, sound, light (not shown) etc. Various method notifies pattern code (information) to obtain completion from code identification device (3) to code generating device (1).As a result, It does not need to export repeatedly in code generating device (1) side.
As notifying this pattern code (information) to obtain the commonsense method completed, have in touch panel (31) or independence In the display device of preparation, the method for the image that display representative pattern code (information) acquirement is completed.Moreover, on the other hand, generation Code recognition device (3) can also show that representative pattern code (information) obtains 2 d codes or the colour codings such as the dot pattern completed, By the interpretation region (IA) of seal portion (16), read by information judging portion (11).
In addition, if the length of the ON/OFF time interval of composite unit pattern is (if the time side of composite unit pattern To configuration distance), then can export more huge a large amount of pattern code (information).
After reading pattern code by means of code identification device (3), exists and want to make seal portion (16) in touch panel (31) situation of operation is moved and implemented on.At this point, after the completion of the output of pattern code, with dot (13-1,13-3,13-4) For " output (ON) ", thus, the identification part (33) of code identification device (3) can identify the position (centre bit in seal portion (16) Set or the shape etc. of seal portion (16)) and seal portion (16) rotation angle.Thus, it is possible to according to display in touch panel (31) Image operated.
Wherein, it in the case where exporting the information based on unit cell pattern repeatedly, at the end of user thinks arbitrarily, presses The operation button (14) that code generating device (1) is equipped with.As a result, only dot (13-1,13-3,13-4) " output (ON) ".Make User makes seal portion (16) be moved to set position, (14) is pressed the operation button, so as to option and installment in corresponding position Instruction.Thus, it is possible to easily giveing training, doing shopping from game, the operation of common smart phone or PC.
In addition, in the example of fig. 6, although being illustrated using dot, being worked as using the optional sign except dot It is so same.
In addition, the symbolic number that can be identified simultaneously, the size of identifiable symbol, symbol and symbol space configuration interval, The output time of symbol, symbol end of output to next symbol export the off time of time started (according to touch panel (31) Performance, can both be not provided with off time, the output of next symbol can also be repeated.) can be in view of code identification device (3) speed of performance or processing routine etc. and be arbitrarily arranged.
For example, using 3 or more symbols as benchmark symbol, continue " output (ON) " always using 7 or more symbols, thus The situation that seal portion even (16) are slided or rotated on touch panel (31), the identification part (33) of code identification device (3) It can also accurately identify the different information symbols of " output (ON) ".As a result, code generating device (1) can export 32bit (about 4,000,000,000 code) identical with the example of Fig. 7.
In addition, example and more dot patterns by using Fig. 6, thus, even if newly being exported with established approach about only When standing on the pattern code of the information of the set information (C) initially entered, or the pattern generation exported from code generating device (1) When code converts at any time by means of wirelessly waiting, can also easily it cope with.That is, code generating device (1) can also be exported changeably Information.
In addition, in Fig. 6, symbol (13) although number be 5, the number of symbol (13) is not limited to 5.Exist now In smart phone, while multiple point touching can be up to 5, in tablet computer, while multiple point touching is up to 10.Symbol (13) Number also can according to need and increase.Even code generating device (1) to be used for the situation of smart phone, symbol (13) Number may be 10.This is because if 5 may also detect that in smart phone with lower conductor ON simultaneously.
It is illustrated above in relation to the code generating device (1) of the seal type of Fig. 4, but is not particularly limited in this.
For example, it may be the code generating device (1) of pen type
In addition, simultaneously non-present invention is defined in the implementation form, the change in the range of the object of the invention can be reached Shape, improvement etc. are both contained in the present invention.
For example, the forms such as size or shape of the symbol for code to occur, although having consolidated in the implementation form It is fixed, but can also can be changed.
That is, can also make the variable morphology of symbol, the combination in the form of corresponding defines pattern code.
Fig. 7 is the figure for showing the specific example of the situation of output pattern code (information) in the form of symbol.
As shown in Fig. 7 (A), in the state of adjacent configuration multiple conductive units, make the ON/ of the output of each conductive unit OFF pattern is variable, so as to uniquely control from the forms such as the size of the symbol of the conductive unit of ON formation or shape.And And can by means of the control output pattern code.
For example, the conductive unit for configuring 5 × 5=25 can be envisioned as example as shown in Fig. 7 (A).
For example, in 4 angles, 3 set conductive units are always ON, and 1 is always OFF as shown in Fig. 7 (B) (wherein, can not also configure conductive unit) controls the respective ON/OFF of other 25-4=21 conductive unit, thus by It is exported in 1 sub-symbol, 21bit (209715) code can be exported.It is at this time spot grain pattern.
Wherein, information content can also be reduced slightly, so that the conduction not comprising OFF is single in the conductive unit set of ON Member.
Fig. 7 (A), (B) example in, although using by square conductive unit be configured to square, not especially It is defined in this.For example, the shape of conductive unit is arbitrary shape as shown in Fig. 7 (C), which kind of shape be configured to.
Alternatively, it is also possible to shown in such as Fig. 7 (D), using circular dividing electric conductor as the control for making symbol variable morphology.
In addition, in the example in figure 7, although using in the conductive unit as benchmark the symbol of 3 ON always, The symbol output pattern code to form specific shape, and can also be based on using the symbol for making electric conductor ON.
In turn, multiple symbols for making this metamorphosis can also be configured, information content is increased.Furthermore, it is also possible to along the time Direction output is multiple, to further increase information content.
But although the set information (C) about code has been assigned the media such as card (2) in the implementation form, It is not particularly limited in this, arbitrary place can be assigned.
E.g., including it, can be in smart phone, individual calculus including the situation for playing code identification device (3) function It is mechanical, electrical depending on showing code dependent set information (C) in the display devices such as machine.
Fig. 8 is to show that code generating device (1) obtains the sample for the dot code (set information (C)) that display device is shown The ideograph of son.
As shown in Fig. 8 (A), in the set display area of display device (100), display represents dot code (set letter Cease (C)) dot pattern.
As shown in Fig. 8 (B), if the display surface that code generating device (1) loads on display device (100) (represents dot Display area shown by the dot pattern of code (set information (C))), then the information judging of respective code generating device (1) Portion (11) interpretation dot code (set information (C)).
Wherein, it shows that the display device of dot code (set information (C)) is not particularly limited, can know to play code The smart phone touch panel (31) of other device (3) function.
Fig. 9 is to show that code generating device (1) obtains the circle shown in the touch panel (31) of code identification device (3) The ideograph of the appearance of point code (set information (C)).
As shown in Fig. 9 (A), in the set display area of the touch panel (31) of code identification device (3), display is represented The dot pattern of dot code (set information (C)).
As shown in Fig. 9 (B), if code generating device (1) loads on the touch panel (31) of code identification device (3) Display surface (representing display area shown by the dot pattern of dot code (set information (C))), then respective code occur Information judging portion (11) interpretation dot code (set information (C)) of device (1).
For the example of Fig. 9, by carrying out a series of following processing, whereby it was confirmed that data output and reception.
Firstly, the information judging portion (11) of code generating device (1), represents dot code (set information from being formed with (C)) medium (2) interpretation dot code (set information (C)) of dot pattern.
The code output section (13) of code generating device (1) is with dot code (set information (C)) for set pattern generation Code is output to the touch panel (31) for playing the smart phone of code identification device (3) function.
Corresponding smart phone touch panel (31) display represents identified representative dot code (set information (C)) Dot pattern.
The information judging portion (11) of code generating device (1) shoots the light projected from smart phone touch panel (31), To interpretation dot code (set information (C)).The figure exported as a result, from the code output section (13) of code generating device (1) Case code, display represent the dot pattern of the representative dot code (set information (C)) of identification, the letter of code generating device (1) Breath interpretation portion (11) is read out, and if it is identical set information (C), then can exclude misidentification completely, safety may be implemented The high Verification System of property.
As another embodiment, without from being formed with the medium for representing the dot pattern of dot code (set information (C)) (2) dot code (set information (C)) is read, user's selection is playing the smart phone of code identification device (3) function Code generating device (1) is loaded on this by the set dot pattern shown together with figure or text in touch panel (31) Place, information judging portion (11) are read out, and code identification device (3) can read information.By this sequence of operations, do not make With the medium (2) for representing the dot pattern of dot code (set information (C)) is formed with, the touch surface in smart phone is selected The icon or figure and text shown together with dot pattern on plate (31), can be more with mutual operation shopping, game, study etc. Sample content.They compared with the touch of finger, can identify from code generating device (1) export pattern code, confirm who into Row operation.By means of this, in shopping, the user bought can be confirmed, what identification has purchased, in gaming, when It more ginseng added-time, can be confirmed that who is operated, easily realize battle game etc..In turn, by operating operation button or making Code generating device (1) movement/rotation, code identification device (3) can also identify this information, what realization can be entertained mutually Infinite contents.
By carrying out a series of this processing, whereby it was confirmed that the output and reception of data.
In addition, the code that respective code generating device (1) can obtain on the touch panel (31) of smart phone fills The loading position of (1) is set, and then pattern code correspondingly can also be exported.
At this point, when utilizing infrared ray absorbing ink to be overlapped printed dot on printed matter, information is sentenced for medium (2) Reading portion (11) needs to utilize infrared LEDs irradiation medium (2) when infrared spectral range only extracts dot.If code fills Setting (1) is pen type, then can enter sunlight from periphery, thus needs infrared ray through filter.On the other hand, if code is sent out Generating apparatus (1) is a seal type, then does not enter the worry of sunlight from periphery, therefore, can only shooting be utilized to infrared ray The dot of the ink printing of reaction, so, infrared ray is not needed through filter.In addition, the infrared ray of irradiation may be ultraviolet Line utilizes the ink printed dot reacted with ultraviolet light.
In addition, when information judging portion (11) read the dot shown in display devices such as smart phone touch panel (31) When pattern, read in visible ray regions.
The infrared ray of infrared LEDs irradiation can not be reflected and be returned from display device, thus information judging portion (11) are not clapped Take the photograph the infrared ray of reflection.
On the other hand, if it is the code generating device (1) of seal type, then as described above, being not provided with infrared ray through filter Mirror, information judging portion (11) can shoot the visible light from display device.That is, information judging portion (11) can be filled from display The dot pattern for setting display reads dot code (set information (C)).
In this way, even with the dot pattern that display device infrared ray absorbing ink prints, information judging portion (11) (shining with luminous ray) the dot pattern shown in display device can be shot, dot code (set information is read (C)) the dot pattern, either formed on which kind of medium, can be accurately read dot code.Moreover, if code Generating device (1) continuously exports in 2 or 3 or more electric conductors, then no matter how to move on the display apparatus/rotate generation Code generating device (1) can recognize that their position and operational circumstances, code identification device (3) can identify far to surpass and be difficult to know The information for the user's finger manipulation not rotated.In the past, by finger manipulation, can not recognize is whose finger, which finger.
But, when being the output of 2 electric conductors, for code identification device (3), in order to identify direction and configuration, Needing to track the output from 2 electric conductors is starting point or terminal, continues to identify always in movement/rotation.When being 3 When above, configure if it is unique and (if the configuration is rotated without 360 degree, do not become identical configuration), then code Identification device (3) can uniquely identify how code generating device (1) is put.
In other words, information judging portion (11) are not limited to the implementation form, as long as only reading set information (C) Equipment then can be used.
For example, can be using optics interpretation sensor, the electricity for reading the 2 d codes (set information (C)) such as dot code Magnetic wave interpretation device etc. is used as information judging portion (11).
When information judging device (11) using optics interpretation sensor as seal type code generating device (1), such as It is upper described, it is irradiated using IRLED, so that in printed medium the two dimensions such as dot code can be read in infrared spectral range It is (set can to read the 2 d codes such as dot code in visible ray regions in a display device for code (set information (C)) Information (C)).
For example, the forms such as the size or shape in the seal portion (16) of seal type code generating device (1), are not particularly limited In the implementation form.
For example, seal portion (16) arrive greatly covering shell, the configuration freedom of dot (electric conductor) can be improved.Then, add The stabilization of code generating device (1) can be sought when load.
For another example code generating device (1) can be made not only to send to the code identification device (3) of smart phone etc. Pattern code, and can receive the information from respective code identification device (3).Communication mode at this time is not particularly limited, It can be using wireless communication, perception of sound, light perception etc..
Separately for example, symbol " output (ON) " detection side of the code output section (11) by means of code identification device (3) Formula is not limited to the mode of the implementation form, that is, it is not limited in the way of capacitance type touch-control panel (31), it can also be with It is in the way of any sensors such as optical sensor, pressure sensor.
In conclusion code generating device and code identification device that the present invention applies have following composition, including Including the implementation form, the implementation form of various kinds colors can have.
That is, the code generating device that the present invention applies includes
Information judging portion, the set information of interpretation；
Code generating unit, by the code about the set information, with the direction in space of 1 or more symbol and time The code that the configuration pattern of at least one party in direction represents, occurs as pattern code；And
Match described in the pattern code when occurring the pattern code according to representing pattern code output section Placing graphic pattern, for described 1 or more each symbol, output whether making according to sensor response whether, changes, thus Output phase answers pattern code.
The sensor is the capacitive position input pickup that touch panel includes,
The pattern code output section
When occurring the pattern code, it can be directed to described 1 or more each symbol, according to representing the figure The configuration pattern of case code, whether there is or not generations for output whether making the reaction according to the capacitive position input pickup Variation, answers pattern code so as to output phase.
The pattern code
The pattern of prespecified position can will be configured at as parent map along the respective direction in space of multiple symbols Case,
Whether the multiple symbol for including for the basic pattern to respectively define to the sensor response Pattern as unit cell pattern,
It is defined based on the unit cell pattern.
The pattern code
Justice depending on being combined based on the configuration of the time orientation of the unit cell pattern of multiple types.
Justice depending on the pattern code can be combined based on the configuration of the time orientation of the symbol.
The configuration combination of the time orientation of the symbol can become using the output time of the symbol as the feelings of variable The combination based on the corresponding output time under condition.
The configuration combination of the time orientation of the symbol, which can become with the off time between the output of the symbol, is The combination based on the respective clearance time in the case where variable.
The configuration combination of the time orientation of the symbol, which can become with the output time of the symbol and off time, is The combination based on corresponding output time and respective clearance time in the case where variable.
The configuration combination of the time orientation of the symbol can also become using the output intensity of the symbol as variable In the case of the combination based on corresponding output intensity.
The pattern code can be defined in the case where the form of the symbol is variable based on corresponding form.
Can also have operation portion, load on the state of the detection faces of the sensor in the code generating device Under, be configured at the detection faces opposite side, operated by user.
The operation of the operation portion at least may include starting the information judging portion or the pattern code generating unit Operation.
It can also include boot portion, the detection faces of the sensor are loaded on as condition using the code generating device, At least start the information judging portion or the pattern code generating unit.
The boot portion may include switch, and the switch loads on the sensor in the code generating device Become ON state in the case where detection faces, becomes OFF state when releasing corresponding load.
There can also be organism authentication portion, detection operates the organism letter of the user of the code generating device Breath, corresponding user is authenticated using the testing result.
There can also be prompting part, to user's prompt information relevant to the pattern code occurred.
There can also be code deletion portion, when the code generating device indicates to delete the pattern code, make institute It states multiple symbols all to change, so that the sensor does not react.
The set information read by means of the information judging portion can be 2 d code.
The 2 d code can be dot code.
The set information read by means of the information judging portion can be the letter that set display device is shown Breath.
The set information read by means of the information judging portion is the letter of the light reaction to given wavelength Breath,
Irradiation portion can be also included, the light of the given wavelength is irradiated for the set information；
Cutting portion, in the state that the code generating device loads on the display surface of the display device, cutting is outer Light.
The code identification device that the present invention applies is
Identify the pattern code identification device of the pattern code occurred from the code generating device of the record,
Show the display device of the set information；
The set sensor；
Test section, based on the testing result of the sensor, the configuration of corresponding 1 of detection or more symbol Pattern, wherein the testing result is to make institute about the pattern code output section by means of the code generating device State the testing result of changed described 1 or more symbol whether sensor response；And
Identification part, the configuration pattern of described 1 or more the symbol based on detection are identified by means of the code The code generating unit of generating device and the pattern code occurred.
It can have touch panel comprising the display device and capacitive position input pickup, the condenser type Position input pickup is laminated in the display surface of corresponding display device as the sensor.
The identification part can also identify the code generating device relative to institute on the basis of the pattern code State touch panel carry out in contact with or close to direction, movement track, or make the code generating device relative to the touch-control Panel carry out in contact with or close to number or combination of more than two kinds in them.
A series of processing can be implemented by means of hardware, it is also possible by means software and implement.
In the case where executing a series of processing by means of software, the program for constituting the software can be from network or note Recording medium is installed on computer etc..
Computer can be the computer for being built in specialized hardware.In addition, computer can be by installing various programs And it is able to carry out the computer of various functions, for example, general purpose personal computer.
Recording medium including this program is in order to provide program to user, not only by being independently equipped with device noumenon Removable media constitute, can also be by the recording medium etc. of user be supplied in the state of device noumenon with preset configuration It constitutes.Removable media is for example by disk (including floppy disk), Blu-ray Disc (Blu-ray disc, registered trademark), CD or optomagnetic Disk etc. is constituted.CD is for example by CD-ROM (Compact Disk-Read Only Memory), DVD (Digital Versatile Disk) etc. constitute.Photomagneto disk is made of MD (Mini-Disk) etc..In addition, with preset configuration in device noumenon State be supplied to the recording medium of user and be for example made of the ROM having program recorded thereon or hard disk etc..
In addition, in the present specification, the step of describing the program recorded in recording medium, not only include pressing in their order The processing that sequence is implemented further includes even if being not required chronologically to handle, also side by side or the processing that individually executes.
In addition, in the present specification, System terminology means the whole dress being made of multiple devices or multiple equipment etc. It sets.
The code generating device of present invention mentioned above application, with the sensor based on code identification device side Composition is not particularly limited.
For example, contemporary code generating device is seal type, the sensor of code identification device side is the electricity that touch panel includes When appearance formula position input pickup, pattern code output section can be realized as shown in Figure 10 to Figure 13.
In addition, pattern code output section and touch panel are collectively referred to as " static capacity control system " below.
In addition, pattern code output section is according to the configuration pattern for representing the pattern code, for predetermined symbols, Output whether making according to sensor response realizes touch panel (position input pickup) detection output whether there is or not changing Symbol, this control is known as the touch panel static capacity of seal electric conductor " detect control " below.
In other words, Figure 10 to Figure 13 is the principle for illustrating the touch panel static capacity detection control of seal electric conductor Figure.
Figure 10 is to show the exemplary ideograph of the composition of static capacity control system.
Code identification device by with static capacity detection type touch panel smart phone or tablet computer constitute.
At this point, static capacity detection type touch panel by because have both quantify static capacity electric conductor close to due to cause Static capacity be detected as touch operation.Touch panel testing number micromicro (pF) micro static amount below obtains and touches position It sets.
Wherein, in the static capacity control system of Figure 10, if journey can not be detected to touch panel by keeping static capacity small The electric conductor of degree is close to touch panel, with established approach, is electrically connected the electric conductor with big static capacity, then, it is small The electric conductor of static capacity becomes the electric conductor with big static capacity, can detecte touch panel.Using the principle, by 1 The figure for the code generating device that the small electric conductor of a above static capacity is configured at lower part as at least part in symbol Case code output section controls at least a certain in the configuration of the big static capacity of electric conductor or the static capacity variation of time orientation Person, so that the touch panel of code identification device side detects corresponding static capacity, the identification part of respective code identification device is known Other pattern code.
Figure 11 is the composition example for the various semiconductor switch that the static capacity control system of Figure 10 can use.
In addition, also can use the switch of multiplicity in addition to semiconductor switch.
Then, referring to Fig.1 2, the summary of static capacity minimization when to the semiconductor switch OFF of Figure 11 is illustrated.
The ideograph of current reduction system when Figure 12 is the semiconductor switch Off for explanatory diagram 11.
Even if semiconductor switch in OFF, also there is several electric current flowings, therefore, as a result, there are electric conductors to hold The situation of the static capacity for the degree for thering is touch panel to be detected of continuing insurance.
Static capacity is set to change and export along time orientation in the state that code generating device is loaded on touch panel When pattern code, or with established methodology (operation operation button or acquirement display device in the state of loading code generating device The automatic control of the 2 d code, program of middle display) when exporting new pattern code, it can not continue to test before this that once detection was conductive Electric conductor.For this purpose, it is minimum in order to which the magnitude of current to be reduced to, reach the degree that can't detect static capacity, needs to utilize and respectively open It closes, it is ensured that impedance sufficiently high.It as a kind of scheme, is shown in Fig.12, by semiconductor (transistor, FET) arranged in series At 2 sections, lowers the magnitude of current, so that static capacity is reached the detection limit of touch panel and led hereinafter, can't detect touch panel Electric body.When being also unable to satisfy with 2 sections of series connection, number of segment can be further increased.Further, it is fabricated to the crystal of high frequency Pipe, FET, MOS FET etc., can greatly reduce electric current, and static capacity can be made to reach minimum.
It is corresponding with pattern code to touching according to multiple dots of the composition pattern code output section (16) described above Whether controlling the reaction of panel (31), illustrate for conduction/non-conduction, but the conduction/non-conduction of electric conductor etc. further includes because of direct capacitance Situation caused by amount variation.In addition, constituting multiple dots of pattern code output section (16), it is not without the point of area, and It is the symbol with given area whether touch panel (31) can react.The symbol is the symbol of arbitrary shape.Do not have yet Necessity is same shape, same area.In addition, the dot is the dot pattern that the information judging portion is read, or and dot The dot of code is entirely different, this is self-evident.In addition, dot pattern is by medium (including all moulders) Formed (including print or mark, display device show etc. is formed optically) multiple dots composition 2 d code.It should 2 d code is as the dot code of numerical information (code) for reading dot pattern (including imaging or imaging) and finding out. Set information (C) includes the 2 d codes such as bar code or QR code (registered trademark), dot code, colour coding or is recorded in wireless The numerical information (code) of information recording carrier.Above content also represents identical meaning in later embodiment.
The collector circuit of the bipolar junction transistor of Figure 11 (A), Figure 11 (B), (C) MOS transistor (FET) leakage Power supply is connected in polar circuit.But in the case where they are used as switch, power supply can be not provided with.Show in Figure 13 (A) Example property, which illustrates, to be omitted power supply and constitutes the circuit that bipolar junction transistor is used as switch.In addition, the exemplary diagram in 21 (B) Show omission power supply and constitutes MOS transistor (FET) circuit for being used as switch.In addition, according to being described in Figure 12 Hold, as shown in Figure 13 (A), (B), makes 2 sections of subordinate connections of transistor, so as to lower the electricity of the knot between collector/base stage The capacity of junction capacity, capacitance of drain, source capacitance between appearance, emitter-base bandgap grading/base stage etc..In addition, the number of segment of subordinate connection transistor It is not limited to 2 sections.
In the following, the attached drawing after 4 referring to Fig.1, says the example for being different from code generating device (1) described composition It is bright.
Figure 14 is the exemplary ideograph for showing the code generating device (1) with information judging device and constituting.
Specifically, Figure 14 (A) is the exemplary side view for showing the appearance of code generating device (1) and constituting.Figure 14 (B) are the exemplary bottom views for showing the appearance of code generating device (1) and constituting.Figure 14 (C) is to show code Another exemplary bottom view that the appearance of device (1) is constituted.Figure 14 (D) is the inside for showing the surface of code generating device (1) The exemplary figure constituted.Figure 14 (E) is an exemplary figure for showing the Inner Constitution inside code generating device (1). Figure 14 (F) is the exemplary side view for showing seal portion (16) the amplification appearance of code generating device (1) and constituting.Figure 14 It (G) is an exemplary figure for showing the Inner Constitution on the surface of seal portion (16) amplification of code generating device (1).
As shown in figure 14, seal type code generating device (1) is in the information judging portion (11), code generating unit (12) And on the basis of code output section (13), also there are operation button (14), power knob (15), seal portion (16), CPU (17), interior Portion's memory (18), PCBA (19), USB terminal (20), loudspeaker (21), button switch (22), from master switch (23), wireless Device (24) and power supply unit (25).
In Figure 14 (A), operation button (14) is installed on code generating device (1) upper end, is to send out for operating code The button of the instruction of generating apparatus (1) various controls, such as the interpretation instruction of set information (C), the output ON/OFF of pattern code refer to Show.Specifically, such as shown in Figure 14 (D), it is internal to be configured at code generating device (1) if pressing the operation button (14) Button switch (22) state of the other side is transformed to from the side in ON or OFF state.Alternatively, it is also possible in operation button (14) internal that LED is installed, various states are showed with the illuminant colour of corresponding LED or luminous pattern.In addition, operation button (14) exists It is not required in code generating device (1) to constitute.In addition, operation button (14) also can be set in side.
Power knob (15) is installed on the side of code generating device (1), is for switching to code generating device (1) Power source ON/OFF button.
Seal portion (16) such as shown in Figure 14 (A) and (F), is installed on the lower end of code generating device (1).Seal portion (16) As shown in Figure 14 (B), the code output section (13) for being configured to predetermined pattern by multiple dots and being constituted is installed, at its center Portion is formed with hole.The bore portion becomes by means of information judging device (11) the information judging region of the set information of interpretation (C) (IA).Information judging device (11) can both contact the medium side for being formed with set information (C) and read set information (C), May exit off respective media face, both set a distance is read.
On multiple symbol peripheries or the surface of symbol load side, also can be set as idioelectric rubber or silica gel, PET etc. protects component, damages so as not to display devices such as the touch panels (31) that makes code identification device (3).In addition, If moving seal portion (16) on the display apparatus, the bottom surface of seal portion (16) (if there is protecting component, then also includes Corresponding protection component) it is suitble to the material low using coefficient of friction.But if move seal portion (16) on the display apparatus It is dynamic, then it is suitble to the material high using coefficient of friction.This is in order to enable not sliding when code identification device (3) load, moment Certainly distinguished symbol.
In set information (C) interpretation, as shown in Fig. 2 (B), seal portion (16) are configured at the dot pattern of medium (2) (set information (C)) on or above.As a result, as shown in Figure 14 (D), set information (C) is believed by interpretation region (IA) Cease interpretation portion (11) interpretation.
In addition, when output pattern code, as shown in Fig. 3 (B), seal portion (16) are in contact with or close to code identification device (3) the code detection region (SP) of touch panel (31).More accurately, the code output section that seal portion (16) are equipped with (13) multiple symbols in contact with or close to code identification device (3) touch panel (31) code detection region (SP).Its In, multiple symbols are made of electric conductor etc., and it is corresponding to pattern code, whether controlling the reaction of touch panel (31).That is, touch-control Panel (31) only detects the symbol (its position coordinates) for having reaction in multiple symbols.Pattern is configured based on the symbol so detected Deng identification icon code.
In addition, the specific example of the identification for the pattern code based on multiple symbols, due to reference to Fig. 6 and Fig. 7 into It has gone explanation, thus has omitted.
In Figure 14 (D), CPU (17) executes all control processing of code generating device (1), for example, executing about both Determine the various processing of the interpretation of information (C), the output of pattern code, program update, input-output equipment control etc..Pass through CPU (17) with set software collaboration, so that the various functional blocks such as the code generating unit (12) of Fig. 2 (C) be made to function.
The various data that the program or CPU (17) that internal memory (18) memory is run by means of CPU (17) use Deng.
PCBA (19) is to add code generating device (1) for various electricity needed for executing various processing shown in Fig. 2 The basis on road.
USB terminal (20) when executing the program update of code generating device (1), data input and output, charging etc., with Other devices (not shown) are connected in a manner of USB.In addition, USB terminal (20) is not required in code generating device (1) It constitutes
Loudspeaker (21) is when set information (C) is read out, implements various operation instructions, broadcasting includes the interior of sound When appearance etc., various sound are exported.
Button switch (22) be it is corresponding to the pressing operation of operation button as described above (14), one from ON and OFF state Side is transformed into the switch of the other side.Button switch (22) is used as reverse phase button, can also make some independence, in order to indicate not Biconditional operation and independently function.
From master switch (23) be using self weight and make pattern code output section (13) start switch.Wherein, so-called to open It is dynamic, it is according to the multiple dots for constituting pattern code output section (16), corresponding to pattern code, establishment is to touch panel (31) Reaction whether state.In addition, as shown in Fig. 2 (B), it is (set in the dot pattern that seal portion (16) are configured at medium (2) Information (C)) on or above when, from master switch (23) using self weight and start, set information (C) pass through interpretation region (IA) And it is read by information judging portion (11).The mechanism started from master switch (23) using self weight, makes the pattern code for needing electric power Output or dot pattern etc. interpretation, code generating device (1) is only being loaded on into touch panel (31) and/or medium (2) just start in the case where, so as to seek to be greatly saved electric power.It is further possible to not utilize it is automatic and Starting, but press code generating device (1) and start.In addition, not being in code generating device (1) from master switch (23) Required composition.
In Figure 14 (E), wireless device (24) is the set letter for carrying out wireless communication with server (4), and being directed to interpretation It ceases (C), receives the dress with the various information utilized in the controls processing such as the outputs of progress control treatment such as server (4) It sets.Wireless device (24) can also wirelessly obtain pattern code.In addition, wireless device (24) in code generating device (1) simultaneously Nonessential composition.
Power supply unit (25) is the part for code generating device (1) supply electric power such as dry cell.Therefore, power supply unit (25) It is not necessary to must be dry cell, it be also possible to rechargeable battery.At this point, charging method is not particularly limited, can both use The charging method based on USB connection in USB terminal (20), can also be using method furthermore.Alternatively, it is also possible to from outside Electric power supply apparatus supply electric power.Power supply can also combine described several.
As shown in Figure 14 (G), rubber or ring-shaped are installed in seal portion (16) upper interior of code generating device (1) Spring.Even if this is can also to make electric conductor configuration face and medium for slightly angled loading code generating device (1) Input unit face can be exactly in contact with.In addition, all electric conductors also leave simultaneously when code generating device (1) leaves, from And it is able to suppress the misidentification of pattern code.
In addition, the spring of the inside installation rubber above the seal portion (16) of code generating device (1) or ring-shaped, This not required composition in code generating device (1).
In addition, code generating device (1) arrives greatly as covering code generating device (1) in itself with shell, Ke Yiti The configuration freedom of highly conductive body.In addition, by the size of increasing code generating device (1) itself, to can also seek to add The stabilization of code generating device (1) when load.
Seal portion (16) is also possible to and identical form shown in Figure 14 (B).It is configured to that is, being equipped with by multiple symbols Predetermined pattern and the code output section (13) constituted, are being formed with hole than its central portion more top.The bore portion become by means of Information judging device (11) and the information judging region (IA) of the set information of interpretation (C).It both can be set in being formed with face contact The simultaneously interpretation of the medium side of information (C), can also leave both set a distances and be read from respective media.
On the periphery of seal portion (16), signal interpretation instruction notch portion (26) is installed.Information judging indicates notch portion (26) in the display device that code generating device (1) is loaded on to code identification device (3), small icon or text, figure are selected In the case where the object images such as shape, the instruction point of object images, the set information of interpretation (C) are accurately indicated.Information judging instruction Notch portion (27) can both indicate that (such as laser designator etc.) substituted with optics, can also be combined to them.
Figure 15 is an exemplary mode for showing the composition of the code generating device (1) without information judging device Figure.
Specifically, Figure 15 (A) is the exemplary side view for showing the appearance of code generating device (1) and constituting.Figure 15 (B) are the exemplary bottom views for showing the appearance of code generating device (1) and constituting.Figure 15 (C) is to show code One exemplary figure of the Inner Constitution on device (1) surface.Figure 15 (D) is the inside structure shown inside code generating device (1) At an exemplary figure.Figure 15 (E) is one for showing seal portion (16) the amplification appearance of code generating device (1) and constituting Exemplary side view.Figure 15 (F) is the Inner Constitution for showing the surface of seal portion (16) amplification of code generating device (1) One exemplary figure.
As shown in figure 15, seal type code generating device (1) is in the code generating unit (12) and code output section (13) On the basis of, also have operation button (14), power knob (15), seal portion (16), CPU (17), internal storage (18), PCBA (19), USB terminal (20), loudspeaker (21), button switch (22), from master switch (23), wireless device (24), power supply Portion (25), pattern code input unit (301), loudspeaker channel (302), pattern code display device (303), pattern code Identification device (304) and power switch (305).
In Figure 15 (A), operation button (14) is installed on code generating device (1) upper end, is to send out for operating code The button of the instruction of generating apparatus (1) various controls, such as the interpretation instruction of set information (C), the output ON/OFF of pattern code refer to Show.Specifically, such as shown in Figure 15 (C), it is internal to be configured at code generating device (1) if pressing the operation button (14) Button switch (22) state of the other side is transformed to from the side in ON or OFF state.Alternatively, it is also possible in operation button (14) internal that LED is installed, various states are showed with the illuminant colour of corresponding LED or luminous pattern.In addition, operation button (14) Hood for protecting rider can be set, so that pattern code can not be arranged in the third party.Operation button (14) in code generating device (1) simultaneously Nonessential composition.In addition, operation button (14) also can be set in side.
Power knob (15) is installed on the side of code generating device (1), is for switching to code generating device (1) Power source ON/OFF button.
Pattern code input unit (301) is installed on the surface of code generating device (1), is for pattern to be arranged The device of code.Specifically, the drafting of rotating pattern code input device (301) has the ring of number, keep number alignment set Pattern code is arranged in position.Start pattern code input unit (301) setting when, pattern code input unit (301) with The operative combination for the various operation buttons being often used without repeatedly implements number and is arranged and remembers, output pattern code.Herein Although not illustrating, pattern code input unit (301) can also draw the ring for having number as rotation, multistage is configured.Separately Outside, pattern code input unit (301) can also configure multiple digital buttons.Moreover, pattern code input unit (301) Required number can be pressed the operation button and be configured.
Loudspeaker channel (302) sends out the various sound of loudspeaker (21) output.
Pattern code display device (303) is for confirming the figure being arranged by means of pattern code input unit (301) The display device of case code.Pattern code display device (303) can for example use liquid crystal display.Furthermore it is possible to by touch-control Panel is installed on pattern code display device (303), so that display number, touch patterns code are configured.
Seal portion (16) such as shown in Figure 15 (A) and (E), is installed on the lower end of code generating device (1).Seal portion (16) As shown in Figure 15 (B), the code output section (13) for being configured to predetermined pattern by multiple symbols and being constituted is installed.
On multiple symbol peripheries or the surface of symbol load side, it is also possible to installation as idioelectric rubber or silica gel, PET etc. protects component, damages so as not to display devices such as the touch panels (31) that makes code identification device (3).In addition, If moving seal portion (16) on the display apparatus, the bottom surface of seal portion (16) (if there is protecting component, then also includes Corresponding protection component) it is suitble to the material low using coefficient of friction.But if move seal portion (16) on the display apparatus It is dynamic, then it is suitble to the material high using coefficient of friction.This is in order to enable not sliding when code identification device (3) load, moment Certainly distinguished symbol.
In output pattern code, as shown in Fig. 3 (B), seal portion (16) are in contact with or close to code identification device (3) The code detection region (SP) of touch panel (31).More accurately, it is installed on the code output section (13) in seal portion (16) Multiple symbols in contact with or close to code identification device (3) touch panel (31) code detection region (SP).Wherein, multiple Symbol is made of electric conductor etc., corresponding to pattern code, whether controlling the reaction of touch panel (31).That is, touch panel (31) Only detect the symbol (its position coordinates) for having reaction in multiple symbols.Based on the symbol configuration pattern etc. so detected, identification figure Case code.
In addition, the specific example of the identification for the pattern code based on multiple symbols, due to reference to Fig. 6 and Fig. 7 into It has gone explanation, thus has omitted.
In Figure 15 (C), CPU (17) executes all control processing of code generating device (1), for example, executing about both Determine the various processing of the interpretation of information (C), the output of pattern code, program update, input-output equipment control etc..Pass through CPU (17) with set software collaboration, so that the various functional blocks such as code generating unit (12) of Fig. 2 (C) function.
The various data that the program or CPU (17) that internal memory (18) memory is run by means of CPU (17) use Deng.
PCBA (19) is to add code generating device (1) to execute various circuits needed for various processing shown in Fig. 2 Basis.
USB terminal (20) when realizing the program update of code generating device (1), data input and output, charging etc., with Other devices (not shown) are connected in a manner of USB.In addition, USB terminal (20) is not required in code generating device (1) It constitutes.
Loudspeaker (21) exports various sound when carrying out various operation instructions, when broadcasting includes the content of sound etc..
Button switch (22) be it is corresponding to the pressing operation of operation button as described above (14), one from ON and OFF state Side is transformed into the switch of the other side.Button switch (22) is used as reverse phase button, can also make some independence, in order to indicate not Biconditional operation and independently function.
From master switch (23) be using self weight and make pattern code output section (13) start switch.Wherein, so-called to open It is dynamic, it is every multiple symbols for constituting pattern code output section (13), it is corresponding to pattern code, it establishes to touch panel (31) State whether reaction.From master switch (23) using self weight and start mechanism, make the pattern code for needing electric power output or The interpretation of dot pattern, only in the case where code generating device (1) is loaded on touch panel (31) and/or medium (2) Just start, so as to seek to be greatly saved electric power.It is further possible to not utilize self weight and start, but push Code generating device (1) and start switch.In addition, the structure from necessary to master switch (23) is in code generating device (1) not At.
Pattern code identification device (304) is the dress of the pattern code of identification icon code input device (301) setting It sets.Specifically, drawing the inboard for having the ring of number, configuration can identify material or impedance of number etc. to identify number. In addition, no matter pattern code identification device (304) other which kind of methods is utilized, as long as number can be identified.
In Figure 15 (D), wireless device (24) is the set letter for carrying out wireless communication with server (4), and being directed to interpretation It ceases (C), receives the dress with the various information utilized in the controls processing such as the outputs of progress control treatment such as server (4) It sets.Wireless device (24) can also wirelessly obtain pattern code.In addition, wireless device (24) in code generating device (1) simultaneously Nonessential composition.
Power supply unit (25) is the part for code generating device (1) supply electric power such as dry cell.Therefore, power supply unit (25) It is not necessary to must be dry cell, it be also possible to rechargeable battery.At this point, charging method is not particularly limited, can both use The charging method based on USB connection in USB terminal (20), can also be using method furthermore.Alternatively, it is also possible to from outside Electric power supply apparatus supply electric power.Power supply can also combine described several.
As shown in Figure 15 (F), rubber or ring-shaped are installed in seal portion (16) upper interior of code generating device (1) Spring.Even if this is can also to make electric conductor configuration face and medium for slightly angled loading code generating device (1) Input unit face can be exactly in contact with.In addition, this is because when code generating device (1) leaves, all electric conductors are also simultaneously It leaves, so as to inhibit the misidentification of pattern code.
In addition, the spring of the inside installation rubber above the seal portion (16) of code generating device (1) or ring-shaped, This not required composition in code generating device (1).
In addition, code generating device (1) greatly to code generating device (1) itself shell covering, conduction can be improved The configuration freedom of body.In addition, by the size of increasing code generating device (1) itself, thus when can also seek load The stabilization of code generating device (1).
Figure 16 is the exemplary ideograph for showing the code generating device (1) without information judging device and constituting.
Specifically, Figure 16 (A) is the exemplary side view for showing the appearance of code generating device (1) and constituting.Figure 16 (B) are the exemplary bottom views for showing the appearance of code generating device (1) and constituting.Figure 16 (C) is shown in code hair The exemplary side view that the appearance of moulder cover is constituted has been covered above generating apparatus (1).Figure 16 (D) is display code hair One exemplary figure of the upper surface of the pattern code setting ring of generating apparatus (1).Figure 16 (E) is display code generating device (1) An exemplary figure below ring is arranged in pattern code.Figure 16 (F) is to show that the pattern code of code generating device (1) is set Set/output device above an exemplary figure.Figure 16 (G) is the code generating device (1) that display is different from Figure 16 (D) An exemplary figure of the upper surface of ring is arranged in pattern code.Figure 16 (H) and (I) are that display is sent out different from the code of Figure 16 (E) An example below the pattern code setting ring of generating apparatus (1) (with immediately below for benchmark dot, is set along clockwise direction The situation of placing graphic pattern code) figure.
As shown in figure 16, seal type code generating device (1) has code output section (13), power knob (401), figure Ring (402), pattern code setting/output device (403) and contact switch (404) is arranged in case code.In addition, pattern code is set Ring (402) is set to be made of (402b) below (402a) above pattern code setting ring and pattern code setting ring.
In Figure 16 (A), power knob (401) is installed on the side of code generating device (1), is for switching to generation Power source ON/OFF button of code generating device (1).
In addition, (402a) such as Figure 16 (D) is shown above pattern code setting ring, equipped with setting number.Rotation, which is drawn, to be had The ring of the number makes number alignment commitment positions (for example, mark or marking), pattern code is arranged.Code generating device (1) It when starting setting up, is started setting up with the operative combination for the various operation buttons being often used without, repeatedly implements number and be arranged and remember Recall, output pattern code.In addition, code generating device (1) can also configure pattern code setting dedicated button.
Furthermore, (402b) such as Figure 16 (E) is shown below pattern code setting ring, is equipped with electric conductor.
Pattern code setting/output device (403) such as shown in Figure 16 (B), is installed on the lower end of code generating device (1).
In the upper surface of pattern code setting/output device (403), as shown in Figure 16 (F), 21 group of contact switch (404) 8 are formed with.
Below pattern code setting/output device (403), as shown in Figure 16 (B), it is equipped with and is matched by multiple symbols The code output section (13) for being set to predetermined pattern and constituting.
In addition, below pattern code setting/output device (403), at least one (even what is continuously abutted is more A, can be within 7) on electric conductor is installed, rotate ring, to contact one in 8 set contact switch It is a, make corresponding contacts switch ON, a numerical value for constituting pattern code can be defined.For example, if implementing 4 rotation process, The pattern code of 12bit (4096 code) then can be set.The number of switch is arbitrary.If first hanging ring, directly Implement rotation process, when number is directed at commitment positions, have passed through set time (such as 1.0 seconds or so), such as fruit Next rotation process is applied, even if being then configured (beginning/end) without other push-botton operations, can also be easily arranged Number.When identical number consecutive hours, after rotation, makes same number alignment commitment positions again, be by set period It can.The number of number needed for being arranged, ends automatically.
In Figure 16 (C), ring can be set in the lower part fixed pattern code of male earner or moulder, to be covered in seal The mode of commitment positions is installed and (can be dismantled), output pattern code.As a result, by loading the male earner of multiplicity or moulder In input medium face, so as to the corresponding content that operates/read.It is further possible to male earner or moulder are rotated, it is defeated New pattern code out.Alternatively, pattern code setting ring can be replaced.In addition, contact switch (404) uses optical switch etc. Which kind of switch is not related.
It, both can be from order to after pattern code is arranged, make the third party that pattern code can not be arranged as shown in Figure 16 (G) It installs additional above and blocks ring, install additional block ring again after pattern code setting ring (402) can also be removed.Alternatively, only by installing figure additional When case code is arranged ring (402) and pattern code is arranged, it in the present embodiment, can use 8 contact switch, 8bit be set The pattern code of (256 code).That is, it is (logical to be equipped with electric conductor in various position below pattern code setting ring (402b) Electric body), it by means of the electric conductor, can use 8 contact switch, the pattern code based on ON/OFF be set.However, it is desirable to (402a) installation triangle mark or marking on pattern code setting ring, and it is directed at them.At this point, not needing in pattern generation (402a) installation settings number above code setting ring.
The seal type of 4 types is explained above, but can also suitably combine the mechanism included by them, function and Commercialization is carried out, this is self-evident.
Figure 17 (A) and (C) are shown on the basis of the non-rotational symmetry configuration of Fig. 6 (B), and information judging device is matched It is placed in end, so that user can easily identify interpretation position, notch portion is installed in the bottom surface of code generating device (1), from And it may be easy to the figure of the symbol pattern specific example of instruction information judging region (IA).
Figure 17 shows that in non-rotational symmetry configuration symbols are (on the basis of 13-1 to 13-5), in order to which user is easy It identifies interpretation position, information judging device is configured at end, notch portion is installed in the bottom surface of code generating device (1), thus Make it easy to the specific example of the symbol pattern in instruction information judging region.
Figure 17 (A) shows basic pattern.In addition, as shown in Figure 17 (C), for including in the basic pattern of Figure 17 (A) Each symbol (13-1 to 13-5), the given moment (given time timing) at the time of opposite in (t1 and t18), definition " output (ON) " or " OFF ".
In the example of Figure 17, since touch panel (31) is able to detect multiple points, because regardless of the moment (t1 and T18 which timing), " output (ON) " admissible mark (any combination of 13-1 any number into 13-5).
Wherein, in Figure 17 (C), each timing in moment (t1 and t18) is depicted, the base of Figure 17 (A) is depicted only The unit cell pattern of " output (ON) " symbol blacking in this pattern.Know the unit cell pattern of Figure 17 (C) due to touch panel (31) It is able to carry out symbol detection, thus multiple symbols become " output (ON) ".In addition, at least the 1 of symbol (13-1) and other symbols A is ON, and in undetectable situation due to symbol is in nearby, touch panel (31) cannot make symbol (13-1) and other Symbol while ON.
This unit cell pattern (in the example of Figure 17 (C), preparing 22 types) for preparing multiple types, in time side To each position (each timing at moment (t1 and t18)), various unit cell patterns respectively configure 1, to define generating object pattern Code.
In addition, in this embodiment, symbol (13-1 to 13-5) each ON/OFF switching, by means of Fig. 4's (C) The control of CPU (17) and realize.The method for exporting a pattern code of Figure 17 (C) is not limited to especially, for example, in this implementation In form, both it can also use and load using the method for operation button (14) pressing operation that Fig. 4 (A) is repeated Face setting is self-possessed by means of seal portion (16) and the self weight button (23) that operates, when loading on code identification device (3) Shi Zidong The method of output.Also it can be set and export identical pattern code predetermined number of times repeatedly.
In the symbol pattern of Figure 17 (A) (C), if making symbol, (13-2 to 13-5) ON, can be with distinguished symbol pattern Direction.It is without being limited thereto, can also symbol (13-1 makes 3 symbol ON into 13-5), so as to become non-axis rotate Symmetrically.In addition, at least one of symbol (13-1) and other symbols is ON, in undetectable situation due to symbol is in nearby Under, touch panel (31) should make symbol (3 symbol ONs of the 13-2 into 13-5), to become non-axis rotational symmetry
Therefore, allow to identify direction using the symbol pattern of acquirement, can identify position and the rotation of electric conductor Turn.
Using the method for confirmation direction, making symbol, (after 13-2 to 13-5) is ON, only making symbol (13-1) is ON. For the effect of the symbol (13-1), as the symbol for representing seal portion (16), (center of 13-2 to 13-4) is neighbouring Fiducial mark is easy to the symbol (center or neighbouring position of 13-2 to 13-4), even if seal in Direct Recognition seal portion (16) Portion (16) is mobile, can also accurately identify the position of seal portion (16).
In the output at moment (t1) to moment (t18), composite symbol (ON/OFF of 13-2 to 13-5) and export letter Breath, during this period, symbol (13-1) are OFF.Then, symbol (13-1) is only become into ON, repeatedly symbol (13-1) and symbol (13-2 to 13-5) ON/OFF, so that symbol (13-1) plays the role of the time seal of time orientation information output, it can be certain Obtain the information changed along time orientation.In addition, in order to reduce the base area of seal, can also shorten symbol (13-1) with The distance of other symbols.This is because in the present embodiment, symbol (13-1) and other symbols cannot be ON simultaneously, because without Touch panel (31) undetectable situation due to symbol is in nearby occurs.Certainly, (13-2 to 13-6) is configured at symbol Touch panel (31) position that can be detected, this is self-evident.
In embodiment, by output information symbol 8 times, so as to export the seal code of 32bit.In addition, if Last moment (t18) is then identified that precision significantly improves as even-odd check (4bit), but information content is reduced to 28bit (2.7 hundred million code).
After interpretation pattern code, exist by means of code identification device (3) and want to make seal portion (16) in touch panel (31) situation of operation is moved and implemented on.At this point, after the completion of the output of pattern code, with symbol (13-2 to 13-5, or symbol Numbers (certain 3 of 13-2 to 13-5)) are " output (ON) ", thus, sliding/rotary stamp portion (16) anyway, code identification The identification part (33) of device (3) can identify seal portion (16) position (shape etc. of center or seal portion (16)) and The rotation angle in seal portion (16).Thus, it is possible to carry out the operation based on the image shown in touch panel (31).
Wherein, symbol (13-1) is close to symbol (13-2 to 13-5), even due to the symbol of code generating device (1) Configuration space limits and the situation that can not identify simultaneously, symbol (13-1) and symbol (13-2 to 13-5) is not also ON simultaneously, from And it can identify both sides.In addition, make symbol (after at least one ON of 13-2 to 13-5), even if respective symbol is become OFF, Code output section (13) is also there are spare capacity, when contemporary code recognition device (3) continues identification under ON state, in symbol After (13-1) becomes ON, if the symbol for identifying code identification device (3) becomes in vain, becoming at symbol (13-1) After OFF, code identification device (3) can certainly identify the symbol (13-2 to 13-5) of ON.Symbol (13-1) can also be with Reduce static capacity, so as not to which there are spare capacities.Such as to reduce static capacity, then have and electrically reducing or reducing conductive Bulk area shortens a variety of methods such as output time.
Figure 17 (B) and (D) be show touch panel (31) be able to detect in the case where multiple spot without symbol code interpretation The figure of the specific example of symbol pattern.
Figure 17 (B) and (D) show by centered on symbol (13-1) configuration, by configuration symbols (13-2 to 13- at equal intervals 6) specific example of symbol pattern.
Figure 17 (B) shows basic pattern.In addition, for each symbol (13- for including in the basic pattern of Figure 17 (B) 1 to 13-6), given moment at the time of opposite in (t1 and t18) (given time timing), definition " output (ON) " or “OFF”。
In the example of Figure 17 (B), since touch panel (31) is able to detect multiple points, because regardless of the moment (t1 and T25 which timing), " output (ON) " admissible mark (any combination of 13-1 any number into 13-6).
Wherein, in Figure 17 (D), in each timing of moment (t1 and t18), the basic pattern for depicting Figure 17 (B) The unit cell pattern that the symbol of only " output (ON) " is painted.Know the unit cell pattern of Figure 17 (D) due to touch panel (31) energy Symbol detection is enough carried out, thus multiple symbols become " output (ON) ".In addition, at least one of symbol (13-1) and other symbols For ON, because in symbol is in nearby undetectable situation, touch panel (31) cannot make symbol (13-1) and other accord with Number simultaneously be ON.
This unit cell pattern (in the example of Figure 17 (D), preparing 23 types) for preparing multiple types, in time side To each position (each timing at moment (t1 and t18)), various unit cell patterns respectively configure 1, to define generating object pattern Code.
For the basic composition of Figure 30 as the symbol pattern of Figure 17 (A) (C), only following point is different.
If making symbol, (13-3 to 13-6) is ON, can be matched with the direction of distinguished symbol pattern, other symbols Setting can also estimate, identify.It moreover, can also (13-1 makes 3 symbol ON, into 13-6) to become in symbol Non- axis rotational symmetry.In addition, at least one of symbol (13-1) and other symbols is ON, can not be examined because symbol is in nearby In the case where survey, touch panel (31) should make symbol (3 symbol ON of 13-2 to 13-6), to become the rotation pair of non-axis.
Therefore, allow to identify direction using the symbol pattern of acquirement, can identify position and the rotation of electric conductor Turn.
Method by confirming direction, making symbol, (after 13-3 to 13-6) is ON, only making symbol (13-1) is ON. For the effect of the symbol (13-1), as the symbol for representing seal portion (16), (center of 13-2 to 13-4) is neighbouring Fiducial mark is easy to the symbol (13-2 to the central location of 13-6), even if seal portion (16) are moved in Direct Recognition seal portion (16) It is dynamic, it can also accurately identify the position of seal portion (16).
In the output at moment (t1) to moment (t18), by symbol, (ON/OFF of 13-2 to 13-6) combines output Information, during this period, symbol (13-1) are OFF.Then, symbol (13-1) is only become into ON, repeatedly symbol (13-1) and symbol (13-2 to 13-6) ON/OFF, so that symbol (13-1) plays the role of the time seal of time orientation information output, it can be certain Obtain the information changed along time orientation.In addition, in order to reduce the base area of seal, can also shorten symbol (13-1) with The distance of other symbols.This is because in the present embodiment, symbol (13-1) and other symbols cannot be ON simultaneously, because without Touch panel (31) undetectable situation due to symbol is in nearby occurs.Certainly, (13-2 to 13-6) is configured at symbol Touch panel (31) position that can be detected, this is self-evident.
In embodiment, by output information symbol 8 times, so as to export the seal code of 40bit.In addition, if With last moment (t18) for even-odd check (5bit), then identify that precision significantly improves, but information content is reduced to 35bit (343.6 hundred million code).
After interpretation pattern code, exist by means of code identification device (3) and want to make seal portion (16) in touch panel (31) situation of operation is moved and implemented on.At this point, after the completion of the output of pattern code, with symbol (13-2,13-4,13-5, Or symbol (certain 3 of 13-2 to 13-5)) are " output (ON) ", thus, sliding/rotary stamp portion (16) anyway, code The identification part (33) of identification device (3) can identify the position (shape of center or seal portion (16) of seal portion (16) Deng) and seal portion (16) rotation angle.Thus, it is possible to carry out the operation based on the image shown in touch panel (31).
Wherein, symbol (13-1) is close to symbol (13-2 to 13-6), even if since the symbol of code generating device (1) is matched It sets interval limitation and can not identify simultaneously, symbol (13-1) and symbol (13-2 to 13-6) can not be ON simultaneously, so as to Identify both sides.In addition, making symbol, (after at least 1 of 13-2 to 13-6) is ON, even if respective symbol is become OFF, code is defeated Portion (13) when contemporary code recognition device (3) continues identification under ON state, become also there are spare capacity at symbol (13-1) out After ON, if the symbol for identifying code identification device (3) becomes in vain, after symbol (13-1) becomes OFF, Code identification device (3) can certainly identify the symbol (13-2 to 13-6) of ON.Symbol (13-1) also can reduce electrostatic Capacity, so as not to which there are spare capacities.Such as to reduce static capacity, then have electrically reduce or reduce conductive bulk area, Or shorten a variety of methods such as output time.
Although figure 17 above is illustrated with the symbol pattern different from Fig. 6, identical effect can be obtained, is schemed 6, Figure 17 also can use the combination for selectively using each feature, output symbol pattern.
In addition, which kind of shape loading surface is.
Figure 18 is the figure of the position identification for input medium symbol pattern and display.
Figure 18 (A) shows code identification device (3).In addition, showing code generating device (1) in Figure 18 (B) And code identification device (3).Code generating device (1) is loaded on into code identification device (3), when selection small icon or text When the object images such as word, figure, code generating device (1) is difficult to indicate due to needing set base area.
Therefore, as shown in Figure 18 (C), in code generating device (1), by means of Warning Mark or protrusion, it is installed on generation The recess of code generating device (1) bottom surface, optics instruction (such as laser designator etc.), accurately indicate the instruction of object images Region.The instruction point P0 (X0, Y0) of code generating device (1) end in code identification device (3) location information is illustrated below Accounting method.
If the centre coordinate value of conductive electric conductor is set as P1 (X1, Y1), P3 (X3, Y3), P4 (X4, Y4), The rotation angle θ for the seal being then positive in a clockwise direction can be found out by θ=- ARK tan ((Y3-Y4)/(X3-X4)).Such as The distance of the centre coordinate value P1 (X1, Y1) of electric conductor (13-1) to instruction point P0 (X0, Y0) is known as L by fruit, then
X0=X1+Lsin θ
Instruction point P0 (X0, Y0) can be found out by Y0=Y1+Lcos θ.In addition, if being determined with established methodology It indicates point, then may be 2 thereafter through the electric conductor for identifying mobile coordinate value is continuously tracked.So determine It indicates point (8 (D) and (E) referring to Fig.1).
Referring to Figure 19~Figure 24, illustrate each example of the Verification System based on code generating device (1).
Then, referring to Figure 25~Figure 29, illustrate each example of the information platform system based on code generating device (1).
In such systems, the set application program of operation in code identification device (3).Set application program can The service or processing of the various kinds colors of the code occurred from code generating device (1) to be utilized together.That is, Figure 19~ A kind of system also may be implemented in the embodiment of Figure 24, that is, only by means of a set application program, (seal code process is answered With program), seal code (the pattern generation of the multiplicity of code identification device (3) interpretation code generating device (1) output Code), make the application program launching being arranged in code identification device (3) or be arranged in runtime server or cloud disk with seal generation The corresponding application program of code.
Figure 19 is the figure for showing the embodiment that personal authentication's service of the invention is utilized.Wherein, hereinafter referred to as of the invention Situation, it is meant that the various inventions recorded in specification.
In payment for goods payment and internet signing, obtain I and family members' personal information when etc., need to prompt identity card Required information is recorded in dedicated printed matter and signed by bright book in person.
But in Figure 19 (A), by the way that code generating device (1) is used as my digital stamp, so as to pole It is big to improve convenience and safety.In addition, can also be sent out in code in order to which the user for proving code generating device (1) is me Finger print identifying sensor is installed in generating apparatus (1).Alternatively, it is also possible to replace finger print identifying sensor, installation vena identification sensing Device, retina certification sensor, iris authentication sensor etc..
In Figure 19 (B), when the occasion in multiplicity implements self acknowledging or when approval/signing, the generation possessed using itself Code generating device (1) touches the code identification device (3) for starting set application program, and output specifically prints me Chapter code implements self acknowledging.At this point, safety can be improved by means of my Password Input or finger print identifying.In addition, Finger print identifying is that my finger print information is registered in code generating device (1) by established methodology, is touched with the finger of registration After touching the finger print identifying sensor of code generating device (1), or touch code identification device (3) while touching, thus defeated Out corresponding seal code and implement.If not me, then the seal code that expression is not for I can be both exported, it can also So that not exporting seal code without exception.The register method of finger print information can both touch the circle for being formed with display register step The medium of point code or the code identification device (3) for showing dot code, to utilize code generating device (1) interpretation dot Code can also be registered to be registered by the operation button that code generating device (1) is equipped with.Furthermore it is also possible to The finger print information for registering multiple users such as family members, is able to use multiple users.It can also be in code generating device (1) Middle setting time clock feature, when who is using record (log).Other information processing unit can be obtained by USB or wireless These information.Alternatively, it is also possible to touch code identification device (3), seal code corresponding with log is exported.As another kind Method, with finger touching code generating device (1) finger print identifying sensor after, or touching while obtain finger print information, It touches code identification device (3), so that seal code corresponding with the finger print information obtained can also be exported.According to seal generation Code and export finger print information can also with code identification device (3) or by wirelessly or non-wirelessly mode be connected to code identification The finger print information registered in the memory media (also including server etc.) of device (3) is compareed.
In Figure 19 (C), in order to exclude the code generating device (1) forged or more than the code generating device of validity period (1), the dot code that the seal code exported to code generating device (1) is encrypted is shown in code identification dress The display device of (3) is set, code generating device (1) carries out interpretation, enciphered signet code corresponding with the dot code is exported, Re-start the approval of height.Time clock feature is arranged in code generating device (1), exports the seal code based on the time, code Identification device (3) also implements the certification of the seal code based on the time of affixing one's seal, and safety can be improved.
In Figure 19 (B) and (C), although the print that code identification device (3) elder generation's interpretation code generating device (1) exports Chapter code, but as shown in Figure 19 (D) and (E), it is also possible to code identification device (3) and first shows that dot code, code fill (1) interpretation dot code is set, output password authenticates seal code, and code identification device (3) implements certification.It can also be with Figure 19 (C) equally, safety is improved using based on the certification of the seal code for time of affixing one's seal.In addition, if each code generating device (1), cipher authentication seal code corresponding with dot code is exported in unique method, then safety further increases.
Figure 20 is to show the figure that the embodiment that ticket purchase of the invention/lottery ticket obtains service is utilized.
In Figure 20 (A), using set application program booking or lottery ticket is obtained.Distribute corresponding seal code.
In Figure 20 (B), start set application program, display approval picture in admission or when using lottery ticket.
In Figure 20 (C), in admission or when using lottery ticket, responsible person touches code using code generating device (1) and knows Other device (3).Code generating device (1) is predisposed to output seal code corresponding with corresponding ticket or lottery ticket.
In Figure 20 (D), code identification device (3) interpretation code generating device (1) output seal code, ratify into Field uses lottery ticket.Again when admission, the picture is shown.
Figure 21 is to show that the figure that ticket purchase/lottery ticket of the invention is serviced (display dot) is utilized.
In Figure 21 (A), using set application program booking or lottery ticket is obtained.Distribute corresponding dot code.
In Figure 21 (B), in admission or when using lottery ticket, start set application program, in approval picture display with Corresponding ticket or the corresponding dot code of lottery ticket.
In Figure 21 (C), in admission or when using lottery ticket, responsible person touches code using code generating device (1) and knows Other device (3), interpretation dot code.Ticket has been pre-registered in code generating device (1) or lottery ticket corresponds to dot code, into Row certification.Alternatively, it is also possible to carry radio function in code generating device (1), ratify dot code in server (4).
In Figure 21 (D), after code generating device (1) interpretation dot code, corresponding seal code is exported, code is known Other device (3) carries out interpretation, ratifies admission or uses lottery ticket.When wireless carry, can also be sent every time from server (4) Approval seal code.
Figure 22 is to show that ticket of the invention/lottery ticket the output for printing service figure is utilized.
In Figure 22 (A), using set application program booking or lottery ticket is obtained.Distribute corresponding dot code.
In Figure 22 (B), start set application program, display is corresponding with corresponding ticket or lottery ticket in printout picture Dot code.
In Figure 22 (C), code identification device (3) are touched using the code generating device (1) for carrying radio function.Generation Code generating device (1) interpretation dot code, server (4) are authenticated, in turn, at wireless connection (such as BT or WIFI etc.) Printer in export ticket or lottery ticket.Alternatively, it is also possible to pre-register ticket or the corresponding circle of lottery ticket in code generating device (1) Point code, and authenticated.
In Figure 22 (D), after code generating device (1) interpretation dot code, corresponding seal code is exported, code is known Other device (3) carries out interpretation, can not print again after the completion of printing.
Figure 23 is to show to attract customers the figure of service using lottery ticket/integral of the invention.
In Figure 23 (A), user obtains the multiplicity print such as the leaflet for providing lottery ticket or integral service or DM, newspaper, magazine Brush product.
In Figure 23 (B), user, which holds lottery ticket or provides the printed matter integrated, comes information desk.Lottery ticket or integral provide Side is needing the place of attracting customers that information desk is arranged, and raises visitor.
In Figure 23 (C), start set application program, touches the lottery ticket held or offer using code generating device (1) After the dot printed matter of integral, the mark region of affixing one's seal of code identification device (3) is touched.In code generating device (1) in advance Seal code corresponding with dot code is set.If code generating device (1), can be successively equipped with radio function The information such as seal code are updated, or send information to server (4).Any chapter that can impress per capita in user and supplier.Such as Fruit makes set application program launching, touches printed matter, touches code identification device (3), then shows prize corresponding with printed matter Certificate or integral picture.
In Figure 23 (D), seal code corresponding with the dot code of code generating device (1) interpretation is exported, code is known Other device (3) carries out interpretation, obtains corresponding lottery ticket or integral.Can also after code identification device (3) interpretation seal code, In the display device of code identification device (3), display defines the dot code of set information, and code generating device (1) is sentenced Read dot code, the information such as information or personal information that code identification device (3) interpretation has been affixed one's seal.Corresponding information can also make It is sent with wireless etc..If touching region of affixing one's seal using code generating device (1), in code identification device (3), It shows the image of accumulating card corresponding with printed matter or seal match (Stamp Rally), assigns integral or seal.In turn, may be used Dot code corresponding with integral, the acquisition information of seal or personal information to be shown in the picture of code identification device (3) Face carries out interpretation using code generating device (1).Wireless etc. sent also can be used in corresponding information.
Figure 24 is to show the figure that electronic accumulation card service of the invention is utilized.
In the past, it as shown in Figure 24 (A), when paying expense in shop, is covered on paper accumulating card and integrates seal, or Integral is accumulated in plastics accumulating card.But for user, accumulating card increases, and management is laborious, as plastic clip, it is not known that Which kind of degree had accumulated, valid till when.
Therefore, it as shown in Figure 24 (B)~(D), provides and electronic accumulation card service of the invention is utilized.Such as Figure 24 (B) institute Show, if starting set application program, touches code identification device (3) using code generating device (1) in shop, then show The accumulating card in corresponding shop.
In Figure 24 (C), salesman is touched using code generating device (1) and is passed through according to the amount of money or lottery ticket used in sales counter The number or icon of the paper controller of dot printing, by fraction or date blotter in code generating device (1).In addition, Paper controller can also not be used, realizes imparting/accounting integral.
The fraction or date recorded in Figure 24 (C), in code generating device (1) is transformed to seal code, and touch makes The code identification device (3) of user, so that the integral in corresponding shop adds in code identification device (3).In addition, pressing generation Number needed for code generating device (1) operation button, or tap or rotate code generating device (1), integral can also be added. User can use set application program, know the integral in each shop and use at any time.If starting set application program, Region of affixing one's seal is touched using code generating device (1), then shows the accumulating card in corresponding shop.
As shown in Figure 24 (D), using integral when, by the fraction used in sales counter carry out dot printing number or Icon touches code identification device (3) using code generating device (1), calculates fraction.Alternatively, it is also possible to press code hair Number needed for generating apparatus (1) operation button, or tap or rotate code generating device (1), carry out integral accounting.Even if behaviour Make mistake, integral amendment is carried out by similar operation.The given service to offer integral or lottery ticket is joined in each shop, So as to which the advertising information of the multiplicity such as activity to be sent to code identification device (3), promote the utilization to shop.
When registering the accumulating card in corresponding shop, after touching code identification device (3) using code generating device (1), Show " agreeing to the information push from shop? " in display device Deng user is ratified itself with established methodology.Make For established methodology, show that dot code reaches the understanding of approval using the corresponding dot code of code generating device (1) interpretation. ID or personal information in corresponding dot code comprising code identification device (3) etc. can also be sent by the modes such as wireless Corresponding information.
It touches code generating device (1), in the accumulating card picture of display, if utilizing respective code generating device (1) Implement the operation for adding/calculating, then can carry out adding/calculating.It can not then be grasped with the code generating device (1) in other shops Make.
Figure 25 is to show the figure that the information service of the invention based on print media is utilized.
In Figure 25 (A), newspaper, proceedings, magazine, goods catalogue, teaching material, picture album, the travel folder of printed dot code Etc. various printed matter suppliers etc., code generating device (1) is provided as platform.It can also be with printed matter at hollow pin It sells.In Figure 25 (B), user makes code generating device (1) to touch dot printed matter, interpretation dot code.Then, if It touches code identification device (3), then exports seal code corresponding with dot code, code identification device (3) interpretation seal generation Code.It is dedicated if it is member, then before touching dot Printing Department, the member card for having dot is touched, user can also step on Record.The input of password can both be inputted and code generating device (1) direction Xiang Jiding is rotated predetermined number of times, can also be with Code identification device (3) are touched with finger and are inputted.G seal itself can also issue ID.If utilizing code generating device (1) the dot printed matter for touching multiplicity, touches code identification device (3), then can start view content or game.
In Figure 25 (C), if code identification device (3) interpretation seal code, holds in code identification device (3) Capable content corresponding with seal code (corresponding with dot code) is read or starting/operation instruction of program.If code identifies It is unregistered in memory in device (3) to have seal code (corresponding with dot code), then with seal code (with dot code It is corresponding) corresponding processing or content download from server (4) or transmit as a stream to code identification device (3).In addition, according to interior Hold, and then code generating device (1) can also be made to slide on code identification device (3) picture, is determined down using operation button A movement.It can also carry out game, purchase article, tourism path guide etc..Code identification device (3) can be sent out with cognizance code The rotation angle of generating apparatus (1) is shown in reading code identification device (3) thus, it is possible to rotate code generating device (1) The rolling in MAP or the set direction in picture/photo or 360 degree of panoramas.If being selected or being revolved using code generating device (1) Turn or mobile code identification device (3) in text or icon, figure for showing, then show in next perhaps operation instruction, into And it can use code generating device (1) operation.
Figure 26 is to show the figure that the communication sales service of the invention based on print media is utilized.
In Figure 26 (A), the communication merchandising catalogue of printed dot code is provided to member and has the member of dot Card, code generating device (1).The member card for having dot is touched, user logs in.The input of password can both pass through by Code generating device (1) direction Xiang Jiding rotates predetermined number of times and inputs, and can also touch code identification device (3) with finger And it inputs.Code generating device (1) itself can also issue ID.
In Figure 26 (B), user touches commodity photo or " illustrating icon ", " shopping cart of communication merchandising catalogue Icon ", " quantity icon ", interpretation dot code.Then, if touching code identification device (3), output and dot code Corresponding seal code, code identification device (3) interpretation seal code.
In Figure 26 (C), if touching goods catalogue using code generating device (1), touch code identification device (3), The then explanation of display of commodity.In turn, it if pressed the operation button, or taps or rotates code generating device (1), then show Lower single-image.If code identification device (3) interpretation seal code, by code identification device (3), display and seal generation The explanation of the corresponding commodity of code (corresponding with dot code) or lower single content.If in the memory in code identification device (3) It is unregistered to have seal code (corresponding with dot code), then and seal code (corresponding with dot code) it is corresponding processing or it is interior Hold and downloads or transmitted as a stream to code identification device (3) from server (4).If lower single content of code identification device (3) does not have It is problematic, then " the lower list icon " of the display device of code identification device (3) is touched using code generating device (1), presses behaviour Make button, orders the goods.When wanting to cancel, " terminating icon " is touched, is pressed the operation button, interrupts and orders.Code is occurred Device (1) is moved to " placing an order ", some in " termination ", presses the operation button and is selected.Operation button can not also be pressed, But it is selected with other methods such as percussions.
Figure 27 is to show the figure that entertainment service of the invention is utilized.
In Figure 27 (A), by the game card for having printed dot code or transactional cards, plate game as gaming platform, with Set application program expansion.Dot prints the entire surface either card, plate, can also be only a part of.
In Figure 27 (B), user starts set application program, touches card or plate using code generating device (1), Interpretation dot code (game recognition code value).Then, code generating device (1) is made to touch code identification device (3), output Seal code corresponding with dot code, if code identification device (3) interpretation seal code, starts corresponding game.Only with By means of touching card, touching code identification device (3), corresponding game can be started.
In Figure 27 (C), the code generating device (1) printed on the cartoon of collection, movement, stage property card, interpretation circle are utilized Point code touches code identification device (3), exports seal code corresponding with dot code, carries out game.In plate game In, it is also printed with XY coordinate value, it, can be with the coordinate value of the interpretation position if code generating device (1) is loaded on plate With the direction of code generating device (1).The information is transformed into corresponding seal code, then, utilizes code generating device (1) code identification device (3) are touched, so as to input information to code identification device (3).Code identification device (3) can be with The rotation angle of cognizance code generating device (1), thus, it is possible to code generating device (1) is rotated, code identification device of reading (3) rolling or 360 degree panoramas of the game picture shown in set direction.In addition, can choose and lead using push-botton operation The icon shown in bullet transmitting or code identification device (3).In turn, dot code, benefit are shown in code identification device (3) Interpretation is carried out with code generating device (1), so as to export new seal code, freely enjoys more advanced game.Utilize code The text or icon, figure shown in generating device (1) selection or rotation or mobile code identification device (3), carries out game. Using the code of XY coordinate value or given area that code generating device (1) interpretation is formed on plate, code identification dress is touched It sets (3), carries out game.
Figure 28 is to show the figure that information transmission service of the invention is utilized.
In Figure 28 (A), the set application program of starting in code identification device (3-1) shoots photo or video, or Show various content.
In Figure 28 (B), if selecting the message transmission mode of set application program in code identification device (3-1), It then shows and specific dot code is carried out to the content that part or all of region in display device is shown.Meanwhile with dot The content uploading that the corresponding seal code of code is connected is to cloud disk or server (4).It can also upload in advance.It will be with seal The corresponding content uploading of code is to cloud disk.
In Figure 28 (C), in the code identification device (3-2) for being connected to information, start set application program, if choosing Information reception mode is selected, then shows the mark of affixing one's seal of code identification device (3-2).In code generating device (1), interpretation generation The dot code of code recognition device (3-1) display, is transformed into corresponding seal code.Then, code generating device (1) is utilized The mark region of affixing one's seal (which kind of figure) shown in code identification device (3-2) is touched, seal code is exported, code is known Other device (3-2) interpretation seal code.
In Figure 28 (D), cloud disk or server can be sent by the seal code of code identification device (3-2) interpretation (4), content corresponding with registered seal code is downloaded or transmitted as a stream, records/reads in code identification device (3-2) It lookes at.Its great advantage is not transmit address to other side, can easily transferring content.The content of transmission may be set to be not It can transmit again.Content corresponding with seal code is downloaded from cloud disk, or implements stream transmission.
Figure 29 is to show that the figure that dot code of the invention forms medium information link is utilized.
In Figure 29 (A), using code identification device (3-1), make code generating device (1) and set application program Starting shoots photo or video, or shows that various content (also includes the live video or voice of code identification device (3) shooting Deng).Content can also be shown after interpretation content connection seal code.
In Figure 29 (B), the Info Link mode of set application program is set, touches code generating device (1) and is formed There are the seal or various media of dot code, interpretation dot code is transformed into corresponding seal code.Then, it is sent out using code Generating apparatus (1) touches the mark region of affixing one's seal (no matter which kind of figure) shown in the code identification device (3-1), output Seal code, code identification device (3-1) interpretation seal code.Alternatively, it is also possible to utilize code generating device (1) interpretation circle Point code, after exporting seal code, setting information linking scheme.The setting of Info Link mode can both be identified in code and be filled The side (3-1) setting is set, also can use code generating device (1), the dot code of instruction specific information linking scheme is read, It is executed by the push-botton operation of code generating device (1) ontology.In turn, the dot generation formed on seal or various media In code, also the setting comprising Info Link mode is indicated, using the corresponding dot code of code generating device (1) interpretation, touches generation Code recognition device (3-1) and interpretation seal code, thus become Info Link mode, corresponding seal code is connected with content It connects.The content connection that will be shown in same Figure 29 of seal code (A) corresponding with dot code, corresponding contents upload to cloud disk or Server (4).Content can also upload in advance.Will content uploading corresponding with seal code to cloud disk.Seal can also be registered Code-content name worksheet.
In Figure 29 (C), then, connected using the content that code generating device (1) touch is formed with Figure 29 (B) The seal of dot code or various medium, interpretation dot code are transformed into corresponding seal code, if touching code identification Device (3-1), then can read/execute corresponding contents.Then, it even if restarting set application program, can also read in the same manner It lookes at/executes.In turn, it can also read/execute even if in code identification device (3-2).Touch is formed with what content was connected The medium of dot code touches code identification device (3-2), can also export seal code.
In Figure 29 (D), alternatively, start set application program, shows the print being connect with display content The corresponding first dot code of chapter code touches Jie for being formed with the second dot code using code generating device (1) interpretation Matter, the second dot code of connection and seal code, then touch respective media, touch code identification device (3-2), output print Chapter code, so as to read/execute content.Content corresponding with seal code is downloaded or transmitted as a stream from cloud disk.
<explanation of dot pattern>
Below with figure~30~35, an example of the dot pattern mentioned is illustrated.
<recognition methods of the information dot of Figure 30>
Shown in the recognition methods of information dot such as Figure 30 (A)~(E).
In addition, the recognition methods of information dot is not limited to Figure 30 (A)~(E) example.
That is, as shown in Figure 30 (A), in addition to by information dot in obliquely the configuring up and down of virtual point other than, also wrap Include not the situation of configuration information dot, configure or the not situation of configuration information dot in virtual point, be capable of increasing information content.Figure 30 (B) are the configuration information dots in 2 rows × 2 column totally 4 virtual regions, but if near border configuration information dot, A possibility that then misidentifying, thus Figure 30 (C) is the embodiment that configuration separates the adjacent virtual region of predetermined distance. Multiple information dots or the not situation of configuration information dot are configured in addition, being also included in 4 virtual regions, letter can be increased Breath amount.
Figure 30 (D) is the configuration information dot in 3 rows × 3 column totally 9 virtual regions.In addition, being also included within 9 void Multiple information dots or the not situation of configuration information dot are configured in quasi- region, can increase information content.
Figure 30 (E) is all to use at the midpoint of square and diagonal line straight line or dummy line to connect, in totally 8 virtual areas Configuration information dot in domain.Multiple information dots or not configuration information dot are configured in addition, being also included in 8 virtual regions Situation, information content can be increased.
Figure 30 (B)~(E) although virtual region be rectangle or triangle, also It is not necessary to as Figure 30 (C) void Quasi- region mutually connects, which kind of shape such as round or other polygons.In turn, by increasing the quantity of the virtual region, Information content can be increased.In addition, the information dot in virtual region configures, with the virtual point shown in Figure 30 (A) to set side The information dot configuration method configured to both set a distances that is staggered is identical.This is because in terms of making printed data, nothing Which by virtual region be configured at, it is required to determine allocation position using the coordinate data for representing a certain position, due to from void Quasi- point is in staggered configuration, thus not entirely different with accounting coordinate data.In addition, no matter which kind of is configured in interpretation dot Method, in the image of shooting dot pattern, by there are centered on multiple allocation positions of information dot configuration possibility, if The dot identification decision region of round or rectangle etc. is set, determines whether dot is in dot identification decision region and identifies circle Point, it can be said that being identical information dot interpretation method.
<code of the information dot of Figure 31 distributes>
The code distribution of information dot is as shown in Figure 31 (A)~(C).
That is, as shown in Figure 31 (A), for example, it can be fully allocated to " code value " of business code etc., it can also be such as it Scheme shown in (B), as 1 code format, distributes to 2 data areas of " X-coordinate value " and " Y-coordinate value ", or such as its figure (C) shown in,
3 data areas of " code value ", " X-coordinate value ", " Y-coordinate value " can also be distributed to.It is distributed to rectangular area The situation of coordinate value, in order to cut down data volume, the data area of " X-coordinate value ", " Y-coordinate value " be can also be different.In turn, though It is so not shown, but in order to define the height in position coordinates, it can also further include " Z coordinate value ".In addition, distribution " X-coordinate Value ", the situation of " Y-coordinate value ", for location information, coordinate value along X, Y coordinates+direction increases both quantitative, thus lead to institute There is dot pattern not identical.In addition, corresponding to distribution code type is increased, dot identification is sentenced as shown in Figure 15 (A)~(C) Determine region reduction, it is difficult to the allocation position of correct identification information dot.
<first case (" GRID0 "), Figure 32>
The first case of dot pattern, the applicant are temporarily known as " GRID0 ".
" GRID0 " is characterized in that crucial dot is utilized, so that at least one in the range of identification dot pattern or direction Person.
" GRID0 " as shown in figure 32, has following constitute.
(1) information dot
Information dot is used for recall info.
In addition, the recognition methods of information dot is carried out as shown in Figure 30 (A)~(E), in addition, the code of information dot point With by progress shown in Figure 31 (A)~(C).
In addition, further include not the situation of configuration information dot, in virtual point configuration information dot or the situation not configured, Information content can be increased.
(2) benchmark dot
Benchmark dot is configured at pre-set multiple positions.
Benchmark dot is used to carry out the position of aftermentioned virtual point or virtual region specific.
(3) crucial dot
Crucial dot is in staggered configuration with benchmark dot, or is configured at from the position that benchmark dot allocation position is staggered slightly. That is, for the situation that benchmark dot configures with being staggered, since benchmark dot is staggered, thus matching in original benchmark dot Seated position does not have benchmark dot.It is therefore preferable that crucial dot is made also to undertake the effect of original benchmark dot, it can be from other The configuration of benchmark dot estimates the position of original benchmark dot.It is just configured at and is staggered slightly from benchmark dot allocation position The situation alum of position, both benchmark dot and crucial dot are configured at nearby.
Crucial dot be to benchmark dot and relative to virtual point information dot carry out it is specific, or to benchmark dot with The direction as benchmark of the information dot configured in virtual region carries out specific.By being determined to become the direction of the benchmark, energy Information and interpretation are enough provided relative to the direction of virtual point by information dot.It in turn, can also be to round using multiple information Point is specific come the range progress for defining the dot pattern of 1 data.It, can also be with even if dot pattern is enumerated up and down as a result, The data of interpretation dot pattern range are decoded.
(4) virtual point or virtual region
Virtual point or virtual region are specific by means of the configuration of benchmark dot.In Figure 47, just with away from virtual point away from From in direction at least for situation of certain one to define information, for direction, with the dot pattern of aforementioned crucial dot On the basis of direction, information is defined.For distance, on the basis of the distance between set benchmark dot.In addition, just matching For setting virtual region and defining the situation of information, by the center for being used to assign multiple virtual regions of 1 information or represent a little As virtual point, as described above, using the configuration of benchmark dot, it is specific to the progress of virtual point position, it in turn, can be with away from void Intend distance and the direction of point to define virtual region.Alternatively, can also be from the configuration of benchmark dot, directly to all virtual areas The allocation position in domain carries out specific.In addition, though virtual region adjacent to each other also can connect, but at this point, if on boundary Neighbouring configuration information dot, then have a possibility that transmission misidentifies, thus is preferably provided with predetermined distance configuration virtual region.
Figure 32 shows the general example of the pattern of adding some points of " GRID0 ", and figure (A), which is shown, is configured to benchmark dot greatly The example of plus sige shape is caused, figure (B) shows the example for increasing the configuration number of information dot, and figure (C) is shown benchmark Dot is configured to the example of hexagon, (D) show make to add some points benchmark be configured to hexagon the adjacent configuration of pattern it is multiple and So that a part of general connection example that the benchmark is added some points, (E), which shows to add some points benchmark, is configured to the example of L-shaped, (F) Show make to add some points benchmark be configured to the adjacent configuration of substantially dimetric dot pattern it is multiple and the benchmark is added some points one The general connection example in part.
In addition, the general example of dot pattern is not limited to shown in Figure 32 (A)~(F) substantially plus sige shape or substantially six sides Shape.
In addition, in Figure 45 (A)~(F) dot pattern, on the crucial dot basis beyond benchmark dot allocation position On, it can also be in its allocation position configuration baseline dot
<second case (" GRID5 ")>
The second case of dot pattern, the applicant are temporarily known as " GRID5 ".
The crucial dot of " GRID5 " substitution " GRID0 ", so that identifying dot by means of " configuration method of benchmark dot " The range of pattern and direction.In " configuration method of benchmark dot ", in order to identify the direction of dot pattern, benchmark dot Configuration should be non-axis symmetry, even if by certain point centered on and rotated (except 360 °) slightly, also not with the configuration phase before rotation Together.In turn, though up and down and/or multiple dot patterns are enumerated in left and right repeatedly and in the case where continuous or connection, it is also desirable to know The range of other dot pattern and direction.
In addition, using pattern identification, identifying the direction of dot pattern in " GRID5 ".That is, will be by means of benchmark dot And the shape memory of the dot pattern formed is in memory storage.Moreover, in the image and memory storage of the dot pattern of interpretation The shape of memory is compareed, to know the direction of dot chart case.
In addition, as " GRID0 ", even if crucial dot can also be identified as benchmark dot comprising crucial dot, borrowed Help " configuration method of benchmark dot ", as the dot pattern of " GRID5 " without crucial dot, identifies its range or direction.
Figure 33 is for the figure that the situation of arbitrary disposition benchmark dot or virtual point is illustrated in GRID5.
In Figure 33 (A), the pattern of benchmark dot is nonaxisymmetrical distinct configuration, can identify the configuration of virtual point Pattern.But, in the configuration pattern of virtual point, when benchmark dot configuration pattern by means of pattern identification (with virtual point The control of configuration pattern) and when identifying, the configuration pattern of benchmark dot may not be nonaxisymmetrical distinct configuration pattern.
In Figure 33 (B), virtual dot pattern is non-axisymmetric distinct configuration, can identify the configuration diagram of benchmark dot Case.But, in the configuration pattern of benchmark dot, when virtual point configuration pattern by means of pattern identification (with benchmark dot The control of configuration pattern) and when identifying, the configuration pattern of virtual point may not be nonaxisymmetrical distinct configuration pattern.
In Figure 33 (C), the pattern of benchmark dot and the pattern associated configuration of virtual point.
In Figure 33 (D), using virtual point as starting point, configuration information dot.In the configuration pattern of virtual point, work as base The configuration pattern of director circle point is by means of pattern identification and when identifying, configuration pattern the matching by identification information dot of virtual point Placing graphic pattern, so as to identify, is compareed (pattern by the pattern with virtual point so virtual point is present in nearby region Identification), so as to identify the configuration pattern of virtual point.
<interpretation of dot pattern>
Above " GRID0 ", " GRID5 " dot pattern identical code value is defined in set region, when upper and lower left When the right side is arranged side-by-side repeatedly, as shown in figure 34, if arbitrary in the range interpretation with corresponding dot pattern range same size Region, then the information dot for constituting original dot pattern all meet (1)~(16) (" 1~16 " is recorded as in figure).Or it is complete Portion meets (1)~(9) ("~circle 1~circle 9 " is recorded as in figure), and the code value of definition all can be with interpretation.As described above, letter Breath dot configuration can use dot pattern direction and range and determine, the configuration for the information dot being made of code value Rule can also be specific.In turn, as shown in figure 35, for the range of the dot pattern in arbitrary region progress interpretation, when super Cross respective range and when some information dot of interpretation or so, the information dot positioned at the opposite side end of corresponding information dot, definition Numerical value it is identical, or be configured at relative virtual point and be staggered in same direction the position of same distance.Connect this 2 information circles The line segment of point, which becomes horizontal line, can accurately identify the horizontal line by virtual point by moving in parallel the horizontal line.Such as For fruit there are corresponding benchmark dot, amount of parallel movement then becomes benchmark dot on a horizontal to the distance of position.Into And if also identifying vertical line for up and down direction with identical step, find out the position of the intersection point of horizontal line and vertical line It sets, so as to accurately find out virtual point.According to this method, oblique optical interpretation device shoots dot pattern, even if circle The configuration of point substantially deforms, and can also accurately find out virtual point, the numerical value that can be represented with exact identity information dot.
The code generating device and code identification device of present invention mentioned above application can be used for the neck of various kinds colors Domain or purposes.Although above explanation is related to the code generating device and code identification device that the present invention applies, according to following Implementation form 1 illustrates the implementation form of many aspects of the present invention to implementation form 17 again.Therefore, described above " to implement The constituent element for including in form " composition can also all be combined by following implementation form 1 to implementation form 23.In addition, following The constituent element that implementation form 1 illustrates into implementation form 23 can be combined with the constituent element of " implementation form ", this is It is self-evident.
<implementation form 1>
Illustrate card-type device (110) relevant to implementation form 1 below.This card-type device is by the implementation form 0 Card-type is made in the composition of code generating device.But, and the implementation of non-present invention is defined in the device of card-type.Figure 36 is shown The use example of card-type device (110).Card-type device (110) has to be built-in with except electronic circuit in plastics tabular component The composition of element.
As shown in figure 36, card-type device (110) portable phone, smart phone, portable information terminal, personal computer, Information is received between the touch panel that the information equipments such as mobile unit (200) have.For example, card-type device (110) receiving has The light of the touch panel picture diverging of display device, is transformed into electric energy.Card-type device (110) from what is received per unit time The energy (electric energy of generation) of light changes, and generates numerical data.Therefore, information equipment (200) is according to numerical data (position String), make the light quantity time to time change of picture, so as to transmit numerical data to card-type device (110).Card-type device It (110) both can be in contact with or close to touch panel, needed for electric energy needed for transformation can also be separated and/or acquirement numerical data Distance and it is face-to-face with touch panel.The hardware of information equipment (200) is constituted to be identified with the code illustrated in implementation form 0 Device (3) equally, thus omits the description (referring to Fig. 5).Therefore, in following implementation form, also have by information equipment (200) There is the situation of composition identical as code identification device (3) of Fig. 3 to be illustrated.In addition, information equipment (200) is, for example, intelligence Mobile phone, portable information terminal, tablet terminal etc..
On the other hand, card-type device (110) provides the variation of the physical quantitys such as capacitor for touch panel, so as to logical Touch panel is crossed, to CPU (Central Processing Unit, central processing unit) output information of information equipment (200). Information equipment (200) for example in the case where detection constitutes the specific capacitor variation of triggering, starts and card-type device (110) Signal procedure starts the communication for passing through touch panel with card-type device (110).
Card-type device (110) is arranged with on face of the touch panel in contact with or close to touch panel and causes the objects such as capacitor Multiple conductor terminals (also known as element) of reason amount variation.Each element can be with contact card-type device (110) by switch The finger of people connects.Therefore, when the switch is opened, if the phase mutual capacitance between element and touch panel is greater than a reference value, touching Touch panel detection element in contact with or close to.For the situation for keeping card-type device (110) close, preferably in card-type device (110) In the state of, between card-type device (110) and touch panel, no careless omission it is pasted with glass or other screening glass.Separately Outside, when having careless omission between card-type device (110) and touch panel, touch panel is difficult to detect connecing for card-type device (110) Closely.
According to making which switch is opened, the arrangement pattern of the element of touch panel detection is different.For example, information equipment (200) CPU detection is referred to as the set element arrangements pattern for triggering pattern, thus, information equipment (200) starts and card The communication of type device (110).Card-type device (110) for example stores in the fingerprint and memory detected by fingerprint sensor User finger print data unanimous circumstances under, it is split to put row control into, to trigger pattern from element by touch surface Plate is detected.Alternatively, it is also possible to replace fingerprint Identification sensor and use vena identification sensor, retina certification sensor, Iris authentication sensor etc..Fingerprint sensor, vena identification sensor, retina authenticate sensor, iris authentication sensor Referred to as organism authentication apparatus.
In addition, the device of card-type is not limited to the device of this part invention citing in this embodiment.But, preferably Device to the invention citing of this part is the device with the acting surface arranged for the element to touch panel output information. Therefore, card-type device is known as device (110) merely below.In addition, device (110) and information equipment (200) start communication Opportunity is not limited to consistent using the user's finger print data stored in fingerprint sensor and the fingerprint and memory that detect, simultaneously The situation sent from triggering pattern means (110) to information equipment (200).For example, for information equipment (200), set Computer program when meeting established condition touched so that information equipment (200) is sent by touch panel etc. to device (110) Signalling.So-called set computer program meets set condition, such as refers to and starting given computer journey When sequence, when given computer program receives set operation from user etc..Pass through touch panel etc. from information equipment (200) The trigger signal sent to device (110), such as can be changed according to the light quantity of touch panel, the color group on touch panel The electromagnetic wave that the migration of color combination in conjunction, touch panel, the set image on touch panel, information equipment (200) radiate The variation etc. of energy passes to device (110).That is, detecting light quantity variation, the touch panel of touch panel in device (110) On color combination, the migration of color combination on touch panel, the set image on touch panel, information equipment (200) Whens the variation etc. of the electromagnetic wave energy of radiation, device (110) is it is also possible that by from the conductor terminals to touch panel The variation of the physical quantitys such as capacitor starts the communication with information equipment (200).In addition, information equipment (200) can be by means of logical The computer program crossing information equipment (200) and starting, it is various that starting is equipped on WIFI or bluetooth of information equipment (200) etc. Wireless device, or the electromagnetic wave energy of the various wireless device outputs of control, to implement to communicate.
[device composition]
Figure 37, Figure 38, Figure 40 show the composition example of the device of implementation form 1.In addition, Figure 39 and Figure 41 are shown in dress The upper surface of set the configuration example of the device with transparent and electrically conductive film.It is an example that the device of this implementation form, which is constituted, not It is confined to hereinafter, can suitably be omitted according to the form of implementation, replace, add constituent element.In addition, each component Configuration can suitably be changed according to the form of implementation.
Figure 37 is an exemplary ideograph of the composition of display device (110) inboard.The inboard of device (110) is to supply The touch panel of information equipment (200) in contact with or close to side.Device (110) inside has including 1 or more element (111) and the components of photo-electric conversion of 1 or more the components of photo-electric conversion arrange (112).The components of photo-electric conversion arrange (112) for example For solar panels.Configured be inside 1 or more element (111) occur that forward surface detection physical quantity variation 1 One example of the acting surface that a above element is arranged.
Element (111) is conductor terminals, according to the variation of the physical quantitys such as capacitor, for the touch surface of information equipment (200) Plate exports the information of set form.It includes 1 or more the components of photo-electric conversion that the components of photo-electric conversion, which arrange (112), receives supply Electric energy.Components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) is the one of " detecting the arrival amount test section from external external energy arrival amount " A example.
Figure 38 is the exemplary ideograph that the table side of display device (110) is constituted.In addition, exemplary in Figure 40 Illustrate the composition of device (110).The table side of device (110) be finger of user etc. in contact with or close to side.Device (110) have fingerprint sensor (113), contact conductor (114, also referred to as conductive pad) on surface.Fingerprint sensor (113) inspection Survey the convex-concave profile on a part of surfaces of human bodies such as fingerprint.On the other hand, by with finger in contact with or close to contact conductor (114), so that the variation of the physical quantitys such as capacitor is detected by touch panel.The table side of device (110) is that one of detection faces shows Example.Contact conductor (114) is to receive an example by contact material portion for the electric conductivity from external contact, user Make finger contact contact conductor (114), so that by SW (115), the human body of user is connected to element (111).Contact is led Body (114) has the function of for the human body of user being electrically connected in SW (115).For example, the finger in user contacts contact In the state of conductor (114), if SW (115) carries out ON/OFF, the capacitor that generating can sufficiently detect in touch panel becomes Change.
Fingerprint sensor (113) is by finger in contact with or close to from the picture number of the spatial distribution of capacitor generation fingerprint According to by bus (not shown) (input/output bus etc.), to the image data of CPU (116) (Figure 40) transmission generation.CPU (116) fingerprint image data that fingerprint sensor (113) are transmitted is stored in the operating area of memory (117) (Figure 40).And And CPU (116) fingerprint image data from fingerprint sensor (113) that saves the operating area of memory (117) and Originally non-volatile area (the Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only of memory (117) Memory (EEPROM), electrically-erasable read-only memory etc.) in the fingerprint image data of user that stores compare.And And if stored in fingerprint image data and the non-volatile area of memory (117) from fingerprint sensor (113) Fingerprint image data is consistent, then CPU (116) is determined as smoothly according to the fingerprint image data for coming from fingerprint sensor (113) Perform the certification of user.CPU (116), which can also replace, executes certification using the image data of fingerprint itself, but finds out Image data from fingerprint is used to carry out specific characteristic point data to fingerprint, is held using the small characteristic point data of capacity Row control and certification.That is, can also store in the area the Fei Yi property region of memory (117) for the image from user's fingerprint Data carry out specific characteristic point data to fingerprint.In addition, fingerprint sensor can also be configured inside card.Moreover, CPU It (116) can be according to triggering pattern come control switch.By means of the switch control, the physical quantity variation of element (111) is come from Pass to the touch panel for the information equipment (200) that device (110) approach or load.In addition, fingerprint sensor (113) can be with Replace fingerprint, identification includes multiple diameters in formation such as insulating properties dielectric surface printing electric conductivity inks less than 0.5mm dot Dot pattern, make conductive material in the diameter that insulating properties dielectric surface is fixed to be formed less than 0.5mm dot including multiple The shapes such as dot pattern.In addition, can also identify diameter 0.05 if fingerprint sensor (113) has sufficient precision The dot of~0.2mm or so.Therefore, it can replace and identify fingerprint using fingerprint sensor (113) and authenticated, execute base In the certification of dot.Such as using insulating materials, the seal portion equally with the code generating device (1) of implementation form 1 is formed Bottom surface or 3D shape object etc. in varied shapes, in seal portion bottom surface or in the table of the 3D shape object of varied shapes etc. Face forms the dot pattern for making information coding by means of electric conductivity ink, conductive material, to replace the hand based on people The certification of finger forms message input device.Furthermore it is possible to be formed on paper by means of electric conductivity ink, conductive material Make the dot pattern of information coding, is used as the message input device to fingerprint sensor (113).Dot pattern can also be replaced And use bar code, two-dimensional bar etc..Furthermore it is also possible to replace dot pattern, bar code, two-dimensional bar etc., utilize Electric conductivity ink, conductive material form character string in medium side, are used as the message input device to fingerprint sensor (113). The character string read using optical character identification (OCR) technology identification fingerprint sensor (113).
But, the finger print identifying of user is not limited to the processing of (116) CPU.At least one of the CPU (116) Processing is divided to be drilled by the processor except CPU (116), such as digital signal processor (DSP), graphics processor (GPU), numerical value The application specific processors such as processor, vector processor, image processor are calculated to complete.In addition, at least the one of the CPU (116) Part processing can also be executed by means of integrated circuit (IC), other digital circuits.Alternatively, the CPU (116) is at least A part processing is executed by modular circuit.Integrated circuit includes large scale integrated circuit (LSI), specific integrated circuit (ASIC), programmable logic device (PLD).PLD is for example including field programmable gate array (FPGA).The CPU (116) Function can also be realized by the combination of processor and integrated circuit.Combination is for example known as microcontroller (MCU), single-chip system System (SoC), system LSI, chipset etc..
Figure 40 is an exemplary ideograph of the composition of display device (110).Figure 40 omits plastics making sheet shown in Figure 36 Shape component, exemplary simulated illustrate the relationship for being inserted in the component of tabular component.Device (110) is in table side (user's finger The side of contact) there is fingerprint sensor (113), contact conductor (114).Fingerprint sensor (113) and contact conductor (114) It is identical as fingerprint sensor shown in Figure 38 (113), contact conductor (114), thus the description thereof will be omitted.
Alternatively, device (110) has 1 or more element (111) in inboard (plate contact for touch or close side) And components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112).Element (111) and components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) and element shown in Figure 37 (111) and components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) is identical, thus the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, device (110) has 1 or more SW (switch) (115), CPU (116), memory (117), compares Device (118), driving circuit (121), battery (122).The each component of device (110) is connected by means of control line (119) To CPU (116).It is supplied in addition, each component of device (110) receives electric energy from battery (122) by power supply line (120) It answers.Battery (122) is, for example, thin film lithium-ion battery.It, can be in device in addition to the components of photo-electric conversion arrange (112) (110) the table side setting components of photo-electric conversion arrange (solar panels), charge to battery (122).
SW (115) is to the capacitance variations by contact conductor (114) detection to whether from element (111) being output to touching Panel is touched to switch over.That is, being formed between touch panel in the case where SW (115) are ON by element (111) There is the capacitor contacted by contacting conductor (114) including human body.On the other hand, the feelings for being OFF in SW (115) Under condition, it is formed between touch panel from element (111) by element (111) to the electricity of the wiring of SW (115) etc. Hold.SW (115) is an example of " physical quantity control unit ".The various journeys remembered in CPU (116) run memory (117) Sequence, thereby executing the processing of each component of device (110).Memory (117) provides the memory for being loaded into various programs Region and operating area for running program.In addition, memory (117) is remembered used in various programs and program operation Data.Memory (117) is, for example, the semiconductor memories such as read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM).ROM Including nonvolatile memory can be modified.
Comparator (118) is the circuit installed side by side in Power Generation Sections such as components of photo-electric conversion arrangements (112).Comparator (118) judge whether the terminal voltage detected by means of Power Generation Section is more than set a reference value, by the arrival amount of external energy with Time change is transformed into numerical data.(112) are arranged from the components of photo-electric conversion many places components of photo-electric conversion (optical sensor, Photodiode, phototransistor etc.) in the case where detection signal, comparator (110) and many places components of photo-electric conversion etc. are several simultaneously Column installation.By means of the combination of multiple components of photo-electric conversion and multiple comparators (118), is formed and obtain the defeated of multiple channels Enter the circuit of signal.Alternatively, comparator can also be replaced and use analog/digital converter (A/D converter).Pass through utilization A/D converter can realize the multi-valued signal of 3 bits of primary input or more in each channel.Comparator (118) (or A/D conversion Device) it is one of " information to obtain the input information of set form based on the changing over time of arrival amount obtains circuit " Example.
Driving circuit (121) switches the ON/OFF of SW (115) according to the output information sent to information equipment (200). In addition, the processing that driving circuit (121) executes can also be controlled by CPU (116).Battery (122) is for being applied to driving element (111), power supply needed for the hardware circuits such as SW (115), CPU (116), driving circuit (121).It is however also possible to be not provided with electricity Electric power is supplied to hardware circuit in pond (122), but the electric power generated by means of components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112).Driving electricity Road (121) is the example that the information output part of the output information of set form is exported according to physical quantity variation.
The graphical representation of exemplary appearance of the variation of device (110) in Figure 39.Figure 39, which is shown in table side, has conduction One exemplary ideograph of the composition of device (110A) table side of property film.Device (110A) replaces Figure 38 shown device (110) Fingerprint sensor (113) and conductive pad (114) and have fingerprint detection imaging sensor (113A) and transparent and electrically conductive film (114A).Even the composition of Figure 39, also provide and the identical function of device (110) shown in Figure 38.
Fingerprint detection is, for example, that charge coupled cell (CCD), complementary metal oxide are partly led with imaging sensor (113A) The imaging sensors such as body (CMOS).Fingerprint detection is for example configured on plastic clip with imaging sensor (113A).Transparent conductivity Film (114A) laminated configuration is in fingerprint detection on imaging sensor (113A).If finger passes through transparent and electrically conductive film (114A) and in contact with or close to fingerprint detection with imaging sensor (113A), then fingerprint detection is taken with imaging sensor (113A) Obtain the image data of the fingerprint of finger surface.Fingerprint detection is with imaging sensor (113A) by the image data of the fingerprint of acquirement CPU (116) are transferred to by bus (not shown) (input/output bus etc.).CPU (116) will be from fingerprint detection image The fingerprint image data of sensor (113A) transmission is stored in the operating area of memory (117).Fingerprint image data is deposited After being stored in the operating area of memory (117), the processing of CPU (116) and Figure 38 (detect fingerprint using according to capacitance variations Fingerprint sensor example) device (110) it is identical, thus the description thereof will be omitted.
Figure 41 is shown in an exemplary mode of the composition of the device (110A) of the conductive film of table side (114A) Figure.Figure 41 omits the plastics tabular component of Figure 39 Figure 37 graphical representation of exemplary, and exemplary simulated, which illustrates, is inserted in tabular component Component relationship.Device (110A) replace Figure 40 shown device (110) fingerprint sensor (113) and conductive pad (114) and With fingerprint detection imaging sensor (113A) and transparent and electrically conductive film (114A).In the composition of Figure 41, if user Finger contact transparent and electrically conductive film of the fingerprint detection on imaging sensor (113A), then the human body of user passes through SW (115) element (111) are connected to.Therefore, in the state that the finger of user contacts transparent and electrically conductive film, CPU (116) It controls driving circuit (121), so that SW (115) is carried out ON/OFF, so as to check the electricity from element (111) to touch panel The physical quantity variations such as appearance.Other constituent elements are identical as device shown in Figure 40 (110), thus the description thereof will be omitted.Fingerprint sensing Device (113) is an example of " sensor ".
[pattern code output]
Figure 42 is an example with the composition of the contact surface of information equipment (200) touch panel for display device (110) Ideograph.Device (110) has components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) and 5 elements (111), and (also referred to as pattern code exports Device).
It is for solar powered and information input panel that the components of photo-electric conversion, which arrange (112),.In the example of Figure 42 In, if components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) is the size of longitudinal 20~30mm, transverse direction 20mm or so, may be implemented to start Power supply needed for pattern code output device etc..The interpretation of finger print identifying or dot code is such as executed, then optimizely select Carry the powerful rechargeable battery of solar energy.Alternatively, the distance between each element (111) of components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) phase Away from 1~2mm.
5 elements (111) are conductor, are configured at around components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112).5 elements (111) are for example The variation for mutually causing the physical quantitys such as capacitor between touch panel, to the electronic equipment output information with touch panel. The output information of element (111) is also referred to as symbol.If the diameter of each element is 8mm or more, even when on touch panel Install the protection glass of 0.5~0.66mm additional, touch panel can also come from the output information of element (111) with interpretation.In addition, such as The distance of end to the end of the adjacent element (111) of fruit is 4mm or more, then can identify.In the example of Figure 42, such as accord with Shown in number (1)~symbol (5), the information exported from each element (111) is imported.In Figure 42, in the element of ring (circle) shape (111) in, symbol (1)~symbol (5) is illustrated with numerical example.In addition, property of the various sizes because of touch panel side It can or cause the circuits of capacitance variations and different, this is self-evident.Symbol (1) is on the upside of components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) Element (111) output.2 elements (111) of symbol (2) and symbol (3) on the right side of components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) are defeated Out, upside is symbol (2), and downside is symbol (3).Symbol (4) and symbol (5) are on the left of components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) 2 element (111) outputs, downside are symbol (4), and upside is symbol (5).Symbol is signal, is referred to as information symbol. Symbol (is claimed by means of the sensor for being able to detect physical quantity of the touch panel of element (111) and information equipment (200) etc. For physical quantity transducer) interaction, the signal detected by detection physical quantity transducer.The physical quantitys such as touch panel sensing Device detects physical quantity by means of the interaction with element (111), for example, the physical quantity of detection capacitor or touch panel etc. The electric field strength etc. of sensor surface.The physical quantity that will test is (or being more than) situation of threshold values or more as ON signal, will Physical quantity deficiency threshold values (or below) situation is as OFF signal.Symbol is known as this ON and OFF signal string.
Symbol (1) is benchmark symbol, is the signal by scheduled time interval ON/OFF repeatedly.Symbol (2~5) be in order to Output information and the signal utilized.Device (110) switches the ON/OFF of each information symbol, is configured in plane, from space The arrangement pattern (hereinafter simply referred to as pattern) of multiple element (111) the output multiplicity of diffusion, to export to information equipment (200) information (pattern code) sent.That is, pattern code, which refers to, utilizes the ON for making the symbol exported from multiple element (111) Combination with OFF changes the information to show on a timeline.Alternatively, by the symbol of multiple element (111) output at a certain moment Number ON and the group of OFF be collectively referred to as pattern.Moreover, the ON and OFF of symbol are according between each element (111) and touch panel Capacitance variations and be transmitted to touch panel from device (110).That is, information equipment (200) is by detection load or close to outside The physical quantitys such as the capacitor inside the device (110) of the touch panel built in shell surface between each element (111) and touch panel Variation and element (111) position, thus from device (110) obtain pattern code.
Figure 43 is the figure of the output example of display pattern code.The ON/ that pattern code output device passes through each symbol of switching OFF and export various pattern.In Figure 43, in each arrangement pattern, sequence number is assigned since left side.No. 0 (sequence number 0) Pattern be element (111) corresponding with symbol (1~5) be OFF state situation.Element (111) is the state example of OFF Property is illustrated as white circular.Circuit etc. in device (110) and device (110) also receives power supply from battery (112).But, The touch panel of information equipment (200) can also be loaded on by the circuit etc. in device (110) and device (110), to borrow Help receive the components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) of the light from touch panel (such as the semiconductor P/N of solar electric power The arrangement of knot) and receive power supply.
Device (110) if since touch panel solar energy power supply, such as No. 1 (sequence number 1) pattern institute Show, element (111) corresponding with symbol (1 to 5) is made to become ON state.Element (111) corresponding with symbol (1 to 5) is in ON or OFF state are merely known as symbol (1 to 5) and are in ON or OFF state.In addition, so-called ON state, refers to and for example touches Panel can with the state of the physical quantity in element (111) more than benchmark, so-called OFF state, refer to such as touch panel without The state of physical quantity of the method in element (111) more than perception benchmark.Symbol (1 to 5) is that the pattern of ON state is (following to be also referred to as For distinguish pattern, fiducial mark pattern) display pattern code beginning or differentiation.It distinguishes pattern and plays display time seal The effect of start time.So that fiducial mark and information symbol do not export simultaneously, thus not misidentification ground identification icon code.
No. 2 (sequence number 2) pattern is symbol (3) and the state that symbol (5) is ON, other symbols are OFF.2nd pattern It is the pattern for output information.
No. 3 (sequence number 3) pattern be the symbol (1) that other fiducial marks are 1 be ON, the shape that other symbols are OFF State (hereinafter also referred to time seal designs).Time seal designs are exported by scheduled time interval.In the example of Figure 43, the 3rd The pattern of odd number (odd serial numbers) output after number becomes time seal designs.In each pattern of even number, Device (110) is from symbol (2), by switching the ON/OFF of symbol (5), thus the pattern generation that output is determined by output information Code.
No. 18 (sequence number 18) pattern can also from symbol (2), using symbol (5) as to the 2nd~No. 16 it Between the parity check bit of information symbol pattern that exports.Pattern one after No. 18 pattern, with No. 1 (sequence number 1) Sample exports the differentiation pattern of beginning or the differentiation of representative pattern code.Pattern code output device can pass through output area component Case and the end for perceiving detection pattern code.Pattern code output device can be by from No. 1 (sequence number 1) to No. 18 The output of (sequence number 18), to export the new pattern code sent to information equipment (200).
In addition, device (110) can also be by continuous 2 output area sub-patterns, so that information equipment (200) be made to detect The end of pattern code.Device (110) exports new pattern code in continuous 2 output area sub-patterns.But, the above theory Bright only example, not the pattern of parity check bit is limited to No. 18 pattern.In addition, not distinguishing pattern is limited to the 19th Number (later plus 1 pattern).
In addition, symbolic number is not limited to 5,5 can also be more than.In turn, the fiducial mark number in time seal designs It is not limited to 1, or multiple.By keeping fiducial mark multiple, information equipment (200) can be from each fiducial mark Positional relationship, direction change of the identification device (110) relative to information equipment (200).On the other hand, device (110) with The mutual displacement of touch panel is limited in the case where moving in parallel, even the fiducial mark in time seal designs is 1 When, information equipment (200) can also moving in parallel with identification device (110), to the elements (111) of device after movement (110) Configuration carries out specific.The card-type device (110) for loading on touch panel etc. is easy to move in parallel.Therefore, even if in Time Stamp In the case that fiducial mark in chapter pattern is 1, the configuration of the element (111) moved on touch panel can be carried out A possibility that specific, is also very high.
In the example of Figure 43, time seal designs are by replacing output with the pattern based on information symbol, to play The effect of time seal.Without being limited thereto, fiducial mark can also be always ON state.At this point it is possible to not export time seal figure Case.
Figure 44 is the figure of another output example of display pattern code.The example of Figure 44 is corresponding with the output example that Figure 43 is shown, Chronologically show the ON/OFF of each symbol.For example, if device (110) load on or close to information equipment (200) touch surface Plate, then receive power supply from information equipment (200) etc., and outputting reference symbol pattern (distinguishes pattern), starts pattern code Output.
In Figure 44, the element (111) of symbol (1) presses predetermined distance, repeatedly the physical quantity variation of ON/OFF.With symbol (2) switch ON/OFF by the pattern of each output to the corresponding element (111) of symbol (5).Symbol (2) to symbol (5) ON shape State is represented by dotted lines.In Figure 44, in the ON/OFF state group as conductor (111) corresponding with symbol (1) to symbol (5) In each pattern closed, it is also marked with 1 to 18 sequence number.In Figure 44,1 to 18 sequence number is it can be appreciated that when representing Between pass through.For example, No. 4 (sequence number 4) pattern is symbol (2) and symbol (4) is ON state.Pattern code output device exists No. 17 output time seal designs, in No. 18 output parity check bit.Then, device (111) outputting reference graphical diagram Case (pattern of sequence number 1), starts the output of new pattern code.In addition, device (110) is even if the symbol in implementation form 1 is defeated It, can also be with the pattern code generating device (1) that is described in implementation form 0 equally, between the time of composite symbol ON/OFF in out Form symbol every length (referring for example to Figure 10~Figure 13, Figure 26, Figure 27).In addition, device (110) can also be by symbol Output intensity is set as multiple grades, so that according to symbol output intensity level come output information (referring to Fig.1 3).
[process flow]
Figure 45 is flow chart of the device (110) to the processing example of information equipment (200) output information.Shown in Figure 45 Reason is for example loaded on by device (110) or is started close to the touch panel of information equipment (200).It is wherein, so-called close, Refer to touch panel close to can in device (110) each element (111) physical quantity variations such as detection capacitor apart from model It encloses.It can also be by loading on device (110) fingerprint of the touch panel of information equipment (200) in addition, being handled shown in Figure 45 Sensor (113) detects fingerprint and dot code etc. and starts.Further, processing can also be by device shown in Figure 45 (111) the input information from information equipment (200) is received by components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) and started.
In OP10, the CPU (116) of device (110) receives to come self-confident by means of components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) Cease the light of equipment (200).In OP11, the components of photo-electric conversion arrange the light that (112) will receive from information equipment (200) Energy conversion at electric energy.But, components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) is also possible to 1 photodiode, 1 photoelectric crystal The components of photo-electric conversion such as pipe.
In OP12, CPU (116) will be changed by means of comparator (118) because of the light quantity received from information equipment (200) The terminal voltage of the caused, components of photo-electric conversion (112) is transformed into numerical data, obtains to input information.But, than Caused by can also arranging the current value variation of (112) output because of the components of photo-electric conversion compared with device (118), there is reference impedance The terminal voltage at the impedance both ends of value is transformed into numerical data, obtains to input information.CPU (116) is if obtain input letter Breath, then controlled in OP13.Fiducial mark pattern is output to letter and each SW (115) is become ON by CPU (116) It ceases equipment (200).In OP14, CPU (116) will be to information equipment (200) by switching the ON/OFF of each SW (115) Output information output is pattern code, is ended processing.According to the output information to information equipment (200), the place of OP13 and OP14 Reason can also be repeatedly.Output information is, for example, the identification information for the device (110) remembered in the memory (117) of device (110) (sequence number, credit number etc.).
Figure 46 is flow chart of the information equipment (200) to the processing example of device (110) output information.Shown in Figure 46 Reason, such as by means of the operation to information equipment (200) touch panel, the application program from information equipment (200) middle operation Input requirements etc. and start.
In OP20, the information sent to device (110) is transformed into the variation figure for representing light quantity by information equipment (200) The code of case.In OP21, optical sensor of the information equipment (200) to device (110) (components of photo-electric conversion arrange (112)) Irradiate the light of light quantity corresponding with the transformed variation code of pattern is represented.More specifically, information equipment (200) make to The light quantity of the backlight of liquid crystal display device supply light on the downside of touch panel becomes at any time according to transformed variation pattern Change.Information equipment (200) changes over time the working current value of the light emitting diode as back light.Device (110) receive the light from information equipment (200), processing shown in Figure 45 can be started.
[effect of implementation form 1]
The device (110) and device (110A) of implementation form 1 can be with the light of the light received from information equipment (200) Quantitative change turns to basis, obtains the input information of set form.In addition, device (110) and device (110A) contact conductor in finger In the state of padding (114) or transparent and electrically conductive film (114A), being switched between ON/OFF by each SW (115) makes physical quantity It changes.Device (110) and device (110A) make information equipment (200) detect the physical quantity variation, so as to will be set The output information of form is output to information equipment (200).In addition, physical quantity variation is information equipment in implementation form 1 (200) capacitance variations between the device (110) and each element (111) of touch panel detection.Capacitance variations are set with information The coordinate of standby (200) touch panel detects together.In addition, device shown in Figure 40 (110) has battery (122), so as to Execute stable power supply supply.
[variation of implementation form 1]
In implementation form 1, each hardware circuit etc. that device (110,110A) has receives supply electricity from battery (122) It can and drive.But, and the limit power of non-device (110,110A) is in battery (122).That is, in the variation of implementation form 1 In, the receiving such as each hardware circuit supply electric energy occurred and driving based on external energy.External energy is transformed into electricity The method of energy for example can be light-to-current inversion, electromagnetic wave, piezoelectric transduction, thermoelectric (al) inversion.Wherein, in information equipment (200) The external energy of middle generation can control information equipment (200) by means of the computer program started in information equipment (200) The electromagnetic wave energy of the various wireless device startings such as the WIFI of middle carrying or bluetooth and output, and it is supplied to device (110).
<<light-to-current inversion>>
Figure 47 is to show an example for being received device (110B) Inner Constitution of power supply by means of light-to-current inversion Ideograph.For constituent element identical with Figure 40, same tag is assigned, the description thereof will be omitted.
Device (110B) has fingerprint sensor (113) in table side (finger of user in contact with or close to side), connects Touch conductor (114) and components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112B).But, device (110B) can also be changed to fingerprint sensor (113) and contact conductor (114), equally with the device (110A) of Figure 39, can table side have fingerprint sensor (113A) and Transparent and electrically conductive film (114A).In addition, device (110B) inboard (touch panel in contact with or close to side) have 1 with Upper element (111) and components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112A).The components of photo-electric conversion arrange (112A) and components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112B) is identical as the arrangement of the components of photo-electric conversion shown in Figure 40 (112), thus the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, device (110B) has 1 or more SW (115), CPU (116), memory (117), comparator (118), capacitor (123).The each component of device (110B) is connected to CPU (116) by means of control line (119).Separately Outside, each component of device (110B) receives electric energy supply by power supply line (120).Capacitor (123) storage becomes because of photoelectricity Change electric energy or the release of element arrangements (112A) and components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112B) and generation.For example, even photoelectricity becomes The insufficient situation of energy that element arrangements (112A) receive from touch panel is changed, the components of photo-electric conversion arrange (112B) can also To receive the light of outer light, illumination etc., to device (110) well-off electric power.I.e., it is possible to by means of the components of photo-electric conversion The electric power that (112B) is provided is arranged, shortens the starting time of CPU (116) etc., accelerates the driving speed of SW (115) etc..Photoelectricity becomes It changes element arrangements (112A) and components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112B) is an example of " power supply circuit ", " photoelectric conversion department ". The components of photo-electric conversion are that have photodiode, phototransistor of structure of joining p-type semiconductor and n-type semiconductor etc., are Structure identical with solar cell device.Capacitor (123), components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112A) and the components of photo-electric conversion Arrangement (112B) is an example of power supply circuit.The components of photo-electric conversion arrange (112A) and components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112B) is an example of the photoelectric conversion department for receiving light and electric energy occurring.
<<electromagnetic wave>>
Figure 48 is to show that one for receiving device (110C) Inner Constitution of power supply by means of electromagnetic wave is exemplary Ideograph.For constituent element identical with Figure 40, Figure 41, Figure 47, same tag is assigned, the description thereof will be omitted.
Device (110C) has fingerprint sensor (113) in table side (finger of user in contact with or close to side), connects Touch conductor (114) and antenna (124).Antenna (124) receives electromagnetic wave from information equipment.But, device (110B) can also become More fingerprint sensor (113) and contact conductor (114) equally with the device (110A) of Figure 39 can have fingerprint in table side Sensor (113A) and transparent and electrically conductive film (114A).The inboard (touch panel in contact with or close to side) of device (110C) Composition it is identical as Figure 40, thus the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, device (110C) has 1 or more SW (115), CPU (116), memory (117), comparator (118), capacitor (123) and power transformation circuit (125).The each component of device (110C) is by means of control line (119) And it is connected to CPU (116).In addition, each component of device (110C) receives electric energy supply by power supply line (120).Antenna (124) by means of the electromagnetic wave of arrival, for example, by means of the electromagnetic wave for the Wireless LAN having from information equipment (200) and Electromotive force occurs.Power transformation circuit (125) is right by means of the electromotive force occurred by electromagnetic induction in antenna (124) Capacitor (123) charging.Capacitor (123) will arrange (112) and power transformation circuit (125) by means of the components of photo-electric conversion And the electric energy to charge is supplied to each portion of device (110C).Antenna (124) and power transformation circuit (125) are " power converters One example in portion ".Components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112), power transformation circuit (125), capacitor (123) are " power supply electricity One example on road ".
<<piezoelectric transduction>>
Figure 49 is to show an example for being received device (110D) Inner Constitution of power supply by means of piezoelectric transduction Ideograph.For constituent element identical with Figure 40, same tag is assigned, the description thereof will be omitted.
Device (110D) has fingerprint sensor (113), contact in table side (finger of user in contact with or close to side) Conductor (114) and piezoelectric element (126).But, device (110B) can also be changed to fingerprint sensor (113) and contact is led Body (114) equally with the device (110A) of Figure 39 can have fingerprint sensor (113A) and transparent and electrically conductive film in table side (114A).Piezoelectric element (126) will because pressing, card-type device (110D) to device (110D) bending caused by pressure It is transformed into electric energy.Piezoelectric element (126) is constituted such as the component by piezoelectric ceramic or piezoelectric film.Piezoelectric ceramic or piezoelectricity If the components such as film pressurize, charge occurs in material, alternating voltage occurs between top and bottom.The alternating voltage of generation It is sent to rectification circuit (127).The composition and Figure 40 phase of the inboard (touch panel in contact with or close to side) of device (110D) Together, thus the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, device (110D) has 1 or more SW (115), CPU (116), memory (117), comparator (118), capacitor (123) and rectification circuit (127).The each component of device (110D) is connected by means of control line (119) It is connected to CPU (116).In addition, each component of device (110D) receives electric energy supply by power supply line (120).
The alternating voltage that piezoelectric element (126) occurs is transformed into DC voltage by rectification circuit (127), to capacitor (123) DC current is exported.Capacitor (123) carries out electric power storage to the DC current exported by means of rectification circuit (127).
In addition, device (110D) not must when the primary pressurization to piezoelectric element (126) just obtains sufficient electric power Must have rectification circuit (127).For example, accumulating the electric power occurred by means of a piezoelectricity in capacitor (123), to dress Set each component supply electric power of (110D).Piezoelectric element (126) is an example in " piezoelectric transduction portion ".Piezoelectricity Element (126), rectification circuit (127) and capacitor (123) are an examples of power supply circuit.
<<thermoelectric (al) inversion>>
Figure 50 is to show an example for being received device (110E) Inner Constitution of power supply by means of thermoelectric (al) inversion Ideograph.For constituent element identical with Figure 40, same tag is assigned, the description thereof will be omitted.
Device (110E) has fingerprint sensor (113), contact in table side (finger of user in contact with or close to side) Conductor (114) and thermoelectric element (128).Thermoelectric element (128) will touch human bodies one, finger of information equipment touch panel etc. The thermal change divided changes electric energy into.Thermoelectric element (128) is, for example, seebeck element, if the high temperature pad electric terminal having to both ends (128A) and low temperature pad electric terminal (128B) and apply temperature difference, then voltage occurs.Pass through finger touching thermoelectric element (128) High temperature pads electric terminal (128A), so that temperature difference occur between low temperature pad electric terminal (128B) for representing room temperature.By means of Electric energy for driving hardware circuit can occur for the temperature difference, thermoelectric element (128).The inboard of device (110E) (touches Plate contact or close side) composition it is identical as Figure 40, thus the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, device (110E) has 1 or more SW (115), CPU (116), memory (117), comparator (118), capacitor (123).Capacitor (123) puts aside the electric energy generated by the voltage that thermoelectric element (128) occur.Device The each component of (110E) is connected to CPU (116) by means of control line (119).In addition, each composition of device (110E) Element receives electric energy supply by power supply line (120).Thermoelectric element (128) is an example in " thermoelectric (al) inversion portion ".High temperature pad Electric terminal (128A) and low temperature pad electric terminal (128B) are an examples of " the first thermoelectricity terminal ", " the second thermoelectricity terminal ".Heat Electric device (128), capacitor (123) are an examples of " power supply circuit ".
[effect of the variation of implementation form 1]
Device shown in Figure 47~Figure 50 (110B) to device (110E) is occurred and external energy is transformed into electric energy Electricity simultaneously starts, thus can not have battery or rechargeable battery.
The device (110) of Figure 47 has 2 components of photo-electric conversion arrangements (112A) and components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112B).Components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112A) receives the light from information equipment (200) picture and electric energy occurs.In light In the insufficient situation of electric energy that electric inverting element arrangement (112A) occurs, device (110B) can be arranged from the components of photo-electric conversion (112B) receives outer light and electric energy occurs.In addition, device (110B) is set by components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112A) from information Standby (200) receive the situation of information, can also arrange (112B) from the components of photo-electric conversion, are produced by means of the outer light etc. because of receiving Raw electric energy and receive power supply supply.
The device (110C) of Figure 48 though for information equipment (200) contactless state, can also be by by information equipment (200) received electromagnetic waveform receives power supply supply at electric energy.The device (110D) of Figure 49 can by will by means of because Finger pressing etc. simple operations and obtain, the pressure from outside is transformed into electric energy, receive power supply supply.The device of Figure 50 (110E) can by by by means of touch finger simple operations and the thermal change that obtains changes electric energy into, receive power supply supply.
<implementation form 2>
In implementation form 2, the composition of device (110) and effect and the device (110) illustrated in Figure 38~Figure 50 are extremely Device (11E) is identical.Since the device composition in implementation form 2 is identical as implementation form 1, thus the description thereof will be omitted.But, In implementation form, device (110), which possesses, knows each other other identification information with other devices.Other identification is known each other with other devices Information can also be remembered in memory (117) (revisable nonvolatile memory, ROM etc.).Device (110) is with pattern generation Code form sends identification information to information equipment (200) (referring to Figure 43, Figure 44).Information equipment (200) can execute according to The authentication processing that the form of pattern code authenticates device (110) from device (110) received identification information.Storage Device (117) (revisable nonvolatile memory, ROM etc.) is to remember device and other devices knowing each other other identification information Identification information memory portion an example.
Therefore, device (110) can be with alternative credit card, cash card, accumulating card etc..Device (110) are being used as credit In the case where card, cash card, accumulating card etc., touching that device (110) can have according to element (111) and information equipment (200) The physical quantity variation between panel is touched, for example, in the form of pattern code, passing information to information according to capacitance variations and setting Standby (200).Therefore, information equipment (200) is not electric by the contact-type installed in previous credit card, cash card, accumulating card etc. Interface, magnetic interpretation interface, but the touch panel that can have from information equipment (200), the card that interpretation device (110) has Number.
For example, information equipment (200) can also change according to the light quantity of touch panel, input information is passed into device (110), it is triggered to be sent to device (110), device (110) is made to start the communication with information equipment (200).In addition, information Equipment (200) can also make the components of photo-electric conversion of device (110) arrange the light that (112) receive touch panel, start electric power Supply triggers to transmit to device (110), and device (110) is made to start the communication with information equipment (200).Alternatively, referring to In the case that line sensor (113,113A) etc. successfully carries out finger print identifying, device (110) can also according to pattern code, to Information equipment (200) sends triggering, the communication of starting apparatus (110) and information equipment (200).
[variation 1 of implementation form 2]
In the variation 1 of implementation form 2, device (110) generate based on the common time of information equipment (200) and Information equipment (200) are given in the encoded information of identification information, output.Device (110) has the device composition of implementation form 1, clock Signal generation, counting circuit.In addition, device (110) has the electricity for making clock signal generating unit, counting circuit operating Pond.
At the time of clock signal generating unit (being not shown on figure) is in order to obtain common with information equipment (200), in both timings It carves, clock signal occurs by the set clock cycle.Counting circuit (being not shown on figure) is sent out based on clock signal generating unit The present moment of raw clock signal is counted.At the time of device (110) is to count and based on identification information, generates and compile Code information (disposal password).The encoded information of generation is exported and gives information equipment (200) by device (110).Information equipment (200) identification information of the device (110) possessed based on present moment and information equipment (200) generates encoded information, if It is consistent with from device (110) received encoded information, then authentication device (110).
Device (110) also can have the antenna of detection counting circuit correction signal, and the counting circuit correction signal is used It makes corrections at the time of being counted to counting circuit.For example, CPU (116) can also be received based on cesium-beam atomic clock from antenna The standard wave that determining etalon time is digitized.The etalon time can also be distributed by common wire.CPU (116) will Received standard wave is transformed into the moment, compared at the time of counting circuit counts, makes corrections at the time of counting.CPU (116) be correcting circuit an example.Antenna is an example of detection circuit.In addition, device (110) can also be by Based on the communication of touch panel light quantity variation, the present moment of etalon time or information equipment is received from information equipment (200), So that making corrections constantly.
[process flow]
Figure 51 is the flow chart for sending the processing example of the identification information encrypted according to the moment.The processing of Figure 51 is for example logical Cross since information equipment (200) receive identification information transmission require and.
In OP30, the clock signal that CPU (116) is occurred based on clock signal generating unit counts present moment.Now Moment for example can be contain make count value 0 correspond in the past reference time point (when the January in 1970 of the morning 0 on the 1st) year, The moon, day, when, information at the time of minute, second, millisecond.In addition, the present moment counted may be to be mended by means of correcting circuit At the time of positive.In OP31, CPU (116) is generated based on the identification information remembered in present moment and memory (117) Encoded information.Alternatively, time segmentation, the time that will divide can also be carried out to elapsed time by set time interval As present moment.That is, by the capacity of decomposition of time as set time interval.In this way, information equipment (200) and Device (110) makes time synchronization under the premise of capacity of decomposition does not have error.
In OP32, the encoded information of generation is sent to information equipment (200) by CPU (116).Information equipment (200) benefit With with device (111) same form (for example, it is described include year, month, day, hour, min, second, millisecond at the time of message form) show At the moment, encoded information is decoded, the identification information authentication processing sent from device (110) is executed, authentication result is sent out Feed apparatus (110).In OP33, device (110) receives authentication result from information equipment (200), sends the place of identification information Reason terminates with regard to this.
[variation 2 of implementation form 2]
In the variation 2 of implementation form 2, information equipment (200) is by disposable encryption key, for example, random number is become The light quantity variation, the variation of color or the light quantity variation of each color for changing touch panel into, pass to device as input information (110).The CPU (116) of device (110) is according to from the change of the external energies arrival amount such as light of information equipment (200) The input information and identification information for turning to basis and obtaining, generate encoded information, and information equipment (200) are given in output.Information equipment (200) the disposable encryption key sent according to end to device (110), is decoded encoded information.According to this step Suddenly, dress is transmitted in the safety that the coded communication of common key mode can be improved from device (110) to information equipment (200) Set the identification information of (110).CPU (116) be based on inputting information and occur encoded information encoded information occur circuit An example.In addition, not the cipher mode between information equipment (200) and device (110) is defined in shared key side Formula.
[process flow]
Figure 52 is the process for sending the processing example of the identification information encrypted according to the input information of information equipment (200) Figure.For example, the processing of Figure 52 is and receiving input information since information equipment (200).
In OP40, CPU (116) is obtained by components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) etc. from information equipment (200) Input information.Input information is, for example, the disposable value such as random number that information equipment (200) occur, and is used as encryption key.Separately Outside, the random number etc. that information equipment (200) occurs, as the input information to device (110), is stored in memory etc..? In OP41, based on the identification information that CPU (116) is remembered in the input information and memory (117) of acquirement, coding is generated Information.
In OP42, the encoded information of generation is sent to information equipment (200) by CPU (116).Information equipment (200) from The interpretations such as memory terminate the input information sent to device (110), are decoded to encoded information, execute from device (110) Authentication result is sent to device (110) by the authentication processing of the identification information of transmission.In OP43, device (110) is from information Equipment (200) receives authentication result, and the processing for sending identification information terminates with regard to this.In addition, information equipment (200) display certification As a result, also can be omitted OP43.In addition, being, for example, the situation of credit number, cash card number, integral card number etc. in identification information Under, information equipment (200) can terminate the input information sent to device (110) from interpretations such as memories, to encoded information It is decoded, to obtain identification information.
[effect of implementation form 2]
In the variation 1 of implementation form 2, device (110) is with the common time and identification information of information equipment (200) Based on, encoded information is sent to information equipment (200).The safety of the authentication processing in information equipment (200) is improved as a result, Property.
In the variation 2 of implementation form 2, device (110) will be from the light or electricity of information equipment (200) picture The external energies such as magnetic wave are transformed into electric energy, turn to basis with the arrival quantitative change of external energy, obtain the input letter of set form Breath.Device (110) is sent to information equipment (200) based on the input information and identification information of acquirement, by encoded information. Information equipment (200) will be sent to the output information of the input information linkage obtained from information equipment (200), to improve The safety of authentication processing in information equipment (200).
<implementation form 3>
In implementation form 3, device (110) is obtained based on the variation of the arrival amount (light quantity) of the light of multiple colors The input information of set form.Figure 53 is shown so that the arrival quantitative change of the light of multiple colors turns to basis and obtains input letter One exemplary ideograph of device (110F) Inner Constitution of breath.To composition identical with Figure 40, Figure 41, Figure 47~Figure 50 Element assigns same tag, and the description thereof will be omitted.
The composition of the table side (finger of user in contact with or close to side) of device (110F) is identical as Figure 47, thus The description thereof will be omitted.It is however also possible to replace the fingerprint sensor (113) and conductive pad (114) of Figure 47, as shown in figure 41, use Fingerprint sensor (113A) and transparent and electrically conductive film (114A).In addition, device (110F) is in inboard, (touch panel is contacted or is connect Close side) it is first with the measurement of (112A) and 1 or more light quantity is arranged including 1 or more element (111), the components of photo-electric conversion The light quantity measuring cell of part arranges (129).The light quantity measuring cell of light quantity measuring cell arrangement (129) is, for example, to have PN junction Photodiode, phototransistor etc..
Further, device (110F) has 1 or more SW (115), CPU (116), ROM (117), capacitor (123). The each component of device (110F) is connected to CPU (116) by means of control line (119).In addition, device (110F) is each Constituent element receives electric energy supply by power supply line (120).
Light quantity measuring cell arrangement (129) can also combine light quantity measuring cell arrangement (129) and colour film, and measurement is every The light quantity of a light color, i.e., the light quantity of each wavelength.CPU (116) is directed to the multiple colors received from information equipment (200) Light obtain the input information of set form based on the variation of the light quantity of each light color.But, in device (110F) does not measure each light color light quantity, i.e., in the case where each wavelength light quantity, light quantity measuring cell can also be replaced to arrange It arranges (129), uses individual light quantity measuring cell (photodiode, phototransistor etc.).The arrangement of light quantity measuring cell It (129) is an example of " acceptance part ".Light quantity measuring cell arranges (129) or individually light quantity measuring cell (two pole of photoelectricity Pipe, phototransistor etc.) it is an example for detecting the arrival amount test section of arrival amount of the external energy to arrive from outside.
[effect of implementation form 3]
Device (110F) is directed to the multiple color lights received from information equipment (200), with the light quantity of each light color Based on variation, the input information of set form is obtained.It is independent with utilizing by detecting the light quantity variation of each light color The situation of light quantity measuring cell compare, device (110F) once can receive bulk information.On the other hand, device (110F) Using individual light quantity measuring cell, it can be obtained with reduced structure from information equipment (200) Input information.
<implementation form 4>
In implementation form 4, device (110) is by means of the fingerprint detection image sensing of graphical representation of exemplary in Figure 41 Device (113A) and based on the image of the display device interpretation from information equipment (200), obtain the input information of set form. The composition of device (110) in implementation form 4 is identical as the device composition in implementation form 1, thus the description thereof will be omitted.Device (110) in the display device of information equipment interpretation image, such as be also possible to be formed on the display face includes multiple straight The dot pattern of dot of the diameter less than 0.5mm, bar code, two-dimensional bar etc..In addition, fingerprint sensor (113) is if there is filling The precision divided, then can also identify the dot of 0.05~0.2mm of diameter or so.
[effect of implementation form 4]
Device (110) obtains set form based on the image or dot pattern from information equipment (200) interpretation Information is inputted, thus the higher information transmit-receive of safety may be implemented.
<implementation form 5>
In implementation form 5, device (110) is detected from fingerprint sensor (113) by the convex of human body at least part surface The apperance that recess portion is formed, such as fingerprint.Fingerprint sensor (113) examines corresponding convex-concave portion based on also referred to as detection faces Capacitor between the face and test object of survey detects at least part of convex-concave of human body.Device (110) in implementation form 5 Composition is identical as the device composition in implementation form 1, thus the description thereof will be omitted.Apperance of the device (110) in the fingerprint of detection etc. In the case where by device (110) certification, start the information transmit-receive with information equipment (200).
[variation of implementation form 5]
Fingerprint sensor (113) also can detecte the medium side shape in interpretation object in addition to human body at least part surface At the dot pattern including multiple dots of multiple diameters less than 0.5mm, recognized in the dot pattern of detection by device (110) In the case where card, start the information transmit-receive with information equipment (200).In addition, fingerprint sensor (113) is if there is adequately smart Degree, then can also identify the dot of 0.05~0.2mm of diameter or so.
<<imaging sensor>>
Fingerprint sensor (113) imaging sensor such as may be CCD, CMOS.Fingerprint sensor (113) is in people In the case where the proximity test face of body at least part surface, the image in the convex-concave portion on human body at least part surface is obtained. In addition, reflection of the fingerprint sensor (113) by means of light, when medium and is formed with including multiple by can recognize that material is formed Dot dot pattern medium proximity test face when, detect the shape of corresponding dot pattern.
Fingerprint sensor (113) is also possible to the backlight sensor with light-conductive media and light receiving element.Fingerprint sensing Medium irradiation light of the device (113) from light-conductive media to interpretation object.Fingerprint sensor (113) can be by means of light receiving element And receive the reflected light from dieletric reflection, to detect fingerprint or dot pattern.In addition, in this embodiment, as fingerprint Sensor (113), can also in the form of application implementation 9, the imaging sensor (160) that is described in detail in 10.
<<capacitance sensor>>
Fingerprint sensor (113) is also possible to capacitance sensor.Fingerprint sensor (113) is in human body at least part table When the proximity test face of face, the capacitor between detection faces and the convex-concave portion on anthropolith surface is measured, it is convex so as to detect It is recessed.In addition, fingerprint sensor (113) is being formed with the non-of the dot pattern including multiple dots formed by conductive material When specially conductive medium is close, the capacitor between corresponding dot is measured, so as to detect the shape of dot pattern.
[process flow]
Figure 54 is started and the flow chart of the processing example of the communication of information equipment (200) according to detection information.Detection letter Breath is by information such as the images of test object of fingerprint sensor (113) detection.The processing of Figure 54 for example passes through test object The proximity tests such as fingerprint or dot pattern face and start.
In OP50, CPU (116) detects the test objects such as fingerprint or dot pattern by means of fingerprint sensor (113). In OP51, CPU (116) will test the authentication information remembered in object and memory (117) etc. and be compared.Authentication information The fingerprint of the owner for the device (110) being e.g. registered for is shown in and needs to be formed on the media such as the card that authenticates or seal Device (110) identifier dot pattern etc..The dot pattern formed on interpretation printed matter corresponding with content etc. is two-dimentional In the case where code, pattern code corresponding with the 2 d code can also be exported and give information equipment (200), be used for content Acquirement and the operation etc. of information equipment (200).
In OP52, CPU (116) determines whether test object has authenticated.In the case where test object is certified (OP52: yes), processing enters OP53.In the case where test object is not certified (OP52: no), processing terminate.In OP53 In, CPU (116) starts the communication with information equipment (200).
[effect of implementation form 5]
Device (110) authenticates fingerprint detected by means of fingerprint sensor (113) etc. or dot pattern, from And start the information transmit-receive with information equipment (200).Thus, it is possible to realize that the higher device of safety (110) authenticates.
<implementation form 6>
In implementation form 6, device (110) has processing unit, and the processing unit execution takes according to information equipment (200) The information processing of the input information obtained.The composition of device (110) in implementation form 6 and the device structure in implementation form 1~5 At identical, thus the description thereof will be omitted.CPU (116) executes the processing of processing unit by means of computer program.The processing of processing unit Or part of it can also be executed by means of hardware circuit.
[process flow]
Figure 55 is the exemplary flow chart that processing is executed according to the input information from information equipment (200).The place of Figure 55 Reason is for example by and information equipment (200) reception input information.
In OP60, CPU (116) is obtained from the received input information of information equipment (200).Input information includes coming from In the processing requirement of information equipment (200) or instruction etc..In OP61, CPU (116) is executed at the information based on input information Reason.It, can also be by taking following scenario described as an example as the example of information processing.
For example, exemplary diagram showing device (110) is used as the situation of credit card or cash card.Wherein, input information is, for example, The input requirements of number, information processing are, for example, the transmission processing of number.For example, for the browsing for passing through information equipment (200) Device and the transmissions such as credit number from internet site require (input information), information equipment (200) is by the hair of credit number It send requirement (input information) to be changed with time and encoded according to the light quantity of touch panel, passes to device (110) i.e. It can.The credit number that device (110) will be remembered in ROM etc. is encoded in pattern code and sends from element (111) etc..
For example, information equipment (200) in terminal, portable phone with touch panel etc., is carrying out internet shopping In the case where, when inputting credit number in website, information equipment (200) can also obtain credit number from device (110). In this case, either processing premised on the authenticating successfully of Password Input based on information equipment (200), Can be premised on the certification success based on fingerprint sensor (113) etc., by means of processing, information equipment (200) is from device (110) credit number is obtained.
Similarly, in the case where carrying out internet bank trade, information equipment (200) is in the terminal, just with touch panel It takes in phone etc., in the case where carrying out internet shopping, when inputting account number in website, information equipment (200) can also be with Account number is obtained from device (110).In this case, either with the certification of the Password Input based on information equipment (200) Processing premised on success, can also be premised on based on the certification of fingerprint sensor (113) etc. success, by means of processing, letter It ceases equipment (200) and obtains credit number from device (110).
In addition, exemplary diagram showing device (110) is used as the situation of electric bank-note card.Wherein, input information is, for example, to electricity The amount of money of sub- money card, which is paid, to be required.Information equipment (200) will be required from the payment of electronic money server, according to touching Touch the changing over time of panel light quantity, color change over time or each changing over time for color light quantity is encoded, transmitting Give device (110).Device (110) is by the amount of money for the electronic money remembered from revisable nonvolatile memory etc. The middle amount of money deducted after requiring the amount of money is registered in revisable non-volatile according to the instruction (input information) of device (110) Property memory etc..
In OP62, the information processing result of execution is sent to information equipment (200) by CPU (116), self-confident according to coming The input information of breath equipment (200) executes processing, and processing terminates with regard to this.
[effect of implementation form 6]
Device (110) executes the processing based on the input information obtained from information equipment (200).In addition, device (110) Output information based on implementing result is exported and gives information equipment (200).As a result, device (110) can with information equipment (200) transmitting-receiving of various information is realized between.CPU (116) is execute the processing unit based on the information processing for inputting information one A example.
<implementation form 7>
In implementation form 7, device (110) and device (110A)~device (110F) in implementation form 1~6 are with card Type device is realized.The composition of card-type device in implementation form 7, in addition to the size of card-type device, with each implementation form 1~6 In composition it is identical, thus the description thereof will be omitted.Even by the size of the inside of card-type device, such as being determined as ISO/JIS rule The configuration of pattern code output device as shown in figure 42 also may be implemented in 85.60 × 53.98mm as defined in lattice.
[effect of implementation form 7]
Due to for card-type, thus carrying convenience, it can be applied to require safety between other information equipment (200) Information transmit-receive various cards.
<implementation form 8>
In implementation form 8, graphical representation of exemplary is more specifically constituted than the card-type device of implementation form 7.But, Device (110) described in 1~implementation form of implementation form 6 etc. can be constituted, be combined in the card-type device of implementation form 8. In addition, in the card-type device of implementation form 8, it can also be using the seal cut code generating device illustrated in implementation form 0 (1) a part or rate-determining steps constituted.Figure 56 (A) is to show the exemplary mould constituted inside card-type device (110G) Formula figure.In the upside figure of Figure 56 (A), card-type device (110G) has 8 elements (111) and optical sensor (130).Each member Part (111) is with circular configuration around 1 element (111).The identification number of the element (111) of existing smart phone is general Simultaneously at 5, but also there is a possibility that increase.In tablet computer, it is already possible to identify that there are many equipment at 10.In addition, i.e. Make at 6 that the above configuration element (111) can also be existing if the number that can be exported simultaneously is determined as within 5 Smart phone in use.
Optical sensor (130) receives the light exported from the display device of information equipment (200).Optical sensor (130) example For example photodiode.But, optical sensor (130) is also possible to that the optical sensor of multipath light signal can be received.In Figure 56 (A) variation of optical sensor (130) is shown on the downside of.In the figure on the downside of Figure 56 (A), card-type device (110G) has Receive No. three optical sensors (130) of the light (RGB) of different wave length.No. three optical sensors (130), which have, penetrates each difference The combination of the colour film and photodiode of the light (RGB) of wavelength.But, these No. three optical sensors can also receive phase Light that is same or repeating wavelength region.That is, being filled in being installed on the light receiving elements such as the photodiode in 3 channels in display Set it is middle be equipped with different light emitting regions, so that each light emitting region is issued the optical signal of varying strength, make the light receiving element in each channel by Light.In addition, not the port number of optical sensor (130) is defined in 3 channels, below 2 channels or more than 4 channels It can.Optical sensor (130) is from the display device light of information equipment (200), thus from information equipment (200) to card-type device (110G) received message code is also referred to as light code.
Figure 56 (B) is an exemplary ideograph for showing the composition on the surface card-type device (110G).Card-type device (110G) has components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (solar panels) (112) and fingerprint sensor (113).Card-type device (110G) can Receive power supply to arrange (112) from the components of photo-electric conversion.
Fingerprint sensor (113) is, for example, the imaging sensors such as CMOS or capacitance sensor.When card-type device (110G) When power supply is ON/OFF, the touching of finger can be perceived and make power source ON/OFF.The imaging sensors such as CMOS are in implementation form It is described in detail in 9.In addition, card-type device (110G) can also not have fingerprint sensor (113).Card-type device (110G) It can replace fingerprint sensor (113), and the sensor with 2 d codes such as interpretation dot codes, it can be corresponding with dual-purpose Sensor and fingerprint sensor (113).
Figure 56 (C) is an exemplary ideograph for showing the mechanism (hardware composition) of card-type device (110G).Card-type dress (110G) is set with CPU (116), memory (117), pattern code output device (131), message input device (132), electricity Power supply unit (133), fingerprint certification device (134).
The various program being unfolded in CPU (116) run memory (117).CPU (116) is by operation program, to want It seeks pattern code corresponding with the code value obtained from message input device (132) and exports, or the pattern generation that output is set Code.Set pattern code is, for example, the pattern code remembered in memory (117) and obtains from fingerprint certification device (134) The corresponding pattern code of code, generated with onboard clock temporal information (or for example, year, month, day, hour, min, second, millisecond, Elapsed time is split by scheduled time interval, including will divide time at the time of information, i.e., by between given time Every time for determining of capacity of decomposition) corresponding pattern code.CPU (116) is to be exported according to physical quantity variation as both Determine an example of the pattern code generating unit of the pattern code of form information.
Memory (117) is the numbers such as various programs, predetermined pattern code and the various code values for remembering CPU (116) operation According to memory storage.The program and data of memory (117) memory can also be updated by means of message input device (132). Memory (117) is for example all including volatile memory and nonvolatile memory.
Pattern code output device (131) includes the driving circuit (121) and element (111) of implementation form 1.In addition, figure SW (115) of the case code output device (131) for example with implementation form 1, according to the finger of the program run in CPU (116) Show, the variation of physical quantity (capacitor, electric field strength etc.) is caused in element (111), exports ON/ as multiple-channel output information OFF signal (symbol).Message input device (132) be include Figure 56 (A) optical sensor (130) light receiving circuit.But, Message input device (12) is also possible to and the components of photo-electric conversion of implementation form 1 (112) and the identical structure of comparator (118) At.Message input device (132) identifies the power for the light that (digitlization) receives or the grade of fluorescent lifetime, intermittent time, will It represents corresponding information and is successively sent to CPU (116).CPU (116) will come from according to the program on memory (117) The information of the representative grade of message input device (132) is decoded in code value.But, message input device (132) also can wrap Include the optical sensor (sensor including light receiving elements such as multiple photodiodes) that can receive multipath light signal.At Figure 56 (C) Downside, it is shown that the variation of optical sensor (130).In the downside figure of Figure 56 (C), when multiple optical sensors (130) connect By different wave length light when, message input device (132) identify (digitlization) light each wavelength of light power or hair Between light time, the grade of intermittent time, corresponding information will be represented and be successively sent to CPU (116).In the present specification, Pattern code output device (131) refers to the SW's (115) of the implementation form 1 driven including element (111) and to element Circuit.In addition, message input device (132) refers to the circuit including optical sensor (130) and being handled the signal of light Light receiving circuit.
Electric power supply apparatus (133) will arrange the luminous energy transformation of acquisitions such as (solar panels) (112) from the components of photo-electric conversion At electric power, it is supplied to each circuit.Components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (solar panels) (112) can also be configured at the inside, set to information The light that standby (200) shine carries out light-to-current inversion.Become alternatively, it is also possible to which the components of photo-electric conversion to be arranged to (solar panels) (112) More battery.Electric power supply apparatus (133) is, for example, the capacitor (123) of Figure 53.In addition, (133 can also for electric power supply apparatus Think chargeable composition.Fingerprint certification device (134) is based on from the image that fingerprint sensor (113) obtains, generation pair Fingerprint carries out specific code.Fingerprint certification device (134) can also be with the 2 d codes such as interpretation dot code, output code value (also may include coordinate value).Fingerprint certification device (134) also may include other CPU, DSP etc. except CPU (116), root Image procossing is executed according to computer program.
[variation of implementation form 8]
In the presence of the situation for being defined in the touch location number that touch panel can identify simultaneously.But and non-device (110) limit Due to the configuration mode or configuration number of element (111).Figure 57 is the card-type device that display has touch input panel (135) One exemplary ideograph of the composition of the inside of (110H).In the upside figure of Figure 57, card-type device (110H) has 8 Element (111) and optical sensor (130).Each element (111) (hereinafter also referred to pattern code output device) is in 1 element (111) rectangular frame apperance is configured to around.
Optical sensor (130) receives the light exported by the display device of information equipment (200).Optical sensor (130) For example, photodiode.The variation of card-type device (110H) is shown in the downside of Figure 57.In the downside figure of Figure 57, card Type device (110G) has the optical sensor (130) for the light (RGB) for receiving different wave length.But, these No. three optical sensors It can also receive light that is identical or repeating wavelength region.The composition of optical sensor (130) and implementation form 8 (Figure 56 (A)) Optical sensor (130) is identical.
Figure 58 is the example that the surface for the card-type device (110H) that display has touch input panel (135) is constituted Ideograph.Card-type device (110H) has components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (solar panels) (112) and touch input panel (135).Card-type device (110H) can arrange (112) from the components of photo-electric conversion and receive power supply.Image interpretation device (110H) is also known as device (110H) merely.
Touch input panel (135) is, for example, capacitance sensor or pressure sensor.Card-type device (110H) detection uses The finger of person or the touching of stylus can also carry out ON/OFF to power supply.Card-type device (110H) is in Figure 58, as touching Input panel (135) are touched, as shown in the button represented with number 0~9 around frame, can have each value because of input And different multiple panels.In addition, card-type device (110H) is used as a panel, location information when touch is obtained, with display Figure object pairing on device, so that input value can also be identified.Further, touch input panel (135) utilizes finger Or stylus writes out number or text/symbol, so that input information can also be identified.Card-type device (110H) can be touched with dual-purpose Touch the sensor of the 2 d codes such as input panel (135) and interpretation dot code.
Figure 59 is the mechanism (hardware for the card-type device (110H) that display has touch input panel (135, reference Figure 58) Constitute) an exemplary ideograph.Card-type device (110H) has CPU (116), memory (117), pattern code output Device (131), message input device (132), electric power supply apparatus (133), code conversion device (136).But, in Figure 59 In, touch input panel (135) are omitted.For CPU therein (116), memory (117), pattern code output device (131), message input device (132), electric power supply apparatus (133), due to identical as Figure 56 (C), thus the description thereof will be omitted. Code conversion device (136) is with the numerical value of touch input panel (135) input of graphical representation of exemplary from Figure 58 or is touching Based on the number that input panel (135) is write out/text/symbol trace information, code value is generated.It is however also possible to install 1 touch panel (135A) for being able to detect touch location of graphical representation of exemplary in Figure 59 variation 2.Code conversion device It (136) can be with the 2 d codes such as interpretation dot code, output code value.Code conversion device (136) has processor, DSP Deng, executed by means of computer program these processing.
[variation 2 of implementation form 8]
Figure 60 (A) is one constituted inside the card-type device image interpretation device (110I) with low-power display device A exemplary ideograph.Card-type device image interpretation device (110I) is also referred to as device (110I).Card-type device (110I) tool There are 5 elements (111), optical sensor (130) and components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (solar panels) (112).In laterally 1 column configuration There are 3 elements (111), in each downside, is configured with element (111), optical sensor (130), element (111).But, For card-type device (110I), in order to which pattern code is used for electronic accounting etc., preferred received information content during set For 128bit or more.Therefore, in the case where this application program, as shown in Figure 70 B graphical representation of exemplary, can also install with The element (111) of symbol (1~10) corresponding 10 or so or its above quantity improves the transmission rate based on pattern code.
In Figure 60 (A), the components of photo-electric conversion, which arrange (solar panels) (112), to be had around element (111) and light sensing Device (130)Glyph shape, however, it is not limited to this, as long as being able to produce electric power, any shape.
Optical sensor (130) receives the light exported from the display device of information equipment (200).Optical sensor (130) example For example photodiode.Optical sensor (130) is also possible to receive photodiode of light (RGB) of different wave length etc. Combination.In the case where this composition, optical sensor (130) is referred to as that each wavelength can be detected in identical timing Different light intensities or different colors are simultaneously decoded in the sensor of light code.But, these No. three optical sensors can also be with Receive light that is identical or repeating wavelength region.The composition of optical sensor (130) and the light sensing of implementation form 8 (Figure 56 (A)) Device (130) is identical.
Figure 60 (B) be show one that the card-type device surface (110I) with low-power display device is constituted it is exemplary Ideograph.Card-type device (110I) has display device (137), has the display unit of display device (137) in surface configuration.It is aobvious Showing device (137) is that electronic memo that organic EL (Electroluminescence) or magnetic substance is utilized etc. is ultrathin low Power display.Display device (137) can also show card number or valid period, surname when being used as credit card or member card Name, security code.Card-type device (110I) can be contacted smart phone and obtained by these information in only user set to be recognized It is just shown when card.Further, display device (137) can also show password etc..In addition, display device (137) is as product Divide card or game, education card, can both show the interior integral remembered of card or stage property, ability, appraisal result etc., and can also show Show other any information.If display device (137) shows 2 d code etc., user can also pass through smart phone Interpretation.
Figure 60 (C) be show the card-type device (110I) with low-power display device mechanism (hardware composition) one A exemplary ideograph.Card-type device (110I) have CPU (116), memory (117), pattern code output device (131), Message input device (132), electric power supply apparatus (133), display device (137).
For CPU (116), memory (117), pattern code output device (131), message input device (132), electricity Power supply unit (133), due to as Figure 59, thus the description thereof will be omitted.Display device (137) is run from CPU (116) Program receives instruction, generates text or figure, is shown in the display unit of display device (137).
<message code of this implementation form>
In this implementation form 1 into implementation form 8, changed according to the light quantity of touch panel, is inputted to device (110) etc. Information.Wherein, the rule of the information inputted in device (110) etc. is defined as message code.Message code can be described as The received energy such as definition device (110) change over time the information format of pattern.In addition, in the following description, will implement Device (110), card-type device (110A~110H) that form 1 illustrates into implementation form 8 etc. are known as merely device (110) etc.. In addition, message code below is input into the message input device (132) including optical sensor (130).Therefore, the information generation Code is also referred to as light code.
In addition, it is following also to from the pattern code that the pattern code output device (131) for including element (111) exports into Professional etiquette is fixed.The format of pattern code below also can be applied to the seal cut code generating device (1) of implementation form 0.Into one Step ground, the code generating device (1) of implementation form 0 have optical sensor described below (130, message input device (132)) in the case where, the code generating device (1) of implementation form 0 can identify smooth code below and input.
3 wavelength that Figure 61 graphical representation of exemplary presses RGB implement the arrangement of the components of photo-electric conversion of light-to-current inversion (hereinafter referred to as For the arrangement of rgb light electricity inverting element), arrange by rgb light electricity inverting element the input letter changed over time of light quantity detected It ceases (the light quantity change pattern of RGB).That is, Figure 61 graphical representation of exemplary for example illustrate in implementation form 8 receive different wave length The format by optical signal that the optical sensor (130) of light (RGB) is received.But, explanation is not limited to implement shape below State 8, but as based on device (110) receive light quantity change pattern information input when format sample be illustrated.? In figure, rgb light electricity inverting element arranges the message input device (132, optical sensor (130)) for being equivalent to implementation form 8.
It is arranged as rgb light electricity inverting element, number 1~3 is added in circular indicia, graphical representation of exemplary assigns The photodiode (or phototransistor) of colour film corresponding with tri- color of R, G, B.1~3 circular indicia difference in the figure Graphical representation of exemplary information input sensor corresponding with R, G, B (individually below be known as information input sensor (PD1, PD2, PD3)).The column of this information input sensor are installed on the face (the inside) in contact with or close to touch panel, thus device (110) etc. three tunnels can be received from the information equipment (200) etc. with touch panel and inputs information.But, in this implementation form In 1 to 8, the information input sensor number of each wavelength of light, i.e. port number is not limited to 3.Device (110) etc. using with The corresponding colour film of wavelength (wavelength examination filter) below 2 channels or more than 4 channels carries out information input.In addition, dress It sets (110) and does not separate wavelength, in the viewing area of touch panel corresponding with information input sensor (PD1, PD2, PD3) respectively Domain receives the light of different light quantity, so as to realize three tunnel information inputs.
The grade for the brightness that the identifications such as device (110) receive.1 threshold values also can be set in the grade of brightness, is ON/OFF 2 grades (1bit).By setting multiple grades for threshold values, the information content that 1 photodiode can be made to obtain is increased to 2bit or more.In the figure, number of degrees is set to 2 grades of ON/OFF.Black is OFF in the figure, is not receive light or connect The light received is the situation of set threshold values or less brightness.It is that receive the light of light or receiving be set in addition, white is ON The situation of brightness more than threshold values.
[pattern A]
In figure 61, the message code for the input information that pattern A graphical representation of exemplary is inputted from 3 channels.In figure 61, In pattern A, sequence number 0~14 is assigned below 3 circular indicias of representative information input pickup (PD1~PD3) group. In addition, below sequence number, the luminescent color of the graphical representation of exemplary display device of touch panel at this time is black (BK), white Color (W), red (R), green (G), blue (B), cyan (C), fuchsin (M), yellow (Y).In addition, the graphical representation of exemplary in figure In the case where information input sensor (D1~D3) is that white is round, corresponding information input pickup is opened, i.e., because of light Electric current that is incident and generating is more than a reference value, or the terminal voltage generated by light incidence is more than a reference value.On the other hand, In the case where information input sensor (D1~D3) is that black is round, corresponding information input pickup closes graphical representation of exemplary It closes, i.e., the electric current deficiency a reference value generated by light incidence, or the terminal voltage deficiency benchmark generated by light incidence Value.
Under information input state, the display device (panel) of information equipment (200) becomes black in sequence number 0 (BK), therefore, the information input sensor (D1~D3) of device (110) becomes OFF.If by display device in contact with or close to Face information input sensor (PD1~PD3) of device (110), such as set pattern code is exported from device (110) etc., then The display device of information equipment (200) is white (W) in sequence number 1, and information input sensor (PD1~PD3) becomes ON. Then, display device becomes red (R) in sequence number 2, and only information input sensor (PD1) is ON.In the sequence number 0 The output of the serial representative information code of the RGB group detected in~2 starts and distinguishes.Then, it in sequence number 3~13, shows Showing device 2 kinds of colors of information input sensor (PD2 (G) and PD3 (B)), 11 output information codes are implemented in 14 Even-odd check.In the case where implementing error check except even-odd check or mistake is corrected, information equipment (200) etc. it is aobvious Showing device can also be in the time point output information code of sequence number 3~14.
Wherein, display device makes the detected value of information input sensor (D1) become ON at the time point of sequence number 1,2. Then, display device shines repeatedly by scheduled time interval, so that the detected value alternate repetition of information input sensor (D1) OFF and ON, to play the role of time seal.By means of the sequence number 0~2 of this display device time point shine, So that device (110) can be with the beginning or differentiation of identification information code.Wherein, so-called message code refers to according to from display The variation of light quantity, the wavelength of light (color) of device etc. and the information that device (110) are transmitted to from display device.As described above, Device (110) identifies machine at the beginning of interpretation according to sequence number 1,2.In addition, mistake occurs when information is transmitted In the case where, the message code of number needed for display device also exports repeatedly, so that device (110) can identify correctly conscientiously Message code.If message input device (132) confirmation message code interpretation is completed, device (110) is defeated from element (111) The pattern code that interpretation is completed out.According to the pattern code that interpretation is completed, whether information equipment (200) can identify interpretation.Separately Outside, as time seal, information input sensor (D2 (G) or D3 (B)) also can be used.
It is above as a result, 2bit × 11=22bit can be exported when using even-odd check.1 output time is 1/30 second or so, substantially can in 500ms output information code 22bit.In display device of good performance, Ke Yiyong It exports within 1/60 second or so, thus most short can use 250ms left and right identification information code 22bit.It can not say, if making information The output times of code increase, and can export/identify huge a large amount of message code.In addition, device (110) identification information generation Code differentiation 0~2, so as to using the pattern of front and back come identification information code.Therefore, under information input state, display Device repeated nucleotide sequence number 0~14 shines, information equipment (200) can not also the face of interpretation display device (110) connect Touching or close predetermined pattern code (such as triggering pattern).That is, information equipment (200) can also connect with the face of device (110) Touching or close to unrelated, passes through shining to device (110) input message code for repeated nucleotide sequence number 0~14.That is, device (110) Detection sequence number 0~14 shine repeatedly and input information.But, message code input can also be from sequence number 0~14 In certain one start.For example, in certain one start information code from the sequence number 3~14 in addition to the differentiation of message code In the case where input, the pattern that device (110) can also be identified before and after message code differentiation with integration carries out message code It is specific.Such as in the case where starting in sequence number 5 with 6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,0,1,2,3,4 inputs, The sequence number 5~14 of 0~2 front and back of differentiation of device (110) identification information code first, the then differentiation 0 of identification information code ~2, and then the pattern of identification sequence number 3,4, so as to identify the message code including sequence number 5~14 and 3,4.
[pattern B]
In Figure 62, the codes of the different input information of 3 channels of pattern B graphical representation of exemplary input.In information input shape Under state, the display device (panel) of information equipment (200) becomes information input sensor (PD1~PD3) in sequence number 0 OFF becomes black (BK).If exporting set figure from device (110) by device (110) face contact or close to display device Case code, then display device makes information input sensor (PD1~PD3) become ON in sequence number 1, becomes white (W), so The output of start information code afterwards.The sequence number 0,1 time point shine, the output of representative information code start and It distinguishes.The time point of sequence number 2,4,6,8,10,12,14 behind, display device utilize information input sensor (PD1 (R), PD2 (G), PD3 (B), PD1+PD2 (Y), PD2+PD3 (C), PD3+PD1 (M)) 6 kinds of colors, by message code export 7 It is secondary.On the other hand, at the time point of sequence number 1,3,5,7,9,11,13, entering information into sensor (PD1~PD3) becomes ON becomes white (W), to play the role of time seal.In addition, display device makes according to the black (BK) of sequence number 0 Obtaining device (110) can be with the beginning or differentiation of identification information code.Even if in device (110), there is a situation where interpretation mistakes Under, display device is also repeatedly required several by message code, so that device (110) can identify correct message code conscientiously.If Device (110) confirmation message code interpretation is completed, then the pattern code completed from element (111) output interpretation.Information equipment (200) pattern code completed using touch panel detection interpretation, whether so as to identify interpretation.In addition, as Time Stamp Chapter, can also enter information into sensor (PD1~PD3) becomes OFF, becomes black (BK).At this point, in information input state Under, display device can enter information into sensor (PD1~PD3) in 0 becomes ON, becomes white (W).
It is above as a result, display device can use 6 color in addition to time seal (white) 7 times shines, export the 7 of 6 The message code of power.1 output time is 1/30 second or so, 7 times of the 500ms output information that can apply greatly code 6 Side.In display device of good performance, it can be exported with 1/60 second or so, thus most short can be identified with 250ms or so is believed Cease 7 powers of code 6.It can not say, if increasing the output times of message code, can export/identify and is huge a large amount of Message code.In addition, device (110) passes through the differentiation 0 of identification information code, so as to identify letter with the pattern of front and back Cease code.Therefore, under information input state, display device repeated nucleotide sequence number 0~14 shines, information equipment (200) Can not also interpretation represent the face contact or close predetermined pattern code (such as triggering pattern) of device (110).That is, information Equipment (200) can also pass through shining to dress for repeated nucleotide sequence number 0~14 with the face contact of device (110) or close to unrelated Set (110) input message code.Device (110) detection sequence number 0~14 it is luminous repeatedly, output information.In addition, such as Fruit device (110) can export 6 14 powers with set precision recognition time, then in addition to time seal.
[pattern C]
Figure 63 is the figure of the light emitting region of graphical representation of exemplary light code.If increasing the size of code of light code, believing Between the display device and device (110) for ceasing equipment (200), in aspectant multiple positions, it is (aobvious that light emitting region is installed respectively Showing device side), optical sensor (photodiode of device (110) side).That is, the display device in information equipment (200) On, increase the light emitting region number of light code, in device (110) and each light emitting region aspectant position, configures rgb light electricity Diode (144).The touch panel of information equipment (200) can identify the location information of each element (111), thus, It can identify the position for being installed on multiple photodiodes (144) of card.Therefore, the touch panel of information equipment (200) exists Hair is arranged in position whenever card touching in display device corresponding with rgb light electric diode (144) position in display device Light region shines to light code.The luminous light for e.g. issuing 1 color in each light emitting region.In addition, light generation Shining for code can also be with parallel practice with the pattern of conductor (111) output.That is, information equipment (200) and device (110) can be with According to shining from display device and the light based on rgb light electric diode (144), from the physics quantitative change of element (111) Change and the detection based on touch panel are performed simultaneously two-way communication (so-called complete double communication).In addition, in order to shorten certification etc. Time, can also remember and use the light code that obtains within the promising time.Rgb light electric diode (144) is equivalent to light Sensor (130).
Figure 63 is overlapped light emitting region (LE1~LE3) and and the display device of the display device of display information device (200) The element (111) and rgb light electric diode (144) of aspectant device (110).In addition, display device is in the figure with dotted line Carry out graphical representation of exemplary.In the example of Figure 63, in the light emitting region (LE1) of display device, with light emitting region (LE3) The region of corresponding device (110) is respectively provided with from RGB photodiode (144-1) to rgb light electric diode (144-3). In addition, in the region corresponding with light emitting region (LE1) of device (110), and element configured with output symbol (1) (111, it surround The circular indicia of number 1).Element (111) is also referred to as pattern code output conductor.Device (110) and light emitting region (LE2) corresponding region, right side configured with output symbol (2), left side be configured with output symbol (5) element (111, respectively around the circular indicia of number 2,5).In the region corresponding with light emitting region (LE3) of device (110), on the right side Side configured with output symbol (3), left side configured with output symbol (4) element (111, respectively around number 3,4 circle Shape mark).In addition, rgb light electric diode (144-1~144-3) can also be as shown in Figure 64, it is contained in element (111).Separately Outside, rgb light electric diode (144-1~144-3) is referred to as rgb light electric diode (144).But, the composition of Figure 63 is to show Example property diagram, and the positional relationship of not element (111) and rgb light electric diode (144) is defined in Figure 63.
Figure 65 is luminous, the RGB of device (110) of the exemplary simulated diagram according to the display device of information equipment (200) The figure of the ON/OFF state of photodiode.In the example of Figure 65, rgb light electric diode (144) by means of from left side by Photodiode that red (R), green (G), blue (B) are arranged in order and constitute.Assorted photodiode is corresponded in detection Light shine in the case where become ON, be shown as in figure white.In addition, assorted photodiode is not detecting correspondence Light shine in the case where become OFF, black is shown as in figure.It in the figure will rgb light electricity corresponding with each smooth code The group of the ON/OFF state of diode (144) is collectively referred to as pattern.In each pattern, 8 are imparted in sequence number 0.In addition, In Figure 65, such as the pattern of each sequence number presses predetermined distance output on a timeline.
In Figure 65, the light code of graphical representation of exemplary rgb light electric diode (144) detection.In each pattern, believing Cease the light emitting region (LE1) of the display device of equipment (200), rgb light electric diode (144- corresponding with light emitting region (LE3) 1) it is successively increased from above to the output of rgb light electric diode (144-3).In No. 0 pattern (sequence number 0), each RGB The all OFF of output of photodiode (144).In addition, in the following description, No. n-th (pattern of sequence number n) is known as scheming Case n.In addition, in Figure 65, in each rgb light electric diode (144-1) into rgb light electric diode (144-3), for RGB For the combination of ON, it is explicitly indicated as color code.Color code, can be with table in addition to red (R), green (G), blue (B) in the figure Existing black (BK), white (W), yellow (Y), 8 kinds of cyan (C), fuchsin (M) colors, that is, 3bit.This is red (R), green (G), blue (B) separately constitutes the result of 2 levels.But, in the present specification, so-called color code, referring to can in addition to color With with the digital information of the performances such as lightness, level.If red (R), green (G), blue (B) are separately constituted 4 levels, 1 time shine can show 6bit.
The effect of rgb light electric diode (144-1) is as follows.Red (R) photoelectricity two of rgb light electric diode (144-1) Pole pipe receives the differentiation and synchronous optical signal for data block with green (G) with photodiode.On the other hand, rgb light electricity The blue (B) of diode (144-1) receives the optical signal for being used for even-odd check with photodiode.In pattern 1, display dress The light emitting region (LE1) set issues figure when yellow (Y) (only R and G shine) or white (W) (R, G, B all shine) light Case, it is completely unique in pattern 1~8.White (W) ingredient of yellow (Y) * j is at least examined by the two sides of R and G photodiode It surveys.Therefore, light emitting region (LE1) according to display device issues yellow (Y) (only R and G shine) or white (W) (R, G, B All shine) light when pattern come definition branch point.The differentiation part is represented as defined in a series of combination of smooth codes The differentiation of data block.That is, independent differentiation pattern is not present into pattern 8 in pattern 1, pattern part and information pattern are distinguished It combines part.That is, the red (R) of rgb light electric diode (144-1) photodiode and green (G) use photoelectricity two The light of pole pipe region of acceptance sub-pattern part.In addition, rgb light electric diode (144-2,144-2) receives information pattern part Light.
On the other hand, the effect of rgb light electric diode (144-2,144-3) is as follows.In pattern 2~9, light emitting region The fluorescent lifetime interval synchronization of the information pattern of (LE2, LE3) and definition light code shines.That is, light emitting region (LE1) makes RGB Red (R) diode and green (G) of photodiode (144-1) are alternately ON with diode.But, according to being to make surprise It is still OFF that the blue (B) of even parity check, which is ON with diode, and the luminescent color of light emitting region (LE1) is as follows.In odd even school When blue (B) ingredient tested is ON, in the shining of light emitting region (LE1), fuchsin (M) (R+B ON) and cyan (C) (G+ B is ON) alternately shine.On the other hand, when the blue of even-odd check (B) ingredient is ON, light emitting region (LE1's) shines It is luminous to be that red (R) replaces with green (G).
The light emitting region (LE1) of display device shines as described above, thus rgb light electric diode (144-1~144-3) The luminous information pattern of every appropriate time is detected, device (110) can identify light code.As at light emitting region (LE2, LE3) The even-odd check of luminous information pattern uses two pole of photoelectricity by blue (B) in light emitting region (LE1) luminous blue (B) ingredient Pipe detection.In this embodiment, even-odd check is known as even check or odd check.In addition, even-odd check both can be with Being includes verification for synchronous optical signal, is also possible to not include only being defined information generation for synchronous optical signal The verification of the optical signal of code.Thus, for example in the case where even check, the case where only message code being utilized to generate verification Under, if the ON number of each light emitting elements of message code is odd number, the light emitting region (LE1) of display device carries out including blue Color (B) ingredient shines.In addition, as the description in Figure 64, can also in element (111) combination as by The photodiode of optical element.
The light ingredient for forming information pattern is tri- kinds of ingredients of R, G, B, ON/ whether detection according to photodiode (144) OFF makes each smooth ingredient have 1bit.3bit is detected according to the information pattern being made of tri- kinds of ingredients of R, G, B in each distribution district, 6bit can be detected 2 light emitting regions.Therefore, pattern light code can be defined.It to be such as used for electronic accounting, then Identify the light code of 128bit or more.It in existing smart phone, can be carried out luminous, thus examined with the time interval of 1/60s Consider safety coefficient, can shine by 1/30s time interval, 30 patterns can be identified between 1 second.It as a result, include 1 number It is 22 according to the information pattern that block distinguishes pattern, can be between about 0.7~0.8 second or so, output/identification 6bit × 22= The light code of 132bit.In the case where the output number of identification information pattern in terms of card, card-type device (110) is in data block It distinguishes front and back and obtains pattern corresponding with information pattern output number, so as to light code decoding.That is, card-type device (110) Data block can not also be obtained separates pattern to all information patterns between next differentiation pattern.Card-type device (110) exists Such as only represent start distinguish pattern into next the first data block for distinguishing pattern, obtain a part of information pattern, then Remaining information pattern is obtained into next second data block for distinguishing pattern, in this case, in the second data block In the step of obtaining insufficient information pattern, terminate decoding.According to this step, card-type device (110) can shorten solution The code time.
Figure 66 is the figure of the variation of the light emitting region of graphical representation of exemplary light code.In the example of Figure 66, sent out at 5 Light emitting region (LE15) is installed in light region (LE11).Each distribution district (LE11) is respectively provided with to light emitting region (LE15) Rgb light electric diode (144-11) is to rgb light electric diode (144-15).1 information pattern has 12bit, including 1 number It is 11 according to the information pattern that block distinguishes pattern, can be between about 0.44 second, output/identification 12bit × 11=132bit Light code.
[process flow]
Figure 67 is that information equipment (200) is carried out specific and carried out to rgb light electric diode (144) position of device (110) The flow chart of the luminous processing example of light code.In the processing example, information equipment (200) sends communication to device (110) and starts It is required that (OP70).Communication starts to require the black (BK does not shine) and sequence of sequence number 0 shown in the e.g. pattern B of Figure 70 The combination of number 1 white (W).In the combination of black (BK) and white (W), all rgb light electric diodes (144) are with identical Color light, thus information equipment (200) is not required to the region of to master diode.Then, device (110) for example changes implementation The ON/OFF state of the SW (115) of form 1, to make the object in the touch panel detecting element (111) of information equipment (200) The variation of reason amount.Then, the touch panel of information equipment (200) matches element (111) in the position of detection physical quantity variation Seated position carries out specific (OP71).Then, information equipment (200) in the allocation position from each element (111) and specific RGB Photodiode (144) position exports the pattern (OP72) of RGB.Although in addition, in figure omit, can also in OP72 So that multiple data blocks needed for output data transmission.
Moreover, information equipment (200) determines whether the output (communication) based on RGB pattern completes (OP73).So-called pattern It exports (communication) to complete, referring to should for example be transmitted from information equipment (200) to the volume of data that device (110) is sent. The processing of OP72 is repeated in information equipment (200), until volume of data is sent completely.Moreover, if volume of data is sent out Completion is sent, then information equipment (200) determines whether wrong (OP74).Vicious situation, such as refer to logical from equipment (110) The situation of response can not be finished receiving by crossing element (111).In addition, vicious situation, such as refer to and pass through from equipment (110) The situation of communication mistake occurs for element (111) notice.When wrong, information equipment (200) returns to OP72, re-executes The output of RGB pattern, until reaching set number of retries.Moreover, information equipment (200) terminates in faultless situation Processing.
In addition, information equipment (200) is directed to device (110) in Figure 67, the output for starting based on RGB pattern is (logical Letter).But implementation of the invention is not limited to this step.For example, the touch panel detection of information equipment (200) comes from In the physical quantity variation based on element (111) of device (110), so as to start to export (communication).In information equipment (200) first in the case where pattern code of the detection based on element (111), information equipment (200) can be with recognition component (111) Configuration and rgb light electric diode (144).Therefore, as shown in the combination of the black of Figure 68 (BK) and white (W), all RGB Photodiode (144) can not also be shone with same color.Therefore, information equipment (200) for example as shown in Figure 69, can be with According to the series of the RGB group detected in sequence number 0~2, (being in sequence number 0 black (BK) is white in sequence number 1 (W), it is in sequence number 2 red (R)) etc., it is desirable that start the message code output to device (110).
Figure 68 is the place that device (110) is received the light code from information equipment (200) by rgb light electric diode (144) Manage the flow chart of example.In this process, the communication of device (110) detection information equipment (200) starts to require (OP80).It sends Start to require the light quantity occurred for example in the comprehensive of the display device of information equipment (200) according to not limited area variation, By multiple rgb light electric diode (144) light of device (110).If a rgb light electric diode (144) detects transmission Start to require, then device (110) output pattern code (OP81) in element (111).Moreover, device (110) waits rgb light The light (OP82) of electric diode (144).RGB pattern of the device (110) from light, the transmission number of decoded information equipment (200) According to (OP83).Moreover, device (110) determines whether the communication based on RGB pattern completes (OP84).It is so-called based on RGB pattern The completion of communication refers to the completion that the volume of data that should for example send from information equipment (200) to device (110) is sent.Hair When sending completion, information equipment (200) is for example sent completely by means of the pattern of RGB to device (110) notice.In addition, information The transmission based on RGB pattern is repeated in equipment (200), until volume of data is sent completely.Moreover, a series of if numbers According to being sent completely, then information equipment (200) determines whether wrong (OP85).So-called vicious situation, for example, for example referring to In equipment 110, the situation of mistake is detected in even-odd check etc..When wrong, equipment (110) returns to OP82, instead The light and decoding of multiple RGB pattern, until reaching set number of retries.Moreover, in case there is an error, equipment (110) knot Beam processing.
In addition, starting based on the communication of RGB pattern from information equipment (200) to device (110) in Figure 68.But Implementation of the invention is not limited to this step.Such as device (110) can also be directed to the touch surface of information equipment (200) Plate, detection pass through the physical quantity variation of element (111), to start output communication.
[another example of pattern code and light code]
Figure~69~73 illustrates the different patterns of output pattern code, the card-type device for receiving light code.
Figure 69 is the figure of the output example of display pattern code.In addition, showing the differentiation of pattern with dotted line.Figure 69's In example, in 6 conductors (element) (111), center configuration output symbol (6) element (111, around number 6 circle Shape mark).In the upside of the element (111) of output symbol (6), configure output symbol (1) element (111, around number 1 Circular indicia).The upper right of the element (111) of output symbol (6), bottom right, lower-left, upper left be respectively configured output symbol (2~ 4) element (111, respectively around the circular indicia of number 2~4).In addition, photoelectricity two is respectively configured in the downside of each symbol Pole pipe (WPD1~WPD6).Each element (111) is when the diameter of roughly circular section is 7mm, between the center of each element (111) Distance is 12mm or so, but in newest type, if it is 10mm or so, smart phone can identify each element really (111) pattern exported.The diameter of roughly circular section can be smaller, but the distance between adjacent element is preferably at a distance of 4mm or so More than.
Existing smart phone can identify 5 multi-touch.Therefore, in this graphical representation of exemplary to 5 multi-touch can be carried out Touch panel the output based on element (111).In addition, the ON of each element (111) is shown as black color in Figure 69, OFF is shown as white.Wherein, the group of ON element (111) and OFF element (111) is collectively referred to as pattern.In addition, right in the figure Each pattern assigns 0~9 sequence number.For the pattern 0 of original state, all OFF states of each element (111).Each element (111) sequentially switch ON/OFF, output pattern code by pattern 1 to pattern 9.
The symbol (6) of pattern 1 is ON state, to distinguish with pattern 0.For pattern 1 and pattern 2, as data The differentiation of block, continuously making symbol (1) is OFF state.Output ON/ is reversed in the symbol (2) of pattern 1 to symbol (5) and pattern 2 OFF, so as to differentiate with 2 phase of pattern.Correspondence symbol of the symbol (2) of pattern 2 to symbol (5) as information pattern 3~9 Parity check bit, be set as ON/OFF state.The interval that the output of information pattern 3~9 exports for identification icon, repeatedly The ON/OFF of symbol (1).Symbol (1) is ON in information pattern 3, is also terminated in information pattern 9 with ON.That is, making call sign It (1) is pattern discontinuous 2 times of ON.
In the pattern 3,5,7,9 that symbol (1) is ON, the information based on each pattern is according in symbol (2) to symbol (6) 5 in selection 0~4 combination and define.Therefore, definable information content is5C4+5C3+5C2+5C1+ 1=31 (4.95bit).On the other hand, symbol (1) be OFF pattern 4,6,8 in, the information based on each pattern by symbol (2) extremely 0~5 combination is selected to be defined in 5 of symbol (6).Therefore, definable information content is5C5+5C4+5C3+5C2+5C1+1 =32 (5bit).
After pattern 9 exports, export as the pattern 1 and pattern 2 for distinguishing pattern, output information pattern 3 to 9.
Figure 70 shows the exemplary mould that the light-receiving surface for the device (110) that the element (111) with Figure 69 arranges is constituted Formula figure.In addition, in Figure 70, due to having expressed the region that light emitting region (LE1~LE6) is display device, thus with swash void It is quasi- to depict display device.The light-receiving surface of device (110) has 6 elements, and (111, imparting is in each circular indicia in figure The grade of the number 1~6 of graphical representation of exemplary symbol carries out graphical representation of exemplary) and photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) and conduct The components of photo-electric conversion of solar panels arrange (SCP1).The configuration of element (111) in Figure 69 graphical representation of exemplary it is identical.
Photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) is respectively arranged to be sent out with the light code of the display device of information equipment (200) The corresponding position circular with swash in light region (LE1~LE6).In this example, photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) It is not provided with filter, directly receives the light for coming from information equipment (200) display device.According to this composition, photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) can be for the light received from display device, by means of light-to-current inversion with sufficient sensitivity generation Electric current (or terminal voltage to both constant impedance) inputs information (light code) from optical signal.Therefore, for photodiode (WPD1~WPD6), not especially setting wavelength limitation.For example acceptable white light of photodiode (WPD1~WPD6).In addition, Device (110) is slim card shape of the thickness less than 1mm.On the other hand, display device is with light emitting region (LE1~LE6) difference Independent light quantity shines, and makes corresponding photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) light.According to this composition, wavelength-limited, does not lead to It crosses and the light emitting region of display device is distinguished, the information input of multichannel can be carried out from display device to device (110).
Figure 71 graphical representation of exemplary is input into the light code of photodiode.In the figure, as in light sample of signal As graphical representation of exemplary, exemplary illustrate with light emitting region (LE1~LE6) light quantity light independent is arranged by 2 rows 3 The each light receiving element (photodiode (WPD1~EPD6)) of diode (WPD1~WPD6).Moreover, in 2 rows 3 column The row graphical representation of exemplary of side 3 light receiving elements of photodiode (WPD1~WPD3).In addition, the row on the downside of in 2 rows 3 column Graphical representation of exemplary 3 light receiving elements of photodiode (WPD4~WPD6).
In the figure, the rectangular area of painted white represent that photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) respectively includes 3 by Optical element is ON, i.e., in light.On the other hand, the corner of painted black is that circular rectangular area represents photodiode 3 light receiving elements that (WPD1~WPD6) is respectively included are OFF, i.e., in non-light.In the figure, by means of photodiode The combination of the ON and OFF of the light receiving element that (WPD1~WPD6) is respectively included, graphical representation of exemplary light code.In addition, in each light In code, sequence number 1~9 is assigned.
In the light code, as the differentiation of data block, the continuous 2 sendings white in the light emitting region (LE1) of display device Light.A series of smooth codes for dividing into data block are known as message code.In addition, capacitor code is otherwise referred to as message code. Therefore, in the light code, for shining for original state, if the light emitting region (LE1) of the light code of display device is not sent out Light, then light emitting region (LE2~LE6) can not also both be shone with certain colour light emitting.In addition, in the light code, The light code light emitting region (LE1) of display device alternately issues white light, thus the dress of light with the pattern of sequence number 2~9 It is synchronous with emission side to set (110) acquirement.That is, the light code light emitting region (LE1) of display device is with the figure of sequence number 2~9 Case alternately issues white light.Further, the light code light emitting region (LE2) of display device is used for even-odd check.Therefore, it shows Other light emitting regions (LE3~LE6) of the light code of showing device are combined, and are shone by 1 time, and the ratio of (output) 4 can be transmitted It is special.In addition, the two sides photodiode (WPD3~WPD6) are combined, it can by 1 light from display device corresponding region With 4 bit of reception (input).In the following, photodiode (WPD3~WPD6) is known as message code diode.In addition, in odd even In the case that mistake occurs for verification, device (110) inputs information equipment by means of element (111), by instruction luminous again (200) touch panel.
In pattern 1 into pattern 9, if light code fluorescent lifetime interval is determined as 1/30s, in information equipment (200) received information content is 4bit × 9=36bit in 300ms between display device and device (110).If can be with Light code fluorescent lifetime is set to 1/60s, then received information content is 4bit × 33=132bit, letter in 550ms 128bit needed for the display device and device (110) for ceasing equipment (200) can receive financial settlement.In addition, if display dress It sets in being also included within the R component of the light emitting region (LE1) of the 32nd pattern, differentiation is exported by continuous 3 0N, then photoelectricity Diode (WPD1~WPD6) can be known in 533ms by the transmission rate of 4bit × 32=128bit (240 bit/second) left and right Not light code.In the pattern of Figure 71 graphical representation of exemplary, when the reception of light code uses white light, device (110) can also be with Divide the brightness of multiple grades identification white.For example, 1 diode can identify 4 levels to 16 levels or so, thus pass through 1 time It shines, the light code of 8bit to 16bit can be exported, the transmission rate is 480~960 bit/second.
The pattern generation that Figure 72 is another configuration example of the constituent element inside device (110), is exported according to the configuration example The example of code.Graphical representation of exemplary includes the pattern code output device (131) of 7 elements (111), information input in the figure Device (132, optical sensor (130)).In addition, each element (111) exemplary diagram of pattern code output device (131) is shown as Around the circular indicia of the number of each symbol of graphical representation of exemplary (1~7).In pattern code output device (131), own Distance between adjacent element (111) is identical.In this composition, when electronically control action is set in information device (110) When the ON/OFF of physical quantitys such as the capacitor (electrical strength) of standby (200), capacitor acts on degree (or the electric-field strength of touch panel Degree) it is no matter stable in which element (111).In addition, touch panel can accurately recognition component (111) centre bit It sets.
In addition, assigning 0~10 sequence number in each pattern of pattern code.With the grade of implementation form 8, by sequence The pattern of number n is known as pattern n.In addition, black circle represents the ON of symbol in each pattern, white circle represents symbol OFF.ON and OFF is corresponding with the ON and OFF of SW (115) as the description in implementation form 1.In addition, also false herein Information equipment (200) is determined as existing smart phone, can only identify the situation of 5 multi-touch.
In pattern 1, device (110) exports touch panel identification icon code by the way that symbol (1~5) is become ON The configuration direction of element (111) in device (131).That is, ON of the touch panel by the detection symbols (1~5) in pattern 1 And the configuration direction of recognition component (111).The identification as a result, information equipment (200) is corresponding from symbol (1~5) with identification Element (111) positional relationship, can also accurately estimate the position of element (111) corresponding with symbol (6,7).
In pattern 2, symbol (1,2) is made to become OFF, then in pattern 3 into pattern 10, symbol (1), symbol (2) are handed over For ON repeatedly and OFF.After pattern 1~10, then pattern 1~10 repeatedly.This output pattern be it is unique, can identify The differentiation of data block.
From pattern 3 to pattern 10, symbol (1) and symbol (2) alternate repetition ON and OFF, thus touch panel identification and change The synchronous synchronization signal of the information pattern of the symbol (3) of change to symbol (7), can accurately identification device (110) output figure Case.Further, due to always can be with the location information of distinguished symbol (1 and 2), thus on touch panel, even if implementing shape Slidings/the rotations such as the device (110) of the seal of state 0 or implementation form 1~8, the information equipment (200) with touch panel The change in location that the element (111) of output information pattern (symbol (1~7)) can easily be estimated, can accurately identify figure Case code.The information content of information pattern becomes the combination of the selection 0~4 in 5 of symbol (3) to symbol (7).Pass through one Secondary output can define5C4+5C3+5C2+5C1+ 1=31 (4.95bit).In pattern 3, as the hum pattern to pattern 10 The symbol (3) of pattern 2 also can be used to symbol (7) in the parity check bit of case.
In data block of the combined pattern 1 based on the above symbol (1) to symbol (7) to pattern 10, if by symbol Output time interval is determined as 50ms, then the information content of 4.95bit × 8=39.6bit is received in 500ms.Work as electronic equipment (200) with the high speed touch panel of existing smart phone it is same when, electronic equipment (200) recognition time interval can be assumed for 12ms.It but, will if setting 3 times for the identification safety coefficient of symbol (1) to symbol (7) from element (111) herein Symbol output time interval is designed as 36ms, then 2 times can be set by the safety coefficient that conductor identifies in 1 second, if will Element output time interval is set as 24ms, then, in 672ms, the letter of 4.95bit × 26=128.7bit can be defined Breath amount.No matter which kind of situation, during 0.6 second to 1 second or so, 128bit needed for financial settlement can be exported.
Figure 73 is the photoelectricity that graphical representation of exemplary element (111) and message input device (132, optical sensor (130)) include The figure of another composition of diode.As shown, photodiode and element (111) can also be constituted on concentric circles.Such as The acceptance part of photodiode can also be formed in area (cylindrical area), inside in the inside of device (110) The circle (cylindrical region of cylinder interior) in portion forms conductor element (111).Or it on the contrary, can also be inner in device (110) Face forms conductor element (111) in area (cylindrical area), in internal circle (the cylindric area of cylinder interior Domain) formed photodiode acceptance part.
In addition, the touch panel when information equipments (200) such as smart phones is identified based on the element (111) as conductor Physical quantity (capacitor, electric field strength etc.) when, between the distance between sometimes adjacent conductor center or adjacent end conductor Distance can be restricted.But for conductor sizes, if there is the effect based on set capacitor or electric field strength occurs, then does not have It is problematic.Therefore, the touch panel of electronic equipment (200) can also be can identify the journey of the physical quantity from element (111) Degree, conductor sizes is made to smaller.But, no matter which kind of situation, when information equipment (200) operation application program setting When various limitation, it is not restricted to this.
The pattern generation that Figure 74 is another configuration example of the constituent element inside device (110), is exported according to the configuration example The example of code.The configuration for example can be applied to seal cut code generating device (1), the implementation form illustrated in implementation form 0 The device (110) illustrated in 1~8.Graphical representation of exemplary includes the pattern code output device of 6 elements (111) in the figure (131) and message input device (132, optical sensor).In addition, each element (111) of pattern code output device (131) shows Example property is illustrated as surrounding the circular indicia of the number of each symbol of graphical representation of exemplary (1~6).As Figure 72, in pattern code In output device (131), the distance between element (111) of all of its neighbor is identical.
In addition, imparting 0~10 sequence number in each pattern of pattern code.In addition, in each pattern, dark circles Shape represents the ON of symbol, and white circle represents the OFF of symbol.In pattern 1, code generating device (1), device (110) make to accord with Number (1~5) becomes ON, to make the configuration side of the element (111) in touch panel identification icon code output device (131) To.That is, the configuration direction of touch panel recognition component (111) and the ON of detection symbols (1~5) in pattern 1.The knowledge It is other as a result, information equipment (200) can also be quasi- from the positional relationship of the corresponding element (111) in symbol (1~5) with identification Really estimate element (111) position corresponding with symbol (6).
In pattern 2 into pattern 10, symbol (1), symbol (2) alternate repetition ON and OFF.Repeatedly according to the symbol, it touches The synchronous synchronization signal of the information pattern of symbol (3) to symbol (7) that panel can identify and change is touched, accurately identification dress Set the pattern of (110) output.Further, due to can distinguished symbol (1 and 2) always location information, thus in touch surface On plate, even if the slidings/rotation such as device (110) of the seal cut code generating device (1) of implementation form 0, implementation form 1~8 Turn, the information equipment (200) with touch panel can also easily estimate the element of output information pattern (symbol (1~6)) (111) change in location, can accurately identification icon code.
In being based on the data block of the above symbol (1) to the pattern 1 that symbol (6) combines to pattern 10, if symbol is defeated Time interval is determined as 50ms out, then the information content of 4bit × 8=32bit is received in 500ms.The intelligent hand of nearest type Machine can be identified with the interval 12ms and be touched, as a result, if it is considered that safety coefficient, seal cut code generating device (1) every 32ms are defeated Pattern code out, then it is most short that pattern code 32bit is received in 320ms.In addition, in code generating device (1), device (110) It, can also be by the dot code of information judging device interpretation with can be in the case where the information judging device of interpretation dot code Directly touch panel is output to from pattern code output device (131).
<<special pattern code pattern>>
Shape is implemented in the bottom surface of the seal cut code generating device (1) illustrated in Figure 75 graphical representation of exemplary implementation form 0 The front button, rear button of the inboard face of the device (110) illustrated in state 1~8 (side of contact touch panel) installation.Such as Fruit user presses front and back, the front and back on device (110) surface on the upside of seal cut code generating device (1), Then the bottom surface of code generating device (1), the button inside device (110) are ON.Front button and rear button are sent out for code Interrupt operation in generating apparatus (1) or device (110).As interrupt operation, from code generating device (1) or device (110) to The touch panel output of information equipment (200) is known as the pattern of special pattern, to make special pattern by information equipment (200) On pattern code processing routine identification, so-called interrupt processing can be executed.Wherein, so-called special pattern is pattern code The so-called reservation pattern of output device (131) output, is that can clearly distinguish with the pattern of the data block of Figure 74 graphical representation of exemplary Pattern.
Operation carries out information equipment (200) thing of the application program of response to code generating device (1) or device (110) First remember special pattern, when receiving special pattern from code generating device (1) or device (110), more preferably than other processing Pause/broadcasting of ground control content or printing/seal are re-issued.Even if code generating device (1) or device (110) are separate The touch panel of information equipment (200), information equipment (200) can also keep the memory of special pattern.
In another example code generating device (1) or device (110) pass through the interpretation dot generation in dot code interpretation device Code, to remember special pattern.Moreover, code generating device (1) or device (110) output respectively with front button or rear The corresponding pattern code of button.Code generating device (1) or device (110) are special in the new interpretation of dot code interpretation device When pattern, the special pattern of memory before removing.
Front switch or rear switch of the special pattern in bottom surface export when being ON.The graphical representation of exemplary spy in Figure 76 Different pattern.Special pattern is as shown, according to button (such as pressing less than 1 second), short-press rear button, long-pressing in front of short-press The push-botton operations such as front button (such as pressing 1 second or more), long-pressing rear button, it is defeated by pattern code output device (131) Out.Operation of the being illustrated below property diagram based on code generating device (1) or front button and rear button in device (110) Pattern.
(1) button in front of short-press (less than 1 second)
If front button ON was less than 1 second, then OFF, then symbol (1,2) are ON by pattern code output device (131) Export 2 seconds (pattern SPEC1).At this point, pattern code output device (131) terminates the symbol in execution and operating in the past Number output.Information equipment (200) if application program detect pattern SPEC1, receive on picture icon selection.No It crosses, the application program of information equipment (200) is in order to avoid misidentification, such as to identify identical special pattern at continuous 2 times In the case of handled.
(2) short-press rear button (less than 1 second)
If rear button ON was less than 1 second, then OFF, then pattern code output device (131) is defeated by symbol (1,2,4) 2 seconds (SPEC2) out.At this point, pattern code output device (131) terminates the symbol output in execution and operating in the past. Information equipment (200) if application program detect pattern SPEC2, played etc. in contents in image, receiving suspends/broadcasts It puts.It is re-issued in addition, the application program of information equipment (200) executes in printing or seal processing.But, information equipment (200) application program is in order to avoid misidentification, such as to carry out in the case where identifying identical special pattern continuous 2 times Processing.
(3) button (1 second or more) in front of long-pressing
If front button ON was up to 1 second or more, the continuous output symbol (1,2,6) of pattern code output device (131), Until code generating device (1) or device (110) leave, front button becomes OFF or presses other buttons (SPEC3).Information The application program of equipment (200) identifies the Special Graphs when being used for code generating device (1) or device (110) movement/rotation Case.But, it in order to avoid misidentification, identifies identical pattern code and is handled for continuous 2 times.On the other hand, user makes Device (110) keeps the state of button in front of long-pressing in the case where moving/rotating on touch panel.Information equipment (200) Application program once identify other special patterns, then, if 2 times identification SPEC3 pattern, continue directly to identify The processing of the pattern of SPEC3.By means of this, the application program of information equipment (200) tracks code generating device (1) or device (110) movement/rotation.
(4) long-pressing rear button (1 second or more)
If rear button ON was up to 1 second or more, symbol (1,2,4,6) are exported 2 by pattern code output device (131) Second (SPEC4).If implementing other operations, the output termination of SPEC4.In the application program of information equipment (200) terminates Hold, returns to standby picture.But, the application program of information equipment (200) identifies identical spy in order to avoid misidentification, continuous 2 times Different code is simultaneously handled.
But, the definition of message code as described above is example, and the implementation of non-present invention is defined in message code Definition.For example, in the case where message input device (132) are 1 channel, it can also be by graphical representation of exemplary in Figure 10~13 Pen type code generating device pattern code (based on from element (111) physical quantity variation bit string), be applied to (slave touch panel, display device based on light quantity variation etc. are input into device (110) to light code in this implementation form 1~8 Message code).In addition, Ethernet (registered trademark), Wireless LAN etc. can also will be defined as in the case where 1 channel The lead code of frame, frame start the bit string of identification etc. or delay to the simplification of these bit strings, along time-axis direction, apply Message code in this implementation form 1~8.In addition, being exported for symbol of the implementation form 1 into implementation form 8, with reality Apply the pattern code generating device (1) described in form 0 equally, device (110) can be with the ON/OFF time interval of composite symbol Length and form symbol (referring for example to Figure 10~Figure 12, Figure 26, Figure 27).In addition, device (110) can also be by symbol Output intensity is set as multiple grades, so that according to symbol output intensity level come output information (referring to Fig.1 3).Further Ground, information equipment (200) is in terms of receiving the light code to shine based on display device to device (110), and based on device (110) pattern code of symbol is the same, can also combine the length of ON/OFF time interval and form light code.In addition, letter Breath equipment (200) light intensity can also be carried out by multiple grades it is luminous, to combine the strength level of light and form light Code.
<deformation of physical quantity variation>
For the implementation form, in implementation form 1 into implementation form 8, pass through SW (115) connecting element (111) between contact conductor, to increase the detectable capacitor of touch panel.But it is also possible to replace this composition, it is right Element (111) assigns pulse signal (or AC signal), to increase the actual effect capacitor of the element (111) of touch panel detection.
The touch of the device of this variation (110Y) and detection device (110Y) physical quantity variation of Figure 77 graphical representation of exemplary Panel.As shown, touch panel has contact detecting (transparent electrode), alternating message source (A) and detection circuit.In addition, The voltage of AC signal (sine wave) or pulse signal is supplied to contact detecting by alternating message source (A).Contact detecting (transparent electrode) have it is multipair, be connected to ac current source (A) person and be connected to detection circuit person constitute it is a pair of.Pairs of Electric flux occurs between contact detecting (transparent electrode).That is, forming electricity between pairs of contact detecting (transparent electrode) Container.That is, contact detecting (transparent electrode) executes the object similar with the sensor of so-called mutual capacitive touch panels Analyte detection movement.Detection circuit detects the capacitor between contact detecting (transparent electrode) to from alternating message source (A) The charging of signal, discharge charge amount, or according to the electric field strength between contact detecting (transparent electrode), detection is contacted or is connect The presence of conductor, the dielectric of adosculation test section (transparent electrode) etc..
For example, making if device (110Y) approaches or contact by insulating film etc. the contact detecting of touch panel A part of electric flux of the contact detecting of alternating message source (A) must be connected to towards the element (111) of device (110Y).Knot Fruit, the electric flux number between pairs of contact detecting (transparent electrode) reduce, and electric field strength dies down.Detection circuit is from this The variation of electric field strength, situation and close position of the detecting element (111) close to contact detecting.
But in the case where element (111) area is small, it is unable to fully receive from being connected to alternating message source (A) The electric flux of contact detecting.That is, element (111) can not be between the contact detecting for being connected to alternating message source (A) Generate sufficiently big capacitor.Therefore, detection circuit can not detection device (110Y) element (111) presence.It is right as its Plan, by means of SW (115) and contact conductor (114), connects the finger of people and human body in implementation form 1 into implementation form 8 Element (111) are connected to, to increase the apparent capacity of element (111).
In this variation, replace and connected the finger of people and human body with conductor (114) are contacted by means of SW (115) In element (111), but element (111) will be assigned with the signal of alternating message source (A) anti-phase.Figure 77 graphical representation of exemplary exists The contact detecting of some time point T1 and the state of charge of element (111).It is assumed that T1 at the time point, is being connected to exchange The contact detecting (+place) of signal source (A), applies positive voltage (positive pulse), charge positive charge.On the other hand, in element (111) it is equipped in and the alternating message source of alternating message source anti-phase (B).Therefore, T1 at the time point is applying negative voltage (just Pulse), charge negative electrical charge.Then, even if the small situation of element (111) area is exchanged by means of negative electrical charge with no anti-phase The situation of voltage caused by signal source (B) is compared, and can be concentrated in the contact detecting for being connected to alternating message source (A) more Electric flux.As a result, the electric flux number between pairs of contact detecting (transparent electrode) reduces, electric field strength dies down.Therefore, By means of the voltage as caused by anti-phase alternating message source (B), even if in the case where element (111) area reduces, detection circuit Also it is able to detect the presence of element (111).
This AC signal occurring source (B) is placed on device (110Y), applies AC signal to element (111), thus Even than the smaller area of the implementation form 1~8, such as diameter 4mm, 3mm, 2mm, 1mm or the element less than 1mm, Touch panel can be made to be based on capacitance variations, that is, presence and the element (111) of detecting element (111) based on physical quantity variation Approximated position, or pass through the contact position of insulating film (or glass etc.).
In Figure 78, graphical representation of exemplary uses alternating message source (A) for touch panel detection, and the exchange letter of inverted image occurs Number alternating message source (B) constitute.Alternating message source (B) have detection electric flux variation (electric field strength variation) detector, Amplifier (AMP1) that the detection signal of detector detection is amplified, by the output signal and benchmark of amplifier (AMP1) The comparator that voltage is compared, and to the amplifier (AMP2) that the output of comparator amplifies.
Electric flux enters detector from the contact detecting for the alternating message source (A) for being connected to touch panel.Electric flux The density of direction (positive/negative) and electric flux, i.e. electric field strength, be positive according to the signal and changing from alternating message source (A)/ Negative value.But if detector according to electrostatic induction principle, when the alternating message source (A) for being connected to touch panel Contact detecting be timing, detector is negatively charged.Therefore, in a detector, the friendship that touch panel is connected to investment occurs Flow the signal of the AC signal anti-phase of the contact detecting of signal source (A).
Amplifier (AMP1) is known as inverting amplifier.Then, amplifier (AMP1) invert to detector signal and be put Greatly, it is input to comparator.Therefore, the signal of comparator and the contact for the alternating message source (A) for being connected to touch panel are input to Test section becomes the signal with phase.
Comparator is compared the output voltage of amplifier (AMP1) with reference voltage, to generate positive/negative pulse. Now, it is assumed that in the case where the output signal of amplifier (AMP1) is more than reference voltage, positive output letter will occur for comparator Number.In addition, amplifier (AMP2) is known as inverting amplifier.Then, amplifier (AMP2) inverts the output of comparator, thus In element (111), the signal with the signal anti-phase of detector detection all occurs.
It, can be by the inverse with alternating message source (A, pulse signal source) of touch panel according to circuit member as described above The signal of phase assigns element (111).Therefore, it even if the size of element (111) is small, can also be detected in touch panel.
In addition, in Figure 77, Tu78Zhong, for mutual capacitance type touch panel, it is shown that improve to the sensitive of element (111) The configuration example of degree.For self capacitance type touch panel, with described, detection with touch panel can also occur with exchanging The signal of signal source (or pulse signal source) anti-phase assigns element (111).Self capacitance type touch panel is by means of in element (111) capacitor formed between, the position of recognition component (111), thus the signal of anti-phase is applied to element (111), thus It, can will be opposite with the contact detecting (+place) electrode of the alternating message source (A) that is connected to touch panel with described Charge is sent to element (111), and the sensitivity of touch panel can be improved in actual effect.According to the composition of Figure 78, even if subtracting The area of small element (111), also can be with sufficient sensitivity, the physical quantity variation for causing touch panel to detect, for example, drawing Play the electric field strength variation etc. between contact detecting.As a result, detection circuit is situated between in conductor, the electricity relative to contact detecting In the case where element (111) of the area of matter etc. less than implementation form 1 to implementation form 8, conductor, dielectric also can detecte Deng close, contact etc..The composition of the present apparatus (110Y) also can be applied to implementation form 1 to implementation form 8.
<implementation form 14>
Referring to referring to Figure 79~Figure 83, illustrate the light sensing of device (110) relevant to implementation form of the invention 14 Device.Optical sensor relevant to implementation form 14 may be used as the optical sensor (130) in implementation form 8.Device (110) example As identical as card-type device by implementation form 1 described in equal etc..
Optical sensor (130) relevant to implementation form 14 has as the LED of light-emitting component and as light receiving element The combination of photodiode.That is, optical sensor (130) has the display that can detecte from the touch panel or PC of smart phone The wavelength of the luminous light of device (hereinafter also referred to touch panel etc.) or the light receiving element of intensity, receive to become along time orientation The light of change simultaneously obtains light code.On the other hand, optical sensor (130) is from light-emitting component (also referred to as irradiation unit) Xiang Yin When the chrominance section of brush product has irradiated light, reflected light can also be received and obtain Color Color code.At this point, being passed using light The printing zone that the reflected light of sensor detection is reflected is considered as same color.This is because in the feelings that device (110) is card Under condition, when the position in loading device (110), the color difference of the printing zone of each photodiode detection range, by In card-type device loading method and there is color change, colouring information detects different, thus abandoned.Wherein, identical face The printing zone of color refers to, in the state that the optical sensor (130) for including each photodiode does not move, detects reflected light Printed matter surface range.Therefore, in 1 printed medium face, there can also be the multiple printing zones for constituting different color matchings. In addition, device (110) can be by determining whether the light to shine from touch panel etc. changes over time light, to hold It changes places and identifies whether to load on one of touch panel etc. or printed matter.In addition, utilizing transmission signal, base based on light-emitting component Whether there is specific relationship in the reception signal of light receiving element, it is possible to determine that whether be the reflected light from printed matter.Such as In the case where irradiating specific pulse signal (luminous signal of HI and LO) from light-emitting component, when light receiving element has received phase With pulse signal when, it can be determined that be the reflected light from printed matter.On the other hand, light receiving element receive with from In the case where the inconsistent signal of the pulse signal of light-emitting component irradiation, it is possible to determine that be the reflected light for being not from printed matter A possibility that it is high.In the case ofs being identified as device (110) and loading on touch panel etc., optical sensor (130) stops irradiation and is It can.In the case of the light irradiated from irradiation unit does not have an impact the light code identification that touch panel etc. shines, light Sensor (130) can continue to irradiate.
Figure 79 is the plan view from the light-receiving surface of optical sensor (130A).In the center of optical sensor (130A), make White LED (140) are configured with for irradiation unit.Around White LED (140), by predetermined distance configuration with through each R photodiode (141), the G photodiode (142), B photodiode of the color filter of different wave length light (RGB) (143).R photodiode (141), G photodiode (142), B photodiode (143), which also can be used, to be had to colors The photodiode of the sensitivity of wavelength region light.
Figure 80 is the plan view in the light-receiving surface observation of the optical sensor (130B) with 6 photodiodes.Light sensing Device (130B) is configured with White LED (140) in center, R photodiode (141), G photodiode (142), two pole of B photoelectricity Pipe (143) respectively 2 one group by configuring at equal intervals.In Figure 80 example, each photodiode is upper from White LED (140) Side is risen, and is arranged in order along clockwise direction by R- > G- > B- > R- > G- > B.
White LED (140) is located at apart from each photodiode nearly identical distance.The light quantity of substantially the same degree It is irradiated in printed medium face, therefore, R photodiode (141), G photodiode (142), B photodiode (143) receive Light quantity be considered as identical degree.But when the printed state of each photodiode lower part is inhomogenous, color code A possibility that in the presence of can not accurately decode.Therefore, by making R photodiode (141), G photodiode (142), B light The position of electric diode (143) approaches to the maximum extent, even if light income slightly color change, it is believed that this difference is not enough to Even influencing decoding.If irradiation unit becomes the form that can equably irradiate printed medium face, with White LED (140) position is unrelated, preferably the position of R photodiode (141), G photodiode (142), B photodiode (143) It is close to each other.As shown in Figure 79, in the example that photodiode configures 3, preferably each diode is as constituted triangle one Sample is close, using light guide plate etc., the equably printed medium face of illumination colors code interpretation object.
R photodiode (141), G photodiode (142), B photodiode (143) detect red (R), green respectively The light intensity of color (G), blue (B).Although the level of detection additionally depends on printing precision, but can at least realize each 8 grade (3 Color × 3bit=9bit, 512 colors)~16 grades (3 colors × 4bit=12bit, 4096 colors) detection.If printing density is high, It then can detecte more grades.
Wherein, in order to prevent to misidentify, white photodiode can also be added, is detected according to white photodiode Light intensity and R photodiode (141), G photodiode (142), B photodiode (143) detection light intensity Relationship (grade) it is whether normal and implement error check.As method furthermore, such as optical sensor (130B) institute in Figure 80 Show, is also possible to R photodiode (141), G photodiode (142), B photodiode (143) and pacifies 2 by one group respectively Whether dress, 2 photodiode light detected by means of detecting same color light are in same grade and implement False retrieval is tested.At this point, as shown in Figure 80, the photodiode of preferably detection same color does not configure closely.This be because For also can be made whether to load on the color code for obtaining same color region exterior domain printing surface.In addition, due to It is printed on medium using the ink of cyan (C), fuchsin (M), yellow (Y), thus each photodiode can also be equipped with transmission Cyan, fuchsin, yellow wavelengths light filter so that detecting the intensity of each light.
Figure 81~Figure 83 be along Figure 79 with " A section " and printed words arrow truncation optical sensor sectional view, show The variation of optical sensor (130A) is shown.
Figure 81 is the sectional view of optical sensor (130C).Optical sensor (130C) is the light for being mounted with to have given thickness The form of transmitting plate (145), to come from the irradiation light of White LED (140), each light to the irradiation of the printing zone of color code Electric diode can receive set reflected light.The light irradiated from White LED (140) as point light source is in R photodiode (141), G photodiode (142), B photodiode (143) each surface receive the reflected light of equivalent.With regard to the light of reflected light For amount, the light quantity in the printed medium face from White LED (140) lower part is high, reduces to periphery, thus there is the color of printing The situation that information can not be obtained accurately.But when being embedded with light transmitting plate (145) in card-type device (110), if Peripheral side is formed with reflecting material, then light is in offside reflection, thus even if light quantity does not also reduce accordingly in peripheral portion.When When not being embedded with light transmitting plate, reflecting plate can also be provided to peripheral side.
Figure 82 is the sectional view of optical sensor (130D).Optical sensor (130D) is in order to from White LED (140) conduct Area source spreads irradiation to multiple directions and spreads the form of filter (146) in White LED (140) outfit light immediately below.By In this, for optical sensor (130D), White LED (140) can more equably irradiate printed medium face.White LED (140) scattered reflection processing also can be implemented.
Figure 83 is the sectional view of optical sensor (130E).Optical sensor (130E) be replace light transmitting plate and use so that The form of the molding light diffusing sheet (147) of material (White acrylic resin etc.) of light diffusion.As a result, from White LED (140) light irradiated is almost equably irradiated in printed medium face, and reflected light is also by scattered reflection.Therefore, the position of light The variation of light income caused by difference reduces.Even if printed state is bad, color of color code interpretation printed medium face has change In the case of change, optical sensor (130E) can also receive reflected light via equalization.
In implementation form 14 so that receive the light of 3 kinds of different wavelength such as R, G, B, but wavelength be not limited to R, G, The light of other wavelength also can be used in B, carrys out interpretation light code by means of identical structure.In addition, being equipped with only makes both standing waves The long filter penetrated, the quantity that can receive the light receiving device (photodiode etc.) of the light of different wave length do not limit.It can sentence The information content of reading increases with the quantity of light receiving device.In addition, either irradiation unit irradiation includes whole different wave lengths Light, can also by each different wave length, be equipped with irradiation given wavelength irradiation unit.
In addition, the code interpretation device with the optical sensor (130A or 130B) is also used as the code of seal Interpretation device.In addition, device (110) can replace the light receiving element for receiving different wave length light and use as optical sensor Receive the light receiving element of same color or a part of duplicate wavelength region light.This receiving same color using multiple Or in the case where the light receiving element of a part of duplicate wavelength region light, the light-receiving surface of the separation such as next door light receiving element is utilized , so as to the reflection region separation of the medium side of each light receiving element light, from Jie for being incident on each light receiving element The reflected light of the reflecting region in matter face is not obscured.
<implementation form 15>
Referring to Figure 84~Figure 86, illustrate the pattern code for exporting digital seal relevant to implementation form 15 of the present invention.With The relevant digital seal of implementation form 15 can be and the identical composition of code generating device (1) shown in implementation form 0.
[pattern code output]
Figure 84 is an exemplary ideograph for showing the composition of contact surface of digital seal and information equipment (200).Number Word seal has information judging device data input part (components of photo-electric conversion arrangement) (112) and 5 elements (111) (also referred to as Pattern code output device), there is information judging instruction notch portion (26) on the outer periphery.Information judging indicates notch portion (26) It is identical as information judging instruction notch portion (26) that the code generating device (1) in implementation form 0 is equipped with.
5 elements (111) are semiconductor, and as implementation form 0, as shown in symbol (1) to symbol (5), importing is come from The output information of each element (111).Element (111) of the symbol (1) on the downside of information judging device data input part (112) is defeated Out.2 elements (111) output of symbol (2) and symbol (3) on the right side of information judging device data input part (112), upside For symbol (2), downside is symbol (3).Symbol (4) and symbol (5) on the left of information judging device data input part (112) 2 A element (111) output, downside are symbol (4), and upside is symbol (5).Symbol is as being in 1 description of implementation form According to the interaction of the sensor (physical quantity transducer) of the physical quantity of detecting element (111) and detectable touch panel etc. And by the physical quantity transducer of touch panel etc. signal detected.
Digital seal switches the ON/OFF of each symbol, is configured in plane, from the multiple element with spatial expansion (111) the arrangement pattern (being also known as pattern or information pattern merely below) of output multiplicity, to export to information equipment (200) information (pattern code) sent.That is, pattern code refers to the ON by making the symbol exported from multiple element (111) The information for changing on a timeline with OFF combination and showing.In addition, the symbol of slave multiple element (111) output at a time Number ON and OFF group be collectively referred to as pattern.Moreover, the state of the ON and OFF of symbol are by means of each element (111) and touch surface The electric field strength of capacitor or touch panel surface between plate changes, and passes to touch panel from digital seal.That is, information is set Standby (200) detection load or close to each element in the digital seal contact surface of the touch panel built in case surface (111) position of the capacitance variations between touch panel (or the electric field strength variation on touch panel surface) and element (111) It sets, to obtain pattern code from digital seal.
Digital seal changes the information pattern of variation along time orientation, encodes to a large amount of pattern code, repeatedly Output phase answers pattern code, so as to exhaustive identifies.Therefore, digital seal makes letter using a series of pattern codes as data block Cease the differentiation of equipment (200) identification data block.The differentiation basis of data block does not enter unique 1 of other patterns or more and schemes Case defines.In turn, along the information pattern that time orientation is changed, there is also the feelings that identical pattern recurs Shape needs the time interval that accurately identification icon occurs.Although every kind of type has difference at the touch recognition interval of touch panel The touch recognition interval (identification of capacitor or electric field strength variation) of the touch panel of different but existing smart phone is 20ms ~40ms or so.But no matter which kind of type, the application program of the interpretation side starting of smart phone or tablet terminal etc., it is difficult to Incremental time (time increment) in detecting element (111) and hum pattern when information pattern occurs from digital seal Between the origination interval of case, synchronization is accurately obtained.It is therefore preferable that digital seal, which occurs to obtain, synchronizes required pattern, so that Information equipment (200) is capable of the origination interval of identification information pattern.For obtaining synchronous pattern not according to whole symbols (1 ~5) it is defined, can also be formed according to a part of symbol, such as according to symbol (1).
In this embodiment, generation of the digital seal according to each information pattern, the ON/ of alternate repetition symbol (1) OFF.Touch panel of information equipment (200) etc. can be decoded with the origination interval of identification information pattern from digital seal as a result, The information pattern of output.
Figure 85 is the figure of the output example of display pattern code.Pattern code output device (111) switches the ON/ of each symbol OFF, to export the information pattern of multiplicity.In Figure 85, each information pattern is accompanied with sequence number from left side.No. 0 (sequence Row number 0) information pattern be symbol (1~5) be OFF state situation.That is, in Figure 85, with white circle graphical representation of exemplary Element represent OFF, ON is represented with the element of black circles graphical representation of exemplary.So-called ON, such as the device with implementation form 1 (110) identical, refer to the connection switch (SW of implementation form 1 that element (111) is connected to other conductors or the finger of people (115)), the situation for being ON such as.It is also same as described above for the definition of OFF.Digital seal loads on information equipment (200) Touch panel, thus it is for example identical as the device of implementation form 1 (110), receive power supply simultaneously from information equipment (200) etc. It starts running.That is, symbol (1~5) is ON state as shown in the information pattern at No. 1 (sequence number 1).In addition, number Word seal can be by means of battery, or receives electric power by the light-to-current inversion based on components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) and supply It answers, the components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) receives the light from touch panel.
In Figure 85, the differentiation of data block is by 2 information pattern institutes such as No. 1 information pattern 1 and No. 2 information pattern 2 Definition.In addition, in the following description, No. n-th information pattern is known as pattern n.Pattern 1 makes symbol (1~5) become ON, pattern 2 Symbol (1,3,4) is set to become ON.In the symbol (1~5) for the information pattern that definition is exported along time orientation, symbol (1) is alternately ON/OFF repeatedly.From in this point, in pattern 1 and pattern 2,3 or more in continuous output symbol (1) and symbol (2~5) The ON of (being also possible to 0).Therefore, symbol (1) continuous 2 times are the pattern 1 of ON and combination (the hereinafter also referred to base of pattern 2 Quasi- symbol pattern), the method for generation of the symbol (1) in the continuous pattern combination of data block is different.Therefore, fiducial mark figure Case becomes the unique continuous pattern distinguished with other information pattern, the differentiation of identification data block.
In addition, the configuration direction of element (111) is uncertain when symbol (1~5) is when being configured to axis rotational symmetry, thus There are the unrecognized situations of configuration sequence of symbol (2~5).At this point, in pattern 2, if by symbol (2~5) at least 1 is ON with symbol (1) output, then the application program of information equipment (200) can be with the configuration direction of distinguished symbol.Identification figure The application program detection symbols (1) of case code and the output of symbol (2~5), implement comparative evaluation, identification continuous 2 with Symbol (1) whole ON person in upper pattern, or if the ON/OFF of symbol (2~5) combines difference, can be identified as counting According to the differentiation of block.In addition, being continuously not limited to symbol (1) for the symbol of ON state, which symbol is also possible to 3 A above symbol combination is continuously the pattern groups of ON.It but, is continuously the symbol of ON state in the pattern groups for being output into differentiation Except information pattern when, be considered as alternate repetition ON/OFF.
In addition, becoming the pattern groups distinguished also may include the continuous symbol for OFF.That is, the symbol of alternate repetition ON/OFF It is used as the differentiation of data block and number can also become the state of OFF by making respective symbol continuously.At this point, different elements (111) In each information pattern, the symbol of different location is become into ON.Due to being to make information content maximum using the symbolic number of restriction Change, thus preferably according to the ON/OFF of 1 symbol come detection time interval.If digital seal using the differentiation of data block and All symbols are made to become ON in certain one of pattern 1 or pattern 2, then the touch panel of information equipment (200), which can identify, adds The symbol configuration state of load.Therefore, the touch panel of information equipment (200) can also hold after the differentiation of identification data block It changes places and detects the output for the information pattern being changed.
The number for the information pattern that 1 data block includes is different because of the pattern code of output, in information equipment (200) In the case where the output number of application program side identification information pattern, application program obtains and believes before and after data block differentiation It ceases pattern and exports the corresponding pattern of number, so as to be decoded to pattern code.That is, information equipment (200) can not also take Obtain data block distinguishes pattern to all information patterns between next differentiation pattern.There are following feelings for information equipment (200) Shape, such as from the differentiation pattern at moment is represented to next differentiation pattern, a part of information pattern is obtained in the first data block, And then until its next differentiation pattern, obtains remaining information pattern in the second data block.In this case, information equipment (200) insufficient information pattern can be obtained in the second data block, terminate decoding in this step.According to this step Suddenly, information equipment (200) can shorten decoding time.
In Figure 85, the output information pattern according to 3~pattern of pattern 9.Pattern 9 will add 3~pattern of pattern 8 Digit under 2 systems of each symbol ON/OFF (1bit) distributes to the symbol ON/OFF (1bit) of corresponding pattern 9, is formed odd Even parity check (error check) code.In order to prevent the error detection of information equipment (200) side, which kind of error check or mistake utilized It corrects.If exporting above each pattern by the interval 50ms, digital seal includes the OFF state of the pattern 0 of original state Inside, even if pressing 0.5 second information pattern to data block additional parity, 4bit × 6 patterns=24bit can also be exported (less than 1700 codes).In addition, in this case, information equipment (200) hypothesis implemented even-odd check in 0.5 second.In number Time needed for the extra parity information pattern of word seal side (or processing time of information equipment (200) side) is 1 second In the case of, huge pattern code can be exported by means of 48bit (about 300,000,000 code).In order to by the pattern code application In electronic accounting etc., the pattern code of 128bit or more is preferably exported.The smart phone of nearest type can be by the interval of 12ms Identification touches, and as a result, if every 25ms output pattern code, 40 patterns can be identified in 1 second.By means of this, intelligence Can mobile phone can be exported in 1 second, the differentiation that identifies 2 data blocks, 32 128bit patterns, 6 error check patterns, Add up to 40 pattern codes.In addition, multiple patterns can also be used for error check by digital seal.Based on this symbol (1~ 5) pattern code output can also be used for the output of pattern code in card-type device.At this point, switching symbol (1~5) How each element (111) of ON/OFF configures.
In addition, after the repeated multiple times pattern code output based on 1~pattern of pattern 9 of digital seal, if information equipment (200) etc. the application program of operations terminates the identification of pattern code, then allows digital seal to move, rotate, user can To operate application program.In the example of Figure 85, multiple output symbol (1,2,5) is the pattern 11 of ON state, to be identified as The end of output of pattern code, digital seal can be moved, be rotated.But, pattern 11 can also be used as common information pattern It uses, therefore, the output pattern 10 as differentiation pattern.Distinguishing pattern 10 is that symbol (1~5) is made to be the pattern of ON state.Area Sub-pattern 10 and the combination (fiducial mark pattern) of the pattern 11 of output next time are uniquely distinguished with other information pattern.Root According to the output of pattern 10 and pattern 11, it is identified as the end of output of pattern code, allows to implement the rotation to digital seal Turn, moving operation.
Figure 86 is the figure of another output example of display pattern code.The example of Figure 86 is corresponding with the output example that Figure 85 is shown, Chronologically show the ON/OFF of each symbol.For example, if digital seal load on or close to information equipment (200) touch Panel, then for example with the device of implementation form 1 (110) equally, receive power supply from information equipment (200) etc., export conduct The pattern 1 and pattern 2 of fiducial mark pattern, start the output of pattern code.In pattern 1, symbol (1~5) is ON state. In pattern 2, symbol (1) is ON state, and symbol (2~5) is OFF state.Due to symbol (1) continuous 2 times, pattern 1 and figure Case 2 is identified as fiducial mark pattern.In addition, pattern 2 can also make the symbol except symbol (1) become ON, the example of Figure 85 Show that symbol (1,3,4) are ON state.By making the symbol except symbol (1) become ON, the direction of digital seal is special It is fixed, thus pattern 2 is also referred to as directional patterns.
Symbol (1) is by being spaced ON/OFF repeatedly between both timing.Symbol (2)~symbol (5) is cut in the pattern of each output Change ON/OFF.Symbol (2)~symbol (5) is ON state, is shown with dotted line.For example, pattern 4 is symbol (2) and symbol (4) For ON state.Element (111) as pattern code output device is anti-by means of the information symbol pattern of 3~pattern of pattern 9 28 information output is carried out again.In addition, each information symbol pattern of 3~pattern of pattern 9, outputting reference symbol pattern (figure Case 1 and pattern 2).In addition, the final 4bit based on the pattern 9 before fiducial mark pattern is also used as parity check bit.
Pattern code output device (111) output symbol (1)~symbol (5) is the pattern 10 of ON state, and symbol is repeated Number (1,2,5) are the output of the pattern 11 of ON state, thus the end of output of representative pattern code.The output of representative pattern code The fiducial mark pattern of end is the combination of pattern 10 or pattern 10 and directional patterns 11.After pattern code end of output, instead The output of the pattern 11 as directional patterns is carried out again.
Digital card (the card-type device illustrated in the specification and implementation form 8 of the pattern code of number seal described above (110G) etc.) pattern code specification can mutually use.That is, digital seal can also use figure identical with implementation form 8 Case code specifications.In addition, in implementation form 1~8, it can also be using the pattern code as this implementation form.In addition, The function that digital seal and digital card have can selectively combine certain function from other side, be provided to digital seal or number Word card.
<variation furthermore>
In the experiment that inventor carries out, in seal type code generating device (1), the card-type device of the implementation form (110) etc. in, in the case where using 2 section AA type dry cells as power supply, it is known that code generating device (1), card-type device (110) etc. capacitance variations are the degree that can be sufficiently identified by the touch panel of portable phone etc..That is, dry using 2 section AA types In the case where battery, that is, make the finger of people not in hookup 38 graphical representation of exemplary contact conductor (114), the touching of portable phone Capacitance variations caused by the ON and OFF of SW (115) can also sufficiently be detected by touching panel etc..Thus, for example in implementation form 0 The code generating device (1) of graphical representation of exemplary in Fig. 1, Figure 14 etc., the device illustrated in 1~implementation form of implementation form 9 (110) etc. or in card-type device (110H) etc., by apparatus surface or the area tune of the metal of plastic plate inner containment It is whole to be the degree of 2 section AA type dry cells, to not utilize contact conductor (114), also can reduce capacitor in touch panel or The variation of the physical quantitys such as electric field strength.
In addition, there are many situation of stickup tempered glass or protective film on touch panel, maximum gauge is less than 1mm, detection The capacitor of 1 electric conductor needed for physical quantity variation caused by the ON/OFF of SW (115) is 1.5Pf or so or more.Institute as above It states, it, can if having the electric conductor for being equivalent to 2 section AAA dry cells when using element (111) of 7~8mm of diameter or so With the shell of electrical insulator production code generating device (1) or card-type device (110) etc..On the other hand, when the electricity is not achieved Rong Shi can make the upside of the shell of code generating device (1) or the plastic plate of device (110) preferably with electric conductor (table side face) configures metal layer in the plastic plate of device (110), carries out ON/OFF using SW (115) etc..The condition Different due to because of the performance of touch panel side or causing the circuit of capacitance variations, this is self-evident.
In addition, in the 1~implementation form of implementation form 9, as physical quantity variation, graphical representation of exemplary capacitor or The electric field strength on touch panel surface changes.But in an embodiment of the present invention, physical quantity variation be not limited to capacitor or Electric field strength variation.That is, according to the physical quantity of the information input operation detection variation by receiving such as information equipments (200), Corresponding variation occurs for device (110) etc..
<implementation form 16>
Referring to Figure 87~Figure 91, to digital card (1~implementation form of implementation form 9 relevant to implementation form 16 of the present invention Device (110,110A~110J) etc.) be that the purposes of situation of card-type device is illustrated.Card relevant to implementation form 16 Type device is also referred to as G-Card.Digital card relevant to implementation form 16 for example may be used as the peace in personal authentication or circulation Various purposes such as full management.In addition, in G-Card, the seal type code generating device that can illustrate in the form of application implementation 0 Including circuit, sensor, conductor configuration, rate-determining steps.
[individual authentication system]
Figure 87~Figure 91 illustrates the example that G-Card is used for personal authentication.Figure 87 is the existing credit card of graphical representation of exemplary Figure.In the payment that the card using the multiplicity such as existing credit card carries out, the valuableness for interpretation IC chip or magnetic stripe is utilized Card reader.In turn, capable of realizing the card of information input output in a non contact fashion, there are its ID during transmitting-receiving is stolen reading A possibility that, especially magnetic card etc. is easy to be replicated the worry of forgery there are ID.
Figure 88 is the figure for showing the use example of card-type device (G-Card).Figure 89 is the variation for showing card-type device Figure.In addition, the multiple element and sensor in the configuration of the inside of G-Card are covered by non-conductive film.In the example of Figure 88, G- Card has finger print identifying panel on surface.But, even if even without finger print identifying panel.In addition, in the example of Figure 89 In, G-Card has Password Input touch panel on surface.In addition, G-Card inside has signature input touch panel.No It crosses, Password Input touch panel and signature input touch panel also can be omitted.
G-Card is by being used as credit card or prepaid card, accumulating card, various member cards, so as to greatly improve just Benefit and safety.G-Card card ID is stored in illustrate in implementation form 8 is equal it is exemplary as memory (117) etc. In the nonvolatile memory enumerated.Alternatively, G-Card by means of make the changed G-Card of physical quantity and touch panel it Between interaction, by pattern code output device (131), to the touch panel output pattern generation of information equipment (200) Code.Alternatively, G-Card is to the light by message input device (132) from receiving such as the display devices of information equipment (200) Light quantity variation, the power of each wavelength or fluorescent lifetime, intermittent time grade are identified (digitlization) and input information.
When implementing self acknowledging or approval, signing under a variety of scenes, in smart phone or tablet computer, dedicated recognize It demonstrate,proves in the information equipments (200) such as device, the starting of G-Card authentication application program.Moreover, with regard to smart phone or tablet computer, dedicated For the information equipments such as authenticator (200), touch panel is touched with the G-Card that I holds, receives and spy is carried out to G-Card Fixed pattern code, to implement self acknowledging.At this point, G-Card can be by means of from graphical representation of exemplary in Figure 89, Figure 88 Touch panel Password Input or finger print identifying etc. and improve safety.
As shown in Figure 89, the signature that G-Card can also write user's finger or stylus in touch panel It is authenticated.G-Card can also extract the characteristic point of signature, be compared, authenticate with the characteristic point recorded in card.G-Card It by the track of signature as pattern code, is sent to information equipment (200), information equipment (200) passes received signature track It is defeated to arrive cloud etc., to can also implement to authenticate beyond the clouds.
In order to make to steal the pattern code for reading the G-Card obtained from touch panel and export figure identical as corresponding G-Card Forgery G-Card of case code etc. is not available, and G-Card obtains the light code to shine from touch panel, will be with the light generation of acquirement The 2nd ID calculated based on the ID that code and G-Card are recorded in memory (117) etc. and with set algorithm, which is exported, is Pattern code.Information equipment (200) can carry out the certification of G-Card as a result,.In addition, G-Card can also first from G-Card exports the first ID to information equipment (200), the touch panel (display device) of information equipment (200) to the first ID Corresponding smooth code carries out luminous.In addition, the light code to shine from the touch panel of information equipment (200) is generated as cloud Disposal password, meanwhile, by the second password calculated based on the first ID of G-Card be used as disposable ID, so as to To realize more advanced safety.
Firstly, G-Card is loaded on the touch panel of information equipment (200) by user.Then, G-Card works as ID1 Make pattern code, by pattern code output device (131), is output in the touch panel of information equipment (200).Information equipment (200) pattern code being docked to is decoded, and is sent to cloud.Cloud receives ID1, is spaced by between both timing, 1 time is worked as Make parameter, the ID2 calculated using corresponding time and ID1 as parameter is sent to information equipment (200).Information equipment (200) will ID2 is transformed to light code, is sent by means of shining for the display device of information equipment (200) etc. to G-Card.G-Card is logical It crosses message input device (132) and receives light code, generate ID3 by set algorithm, it is defeated by pattern code output device (131) For touch panel.The ID3 of acquirement is sent cloud by the sequence of information equipment (200) as described above, and just whether certification ID1 Really.But, ID1 also can be omitted.In the case where not using ID1, the ID2 calculated using the time as parameter is sent to by cloud Information equipment (200), implements identical processing.
Now, when carrying out payment for goods clearing using internet, by the name recorded in input credit card or prepaid card or Card number, validity period, security code and may be implemented to settle accounts.Therefore, as shown in Figure 90, on shop and other places, sticked into when submitting credit When row clearing, the situation of the information recorded in copy card and the payment being maliciously used on internet based on the information is Increase.G-Card only passes through the information equipments such as the smart phone of contact G-Card user when internet is settled accounts (200) clearing just be can be carried out, therefore, as long as G-Card is not stolen, will not occur to input credit card etc. because other people pretend The situation that number is settled accounts.
In turn, by making the ID and G-Card of the information equipments such as smart phone (200) link, can make even if G- Card is stolen, can not use if not my smart phone.Even if in the feelings that smart phone and G-Card are all stolen , can also be by progress finger print identifying when using G-Card under condition, or recognized as shown in Figure 91 by means of Password Input Card, to realize safe self acknowledging.In addition, in Figure 91 graphical representation of exemplary processing, such as can according to Figure 45, Figure 46, The sequence of graphical representation of exemplary is implemented in the flow charts such as Figure 51, Figure 52, Figure 54, Figure 55, Figure 67, Figure 68.
[security system]
The counterfeit or smuggled goods of the manufactures such as developing country are just in row.Especially to the names such as best brand of product your make or It is a world subject that the counterfeit relevant to the life of people such as food, drug, which carries out strike,.Figure 92~Figure 95 illustrates G- Example of the Card for security systems such as product guarantees.
Figure 92 is the figure for showing G-Card use example used in product guarantee.G-Card can be used as product and guarantee institute The guarantee card that needs and be clipped in corresponding product packaging and use.Alternatively, very thin G-Card module can also be built in corresponding product Packaging itself, or product is pasted in shipment with seal state.By means of this, may be implemented high-precision identification or Trackability (traceability).
As described in equal in 1~implementation form of implementation form 8, the inside of G-Card and G-Card module are with more A element and solar panel for receiving light code or power supply.In addition, element etc. is built in G-Card, led by non- Electrolemma covering.
For user in the information equipments such as smart phone (200), starting product guarantees required G-Card security application journey Sequence, or the security page of the WEB website of corresponding product is opened, close to G-Card or G-Card module.By means of the operation, intelligence The touch panel of the information equipment (200) of mobile phone etc., passes through the pattern code output device of G-Card or G-Card module (131) pattern code is obtained.Then, the information equipments such as smart phone (200) can by touch panel, from G-Card or G-Card module determines the product true and false or obtains the various informations such as build date, validity period, product content and be shown to use Person, so as to read.
Figure 93 is the figure for showing the identification processing example by means of G-Card.If by G-Card close to smart phone, Then code number is shown in smart phone, and user can pass through the generation of the unique security code recorded in G-Card and display The identification that whether code number is consistent and easily implements product etc..
Figure 94 is the figure for showing the identification example by means of G-Card and security code input.User is by G-Card It (is 4541 in the example of Figure 94 by the unique security code recorded in G-Card before close to smart phone (or close to rear) 5673) information equipments (200) such as smart phone are inputted.On the other hand, the information equipments such as smart phone (200) are to corresponding light Code carries out luminous, guidance G-Card, compared with the information recorded in the nonvolatile memory of G-Card, or to G- Card output pattern code be compared with the security code inputted from user, so as to according to relevance whether just Really carry out identification.The situation and the reality in G-Card implemented in information equipment accordingly, there exist the judgement of identification The situation applied.
Illustrate the situation determined in information equipment (200) side first.Information equipment (200) is by means of from display Shining for device etc., by the message input device (132) of G-Card, is input into G-Card for light code, it is desirable that sends safety Code.Then, G-Card, G-Card pass through pattern generation from the nonvolatile memories interpretation security code such as memory (117) Code output device (131) is exported in the form of pattern code in the touch panel of information equipment (200).Information equipment (200) The pattern code obtained by touch panel is decoded, is compared with the security code of input, to implement the true and false The judgement of judgement.Information equipment (200) is by identification as the result is shown in display device.
Secondly illustrate the situation determined in the side G-Card.The security code of input is transformed by information equipment (200) Light code is input into G- by the message input device (132) of G-Card by means of shining from display device etc. Card.G-Card is decoded the light code received from message input device (132), obtains security code.Moreover, G- Card is compared the security code remembered in the nonvolatile memories such as decoded security code and memory (117).Cause And implement the judgement of identification.Identification result is output in letter by pattern code output device (131) by G-Card Cease the touch panel of equipment (200).Information equipment (200) is by the identification being connected to as the result is shown in display device.
The unique security code can also be printed in certain one in product or packaging, guaranty etc., or both print Brush.Security code may be date or the now time on the same day etc..G-Card can also be with the date or present tense on the same day Between for disposal password output pattern code so that implementing certification.When being disposable close with the date on the same day or present time It, can not also printing security code when code.In the case where not utilizing security code, implement the identification of G-Card itself. For example, being transformed into light code, passing through firstly, information equipment (200) encrypts set use of information disposal password Message input device (132) is input into G-Card.G-Card is decoded the light code of receiving, by decoded result according to Disposal password decodes again.Decoded result is passed through pattern code output device (131) by G-Card, with pattern code Form is sent to the touch panel of information equipment (200).Information equipment (200) carries out the pattern code received from G-Card Decoding, under the set information unanimous circumstances being originally sent, is determined as that G-Card is true.
Safety is such as further increased, then G-Card security application is obtained from the information equipments such as smart phone (200) The luminous light code of touch panel, from pattern code output device (131) output by set based on the light code obtained The pattern code that algorithm calculates.The information equipments such as smart phone (200) are using the light code information to shine to G-Card, to G- The pattern code of Card output is decoded, so as to implement identification or trackability.
Figure 95 is the figure for showing the use example of G-Card module.Aspect, when self acknowledging, meeting are got in article etc. The card etc. for being stained with photo is shown in consideration, but often do not possess corresponding card etc..Even if not being stained with the card etc. of photo, G-Card mould Self acknowledging also may be implemented in block.When completing a business transaction article etc., if will confirm that my required article etc. or the receipts that I provides According to the G-Card module of upper stickup close to the information equipments such as the smart phone for completing a business transaction side (200), then show it is registered I Personal information.By means of the personal information of display, self acknowledging can be carried out.My individual registered in G-Card module Information may not be photo, also may include the ignorant information except me such as date of birth, age, password.Pass through Ignorant information except confirmation in person, or receive input, self acknowledging may be implemented.
In this process, the memory (117) of G-Card module pasted on the receipt that I provides etc. is non-volatile to be deposited Memory has ignorant information etc. except me in reservoir.For example, if deliveryman is by G-Card module close to smart phone etc. Information equipment (200) is deposited then by the sequence of graphical representation of exemplary in Figure 45, Figure 46, Figure 51, Figure 54, Figure 55, Figure 67, Figure 68 etc. The information of reservoir (117) is output in the touch panel of information equipment (200) by pattern code output device (131).Information The information obtained from G-Card module is shown in display device by equipment (200), so that deliveryman can identify I it Outer ignorant information etc., carries out self acknowledging.
[booking/acquisition lottery ticket and certification]
Figure 96~Figure 98 illustrates the example that G-Card is used for the certification of booking/acquisition lottery ticket and ticket, lottery ticket.In intelligence G-Card application program is also referred to as using application program needed for G-Card in the information equipments such as mobile phone or tablet computer (200). When by means of G-Card application program and booking or obtain lottery ticket when, user by G-Card close to smart phone or plate electricity The touch panel of the information equipments such as brain (200).By the operation, corresponding pattern code (ticket/lottery ticket code) is from smart phone Equal touch panels output is light code, is input to G-Card by message input device (132).G-Card carries out light code Decoding, is recorded in memory (117).In turn, as shown in Figure 96, knot also can be implemented in the G-Card for carrying credit card function It calculates.Specifically, if face contact by G-Card configured with element or close to touch panel, G-Card is by G-Card The information that clearing use is exported to smart phone etc..In addition, G-Card may be composition identical with Figure 104.
In addition, in order to match the photoelectricity two of the message input device of G-Card (132) (optical sensor (130)) in high precision In pole pipe, such as Figure 70 the photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) of graphical representation of exemplary and display device light emitting region (L1~ LE6 position), label needed for the application program of information equipment (200) can show matching card position in a display device, For example, the Drawing Object of display bezel shape.In the example of Figure 96, the Drawing Object of information equipment (200) and dotted border shape The guidance such as " (card top) ", " (card lower section) ", " please here by the inside alignment on the left of card " are shown together.Information equipment (200) By showing this guidance, allow user accurately by G-Card be aligned touch panel and in contact with or close to.Therefore, Information equipment (200) though the pattern code output device (131) (element (111)) of nonrecognition G-Card allocation position, Light can be made incident from each light emitting region (LE1~LE6) to corresponding each photodiode (WPD1~WPD6).? In this case, it does not need to be identified by means of the position G-Card of information equipment (200), thus pattern code output device (131) for example can only have 1 or 2 elements (111).Information equipment (200) is with being capable of identification icon code output device Element (111) be ON symbol for triggering, from each light emitting region (LE1~LE6) shine.Alternatively, G-Card can be with Receive light code from corresponding photodiode (WPD1~WPD6), in the case where no mistake, will confirm that response exports For the pattern code determined by pattern code output device (element (111)).
When using the ticket admission of purchase or when using lottery ticket, information equipment (200) uses plate as ticket/lottery ticket certification Terminal of computer, dedicated decipherer etc. uses.Wherein, for example, information equipment (200) starts the ticket/lottery ticket bought to G-Card The application program confirmed.As shown in Figure 97, if by G-Card close to pattern code corresponding with ticket or lottery ticket Output request is shone in the display device of terminal touch panel with light code form, defeated by message input device (132) Enter G-Card.The G-Card for receiving light code reads ticket corresponding with light code or lottery ticket from memory (117).Moreover, G- The ticket of reading or lottery ticket are transformed into pattern code by Card, are output in information by pattern code output device (131) and are set The touch panel of standby (200).
Terminal etc. carries out interpretation, decoding to the pattern code that G-Card is exported, and obtains the information of ticket or lottery ticket.If with The pattern code recorded in cloud or terminal is identical, then the approvals such as terminal enter meeting-place or repayment/use lottery ticket.G- can be deleted The corresponding pattern code recorded in Card, so that used primary ticket or lottery ticket cannot reuse.In addition, as shown in Figure 98, The usage history of ticket or lottery ticket also can recorde in G-Card, by by G-Card close to information such as the smart phones of user Equipment (200) and shown.
[content/lottery ticket/integral service of attracting customers]
Figure 99~Figure 101 illustrates for G-Card to be used for the audiovisual service of content, attracted customers service based on lottery ticket/integral Example.User obtains content, lottery ticket with established methodology, from ISP, integrates to provide and use G-Card.It is taken in user The time point of G-Card is obtained, the ID for providing content, lottery ticket or integral is not recorded in the memory (117) of G-Card.Separately Outside, as established approach, user can by obtain direct mail (DM), goods catalogue, magazine that G-Card packs together, Newspaper, product, or provided on shop or facility, street, to obtain G-Card.
Figure 99 is the exemplary figure for showing the offers services such as integral based on G-Card.ISP in order to attract customers and In set place of attracting customers, G-Card is installed on information desk with light code light emitting device (170).User holds G-Card To information desk, by G-Card close to light code light emitting device (170).G-Card can be taken by message input device (132) Content, the lottery ticket, integral service ID for obtaining light code light emitting device (170) output, it is non-volatile to be recorded in memory (117) etc. Property memory.According to the information exported by light code light emitting device (170), information desk everywhere can provide different Service.In addition, G-Card can also be shone by the information desk responsible person for taking G-Card from user close to light code Device (170).Alternatively, light code light emitting device (170) is also possible to the information equipments such as the smart phone of information desk responsible person (200)。
When user achieves G-Card, although interior perhaps lottery ticket/integral service is recorded in storage with ID by G-Card Device (117) is but it is also possible to be the state for being provided with electron key, so that it is not available.At this point, if by G-Card close to Light code light emitting device (170), G-Card then releases electron key, and becoming given content or lottery ticket/integral service ID can make Use state.When being provided with multiple electron keys in G-Card, clothes corresponding with corresponding electron key are can be used in user Business.At this point, obtaining different content or prize in the information desk of multiplicity user can match (Stamp Rally) as seal Certificate/integral.
Figure 100 is the figure shown to mark by means of the example of the state of the integral service of G-Card.User is logical It crosses G-Card close to the information equipments such as smart phone (200), can be confirmed that the validity period of such as integral, integral obtain number.Separately Outside, Figure 101 is the figure shown to mark by means of the example of the service content such as the lottery ticket of G-Card.User pass through by The lottery ticket clothes obtained such as from purchase concert tickets can be confirmed close to the information equipments such as smart phone (200) in G-Card Business content.
User can use the lottery ticket/integral recorded in G-Card in the shop of multiplicity.In addition, user can be with Start G-Card application program in the information equipments such as the smart phone of user (200), close to G-Card, thus interconnecting Lottery ticket/integral is also used in net service.In addition, user can record in the G-Card that reads as shown in Figure 110 and Figure 101 The states such as the service content of present lottery ticket or integral or validity period.In turn, lottery ticket/integral can also be moved to by user For using G-Stamp (the seal type code prompted in Fig. 4 of implementation form 0 in the information equipments such as smart phone (200) Generating device (1)) needed for application program and use.User is when playing content retrieved, in smart phone or plate electricity Start G-Card application program in the information equipments such as brain (200).Moreover, if user is by G-Card close to smart phone Or the information equipments such as tablet computer (200), then various content such as game or photo, video can be transferred to letter from G-Card It ceases equipment (200).In turn, user, can also by the way that G-Card is loaded on smart phone or tablet computer and movement, rotation To operate the contents such as game.When user starts G-Card application program and uses G-Card, ISP can be made also It can use the receivable various means of communication of the information equipments such as the smart phone of user (200) to further provide for servicing.Separately Outside, G-Card is not only card shape, it is possible to have coin or the same certain shape of horse.In addition, G-Card is not limited to The purposes that attracts customers of information desk, it is also possible that also can be used even without information desk.
[seal/accumulating card luminescent system]
Figure 102~Figure 105 is the example that G-Card is used as to seal and accumulating card.Wherein, illustrate by means of information equipment (200) display device covers seal to shining for G-Card and adds/reduce the example of integral.
When paying expense in shop, in the past, seal is covered in paper seal card, and integral records tired in plastics accumulating card Product.But user is difficult to manage since card is too many.In addition, can not know to have accumulated how much integrate, have using plastic clip When is the cut-off of effect phase, if user does not register on the internet, retrieves cumbersomely, can not obtain this information.
Figure 102 is the exemplary figure for showing the dedicated accumulating card that G-Card is used as to specific shop.In addition, Figure 103 is aobvious Show and G-Card is used as the exemplary figure of General integral card in multiple shops.
In the example of Figure 102, G-Card has electronic memo (171).Electronic memo (171), which can be shown, works as The seal or integral situation of preceding state, and be allowed to visualize.Magnetic substance and organic EL had both can be used in electronic memo (171) Deng writing words or drawing by means of the control inside card, special equipment, which also can be used, to be controlled, and is allowed to Outside is charged to.
Figure 104 is to show the exemplary figure for adding/reducing for carrying out the seal or integral that record in G-Card.User Show G-Card in shop.The information such as business smart phone or tablet computer that user possesses G-Card close to shop Equipment (200).That is, in the service, the trade company in shop can also not use special equipment.By the operation, corresponding intelligence hand Machine or tablet computer are shone light code to G-Card by means of the linkage and touch input with POS, can be easily to G- Card requires to affix one's seal or integrate to add/reduce memory (117).In addition, if the information such as smart phone or tablet computer Equipment (200) will require to send light code needed for the information of memory in memory (117) and shine to G-Card, then G-Card The information of the nonvolatile memories such as memory (117) is exported as pattern code.According to this step, user can be The ID of identification card or existing in the display device of the information equipment (200) of smart phone or tablet computer (business G-Card) etc. In seal or integral situation, integral can also be reduced.
User can download G-Card application program or be connected to G- by means of the information equipments such as smart phone (200) The web site of Card or set web site show the identification page of G-Card.If user is by G-Card close to showing Identify the information equipment (200) of page, then information equipment (200) by means of G-Card close detection pattern code output dress Set physical quantity variation caused by (131) (element (111)).Then, showing the information equipment (200) of identification page from display Device carries out light code and shines, and by message input device (132), the output request of information is input to G-Card.Then, G-Card passes through using the information such as the shop ID of record, the fraction, the validity date that obtain in corresponding shop as pattern code Pattern code output device (131) is output in the touch panel of information equipment (200).The information of pattern code based on output The information equipments such as smart phone (200) are shown in, so that user can be at any time in the information equipments such as smart phone (200) Confirm each shop integral.Wherein, for smart phone, if loading G-Card by set direction, can make to remember in G-Card The information of record is moved to smart phone.In addition, as shown in Figure 105, if by G-Card according to set direction, such as with figure The different direction load in direction shown in 104, then can be such that the information equipments such as smart phone (200) only show in G-Card and record Information.When the seal or integral that record in using smart phone, adding/reducing for affixing one's seal or integrate can also be by means of Aforementioned G-Stamp and shop G-Card and implement.In addition, in the processing of Figure 105, the information equipments such as smart phone (200) User can also be guided by sequence identical with Figure 96.That is, the application program of information equipment (200) can be shown for inciting somebody to action Card position is directed at the label of display device, such as the guidance of display bezel shape Drawing Object.
When user is using integrating, can be inputted with the information equipments such as touch intelligent mobile phone or tablet computer (200) The fraction that sales counter uses reduces fraction by G-Card close to the information equipments such as smart phone or tablet computer (200).Make User will block (G-Card) close to the information equipment for the G-Card identification page for showing G-Card application program or set website (200).Then, the information equipments such as smart phone (200) can shop ID to remember in interpretation G-Card, receive and corresponding shop Spread the information that the corresponding shop ID is sent.The information equipments such as smart phone (200) are if allow to receive the letter sent by shop Breath receives the advertisement letter of the multiplicity such as shop activity (weekend provides 3 times of integrals or 00 presents) then by means of delivery email etc. Breath.The advertising information of user's reading multiplicity, to promote the utilization to shop.
As another method, the information equipments such as smart phone (200) can also be to shop corresponding with the shop ID of interpretation The requirements such as server send information.In addition, G-Card may be used as general seal card or accumulating card.G-Card can recorde Information corresponding with the ID in various shop, as the terminal in each shop, information equipment (200) will be corresponding with corresponding shop ID Light code shines to universal card (G-Card).In addition, each store information equipment (200) does not obtain other shops from card (G-Card) Spread information.
[toy/game]
Illustrate the gaming example based on card-type device in Figure 106 and Figure 107.User is in the game based on G-Card In card or transactional cards, G-Card is loaded on into the information equipment (200) that tablet computer etc. has touch panel.G-Card is touched It is specific to touch panel institute, thus user can carry out game while making G-Card mobile, rotation.In turn, the score of acquisition Can recorde with ability, stage property etc. in G-Card, thus user can use G-Card, with in battle game or game The identical method for gaming of the heart carries out game.In addition, game information can also be recorded in G- by the application program carried in G-Card Memory (117) (referring to implementation form 1) of Card etc..
In addition, in gaming the heart or shopping center etc. equipped in the case where can be with the game machine of G-Card receiving and transmitting signal, G-Card becomes the tool that the heart or shopping center etc. are sold to user in gaming.User be equipped with G-Card into The game center of the game machine of row game or shopping center, purchase G-Card carry out game.Moreover, user goes back home, it can also To utilize corresponding G-Card, game is continued playing in tablet computer that oneself possesses etc..User can also be by the ID of G-Card Or game information provides part of it or whole close to the tablet computer etc. of the third party.
As shown in Figure 106, the surface G-Card equipped with touch panel or based on it is various switch etc. operating area.Make User can touch the operating area of G-Card with finger and carry out game operation.The letter such as smart phone with touch panel Breath equipment (200) or game machine can accurately identify the loading position of G-Card.Therefore, as shown in Figure 107, information equipment (200) or game machine can also identify the configuration of the operating area being equipped in G-Card.If operating area is led so that glass etc. is non- Electric body (insulant) is constituted, then when user operates the operating area of G-Card, the touching of information equipment (200) or game machine G-Card, the touch of Direct Recognition finger can be crossed by touching panel.That is, user is while operating G-Card, in G- In the case that Card is between finger and touch panel, G-Card can also be crossed and operation information equipment (200) or game Machine.The icon for representing and operating can also be formed on electrical insulator surface.At this point, the finger number touched simultaneously includes coming from G- Including the output of Card element (111), the limitation for the multiple point touching that can be identified simultaneously must not exceed.When touch operation region, G- Card can also make the output OFF of part or all of element (111).
In Figure 108, graphical representation of exemplary is (such as implementation form 14, real based on the photodiode with irradiation unit Apply the optical sensor of form 18) G-Card game device.It can be by the G-Card of the photodiode with irradiation unit The region for forming color code in plate game or card is loaded on, color code is obtained and carries out game.Wherein, so-called face Color code refers to the digital information that can use the performances such as color or lightness, level.With the G-Card of photodiode at 2 The combination of 2 colors of left and right be can use to increase color code number.For example, the assorted ON/OFF of R, G, B are 3bit, group at 2 It is combined into 6bit, colors are divided into 4 grades, then is 12bit.It in turn, can be with if being transformed to reverse by G-Card and loading Obtain the color code of 24bit.In addition, can also obtain position if having dot interpretation device from dot code and believe Breath.
Figure 109 is the example of the device of another shape.G-Card can be the varied shapes as horse.With various shape The G-Card that shape is constituted is properly termed as G-Piece.It can also be equipped in G-Piece and issue 1 color or heterogeneous light LED or sound Sound output device.If G-Piece to be loaded on to the game picture of tablet computer etc., receive light code, horse issue color or Export sound.Also the power supplys such as button-type battery can be used.It can be equipped with patterned conductor in G-Piece, export the state of horse Or recording game information.It, can also be without element (111), optical sensor (130) (or message input device in G-Piece (132)) certain one.When touch panel of game machine etc. is when there is no limit in terms of the touch number that can be identified simultaneously, G- When element (111) number that Piece is used is more than that the limitation of detectable touch number is above, for example, only after light code shines, If element (111) carries out ON output to touch panel, horse no matter several, it is configurable.As shown, G-Piece is for example With 3 elements (111).The configuration of 3 elements (111) is respectively provided with different sizes, so as not to form point symmetry, thus plus The direction of G-Piece can be identified by carrying the equipment such as the touch panel of G-Piece.
[signature]
The electronic memo that the input unit based on touch panel is utilized can also be equipped on the surface of G-Card.Electricity Sub- notebook is, for example, the signature input touch panel of Figure 89, electronic memo (171) of Figure 102 etc..User can use The input units such as touch panel are signed on the electronic memo that card surface is equipped with.For example, user loads on G-Card The touch panel of information equipment (200), signs on electronic memo.As long as electronic memo is equipped with touch panel Organic EL or magnetic substance etc. can show person's handwriting and obtain the form of data, any form.Circle can also be formed on card Dot pattern.User utilizes dedicated dot interpretation pen input signature.
G-Card can also extract characteristic point from the track of signature, pass through the signature with the middle record of memory (117) Characteristic point compares and is authenticated.The track of signature can also be sent to information equipment (200) as pattern code, believed It ceases equipment (200) and sends cloud etc. for received signature track, to implement certification on cloud.
[game card]
In game card, can also be formed do not make electronically conductor ON/OFF, with unique patterns formed (including print Brush) element (111) (conductor), the region that is operated with finger.In addition, being by conductor close to touching with the region of finger manipulation Panel is touched, the composition of the interaction based on capacitor or electric field using touch panel degree that can be detected is provided.Below will Block electronically the game of conductor ON/OFF in G-Card and is referred to simply as card.
The composition of graphical representation of exemplary game card in Figure 110, Figure 111.The inside of Figure 110 graphical representation of exemplary card (face of contact touch panel) is constituted.Figure 111 graphical representation of exemplary card surface is constituted.The card all eliminates implementation form 0 The composition of power supply is needed to want in device (110) of seal type code generating device (1) or 1~implementation form of implementation form 8 etc. Element.On the other hand, in the card equipped be equivalent to element (111) conductor, connect conductor card inner conductor plate.
With present smart phone etc., it is assumed that in the touch panel of information equipment (200), touched by means of multiple spot The quantity touched and can identified simultaneously is at 5.At this point, the card for being configured with 4 elements (111) (conductor) is put on touch panel, To which for example while can carry out the operation based on finger, the games that card is utilized can be run.For example, if making The card for being configured with 4 elements (111) (conductor) is put on touch panel by user, then the configuration pattern of element (111) (conductor) To be asymmetric, every Zhang Kajun is unique, then, no matter blocking and how to rotate, touch panel identifies unique pattern code, Configuration on card type class and touch panel is carried out specific.At this point, touch panel can identify the touch at next 1.At this point, Remaining touch recognition is by climbing over card (that is, from the upside of card), the realization when user presses with finger touch panel.
For example, on card surface equipped with having pasted such as card title of " 00 battle game △ △ role " and had The touch of role's title and the icon of labels such as " walking ", " race ", " stopping ", " seat ", " sleeping ", " standing ", " turning ", " winged ", " fight " Region (TC1).
Information equipment (200) passes through the configuration pattern of the inside element (111) (conductor), the type and configuration of identification card.Cause This, information equipment (200) identifies the touch area (TC1) in the card being pressed when being pressed whenever touch area (TC1) Position, to label carry out it is specific.Moreover, for example, in the case where pressing " walking ", the information equipment of running game program (200) movement of " △ △ role " corresponding with the type of card walking is executed on the display apparatus.
In the case of configuring 3 conductors, although can be touched simultaneously with 2 fingers, pattern code number is reduced.Separately Outside, in tablet computer, multiple point touching identification be can achieve at 10, can configure 5 or more conductors, and a large amount of figure is arranged Case code, and then can be touched simultaneously with multiple fingers.The use example of the card in tablet terminal is shown in Figure 112.Separately Outside, in the present specification, although the touch number that touch panel can identify simultaneously is assumed at 5, at 10, this limitation is only It is example.Therefore, implementation of the invention is not limited by the touch number itself that touch panel can identify simultaneously.
Figure 113 be A1 arrow by connection figure 110, A2 arrow line and card is truncated on the face perpendicular to paper Sectional view (hereinafter referred to as section A).Figure 114 be B1 arrow by connection figure 125, B2 arrow line and perpendicular to paper The sectional view (hereinafter referred to as section B) that card is truncated on the face in face.In addition, Figure 115 is that (card contacts touch panel from below It is inboard) plan view (referred to as bottom view) of the card of observation Figure 110.As shown, protection/printing layer of the card by means of table side (CA1), internal conductor plate (CA2) and the insulator (CA3) (or elastic insulator (CA4)) of inboard and substantially tied by 3 layers Structure is constituted.In addition, being surround around card by the frame of insulating properties.In turn, as shown in Figure 113, near section A, in inboard Insulator (CA3) in be embedded with element (111) (conductor), connect with internal conductor plate (CA2).By the way that this card is put Onto the touch panel of information equipment (200) etc., thus physical quantity caused by element (111) inside touch panel identification card (electric field strength caused by capacitor, electrostatic induction) etc., detects the load of card.But, the touch panel of information equipment (200) etc. The physical quantity of detecting element (111) (conductor) is highly difficult.Therefore, in this embodiment, inside card surface or card It configures conductor plate (CA2), can to act on the physical quantity of touch panel from element (111) when user touches and blocks (capacitor, electric field strength etc.) increases.In addition, the insulator (CA3) of Figure 113 is partially that can't detect object by means of touch panel The part of presence or the variation of reason amount (capacitor, electric field strength etc.).Therefore, if the finger of user touches card, touch surface Plate carrys out the configuration of detecting element (111) (conductor) from the presence or variation of physical quantity (capacitor, electric field strength etc.).If element (111) (conductor) be configured to it is asymmetrical, then information equipment (200) obtain touch panel detection element (111) (conductor) Configuration coordinate.Therefore, for multiple cards, if the configuration of the element (111) (conductor) of each card is unique, information Equipment (200) can be with the type of identification card.
In this composition, in the feelings that can use the conductive materials such as electric conductivity ink formation protection/printing layer (CA1) Under condition, the finger of user is connected to member by protection/printing layer (CA1) and conductor plate (CA2) by means of touching card surface Part (111) (conductor).On the other hand, even if protection/printing layer (CA1) is not conductive material, if with a thickness of sufficiently thin 0.5~0.6mm or so, then, when user is by finger contact protection/printing layer (CA1), cause in conductor plate (CA2) quiet Electric induction can identify physical quantity (capacitor, electrostatic from element (111) (conductor) to touch panel by conductor plate (CA2) Incude caused by electric field strength) etc. presence or variation.In addition, as long as the specification of card makes user only touch touch area (TC1) (such as the icon for posting the labels such as " walking ", " race "), then in touch area (TC1) configuration conductive part (for example, leading The film of electrical ink), benefit runs wires to the electric conductivity of all elements (111) (conductor) and their touch area (TC1) Part.
As shown in Figure 114, immediately below at touch area (TC1) (such as label of " walking "), at conductor plate (CA2) Layer, equipped with elastic insulator (CA4) layer, insulator (CA6) layer.In addition, in elastic insulator (CA4) layer, equipped with partition (CA5).Elastic insulator (CA4) or gap, i.e. air layer.In addition, elastic insulator (CA4) may be with bee The layer that Nest architecture or spongy material are formed.Partition (CA5) need not be circle, as long as can be relative to touch surface plate face And the structure of conductive plate (CA2) is supported, any shape.Partition (CA5) such as or it is hemispherical, make parabola The quadratic surface that conic section is rotated.Partition (CA5) can be flexible material.If partition (CA5) has bullet Power, then, when user presses touch area (TC1) (such as label of " walking "), the conductive plate (CA2) of depressed position holds The operability of easily contact touch panel, user improves.
If the conductor contact (pressing) touch area (TC1) held in user's finger or hand, conductive plate (CA2) face contact is carried out with the insulator of the inside side (CA6).Alternatively, it is also possible to no insulator (CA6).When there is no insulator (CA6) when, if the conductor contact (pressing) touch area (TC1) held in user's finger or hand, conductive plate (CA2) in contact with or close to touch panel surface.Therefore, the pressing by means of finger to touch area (TC1), conductive plate (CA2) Insulator (CA6) or touch panel surface are contacted, thus touch panel can identify physical quantity (caused by capacitor, electrostatic induction Electric field strength) etc. presence or variation.
As shown in Figure 115, block if observed in downside (the inside), card is surround by frame (CA0), is existed equipped with 4 The region of element (111), equipped with the region of multiple partitions (CA5).Insulator (CA3) is filled with around element (111). In addition, being filled with elastic insulator (CA4) around partition (CA5).But, elastic insulator (CA4) or air Layer.For elastic insulator (CA4) in the case where for example, gap, insulation rate is very high.Such as since there are 0.2mm~0.3mm The gap of left and right, thus touch panel can not detect touch.On the other hand, user presses elastic insulator on the upside of card (CA4), so that if the conductive plate (CA2) of pressing position is close to touch panel to less than 0.2mm distance, touch panel inspection Measure touch (pressing of finger).Therefore, by means of the composition of Figure 113,114,115, touch panel recognizes card, game machine Processing can be implemented in equal information equipments (200), so that executing the movement of " △ △ role " corresponding with card type class walking.In addition, Insulator (CA6) is omitted in Figure 115.As the explanation carried out, insulator (CA6) may not be.
Figure 116 be B1 arrow by connection figure 110, B2 arrow line and card is truncated on the face perpendicular to paper Section B variation.As shown in Figure 116, in section B, i.e., touch area (TC1) (such as label of " walking ") is immediately below In the case that part is equipped with elastic insulator (CA4), even partition (CA5) omits.In the composition of removal partition (CA5) In, elastic insulated object (TC4) is flexible material, for example, being sponge, flexible honeycomb structure etc..In addition, in Figure 128 Around the element (111) (conductor) of middle graphical representation of exemplary, insulator (CA3) can also be replaced and utilization and elastic insulator (CA4) identical material is integrally formed.By this composition, when user presses touch area (TC1) (such as the mark of " walking " Label) when, conductor plate (CA2) part being pressed is recessed slightly.Then, the depressed area is at a distance from touch panel than other Part is closer, touch panel can detecte to touch area (TC1) be pressed caused by physical quantity (capacitor, electrostatic induction are drawn Rise electric field strength) etc. variation.As described above, inside side is (towards the one of touch panel in the composition of Figure 113, Figure 116 Side), the layer in contact with or close to touch panel is formed with by means of insulator (CA3) and insulator (CA4).
Figure 117, Figure 118 are the examples of another game card.Figure 117 is the inside (the contact touch panel of another card Face) composition.As shown in Figure 118, which has touch area (TC2) and touch area (TC3).At touch area (TC2), Such as the title and figure of " 00 language learning card " are recorded, inside, (led as shown in Figure 117 equipped with 5 elements (111) Body).Therefore, touch area (TC2) is known as pattern code output touch area.On the other hand, in touch area (TC3), " English The labels such as language ", " Japanese ", " Q1 ", " Q2 ", " Q3 ", " YES ", " NO " are printed as icon.For from this meaning, touch (TC3) is known as icon touch area in region.In addition, touch area (TC2) and touch area (TC3) be not mutually electric in the card Gas connection.In addition, in the lower layer of touch area (TC2), there are conductor plate (CA2), but in the lower layer of touch area (TC3), no There are conductor plate (CA2).
For example, contacted touch area (TC2) if card is loaded on the touch panel of information equipment (200) by user, Then by conductor plate (CA2), the body capacitance of user increases, information equipment (200) detecting element (111) (conductor).Cause This, the pattern code that information equipment (200) interpretation is determined according to the configuration of element (111) (conductor), to card type class and element (111) allocation position of (conductor) carries out specific.As a result, information equipment (200) is by touch area (TC2) and information equipment (200) the coordinate position on touch panel is corresponded to.That is, information equipment (200) is on touch panel, to being printed on card The icon position (" English " " Q1 ") carry out it is specific.
Then, user touches touch area (TC3), assigns operation instruction.Then, finger from touch area (TC2) from It opens, thus physical quantity (capacitor, electric field etc.) caused by element (111) (conductor) is insufficient with the interaction of touch panel, letter Ceasing equipment (200) can not recognition component (111) (conductor).Therefore, in information equipment (200) as present smart phone In the case where can only identifying 5 touches, the touch of finger can also be identified.That is, the lower touch area if user press...withes one's finger (TC3) icon printed, then as shown in the situation of Figure 116, information equipment (200) identifies the touch of finger by touch panel Position.For this point, information equipment (200) can be identified simultaneously and be touched at 5.That is, Figure 117,132 card in, Pattern code exports in touch area and icon touch area, and electric conductivity is cut off, thus as pattern code, 5 can be configured The quantity of a electric conductor, unique patterns code increases.
Figure 119 be C1 arrow by connection figure 117, C2 arrow line and card is truncated on the face perpendicular to paper Sectional view (hereinafter referred to as section C).Figure 120 be D1 arrow by connection figure 117, D2 arrow line and perpendicular to paper The sectional view (hereinafter referred to as section D) that card is truncated on the face in face.The section C of Figure 119 is knot identical with the section A of Figure 128 Structure.On the other hand, as shown in Figure 120, Figure 115 is different from section D, is not equipped with conductor plate (CA2).That is, Figure 118's Touch area (TC3) is immediately below not to have conductor plate (CA2).Therefore, even if user touches touch area (TC3) with finger, Element (111) (conductor) that can not be immediately below by touch area (TC2) detects physical quantity (capacitor, electricity on touch panel Field intensity etc.) caused by interaction.On the other hand, in the part section D equipped with insulator (CA3).Insulator (CA3) It can be identical as the insulant around the element (111) (conductor) of section C portion.Insulator (CA3) has electricity to a certain degree Capacity rate, thus if user touches the surface of protection/printing layer (CA1) with finger, touch panel detects capacitor, electric field Interaction caused by the physical quantitys such as intensity carries out touch location specific.In addition, if being constituted protection/print with transparent material Brush layer (CA1) and insulator (CA3) when card then being loaded on touch panel even with person, can also read picture simultaneously The operating touch panel on card.In this case, protection/printing layer (CA1) and insulator (CA3) are for example with glass or third The production of the transparent mediums such as olefin(e) acid resin.In addition, protection/printing layer (CA1) and insulator (CA3) can also with it is transparent, no Transparent independently integral production.
Figure 121 be C1 arrow by connection figure 117, C2 arrow line and card is truncated on the face perpendicular to paper Sectional view variation (hereinafter referred to as section CC).For example, element (111) (conductor) and conductor plate (CA2) are by printing shape At can be element (111A), conductive plate (111A).In this case, element (111A), conductive plate (111A) can be equal For the film of printing.Furthermore, it is also possible to conductor connection element (111A), conductive plate (111A).In addition, element (111A), leading Insulator (CA3) is buried in part except battery plate (111A), conducting wire, forms the shell of card-type.It is however also possible to by first Part except part (111A), conductive plate (111A), conducting wire is formed as a part of gap.
Figure 122 be D1 arrow by connection figure 117, D2 arrow line and card is truncated on the face perpendicular to paper Sectional view variation (hereinafter referred to as section DD).In this example, under each icon of touch area (TC3) printing Side is equipped with element (111) (conductor).If user touches the icon (labels such as " English ") of graphical representation of exemplary in Figure 118, Then the physical quantitys such as capacitor caused by finger, electric field strength are by element (111) (conductor) immediately below, give touch panel with Interaction.Therefore, information equipment (200) can identify which icon is pressed.
In addition, touching icon in user when being operated by means of blocking the icon printed as shown in Figure 118 When, there is the situation of card sliding, rotation.If card sliding, rotation, information equipment (200) can not obtain touch area and touching Touch the correspondence of position.Accordingly it is also possible to anti-slip material be coated inside card, so that card is not slided, rotated.
But, even if card sliding, rotation, if conductive region (touch area (TC2)) is touched, even if being not coated by anti- Sliding material, can also select set icon without problems.
Figure 123 is example of the game with another card.In this example, equipped with transparent touch region (TC4) on card. Transparent touch region (TC4) is, for example, the transparent dielectrics such as glass or acrylic resin.In addition, touch area (TC2) is inner The structure in face is as the situation of Figure 117, Figure 118, equipped with element (111) (conductor).If user is by this composition Card loads on the picture of information equipment (200), then the icon image shown in the display device of information equipment (200) is shown in Transparent touch region (TC4).Even if obliquely load card, obliquely shows smart phone picture according to the direction of card, so as to Into transparent border.But become the state shown card rotation, movement in same position.At this point, if touching again Conductive region is touched, then icon image shows to enter transparent touch region (TC4).If user touches transparent touch region (TC4), then the interaction by means of finger to touch panel, touch panel can detecte the touch location of finger, to touch Position carry out it is specific.That is, capacitor caused by finger or electric field strength can pass through the transparent electricity of transparent touch region (TC4) Medium and detected by touch panel.Therefore, what the application program execution run in information equipment (200) was shown with touch location The corresponding processing of icon.
In addition, touch area (TC2) and transparent touch region (TC4) is covered using conductive clear film, if with figure Conductor plate (CA2) connection of graphical representation of exemplary in 119, then during user touches transparent touch region (TC4), Ke Yicong Element (111) (conductor) inside touch area (TC2) gives sufficient interaction, information equipment (200) to touch panel It can be with the configuration of recognition component (111) (conductor).In this case, user can by transparent touch region (TC4), to The touch panel of icon part in display devices such as " English " gives interaction caused by finger, can choose display dress The icon set.
Figure 124 is the example that the processing of drawing application program is executed on the card of Figure 123.If user is existed with finger It draws a picture on transparent touch region (TC4), then the drawing application program run in information equipment (200) can be by means of from saturating Interaction caused by the finger of bright touch area (TC4), the motion track of finger is obtained by touch panel.Drawing application Program draws lines on the display apparatus according to track.Therefore, user for example can be in information equipment (200) touch surface The picture area writing words of the transparent touch region (TC4) of the card loaded on plate drawing application program immediately below.
Figure 125 is the card of graphical representation of exemplary and the games run in information equipment (200) identification Figure 110~Figure 124 Processing example.In this process, the central processing unit (CPU) of information equipment (200) operates according to user and starts game journey Sequence.For example, firstly, role comes on stage in scene of game (S1).Moreover, CPU waits card to load on touch panel (S2).CPU is such as Fruit detection card loads on touch panel (in S2 be), then the type progress risen from the configuration of element (111) to card is specific, and And the relative position (configuration) being stuck on touch panel is carried out specific.Moreover, CPU waits the finger of user to touch card Icon.In addition, CPU waits the finger touch display unit of user in the case where card has transparent touch region (TC4) On icon (S4).
Moreover, if the touch (in S4 be) of CPU detection finger, determines whether the icon touched indicates game The end (S5) of program.At the end of the icon touched does not indicate that games, CPU executes role by touching position Set the movement of decision.Moreover, CPU makes, processing returns to S4.On the other hand, by the judgement of S5, when the icon touched is instruction At the end of games, CPU Exit Game.
As described above, can be occurred from the code of the devices such as G-Card (110), implementation form 0 according to implementation form 16 The removals such as device (1) need the composition of power supply, are simply constituted with insulant, element (111) and conductor plate (CA2) etc., shape At game card and furthermore article (stage property).It in this case, can be same than touch panel shown in Figure 110 by utilization When the element (111) of touch place number (such as at 5) smaller amounts (such as 4) that detects, even if will block or article is placed in In the case of the touch panel of game machine, information equipment (200) etc., it is also able to carry out the touch operation based on finger.In addition, such as Shown in Figure 115, by combined conductor plate (CA2) and elastic insulator (CA4), so that interaction caused by physical quantity is from leading It is related to the touch panel of lower layer on body plate (CA2), can identifies touch location.In addition, utilizing conductor plate as shown in Figure 116 (CA2) and be configured with partition (CA5) elastic insulator (CA4) situation it is same.It is elastic insulated in the case where Figure 116 Body (CA4) is gap, so that conductor plate (CA2) is 0.2mm~0.3mm or so at a distance from touch panel surface, is not yet being pressed In the state of lower, touch panel is set not detect conductor plate (CA2), user presses conductor plate (CA2), to make touch panel It can identify pressing position.
In addition, the transparent touch region (TC4) by utilizing Figure 123, thus and with game machine, information equipment (200) etc. Icon and card in display device are operated by the icon in display device, role corresponding with card etc. can be made to act.
<implementation form 17>
According to Figure 126~Figure 128, the code generating device (1) or implementation form 1 of graphical representation of exemplary implementation form 0~ Device (110,110A~110J) of implementation form 9 etc., the digital seal of implementation form 15, the G-Card of implementation form 16 etc. Information transmitting with information equipment (200) is handled.In this embodiment, illustrate in information equipment (200) detection such as Figure 70 The configuration of element (111) in the device (110) of graphical representation of exemplary, in the photoelectricity two grasped with the configuration from element (111) The processing example of corresponding light emitting region (LE1~LE6) the output light code such as pole pipe (WPD1~WPD6).In addition, in this implementation shape In state processing, it is applied in combination for example in the code generating device (1) of implementation form 0 or the dress of 1~implementation form of implementation form 8 Set (110) etc., implementation form 15 digital seal in the composition that illustrates.Therefore it is presumed that the code generating device of implementation form 0 (1) or the digital seal of the device of 1~implementation form of implementation form 8 (110) etc., implementation form 15 has for setting from information Multiple photodiodes of standby (200) light.Therefore, the processing illustrated in 6~Figure 128 of following figure 12 may be directly applied to The number of device (110) of the code generating device (1) of implementation form 0 or 1~implementation form of implementation form 8 etc., implementation form 15 Word seal.
In the processing of Figure 126, the CPU of information equipment (200) is for example by the element (111) of device (110) to touch Physical quantity variation caused by the interaction of panel and obtain pattern code.Moreover, CPU detection obtain pattern code whether For pattern code (S10) corresponding with triggering pattern.Triggering pattern is, for example, fiducial mark pattern.In addition, triggering pattern is for example Be graphical representation of exemplary in Figure 69 symbol (6) be continuously ON, symbol (1) continuously be OFF pattern 1,2 combination.But, it removes Outside the combination for the pattern that this fiducial mark pattern or representative start output, can also according to information pattern (such as pattern 3~ Pattern 9), the regulation triggering pattern in application program rank.If detection triggering pattern (in S10 be), CPU is to touch Based on touching the element configuration detected in panel, on the display apparatus, to device (110) photodiode (WPD1~ WPD6) the corresponding light emitting region position (LE1~LE6) carries out specific (S11).In addition, the light emitting region of device (110) is for example It can be determined according to the type of each device (110).Information equipment (200) can also be directed to each device (110) type, Determination device (110) type according to the configuration of element (111).In addition, information equipment (200) detection trigger pattern after, can To be believed according to the pattern code for coming from element (111) from the type of device (110) acquisition device (110) according to set procedures Breath.Detection triggering pattern, refers to and is caused by the element (111) of device (110) to the interaction of touch panel in S10 Physical quantity variation and obtain the situation of pattern code.Therefore, it when in S10 to be, is equivalent to and shows as one, object The device (110) of example contacts the situation as one exemplary touch panel of flat panel sensor.In addition, touch panel is to take Carry an example of the display device of transparent plate sensor.
Moreover, CPU makes in light emitting region (LE1~LE6) (referring to Figure 70) on the display apparatus, according to light code Carry out it is luminous, to carry out response (S12) to device (110).Light emitting region (LE1~LE6) in display device is and light The part area for the corresponding display device in position that element (photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) etc.) is equipped on device (110) One example in domain.The position of light emitting region (LE1~LE6) is determined by the positional relationship of touch panel and device (1110). CPU carried out according to light code it is luminous, thus the light quantity of light emitting region (LE1~LE6) as in Figure 71 explanation shown in change over time Change.Moreover, CPU is standby (S13) as event.Event is for example with the driver of touch panel or the running computer journey of CPU Based on the processing of sequence etc., issued from OS.
For example, when event is to represent the event of the movement of device (110) (in S14 be), CPU is on touch panel The position of detecting element (111) executes the mobile processing (S15) of tracking element (111).By means of the processing, even if device (110) moved on touch panel, CPU can also detecting element (111) again position (S15).After tracking process, CPU makes that processing returns to S13.
In addition, CPU is executed for example when event is the pattern code input from device (110) by element (111) Pattern code input processing (S19).After pattern code input processing, CPU makes that processing returns to S13.Pattern code input Reason is the processing for obtaining card number etc. such as in the case where device (110) are credit card, cash card, accumulating card.In addition, figure Case code input processing is, for example, the processing from the remaining sum of electric bank-note card interpretation electronic money.
In addition, for example when event is from the lighting requirements of the running application program of CPU (in S18 be), CPU Execute the luminous processing (S19) of light code.Light code issues after treatment, and CPU makes that processing returns to S13.Light code distribution processing It is the processing for carrying out the response to card, existing such as in the case where device (110) are credit card, cash card, accumulating card etc. The processing that postal remittance counter is recorded in gold card, the processing for charging in accumulating card integral, the processing for charging in electric bank-note card remaining sum Deng.Wherein, in S19 processing, CPU makes to match in device (110) with light receiving element (photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) etc.) The light quantity of the partial region (such as distribution district (LE1~LE6) of Figure 70) of the corresponding display device in standby position, such as such as Shown in Figure 71, temporally change.Moreover, when event be representative terminate instruction when (in S20 be), CPU terminates program.
Pattern code by element (111) is output to information equipment by Figure 127 graphical representation of exemplary device (110) (200) processing.In this process, the triggering (S30) of the processing to be launched such as CPU of device (110).Triggering is, for example, from letter The display device of breath equipment (200) is input to the ON signal of photodiode (WPD1~WPD6).In addition, in e.g. Figure 71 2 continuous light to photodiode (WPD1) of graphical representation of exemplary.In addition, having in implementation form 1 in device (110) In the case where the fingerprint sensor of explanation, the certification in fingerprint sensor illustrated in triggering e.g. implementation form 1 is successful. In addition, triggering is for example in the case where device (110) have the components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) illustrated in implementation form 1 It is the power supply since the components of photo-electric conversion arrange (112).
Device (110) if CPU detect triggering, from element (111) output pattern code (S31).Moreover, dress Set the response that (110) wait light code.Light code is for example in display device corresponding with photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) Light emitting region (LE1~LE6) occurs.If device (110) is answered by photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) detection light code It answers, then it is standby (S33) to become event.
Event is, for example, to pass through the light code light of photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) from information equipment (200) (S34).When event be light code by light when, CPU is decoded the light code of receiving.Moreover, CPU makes, processing returns to S33.
In addition, event is, for example, to export to require (S36) from the pattern code of light code decoding.When event is pattern code When output requires, CPU executes pattern code output processing (S37).Moreover, CPU makes, processing returns to S33.Wherein, pattern code Output processing is for example from memory (117) (referring to real in the case where device (110) are credit card, cash card, accumulating card Apply form 1) it obtains card number etc. and delivers the processing of information equipment (200).In addition, for example as electric bank-note card, pattern code Output processing is from memory (117) interpretation electronic money remaining sum and to deliver the processing of information equipment (200).
In addition, when event is, for example, to require from the storage of the information of light code decoding to memory (117), (reference is implemented Form 1) when, CPU executes the memory storage processing (S39) that information is stored in memory (117).Wherein, in device (110) in the case where for accumulating card, memory storage processing is the processing of storage integral.In addition, being electronics in device (110) In the case where money card, memory storage processing is the processing that the remaining sum of electronic money is charged to memory (117).Moreover, working as Event be representative terminate instruction when (in S20 be), CPU terminates program.
<<variation>>
In Figure 126, Tu127Zhong, information equipment (200) is determined based on the configuration of the device (111) of device (110) The configuration of light emitting region (LE1~LE6).But implementation of the invention is not limited to this processing.Such as information equipment (200) configuration from element (111) can also be replaced to determine light emitting region (LE1~LE6), but as shown in Figure 96, aobvious The frame of the devices (110) such as load card is shown in showing device.Moreover, representing the touching that card has loaded on the frame of display in detection In the case where signalling, information equipment (200) can also be from the frame of display, to the photodiode (WPD1 of device (110) ~WPD6) carry out specific, the configuration of decision light emitting region (LE1~LE6).
In this process, for example, information equipment (200) is for example from the lighting requirements of application program detection light code (S10A).The lighting requirements of light code are, for example, the requirement that credit number is obtained from web browser.If detection light code Lighting requirements (in S10A be), then the CPU of information equipment (200) shows edge frame in the display device of touch panel, draws It leads user and loads the devices (110), (S12A) such as G-Card.Moreover, CPU is standby (S13) as event.For example, display edge After frame, if being loaded with device (110), load events (S14A) occurs.Load events are for example by touch panel according to element (111) load of detection device (110) and occur.In case of load events, then CPU executes contraposition confirmation (S15A).Right In the confirmation of position, shine at light emitting region (LE1~LE6), CPU is connected to light response from the element (111) of device (110).Work as nothing When method carries out contraposition confirmation, such as time-out occurs, CPU shows that guidance, execution retry in a display device.In addition, if Contraposition confirms that successfully then CPU makes that processing returns to S13.In turn, the processing after S16 in addition to not to the processing of moving event it Outside, identical as Figure 126.In this example, CPU guidance user loads the devices (110) such as card, and the devices (110) such as confirmation card add It is downloaded to touch panel.In turn, CPU confirmation contraposition, executes light code distribution processing (S19).Therefore, though in this process, CPU be could also say that when object contacts flat panel sensor, from the positional relationship of flat panel sensor and object, made and light member The light quantity time to time change of the partial region of the corresponding display device in the position that part is equipped in object plane.
According to the processing of Figure 126, Figure 127, information equipment (200) is configured from the element (111) of device (110) etc., to light Sensor (such as photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) of Figure 70) configuration progress is specific, decision light emitting region (such as same figure In LE1~LE6 of display device side for being drawn with a dashed line).Therefore, information equipment (200) can in multiple channels, according to The variation etc. of light quantity inputs information to device (110) etc..
Or the processing according to Figure 128, the Drawing Objects such as edge frame that user is utilized in display device are guided, letter Breath equipment (200) does not need the configuration of detecting element (111).Therefore, even if in device of element (111) number less than 3 (110) or being configured to point symmetry of element (111) and element (111) direction can not be carried out in specific situation, information equipment (200) information can also be inputted to device (110) etc. in multiple channels, according to the variation etc. of light quantity.
The processing of this implementation form is for example according to the computer program stored in recording medium, in information equipment (200) It is executed in CPU etc..In this recording medium, as recording medium that can be isolated from computer etc., such as there is floppy disk, optomagnetic Storage cards such as disk, CD-ROM, CD-R/W, DVD, Blu-ray disc, DAT, 8mm tape, flash memory etc..In addition, as being fixed on The recording medium of computer etc. has hard disk, ROM (read-only memory) etc..In turn, SSD (Solid State Drive, solid-state Hard disk) as can be isolated from computer etc. recording medium, can also be used as be fixed on computer etc. recording medium use.
<implementation form 18>
According to Figure 129~Figure 133, illustrate the optical sensor (130F and 130G) of implementation form 18.Optical sensor (130F And 130G) as implementation form 14, there is the group of the LED and the photodiode as light receiving element as light-emitting component It closes.Therefore, optical sensor (130F and 130G) to irradiation lights such as printed matters and can detect its color.Therefore, optical sensor (130F and 130G) can be used as the use of the optical sensor (130) in implementation form 8 etc..In addition, optical sensor (130F and It can 130G) be embedded in the seal type code generating device of implementation form 0 or the device of 1~implementation form of implementation form 8 etc. (110) it uses.
Figure 129 is the plan view from the light-receiving surface of optical sensor (130F).In the center of optical sensor (130F), Configured with the photodiode (240) as light receiving element.Around photodiode (240), it is configured with by predetermined distance LED-R (241), LED-G (242), LED-B as the light emitting diode (LED) for issuing different wave length light (RGB) respectively (243).In this composition, when the feelings for the printing surface for having red (R) on the face opposite with the light-receiving surface of optical sensor (130F) Under condition, when LED-R (241) shine, photodiode (240) receives reflection from printing surface with the set above light income Light.That is, photodiode (240) receives the reflected light for the red wavelength region irradiated from LED-R (241).On the other hand, needle To the printing surface of red (R), LED-G (242) (green wavelength region), LED-B (243) (blue wavelength region) are even if hair Light, photodiode (240) can also receive reflected light from printing surface only with the light income of insufficient set value.
Similarly, for the printing surface of green (G), when LED-G (242) is when green wavelength region shines, two pole of photoelectricity (240) are managed with the set above light income, receive reflected light from printing surface.On the other hand, for the printing surface of green (G), i.e., LED-R (241) (red wavelength region), LED-B (243) (blue wavelength region) is set to shine, photodiode (240) It can receive reflected light from printing surface only with the light income of insufficient set value.
Similarly, for the printing surface of blue (B), when LED-B (243) shine, photodiode (240) is with set Above light income receives reflected light from printing surface.On the other hand, for the printing surface of blue (B), even if LED-R (241), LED-G (242) shines, and photodiode (240) can also receive reflection from printing surface only with the light income of insufficient set value Light.
Figure 130 is the plan view from the light-receiving surface of the optical sensor (130G) with 6 LED.Optical sensor (130G) is used as light receiving element, is configured with photodiode (240) in center.Moreover, around photodiode (240), LED-R (241), LED-G (242), LED-B (243) respectively by configuring two-by-two at equal intervals.In the example of Figure 130, luminous two Pole pipe along clockwise direction, is arranged in order by R- > G- > B- > R- > G- > B.
Figure 131 is the sectional view of optical sensor (130F) (with the bottom surface with the arrow by being attached to Figure 129 " A section " Vertical plane truncation).Optical sensor (130F) is the form for being mounted with to have the light transmitting plate (145) of given thickness, so as to Irradiation light etc. from LED-R (241), LED-G (242), LED-B (243) to the printing zone of color code irradiate after, photoelectricity two Pole pipe (240) can receive set reflected light.From LED-R (241), LED-G (242), LED-B (243) as point light source and The light of irradiation receives each reflected light on the surface of photodiode (240).The light quantity of reflected light is in LED-R (241), LED- The light quantity in the respective printed medium face immediately below G (242), LED-B (243) is high, and drops with immediately below far from each LEC It is low, therefore the situation that the colouring information that there is printing can not be obtained accurately.But when in the device of card-type (110) include light When transmitting plate (145), if peripheral side is formed with reflecting material, light is reflected in side, thus even if far from each Position LEC immediately below, light quantity will not correspondingly decline.When not including light transmitting plate (145), it is equipped in peripheral side Reflecting plate.
Figure 132 is the device (110) etc. that graphical representation of exemplary is equipped with optical sensor (130F) or optical sensor (130G) The light code that CPU is executed obtains the flow chart of processing.Light income (R) when wherein, light code is for example shone by LED-R, LED-G shine when light income (G), LED-B shine when light income (B) combination and obtain.When light income (R, G, B) When level is 2 grades (1 bit), device (110) can obtain the information of 1 circuit, 1 bit that shines of each LED, by means of LED- R, LED-G, LED-B can obtain 3 bit informations.On the other hand, it by the way that light income (R, G, B) is set as multiple grades, fills Setting (110) can be by the combination of R, G, B, from the more information of the acquirements such as printing surface.In addition, being set by light income (R, G, B) In the case where for multiple grades, in the prior irradiation LED-R of printing surface, LED-G, the LED-B for becoming benchmark, two pole of photoelectricity is corrected The gain (gain) of pipe.The printing surface as benchmark at this moment, is combined with single color printing with R, G, B of multiple grades The corresponding color for becoming base colors, lightness.Printed medium as benchmark only presses R, G, B combination of multiple grades Number is prepared.
Color code acquirement processing in, the CPU of device (110) make LED-R shine, photodiode light, save by Light quantity (R), (S50).Then, the CPU of device (110) makes LED-G shine, photodiode light, preservation light income (G), (S51).Then, the CPU of device (110) makes LED-B shine, photodiode light, saves light income (B), (S52).Separately Outside, the processing sequence of S50~S52 does not limit.That is, not limited for shining first from which luminescent color in RGB.
Moreover, light income (R, G, B) is output in the region that for example application program (such as games) accesses by CPU.And And whether CPU determination processing terminates (S54).In the case where processing is not finished, CPU makes that processing returns to S50, repeatedly similarly Processing.In addition, RGB often shines 1 time light income (RGB) is just output in the region that application program accesses respectively in Figure 131. But this processing can also be replaced, after obtaining set group of number of RGB by CPU, application program is given in the form of arrangement.
The optical sensor (130F, 130G) of implementation form 18 described above can be from the printing surface of different colours (RGB) Detect color.Therefore, optical sensor (130F) can be with the optical sensor (130A~130E) of implementation form 14 equally, from printing Face obtains color code.But the optical sensor of implementation form 18 is characterized in, LED-R is equipped with as light-emitting component (241), LED-G (242), LED-B (243) on the other hand need color filter not as implementation form 14.That is, photoelectricity Diode (240) detects the reflected light from printing surface in the case where no color filter.Therefore, in optical sensor In (130F, 130G), there is no the situations because of optical attenuation caused by color filter.That is, the light sensing with implementation form 14 Device (130A~130E) is compared, and optical sensor (130F, 130G) can be with high sensitivity, from printing surface interpretation color code.
<implementation form 19>
33~Figure 148 referring to Fig.1 is illustrated implementation form 19.
Implementation form 19 is different from the embodiment for the pattern code for exporting conductor output changeably, shows The configuration example of fixed pattern code is shown.In the pattern code of this implementation form, which is characterized in that led equipped with benchmark 2 kinds of conductors of body and conductors of information define direction and the figure of pattern code according to the positional relationship of reference conductor and conductors of information Case code.
Figure 133 is the figure being illustrated to the situation of 3~4 same size conductors of configuration, and (a) is for reference conductor Between distance be the situation of 43mm, (b) be for distance between reference conductor be the situation of 38mm, (c) is to be directed to reference conductor Between distance be the situation of 33mm, (d) is figure that the situation for being 28mm for distance between reference conductor is shown.
The pattern code of this implementation form configures 2 reference conductors and 1 or 2 conductors of information, thus pattern code Direction is determined, and can define unique pattern code.
Configure 2 reference conductors so that between 2 reference conductors distance be greater than other any conductors between (reference conductor with Between conductors of information, conductors of information is between conductors of information) at a distance from, that is, in all distance between conductors, 2 reference conductors The distance between be maximum value.As a result, for the distance between conductor, if retrieving maximum 2 conductors, known to This 2 are reference conductors.Moreover, knowing remaining 1 or 2 as conductors of information, closed from the position of reference conductor and conductors of information System, can determine the direction of pattern code, define unique pattern code.
Wherein, so-called " distance between conductors " is distance of certain conductor center to another conductor center.
The distance between conductor is preferably 10mm or so.But, preferred distance is according to smart phone or tablet computer Performance and it is different.
After the maximum identification error of conductor center is assumed to ± 2mm or so (total 4mm or so), identify in conductor Heart septum distance simultaneously configures conductor, accurately to obtain pattern code.
Then, each situation of (a)~(d) is illustrated.
It (a) is the figure shown for the situation that distance between reference conductor is 43mm.
The circle of the dotted line of the figure is that the configuration of conductors of information is candidate (hereinafter referred to as " configuration is candidate ").Configuration candidate is set as The interval 5mm.If identification error is small, the conductors of information that configuration candidate interval is configured can be reduced by increasing, and can be defined big The pattern code of amount.In addition, the outfit of 10mm or more distance is left, so as to effectively identify adjacent 2 when adjacent configuration A conductor.
In the case of distance is 43mm between reference conductor, distance between conductors is 4mm shorter than the distance between reference conductor Above (that is, distance between conductors is that 39mm the is below) configuration is candidate, and there are 38.
But if configuring 2 conductors of information between reference conductor, reference conductor and conductors of information are configured to one Straight line, can not determine the direction of pattern code.Therefore, between reference conductor, information medium can only configure 1.Wherein, 5 configurations excluded between reference conductor first from 38 are candidate, as follows, find out selection 2 from residue 33 A and 1 combination.
33C2+ 33=561 kind ... (A).
Then, the group of 2 position candidates of the distance less than 10mm is combined between conductor
9+15+21+27+33+28+5=138 kind ... (B).
Conductor can not be arranged to make between conductor distance less than 10mm.This is because in the presence of that can not identify adjacent 2 Possibility.Therefore, the combination less than 10mm is left out.
Then, the configuration candidate between reference conductor selects 1, the combination for the situation that can be differentiated with other conductors For
29 × 2+28 × 3=142 kind ... (C).
The configuration group of the configurable conductors of information in (a) situation is combined into as a result,
(A)-(B)+(C)=561-138+142=565 kind.
It (b) is the figure shown for the situation that distance between reference conductor is 38mm.
At this point, distance between conductors is 4mm or more shorter than distance between reference conductor (that is, distance between conductors is 34mm or less) Configuration candidate there are 29.
But as shown in the situation of (a), between reference conductor, information medium can only configure 1.Wherein, exist first 4 configurations excluded between reference conductor in 29 are candidate, as follows, find out selection 2 and 1 from residue 25 A combination.
25C2+ 25=325 kind ... (A).
Then, the group of 2 position candidates of the distance less than 10mm is combined between conductor
5+21+27+27+18+3=101 kind ... (C).
As shown in the situation of (a), combination of the distance less than 10mm is left out between conductor.
Then, the configuration candidate between reference conductor selects 1, the combination for the situation that can be differentiated with other conductors For
21 × 2+20 × 2=82 kind ... (C).
The configuration group of the configurable conductors of information in (b) situation is combined into as a result,
(A)-(B)+(C)=325-101+82=306 kind.
It (c) is the figure shown for the situation that distance between reference conductor is 33mm.
At this point, between conductor distance it is 4mm or more shorter than distance between reference conductor (that is, distance between conductors be 29mm with Under) there are 21 by configuration candidate.
But as (a), (b) situation shown in, between reference conductor, information medium can only configure 1.Therefore, first 3 configurations first excluded in 21 between reference conductor are candidate, as follows, find out selection 2 from residue 18 And 1 combination.
18C2+ 18=171 kind ... (A).
Then, the group of 2 position candidates of the distance less than 10mm is combined between conductor
9+15+21+18+3=66 kind ... (B).
As (a), (b) situation shown in, combination of the distance less than 10mm is left out between conductor.
Then, the configuration candidate between reference conductor selects 1, the group for the situation that can be differentiated with other conductors It is combined into
14 × 2+13=41 kind ... (C).
The configuration group of the configurable conductors of information in (c) situation is combined into as a result,
(A)-(B)+(C)=171-66+41=146 kind.
It (d) is the figure shown for the situation that distance between reference conductor is 28mm.
At this point, between semiconductor distance it is 4mm or more shorter than distance between reference conductor (that is, distance between conductors be 24mm with Under) there are 10 by configuration candidate.
But as shown in the situation of (a)~(c), between reference conductor, information medium can only configure 1.Therefore, first 2 configurations first excluded in 10 between reference conductor are candidate, as follows, find out selection 2 from residue 8 And 1 combination.
8C2+ 8=36 kind ... (A).
Then, the group of 2 position candidates of the distance less than 10mm is combined between conductor
3+9+8+1=21 kind ... (B).
As shown in the situation of (a)~(c), combination of the distance less than 10mm is left out between conductor.
Then, the configuration candidate between reference conductor selects 1, the group for the situation that can be differentiated with other conductors It is combined into
4 × 2=8 kind ... (C).
The configuration group of the configurable conductors of information in (d) situation is combined into as a result,
(A)-(B)+(C)=36-21+8=23 kind.
Total code number of the 4 kind pattern codes different from distance between (a)~(d), reference conductor is
565+306+146+23=1,040.
In addition, distance is not limited to described 4 kinds certainly between reference conductor, if it is possible to the direction of identification icon code, It then can configuration baseline conductor everywhere.In addition, can also only be formed even if not configuring reference conductor with conductors of information unique Configuration defines pattern code.So-called unique configuration is that there is no the configurations of identical patterns rotation, mobile.
Figure 134 is the figure being illustrated to the situation for configuring the reference media of different sizes in conductors of information, adds up to configuration 3~4 conductors.(a) be for distance between reference conductor be the situation of 35mm, (b) is to be directed to distance between reference conductor to be It is the situation of 25mm that the situation of 30mm, (c), which are for distance between reference conductor, (d) is to be for distance between reference conductor The figure that the situation of 20mm is shown.
The pattern code of this implementation form configures 2 reference conductors and 1 or 2 conductors of information, thus pattern code Direction is determined, and can define unique pattern code.
Keep 2 reference conductors of different sizes in conductors of information, reaching the information equipment (200) with touch panel can know Other degree (in same figure, reference conductor being made to be greater than conductors of information).Information equipment (200) identification conductor is big as a result, It is small, it is known that big conductor is benchmark conductor.Moreover, knowing that remaining 1 or 2 is conductors of information, leads from reference conductor and information The positional relationship of body determines the direction of pattern code.
Distance between conductors (distance at some conductor center to another conductor center) is preferably 10mm or so.But, preferably Distance it is different due to the performance of smart phone or tablet computer.
After the maximum identification error of conductor center is assumed within ± 2mm or so (total 4mm or so), identification is led Body center spacing distance simultaneously configures conductor, so as to accurately obtain pattern code.
Then, each situation of (a)~(d) is illustrated.
It (a) is the figure shown for the situation that distance between reference conductor is 35mm.
The circle of the dotted line of the same figure is that the configuration of conductors of information is candidate (hereinafter referred to as " configuration is candidate ").Configuration is candidate For the interval 5mm.If identification error is small, the conductors of information that configuration candidate interval is configured can be reduced by increasing, and can be defined A large amount of pattern code.When actual disposition, the outfit of 10mm or more distance is left, so as to effectively identify that adjacent 2 lead Body.
When distance is 35mm between reference conductor, there are 34 by the configuration candidate of conductors of information.
But if configuring 2 conductors of information between reference conductor, reference conductor and conductors of information are configured to one Straight line, can not determine the direction of pattern code.Therefore, between reference conductor, information medium can only configure 1.Wherein, First in 34, outside by 3 configuration candidate exclusions between reference conductor, as follows, asked from residue 31 2 and 1 combinations are selected out.
31C2+ 31=496 kind ... (A).
Then, the group of 2 position candidates of the distance less than 10mm is combined between conductor
25+25+25+15+2=92 kind ... (B).
Conductor can not be arranged to make between conductor distance less than 10mm.This is because in the presence of that can not identify adjacent 2 Possibility.Therefore, the combination less than 10mm is left out.
Then, the configuration candidate between reference conductor selects 1, the combination for the situation that can be differentiated with other conductors For
29 × 2+28=86 kind ... (C).
The configuration group of the configurable conductors of information in (a) situation is combined into as a result,
(A)-(B)+(C)=496-92+86=490 kind.
It (b) is the figure shown for the situation that distance between reference conductor is 30mm.
At this point, distance is that the situation of 35mm is identical between reference conductor, there are 34 by the configuration candidate of conductors of information It is a.
Therefore, because constitute with the identical combination of situation of (a), thus with the configurable information in (B) situation The configuration group of conductor is combined into 490 kinds.
It (c) is the figure shown for the situation that distance between reference conductor is 25mm.
At this point, there are 32 by the configuration candidate of conductors of information.
But as shown in the situation of (a) (b), between reference conductor, information medium can only configure 1.Therefore, first 1 configuration excluded between reference conductor in 32 is candidate, as follows, finds out selection 2 and 1 from remaining 31 A combination.
31C2+ 31=496 kind ... (A).
Then, the group of 2 position candidates of the distance less than 10mm is combined between conductor
25+25+25+15+2=92 kind ... (B).
As shown in the situation of (a) (b), combination of the distance less than 10mm is left out between conductor.
Then, the configuration candidate between reference conductor selects 1, the combination for the situation that can be differentiated with other conductors For
28 kinds ... (C).
The configuration group of the configurable conductors of information in (c) situation is combined into as a result,
(A)-(B)+(C)=496-92+28=432 kind.
It (d) is the figure shown for the situation that distance between reference conductor is 20mm.
At this point, there are 30 by the configuration candidate of conductors of information.
But as shown in the situation of (a)~(c), between reference conductor, information medium can only configure 1.Therefore, first It is candidate that 1 configuration positioned at reference conductor between is first excluded in 30, as follows, found out from residue 29 select 2 and 1 combination.
29C2+ 29=435 kind ... (A).
Then, the group of 2 position candidates of the distance less than 10mm is combined between conductor
25+25+25+9=84 kind ... (B).
As shown in the situation of (a)~(c), combination of the distance less than 10mm is left out between conductor.
Then, the configuration candidate between reference conductor selects 1, the group for the situation that can be differentiated with other conductors It is combined into
28 kinds ... (C).
The configuration group of the configurable conductors of information in (d) situation is combined into as a result,
(A)-(B)+(C)=435-84+28=379 kind.
Total code number of the 4 kind pattern codes different from distance between (a)~(d), reference conductor is
490+490+432+379=1,791.
As described above, when make reference conductor and conductors of information it is of different sizes when, with the situation phase using identical size Than more pattern codes can be exported.
In addition, distance is not limited to described 4 kinds certainly between reference conductor, as long as capableing of the direction of identification icon code, It then can configuration baseline conductor everywhere.
In turn, by changing the size of 2 reference conductors, no matter conductors of information configuration wherein, can recognize pattern generation The direction of code.
Although in addition, implementation form 0~19 is illustrated above, in the present invention, each figure of each implementation form Case code, device etc. can surmount implementation form and suitably be applied in combination.For example, can will be filled in seal type code The middle pattern code utilized is set, card-type device, or the information judging device that will be utilized as card-type are used for, is used for seal type Device.Certainly otherwise also.
<implementation form 20>
The code generating device (1) of implementation form 0 above, the card-type of 1~implementation form of implementation form 9 can also be combined Device (110~110G) (following simple be known as device (110) etc.), implementation form 16 Figure 110~Figure 124 in exemplary diagram Show do not need power supply game with card, article (stage property) furthermore and formed 1 device.At this point, in the dress of this implementation form In setting, the imaging sensor (160D) of graphical representation of exemplary in implementation form 10 can also be combined, exemplary diagram in implementation form 11 The imaging sensor (160F) of graphical representation of exemplary in the imaging sensor (160E) that shows, implementation form 12 shows in implementation form 13 The imaging sensor (160G) of example property diagram, in implementation form 14 graphical representation of exemplary optical sensor (130).In addition, conduct The pattern code of the device of this implementation form exports step, can also in the form of application implementation 15 graphical representation of exemplary output step Suddenly.Alternatively, it is also possible to which the information transmitting processing of the device of graphical representation of exemplary in implementation form 17 and information equipment (200) is answered It is handled for the device of this implementation form and the information transmitting of information equipment (200).Alternatively, it is also possible to will be in implementation form 18 The optical sensor (130F and 130G) of graphical representation of exemplary is applied to the device of this implementation form.In addition, as this implementation form The pattern code of device, can also in the form of application implementation 19 pattern code configuration.
Figure 135 is the plan view observed in the inside of device (110K) relevant to implementation form 20.Wherein, the inside with Implementation forms 1 etc. are the same, are the touch panels for information equipment (200) of device (110K) in contact with or close to the face of side.Separately Outside, Figure 136 is the plan view observed on the surface of device (110K) relevant to implementation form 20.Surface is the opposite of the inside Face is to be touched when the touch panel of the inside contact information equipment (200) by a part of the human bodies such as user's finger Face.
As shown in Figure 135, Figure 136, the inside, the surface of device (110K) be divided into electric device region (110K-1) and Non-electrical device area (110K-2).Electric device region (110K-1) has electronic circuit component, power supply component etc., By means of the effect of electric circuit, electronic circuit, receive the operation of user, detects the touch panel of information equipment (200) Physical action.Electric device region (110K-1) is for example with code generating device (1), the implementation form of such as implementation form 0 The composition of the card-type device (110~110G) (following simple referred to as device (110) etc.) of 1~implementation form 9.In addition, touching The lower end in region (TC2) is embedded with the contact conductor (114) of graphical representation of exemplary in Figure 137.
The graphical representation of exemplary composition of electric device region (110K-1) in Figure 137.Specifically, electric device area Domain (110K-1) is changed to two pole of photoelectricity compared with the composition of the device (110F) of Figure 53, by photoelectric measurement element arrangements (129) It manages (WPD1~WPD6).In addition, in Figure 137, for the composition that illustrates in 1~implementation form of implementation form 10 The identical constituent element of element assigns symbol identical with 1~implementation form of implementation form 10 and the description thereof will be omitted.In addition, electric The component composition of gas device area (110K-1) is not limited to Figure 137, and implementation form 0, implementation form 1~implementation can be used Device (110) illustrated in form 10 etc..In addition, in Figure 137, although comparator (118) graphical representation of exemplary 1, And non-comparator (118) quantity is limited to 1.In the components of photo-electric conversion from multiple photodiodes (WPD1~EPD6 etc.) (optical sensor, optotransistor etc.) side by side in the case where detection signal, comparator (110) can be by first with multiple light-to-current inversions The identical quantity of part is equipped with side by side.By means of the group of multiple photodiodes (WPD1~EPD6 etc.) and multiple comparators (118) It closes, forms the circuit for obtaining the input signal in multiple channels.Analog/digital conversion is used alternatively, it is also possible to replace comparator Device (A/D converter).By utilizing A/D converter, so that the more of 3 bits or more may be implemented in primary input in each channel Value signal.
As shown in Figure 135, device (110K) inside have 6 elements (111) and 6 photodiodes (WPD1~ WPD6), identical as [variation 2 of implementation form 8] (Figure 69, Figure 70) in this regard.In turn, device (110K) inside has There are the components of photo-electric conversion to arrange (112A), touch area (SCP1).In addition, device (110K) has on surface as shown in Figure 136 There are the components of photo-electric conversion to arrange (112B), fingerprint sensor (113), touch area (TC2) and touch area (TC4).
The composition and effect of 6 elements (111) of the inside and 6 photodiodes (WPD1~WPD6) with pass through Figure 69 And as Figure 70 explanation.Such as description in Figure 69, each element (111) switches ON/ according to the sequence of 1~pattern of pattern 9 OFF, output pattern code.Device (110K) detects the touch panel of information equipment (200) in such as 6 elements (111) Capacitor (electric field strength) caused by 5 elements (111).Information equipment (200) identifies such as 6 elements on touch panel (111) output pattern of 5 elements (111) in, to identify photodiode (WPD1 according to the configuration of element (111) ~WPD6) allocation position.
On the other hand, photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) is respectively arranged at and the display device of information equipment (200) The corresponding position circular with swash in light code light emitting region (LE1~LE6).The display device of information equipment (200) makes and light The light code light emitting region (LE1~LE6) of the corresponding display device of allocation position of electric diode (WPD1~WPD6) respectively with Independent light quantity shines, and makes corresponding photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) light.According to this composition, wavelength-limited, does not lead to It crosses and the light emitting region of display device is distinguished, the information input of multichannel can be carried out from display device to device (110).
Photoelectric cell transformation arrangement (112A) is so-called solar panel, receives the sunray from display device And it is transformed into electric energy, electric power is supplied to each portion of device (110K).Photoelectric cell transformation arrangement is equipped with it is however also possible to replace (112A) supplies electric power to device (110K) by light-to-current inversion from photodiode (WPD1~WPD6).That is, as light Electric diode (WPD1~WPD6), uses the light receiving element for being respectively provided with abundant ability to transform.Photodiode (WPD1 ~WPD6) multiple photodiodes can also be respectively included and improve generating capacity.
In addition, the components of photo-electric conversion on surface, which arrange (112B), matches the photoelectric cell change for being ready for use on and reinforcing by means of the inside Change gear column (112A) power supply or power supply by means of photodiode (WPD1~WPD6).That is, device (110K) By means of the components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112B) on surface, the photoelectric cell transformation arrangement (112A) of the inside and photodiode The combination of (WPD1~WPD6) or they at least one and receive power supply.But, in the photoelectric cell change by means of the inside In the case where changing gear column (112A) or photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) and supplying sufficient electric power, the not no photoelectricity on surface Even inverting element arranges (112B).
Fingerprint sensor (113) is for example authenticated for user.Equally with the device (110) of implementation form 1, device It, can when user's finger print data that (110K) is for example stored in the fingerprint detected using fingerprint sensor and memory is consistent Detect triggering pattern by touch panel from element.
In addition, device (110K) for example will be from photodiode (WPD1 in the case where omitting fingerprint sensor (113) ~WPD6) receive set starting light pattern as triggering, it starts to process.In addition, device (110K) is for example by people's The contact conductor (114) that finger, conductor furthermore contact touch area (TC2) is started to process as triggering.In addition, dress Set (110K) for example and can also replace fingerprint sensor (113) and the imaging sensor with graphical representation of exemplary in Figure 39, Figure 41 (113) etc..In this case, device (110K) starts by interpretations predetermined patterns such as imaging sensors (113) as triggering Processing.
Non-electrical device area (110K-2) does not have electronic circuit component, power supply component etc., such as works as user When the surface of press device (110K), machinery/physical deformation of the material by means of forming device (110K), user's finger Close to being detected by the touch panel of information equipment (200).Non-electrical device area (110K-2) has and implementation form 16 The game card for not needing power supply of middle graphical representation of exemplary and the furthermore identical structure of article (stage property).As non-electrical device Region (110K-2) also can use a certain structure of Figure 113, Figure 114, Figure 116, Figure 119~Figure 122.In addition, conduct The touch area (TC4) of non-electrical device area (110K-2), can also be just like touch area transparent shown in Figure 123.
As described above, the code generating device of implementation form 0 can be combined according to the device (110K) of implementation form 20 (1) with implementation form 16 do not need power supply game block and furthermore article (stage property) and be formed as 1 device.In addition, can With the game card for not needing power supply of device (110) for combining 1~implementation form of implementation form 9 etc. and implementation form 16 and Furthermore article (stage property) and 1 device of formation.
At this point, user makes finger or conductor etc. contact touch area (TC2), to make the touch of information equipment (200) Panel detection to element (111) position, to enter data into information equipment (200).In addition, user touches pressing Touch area (TC4), so as to so that the touch panel of information equipment (200) detects pressing position.
At this point, touch area (TC2) is used as the first operation portion, if the position of contact human body or device (110K) are outside Electric conductor, then 1 or more the physical quantity control unit driven and by means of information output part export the first set information. In addition, touch area (TC4) is used as the second operation portion, if the position of contact human body or electric conductor, make information equipment (200) touch panel identifies corresponding contact position.
Therefore, the position of information equipment (200) detecting element (111), thus if the position of identification device (110K), Region (LE1~LE6) in display device is set to shine, then so as to photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) input light figure Case.It, can be with thus if the position of identification device (110K) in addition, the position of information equipment (200) detecting element (111) Detect touch area (TC4) pressing position, the surface identification device (110K) which at be pressed.Information equipment (200) is for example It can identify the labels such as the posting of Figure 136 " Japanese ", " English ", " listening (Listen) ", " reading (Read) ", " writing (Write) " Region is pressed, and executes the processing determined by these labels.
In addition, user can select in the case where touch area (TC4) has transparent touch region as shown in Figure 123 Select the icon shown in touch panel (display device) that transparent region is shown and graphic user interface (GUI) component furthermore. Therefore, information equipment (200) receives input to touch panel from the element (111) of device (110K), from display device to light Electric diode (WPD1~WPD6) inputs light pattern, so as to receive and send messages with device (110K), is executing multiplicity processing Meanwhile by the transparent region of touch area (TC4), receive the input to touch panel.
<implementation form 21>
According to Figure 138~Figure 163, to the circuit of device (110L) relevant to implementation form 21 constitute details, control and Information processing is illustrated.
In addition, the composition of the device (110L) illustrated in this implementation form also can be applied to the generation of the implementation form 0 The device (110~110K) of code generating device (1), 1~implementation form of implementation form 9 and implementation form 20 (hereinafter referred to as fills Set (110) etc.).Alternatively, it is also possible to by code generating device (1), the 1~implementation form of implementation form 9 of the implementation form 0 And the composition of the device (110~110K) (following simple referred to as device (110) etc.) of implementation form 20 is applied to this implementation form Device (110L).The appearance of device (110K) constitutes identical as device (110K) of implementation form 20 (35, figure referring to Fig.1 136).In addition, the structure in the electric device region (110K-1) of the composition of the electric circuit of device (110K) and device (110K) It is identical at (Figure 137).Therefore, Figure 135, Figure 136 also direct reference in implementation form 21.
Figure 138 is that the circuit of exemplary diagram showing device (110L) constitutes the figure of details.Device (110L) is in information input side Each letter of multiple photodiodes (WPD1~WPD6) is come from equipped with multiple photodiodes (WPD1~WPD6), detection Number multiple comparators (118) and possess the buffer (182) of the signal from multiple comparators (118).In addition, in this theory In bright book in the case where general name photodiode (WPD1~WPDk (k is integer)), referred to as photodiode (WPD) merely.
In addition, in information outlet side, equipped with 2 output buffers (183A/183B), selector (184), driving electricity Road (180), SW (115), element (111) and contact conductor (conductive pad) (114).With the device (110) of the implementation form etc. Equally, if the contacts such as user's finger contact conductor (114), pass through the SW (115) of ON state, the human body of user The capacitor having and element (111) are electrically connected.As a result, electrostatic moves between element (111) and human body, touch panel inspection It surveys the capacitance variations between panel and element (111) or the electric field strength from element (111) changes.
CPU (116) such as according to the computer program being operably unfolded in memory (117) come control device (110L).Alternately output information, control selections device (184) are slow from output from output buffer (183A and 183B) by CPU (116) Device (183A and 183B) is rushed alternately to driving circuit (180) output information.Driving circuit (180) from output buffer (183A and Information 183B) is alternately obtained, according to the information of acquirement, controlling SW (115) becomes ON or OFF, thus from element (111), to scheme The form output information of case code.In addition, though omit in Figure 138, but driving circuit (180) utilizes matching independently Line (circuit) and connect with each SW (115), each SW (115) can be made independently to be ON or OFF.Moreover, CPU (116) will under A information is output to output buffer (183A).CPU (116) and driving circuit (180) can be described as one of information output part Example.
Then, information equipment (200) is together with synchronous optical signal, and the code value of the pattern code that will test is towards light Electric diode (WPD1~WPD6) shines.The signal that comparator (118) receives from photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) generates 0 Or 1 digital signal, be stored in buffer (182).Then, exclusive or (EXOR) circuit (181) protects output buffer (183B) Some information (code value) are compared with the information (code value) protected in buffer (182).If XOR circuit (181) Detected in the code value of buffer (182) and the code value of output buffer (183B) it is inconsistent, then to selector (184) It assigns and transmits instruction again.Then, selector (184) exports the information of output buffer (183B) again to driving circuit (180).On the other hand, if XOR circuit (181) is in the code value of buffer (182) and the generation of output buffer (183B) It is detected in code value unanimously, then assigns buffer switching instruction to selector (184).Then, selector (184) buffers output The information of device (183A), which exports, gives driving circuit (180).In this way, in the code of the pattern code exported from element (111) Value executes error check between the code value for including in light code with synchronous.
But, in Figure 138, device (110L) not exports although having 2 output buffers (183A/183B) Number of buffers is limited to 2.For example, the description such as in implementation form 21, device (110K) will become the benchmark distinguished Pattern and multiple information patterns are organized into one, as pattern code string, output pattern code.The pattern code string is known as electricity Hold code or message code.At this point, can also correspondingly be matched according to the information pattern number of reference pattern to next reference pattern Standby output buffer (183A) etc..By being equipped with output buffer corresponding with pattern code string, can postpone to execute output The timing of the error check of pattern code, for example, error check can be executed after the output of pattern code string.
In addition, in Figure 138, convert the selector (184) of output buffer (183A/183B), driving circuit (180), The hardware circuits such as the XOR circuit (181) of error check are executed, can be executed at pattern code output with CPU (116) together Reason, error check, again transmission process etc..But CPU (116) can also execute part or all of these processing.It is another Aspect can also execute a part processing of CPU (116) in hardware circuit.
In addition, though omitted in Figure 138, equally with implementation form 20 (Figure 137), the graphical representation of exemplary from Figure 137 The components of photo-electric conversion arrange (112A, 112B) etc., to CPU (116), comparator (118), photodiode (WPD1~WPD6), Buffer (182), output buffer (183A/183B), driving circuit (180), SW (115) etc. supply power supply.
In addition, photodiode (WPD1~WPD6), multiple element (111) separate configuration in Figure 138.But scheme 138 have expressed the connection relationship on electric circuit, but not limit the positional relationship of physics.Therefore, photodiode (WPD1 ~WPD6), multiple element (111) can both adjoin each other as shown in Figure 135, Figure 137 configuration, configuration can also be separated.Separately Outside, the quantity of photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) and the quantity of multiple element (111) both may be the same or different.
As shown in graphical representation of exemplary in Figure 138, device (110L) also can have interface (I/F) circuit (180A) and connect It is connected to illumination region, sound portion, vibration section, the wireless communication part etc. of I/F circuit (180A).Wherein, illumination region is, for example, luminous two Pole pipe (LED) etc..In addition, sound portion is sound (the sound, sound) generating unit and loudspeaker for including digital-to-analog transformation component Deng.In addition, vibration section is oscillator and the vibrator etc. for causing mechanical oscillation.In addition, wireless communication part is based on wireless The communication interface of LocalArea Ntwork (LAN), Bluetooth specification etc..
Moreover, device (110L) (CPU (116)) is exporting the pattern code as the first information according to pattern code Data block (capacitor code, message code) while, input as the second information light code data block (information generation Code), execute the information processing of multiplicity.Moreover, device (110L) can also be according to information processing as a result, passing through I/F circuit (180A), according in come self-luminescent part shine, the sound equipment from sound portion, the vibration from vibration section, from nothing The wireless communication of line communication unit, to external notification third information.Above illumination region, sound portion, vibration section, wireless communication part At least one, I/F circuit (180A) and CPU (116) can be described as an example of information output part.It but, is including implementing In this implementation form of form 21, illumination region, sound portion, vibration section, wireless communication part and I/F circuit (180A) are simultaneously nonessential It constitutes, it is convenient to omit.
Figure 139 is 5 photodiodes (WPD1~WPD5), 5 elements (111-1~111-5) in implementation form 21 Configuration example.In addition, in the case where individually calling element (111-1) etc., describing in following implementation form as element (111-1) etc., in the case where general name, referred to as element (111) merely.In addition, at general name photodiode (WPD1~WPD5) In the case where, referred to as photodiode (WPD) merely.But, not multiple photodiodes (WPD1) etc. and multiple element (111) number is limited to 5.For example, the number of multiple photodiodes (WPD1) etc. and multiple element (111) can also be with It is not identical number.In addition, the configuration example of multiple photodiodes (WPD1) etc. and multiple element (111) is not defined in figure 138.For example, the configuration of photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) and multiple element (111) may be implementation form 8, implement The composition of form 9, embodiment 21.
In Figure 139 example, 5 elements (111) and the adjacent configuration of 5 photodiodes (WPD1~WPD5).In addition, Graphical representation of exemplary assigns digital label to each element (111) in figure, so that 5 elements (111) can know on the diagram Not.
Illustrate as done in implementation form 8, information equipment (200) is detected on touch panel from element (111) The configuration of physical quantity variation, recognition component (111) makes display device in the corresponding position of photodiode (WPD1~WPD5) It shines, to be communicated with device (110L).In addition, throughout this manual, the SW (115) of element (111) will be connected to Become ON, make element (111) and contact the situation of conductor (114) as on state, shows as " becoming element (111) ON".In addition, the SW (115) that will be connected to element (111) becomes OFF, makes between element (111) and contact conductor (114) The situation for becoming dissengaged positions shows as " element (111) is made to become OFF ".
The communication sequence between device (110L) and information equipment (200) is illustrated in n-lustrative in Figure 140.In the figure From upside, shown when SW (115) are OFF in the first row and the third line graphical representation of exemplary pattern code, white circle State, black circles show state when SW (115) are ON.It with dotted line circular part is matched with Figure 139 in the figure Set the pattern code for being equivalent to 1 output determined by physical quantity variation accordingly exported.In addition, from the upside of figure, Graphical representation of exemplary light code in second row and fourth line.It is to photoelectricity two with the circular part of dotted line as pattern code Pole pipe (WPD1~WPD5) it is luminous be equivalent to 1 luminous light code.In Figure 138, such as black rectangle exemplary diagram Shown photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) by light state, white rectangle graphical representation of exemplary photodiode (WPD1~ WPD6 nothing) is by light state.
Device (110L) occurs that the physical quantity from element (111) in information equipment (200) by touch panel Variation, makes configuration of information equipment (200) recognition component (111) on touch panel.For example, user is by device (110L) Close to touch panel, so that the reference pattern for exporting element (111) position for identification (is connected to the SW of all elements (111) (115) equal ON).Wherein, the number 0~10 recorded below pattern code is the index of pattern code.Index graphical representation of exemplary A series of position of the output sequence of pattern codes before reference pattern to next reference pattern.That is, device (110L) conduct First pattern code and outputting reference pattern.Then, touch panel detects physical quantity variation, identifies the position of conductor.
Then, matching for information equipment (200) recognition component (111) postpones, and luminous, control is carried out with light code to synchronous The timing that next pattern code is exported from device (110L).Information equipment (200) can be by means of the synchronous timing for using light code Control improves and identifies probability by the pattern code of touch panel.In addition, in Figure 140, do not make pattern code index (under State system) synchronous light code is contained in from device (111).In Figure 140, index exemplary diagram is shown as 0~10 number. It is assigned and being indexed with light code by appended synchronization, thus, such as pattern occurs in the synchronization light code for specifying the index When code error, device (110L) can specify the index and again transmission patterns code.
In the example in the drawings, for information equipment (200) after identifying reference pattern, in generation, is used up in synchronizing for output index 2 Code.If receiving the synchronization light code of index 2, device (110L) exports even-odd check pattern.Alternatively, it is also possible to make Even-odd check pattern is exported in the ending of pattern code string.In addition, being determined from device (110L) by physical quantity variation Pattern code output facet, even-odd check are not necessary.For the error check for replacing even-odd check, using Figure 141 and In addition Figure 164~Figure 170 is described in detail.
Information equipment (200) is after detection parity pattern, the synchronization light code of output index 3~10.Index 3 ~10 synchronization is combined with light code come performance information, thus referred to as message code.But, it is not wrapped in message code The light code number contained is defined in 8.Device (110L) if receive index 3~10 synchronization light code, for index 3~ 10 each phototiming is inputted with light code, by set timing, exports the pattern code of 8 patterns respectively.
Then, information equipment (200) carries out synchronization with light code 1 luminous, and the synchronization is with light code 1 to Representative Region Divide and the reference pattern of conductor configuration pattern carries out output control.Synchronizing with light code 1 is the code comprising index 1.Device (110) light code 1 is used if receiving to synchronize, again outputting reference pattern.In turn, if information equipment (200) output index 2~10 synchronization light code, then with it is synchronous with light code by phototiming, device (110L) export parity check code and Transmit the pattern code string of information.It is synchronous with index 3~10 to be also referred to as information generation with the corresponding pattern code string of light code string Code.But, in order to distinguish with light code, also there is the situation that pattern code string is known as to capacitor code.
Then, it after information equipment (200) identifies reference pattern by touch panel, is carried out to synchronous with light code It shines, control exports next conductive pattern, so that touch panel can certainly identify conductive pattern.Then, it is used when synchronous When index (including following 10 systems) of the ordinal position comprising the representative pattern code from device (110) in light code, needle To information equipment (200) side once unrecognized pattern code, can to the synchronization comprising same index with light code 1 again It shines, again output pattern code.In turn, information equipment (200) side can only export pattern generation corresponding with specified index Code.But, it is not necessary to use in light code synchronous comprising index.That is, information equipment (200) can also be used as to synchronize and use up Signal merely issues the pattern of 1 type, such as distribution makes the light generation of all photodiodes (WPD1~WPD6) light Code.In the case where the light code of all photodiodes (WPD1~WPD6) light will be made as synchronizing with light code, even if The identification of element (111) is not exclusively also not related.This is because information equipment (200) in display device include device (110) all regions shine.At this point, being sequentially output pattern code by each time interval.But if not It is equipped with index, then not identifying which pattern code outputed, presses in all SW (115) and (is connected to reference pattern The SW (115) of all elements (111) becomes ON) in the case that different patterns becomes ON, it can not identify reference pattern.Therefore, By the way that the pattern that all elements (111) are ON is limited to reference pattern and is used, so that information equipment (200) can To identify reference pattern.In turn, device (110L) can not by initial reference pattern export before or whole OFF even-odd check Pattern, touch panel can not identify conductive pattern situation (mistake etc.), for excludes to touch move phenomenon (aftermentioned) by institute There is element (111) to become the pattern etc. of OFF, distinguishes and identify for the information pattern of OFF with all elements (111).Therefore, All elements (111) are that the pattern of OFF is eliminated from pattern code, are based on information equipment (200) so as to realize Information pattern identification.As a result, as shown in implementation form 21, when 3~10 8 conductive patterns become information pattern, originally The information content of 5bit × 8=40bit (about 1,100,000,000 code) can be exported, but as information pattern, if be ON by entirety, Entirety is outside OFF is arranged in, then describable information content is 5bit=64, thus is 8 powers=about 218,000,000 generations of (64-2) Code.As information pattern, by be ON by entirety, that entirety is that OFF is arranged in is outer, thus compared with not excluded situation, Information content is 1/5 or so.On the other hand, if schemed by the mark for being used to distinguish reference pattern and information pattern using 1bit The describable information of case code is 4bit × 8=32bit (about 4,300,000,000 code), and information content extremely reduces.Therefore, for difference The gimmick of the method for certain bits reference pattern and information pattern, this implementation form is very reasonable, is also used as with other implementations The pattern code that form illustrates, this is self-evident.
Figure 141 is that the synchronization light code that graphical representation of exemplary information equipment (200) is exported from display device is synchronous with receiving With the timing diagram of the relationship for the pattern code of device (110L) output of light code determined by physical quantity variation.Firstly, opening When beginning to communicate, device (110L) exports the reference pattern determined by physical quantity variation.Information equipment (200) is in touch panel The initial pattern code of identification is benchmark pattern, thus the index of reference pattern is 1.That is, information equipment (200) by means of The identification of reference pattern and index is initialized as 1.
Information equipment (200) is identified by means of touch panel after the reference pattern that device (110L) is exported, as same Signal is walked, synchronization is carried out with light code from display device luminous.The synchronous sequence number shown with light code is shown in the figure (index 2~10 and 1).Device (110L) uses light code if identification is synchronous, and output represents the timing in respective index immediately The pattern code of the information of middle output.
Figure 142 shows an example of the error check mode in implementation form 21.In Figure 140, used up as synchronizing Code, graphical representation of exemplary represent the light code or simple identical smooth code of 1~10 index.But generation is used up for synchronizing Code shines, and information equipment (200) can also be determined what is detected before respective synchronization light code shines by physical quantity variation The value (also referred to as code value) that pattern code represents directly returns to device (110L).Information equipment (200) will be from by detecting The code value obtained in the pattern code that physical quantity variation determines is contained in next synchronous light code, and is sent back to device (110), so that device (110) can repeatedly implement error check.In this case, information is output to from device (110L) The pattern code of equipment (200) is directly from information equipment (200) foldback return device (110), thus device (110) can be examined By the whole bits for the output result that physical quantity variation determines.
In addition, the processing speed in information equipment (200) is different from the processing speed in device (110L), device as a result, (110L) is not needed whenever from information equipment (200) foldback light code, by error result notification information equipment (200), is pressed and is appointed Timing of anticipating notice.
In Figure 142, the state for being OFF from all SW (115) of index 0, the outputting reference pattern in index 1.And And for the synchronization light code of index 1~9, the pattern code of output index 2~10 determined by physical quantity variation.Example Such as, index 2 synchronization be with light code index 3 synchronization light code, meanwhile, as examining in the index 2 exported before this The code (hereinafter referred to as error check light code) of the mistake of pattern code.
After device (110L) identifies error check light code with light code as synchronization, next pattern code is exported. If at least one does not shine in photodiode (WPD1~WPD5), device (110L) can not receive synchronization signal.Therefore, In Figure 142, central photodiode (WPD5) is used as synchronous use.That is, information equipment (200) uses up generation in all synchronize When code shines, display device is made to shine for the photodiode (WPD5) in center.
According to this communication sequence, mistake is accomplished as follows in figure and corrects.In the index 5 of figure, device (110L) exists In the pattern code (CP1) determined by physical quantity variation, element (111-1,111-3,111-4) is exported as ON, by element (111-2,111-5) output is OFF (label for defining referring to Fig.1 39 of element (111)).On the other hand, in index 5 After pattern code (CP1) output of device (110L), the synchronization from information equipment (200) is with light code (CP2) Be photodiode (WPD3, WPD4, WPD5) be ON, photodiode (WPD1, WPD2) is OFF.Wherein, photodiode (WPD5) as described above, being the bit in order to synchronize and export always ON.Therefore, information equipment just is come from index 5 (200) synchronization the value of photodiode (WPD1) and is sent to letter from device (110L) before this with for light code (CP2) The pattern code (CP1) for ceasing equipment (200) is different.
The device (110L) for receiving synchronization light code (CP2) of index 5, to the code value of corresponding light code (CP2) with Possess in itself output buffer (183A or 183B) index 5 in terminate send pattern code (CP1) code value into Row compares, the mistake of the output valve in detecting element (111-1).It is tied at this point, device (110L) exports again in index 5 The identical pattern code of pattern code (CP3) of beam output.The indexing diagram of the pattern code (CP3) exported again in the figure For 5-2.But, when exporting again, the element (111-5) in center is become ON by device (110L).Then, information equipment (200) The situation for being ON from central member (111-5), being identified as front terminates the pattern code (pattern code of index 5) of output Export again.Moreover, in index 5A, it is corresponding to the pattern code (CP3) with light before synchronous to be sent out with light code Light.Then, device (110L) and information equipment (200) restore common communication.As described above, information equipment (200) will be with this The preceding corresponding smooth code of pattern code for terminating detection is returned to device (110L), to realize error check.
In Figure 143, it is shown that another example that pattern code exports again.In the figure in index 3, pattern code (CP4) information equipment (200) are output to from device (110L).In pattern code (CP4), element (111-1) and element (111- It 3) is ON.On the other hand, in index 3, the synchronization of device (110L) is returned to light code (CP5) from information equipment (200) The photodiode (WPD5) as synchronization bit is excluded, only photodiode (WPD3) is ON.Therefore, device (110L) It is identified as the bit-errors of element (111-1) in pattern code (CP4).Moreover, device (110L) then exports in index 3A The identical pattern code (CP6) with pattern code (CP4).Then, the communication recovery of device (110L) and information equipment (200) Common state.
Figure 144 is the timing diagram of synchronization the light code and pattern code relationship in graphical representation of exemplary Figure 142, Figure 143. It in pattern code and synchronizes in light code, index exemplary diagram is shown as label.As theory made in Figure 142, Figure 143 It is bright, in the index 5 of the upper end (the first row and the second row) of figure, in the figure that information equipment (200) detection device (110L) exports Mistake occurs when case code.Moreover, according to the synchronization light code for being returned to device (110L) from information equipment (200), device (110L) detect mistake, index 5A in export again it is previous terminate output pattern code (central element (111-5) be ON, The output phase of other elements is same).Similarly, it in the index 3 of the lower end of figure (the third line and fourth line), is set according to from information Standby (200) are returned to the synchronization light code of device (110L), and device (110L) detects mistake, before exporting again in index 3A The secondary pattern code for terminating output.
[variation of pattern code]
Figure 145 is the figure of another composition of the inside of exemplary diagram showing device (110L) contact touch panel.As schemed Show, device (110L) has element (111-1)~element (111-5).In addition, device (110L) also can have switch (SWL).Switch (SWL) is the switch when device (110L) loads on the surface except touch panel for ON.In addition, device (110L) can also be equipped with information judging device in the position of switch (SWL).Information judging device is, for example, implementation form 9 The imaging sensor (160D) etc. of graphical representation of exemplary in imaging sensor (160), 10~implementation form of implementation form 13.The letter Breath interpretation device has the function of the 2 d codes or fingerprint etc. such as interpretation QR code, dot code, colour coding.When interpretation two dimension generation When code, if it is printed matter, then in the case where not from device (110L) irradiation light, due to there is no reflected light, thus clap It takes the photograph dark, when irradiation light, is shot because of reflected light bright.On the other hand, if it is display device, then not from In the case where device irradiation light, in addition to the non-luminous situation of display device, shoot bright.In the feelings for having irradiated light Under condition, display device not reflected illumination light, thus shoot image and do not change.It is possible thereby to from light irradiate whether as a result, Identification is printed matter or display device.On the other hand, the 2 d code shown in display device can not with printing High-resolution is shown, thus is preferably switched over, and the 2 d code than printing further expansion is shown as, so as to information judging Device interpretation.For example, in press, dot size 0.042mm, benchmark dot interval is when 2 d code is dot code 0.508mm, but in a display device, if not all it is 2 times or so or more, then can not accurately shows dot pattern, it is difficult With interpretation.Therefore, the situation of printed matter and the situation of shooting display device are shot, information judging device is can use and judges certain It one, is switched over using corresponding software, suitably interpretation 2 d code.
In addition, photodiode (WPD1) etc. omits in Figure 145.When not receiving light code, can also there is no photoelectricity Diode.In this embodiment, graphical representation of exemplary element (111-1)~element (111-5).In addition, in this embodiment, element (111- 1)~element (111-5) corresponds to the bit 1~5 of the pattern code of output.
Figure 146 is the pattern generation that graphical representation of exemplary is exported by means of element (111-1)~element (111-5) of Figure 145 The figure of code.The ON of element (111) is illustrated as black in the figure, and OFF is illustrated as white.In the figure in the lower section of pattern code, Bit value representated by graphical representation of exemplary index 1~10 and pattern code.In addition, bit value is determined according to the bit of Figure 145 Justice.All elements (111) of index 1 are the pattern of ON in the figure, are that device (110L) makes information equipment (200) recognition component (111) reference pattern of the differentiation of representative pattern code string while configuration.The pattern (referred to as information pattern) of representative information Pattern code does not need to foreclose reference pattern.Therefore, in Figure 145 in the information pattern of graphical representation of exemplary, element (111-1) (corresponding to bit 5) is always OFF.In addition, the pattern code of index 2 uses in even-odd check pattern.Therefore, Device (110L) can use the pattern code of index 3~10, export the information content of 4bit × 8=32bit (about 4,300,000,000 code). Wherein, index 6 information pattern be element (111) all OFF (hereinafter referred to as full OFF pattern), two sides pattern code All OFF.At this point, being difficult to information pattern.Therefore, the feelings of index are not included with light code as the synchronization of Figure 140 The explanation of shape, by the way that the pattern of full ON is limited to reference pattern, so as to identify reference pattern.In turn, by will be complete The information pattern of OFF is removed from pattern code, and must have some element is ON, so as to identification information pattern.Knot Fruit, as shown in this embodiment, when index 3~10 8 information patterns become 1 block pattern code when, if by full ON, The pattern of full OFF forecloses, then is 5bit=64, thus (64-2) 8 powers=about 218,000,000 codes, information content substantially increases Add.
In addition, device (110L) exports information corresponding with various application program for pattern code.Show as one Example both can direct output information interpretation device in the case where device (110L) has information judgings devices such as CPU (116) The information of interpretation, such as dot code (32bit) can also include device (110L) in a part of the information of output Identification information (ID).
The feature property of can be exemplified of Figure 146 be shown in the reference pattern proposed in index 1~10, even-odd check pattern and It is the pattern code of OFF inserted with all elements (111) between information pattern.Full OFF pattern is in order to from the first pattern The output state variable of code prevents from touching mobile error detection and exporting when turning to the output state of the second pattern code.Wherein, So-called touch movement is user when touch panel implements touch operation, if user touches finger from present finger etc. The position touched takes away and touches neighbouring position within the short time within given time, then touch panel is considered as and detects finger The operation moved under touch condition.If touch panel detects touch operation, the coordinate being inserted between 2 touch operations Data are exported.Such as in the equipment such as smart phone, especially if quick touch neighbouring position, then touch mobile quilt Detection.
As described above, index 1 reference pattern, index 2 even-odd check pattern, index 3~10 information pattern it The preceding pattern code be inserted into whole elements (111) and be OFF, in such a case, it is possible to be OFF's by the whole element (111) Pattern code is used as synchronization pattern.Information equipment (200) presses NOR logic, exports to physical quantity corresponding with each element (111) It is synthesized.Then, in the case where whole outputs of the element of Figure 145 (111-1~111-5) are OFF, information is set Standby detection logic 1 can be that the input of OFF is synchronous with the whole bit, import as next information pattern.
In addition, in this process, the pattern code that full bit is OFF can be also used as wrong patterns code.For example, It is assumed that processing is inputted by the pattern code of first time, certain pattern code inputs information equipment (200), then, the pattern The code value of code is from information equipment (200) with the return of same light code.Furthermore it is assumed that terminating the pattern code of previous transmission Code value and the code value that is returned as light code it is inconsistent.Then, device (110L) is in order to logical to information equipment (200) Know mistake, (1) exports synchronization pattern code (full bit be OFF) first, and (2) then (full bit is output error pattern code OFF), (3) then export the pattern that mistake occurs again.By such output pattern code, information equipment (200) can With after (1) synchronization pattern, (full bit is OFF) to detection (2) mistake wrong patterns code, and then obtains pattern code again.
But, which exported for the pattern code from device (110L), exports it in next synchronization pattern Before, code value corresponding with pattern code is write in reply from information equipment (200) as light code, can with non-time delay The situation of processing.In addition, if pattern export again next synchronization pattern generation before be not finished when, device (110L) will Replace the processing, after (1), (2) output error wrong patterns code (full bit is OFF), after (3), output is represented The pattern code that the index of mistake occurs in which pattern code after (4), exports the next pattern that mistake occurs again ?.Information equipment (200) can be except synchronization pattern as a result, and (2) detect wrong wrong patterns code (full bit is OFF), (3) obtain the index that mistake occurs, and (4) obtain pattern code again.
When shown in Figure 147 by means of device (110L) output from the pattern code of element (111), touch surface Plate is to the example for touching mobile progress error detection.In the figure before output variation, element (111-1 and 111-2) is ON.Then, Short time within the promising time, element (111-1) become OFF, and element (111-4) becomes ON.The output of element (111-2) It is unchanged.Now, by the position of element (111-1) as starting point PS (X0, Y0), by the position of element (111-4) as terminal PE(XE,YE).In this case, touch panel will be from more on starting point PS (X0, Y0) the to terminal straight line of PE (XE, YE) A point PS (X0, Y0), P1 (X1, Y1), P2 (X2, Y2) ..., the coordinate value of PE (XE, YE) be output to application program.This touching Touching mobile detection is considered executing in touch panel device driver etc..According to touch panel, there is also do not export midway Coordinate is to touch to start with element (111-1), is exported to be moved to the touch movement of element (111-4) in touch condition Situation.
It is reduced when Figure 148 graphical representation of exemplary is for coming from the pattern code of device (110L) in output and touches mobile miss The processing of detection.That is, when exporting the second information pattern, exporting whole elements after device (110L) output first information pattern (111) the full OFF pattern for being OFF.Moreover, then exporting the second information pattern.In smart phone on probation, by hum pattern Case is set as 70ms, and synchronization pattern is set as 100ms, prevents from touching mobile error detection.Alternatively, it is also possible to according to smart phone machine Type and it is different.Wherein, if widening the interval (such as 15mm or so) of adjacent element (111), the generation of mobile phenomenon is touched It reduces.In addition, can identify the position of original element by exploitation software corresponding with mobile processing is touched.This information The limitation of the design value or setting value of equipment (200) type can be changed by each type by setting.But, such as In each type, it is changed to operating system (OS) device driver run to be not limited to the design value of type or setting value, So as to avoid this limitation.
Figure 146 is returned, illustrates to handle example.In the index 1 of Figure 146, since it is determined differentiation and the direction of data block, Thus outputting reference pattern.Then, full OFF pattern is exported, in index 2, exports even-odd check pattern.In turn, output is complete OFF pattern exports information pattern corresponding with Bit String 1011 in index 3.Same treatment is repeated later, until rope Draw 10.
According to Figure 146, the even-odd check of implementation form 21 is illustrated.In the figure in the parity diagram of index 2 In case, element (111-1): OFF, element (111-2~111-4): ON.On the other hand, in index 3~10, element (111- It 1) is 1 in index 3,4,5,8,9,10.Therefore, parity value is to add these bits 1, is 1+1+1+0+0+1+1+1=1.Cause This, using odd parity value, in even-odd check pattern, element (111-1) is OFF.
Similarly, for element (111-2), the bit addition calculated value in index 3~10 is 1+1+0+1+0+1+1+1+0= 0.When for odd parity value, in even-odd check pattern, element (111-1) is ON.In addition, for element (111-3), rope Drawing the bit addition calculated value in 3~10 is 0+1+1+0+0+1+1+1=1.When for odd parity value, in even-odd check pattern, Element (111-3) is OFF.In turn, for element (111-4), indexing the bit addition calculated value in 3~10 is 1+0+0+0+1+1+ 0+0=1.When for odd parity value, in even-odd check pattern, element (111-4) is OFF.
[the communication process process between device (110L) and information equipment (200)]
The pattern code output that the CPU (116) of graphical representation of exemplary device (110L) is executed in Figure 149 handles (device Side synchronous communication).But, Figure 149 processing below can not be is executed by CPU (116), but is executed by hardware circuit.Cause This, in the following description, each process flow illustrates according to being executed by device (110L).
In this process, device (110L) is first from element (111) outputting reference pattern (S60).Then, device (110L) waits the light of the synchronization light code from information equipment (200).Moreover, if receiving synchronous light code, Device (110L) exports even-odd check pattern (S61) from element (111).Moreover, the synchronization of device (110L) execution information pattern It exports (S63).
Then, device (110L) waits the response from information equipment.Moreover, device (110L) is from information equipment (200) Receive response.Moreover, device (110L) determines parity error (S67) whether occur in the response from information equipment (200). In addition, the processing of S67 be also possible to determine response whether be normal response processing.In the judgement of S67, when there is odd even When mistake, device (110L) makes to re-execute the processing processing returns to S60.In addition, S67 parity error identical Pattern code string send in predetermined number of times or more occurs in the case where, device (110L) can be determined that as failure, at end Reason.
In the judgement of S67, when not having parity error, device (110L) determines whether the information there are also next transmission. When there is next information, device (110L) makes to send next information processing returns to S60.
In addition, in the processing of Figure 149, after device (110L) outputting reference pattern (after S60), in the timing of index 2 Even-odd check pattern, but device (110L) (timing after index 10) after output information pattern are exported, surprise can not also be exported Even parity check pattern.
The details of graphical representation of exemplary information pattern synchronism output processing (S63 of Figure 149) in Figure 152.In the example In, device (110L) waits the light (S631) of phototiming pattern.Moreover, device (110L) determine synchronous light pattern by Whether light (S632).Moreover, device (110L) is if receive phototiming pattern, in the light sequential export next pattern generation Code (S635).Moreover, device (110L) determines whether to have carried out output (S637) corresponding with complete pattern code number.Complete pattern Code numerical example adds up to 8 patterns such as in Figure 142, Figure 143, Figure 146, Figure 161 example, for index 3~10.And And exported up to completion is corresponding with complete pattern code number, the processing of S631~S637 is repeated in device (110L).Separately Outside, when device to be loaded on to the moment of touch panel or keeps device mobile, it is easy to happen misidentification, thus preferably by complete pattern Code predetermined number of times repeatedly.At this point, not needing the error check of the pattern code since the acquirement of reference pattern, and remember packet Implement even-odd check after the pattern code of necessary amount containing the newest reference pattern obtained by touch panel.When Parity errors occur to mistake, omit the initial information pattern of memory, are implemented using the information pattern of the necessary amount newly obtained The processing is repeated, until mistake not occurring in error check.Error check as a result, obtaining faultless electricity After holding code, the output of light the code ends pattern code is utilized.
Another processing example of information pattern synchronism output processing (S63 of Figure 149) is shown in Figure 153.In Figure 153 Processing in, implement error check after exporting 1 pattern code.In this process, device (110L) also waits phototiming figure The light (S631) of case.Although the S631 processing of Figure 153 is processing identical with Figure 152, same in the light as light object It walks in pattern, including code value identical with the pattern code for terminating previous output.Moreover, device (110L) determines phototiming Whether the light of pattern (S632).Moreover, device (110L) is to previous if device (110L) receives synchronous light pattern The code value of output pattern code is combined with synchronous with the code value of light pattern.Moreover, determine 2 code values whether one It causes, that is, determine whether wrong (S633).In addition, previous output pattern code is for example slow in the output of Figure 138 graphical representation of exemplary It rushes in device (183A or 183B) and keeps.
When in the judgement of S633 without mistake, device (110L) based on S632 determine by light sequential, export next Pattern code (S635).On the other hand, when wrong in the judgement of S633, device (110L) exports previous output figure again Case code (S635).Moreover, the processing of device (110L) S631~S637 repeatedly, until completing corresponding to complete pattern code number Output when until.
Figure 152, Figure 153 graphical representation of exemplary device (110L) shine synchronous same with light code with information equipment (200) Step, the processing of output pattern code.In Figure 154, graphical representation of exemplary device (110L) connects synchronous pattern code and defeated The processing of information pattern out.In addition, at this point, in S62 processing of the Figure 149 as device side synchronous communication processing, device (110L) exports synchronous pattern code first, then in set sequential export even-odd check pattern.Then, processing is moved to Figure 154.In this process, device (110L) exports synchronous pattern code (S63F) first.Synchronous pattern code can benefit In the pattern defined with pattern code, using reference pattern and it is not used as the pattern of information pattern.Such as show in Figure 146 In example, element (111-1)~element (111-4) is used as information pattern, thus adds up to and 16 patterns can be used.Then, device (110L) output information pattern (S63G).Then, device (110L) receives light code (S63H).Moreover, device (110L) is to preceding Secondary output pattern and light code are combined (S633).S633 processing below is omitted as Figure 153.
After Figure 153, Tu154Zhong, device (110L) output pattern code, pattern generation that information equipment (200) will test Code code value is encoded to synchronizable optical code, is sent back to device (110L).That is, the pattern code for 1 time exports, according to next It is synchronous to use light code implementation error check.But, as described in Figure 138, prepare 3 or more output buffers (183A) etc., such as be correspondingly prepared with the pattern code number of reference pattern to next reference pattern, so as to postpone Error check.
Figure 155 is the processing that error check is implemented after the pattern code string output of reference pattern to next reference pattern Example.In this process, device (110L) waits the light (S631) of phototiming pattern.The S631 processing of Figure 155 is and Figure 153 Identical processing.Moreover, device (110L) determines whether the light of phototiming pattern (S632).Moreover, if device (110L) The synchronous light pattern of reception, then device (110L) synchronous will be stored in slow with the code value for the newest pattern for including in light pattern Device (183) etc. (referring to Fig.1 38) are rushed, next pattern code (S635A) is exported.Moreover, device (110L) determines whether to output Until the pattern code (S637) for the complete pattern code number for including in the pattern code string of next reference pattern.
In judgement in S637, when outputing the pattern code of complete pattern code number, device (110L) is by the place of S635 The newest code value from information equipment (200) saved in reason is compared (S638) with the pattern code for terminating to send. The processing of S638 is implemented for all pattern codes that sends.Moreover, device (110L) decision error, that is, determine to reply code value Whether the pattern code sent with end is inconsistent (S639).
When wrong in S639 determines, device (110L) for example exports the index of the pattern code of detection mistake, into And export the pattern code (S63A) of detection mistake.Wherein, index is to represent the examples such as Figure 142, Figure 143, Figure 146, Figure 146 Property diagram information pattern ordinal position number (such as index 3~10 of Figure 142).
Therefore, in this process, in the ON for the element (111) that can be defined by means of pattern code is combined with OFF, A part of pattern code is used as information pattern, remaining pattern code is used as index.Such as the situation of Figure 146, by means of element The ON and OFF of 4 elements (111) of (111-1)~element (111-4) are combined, and 16 patterns can be used.
As the narration carried out in the explanation of Figure 145, device (110L) can be by element (111) all ON's Pattern is used as reference pattern, and the pattern code of element (111) all OFF is used as wrong patterns code.In addition, occurring In the case that the exporting again of the pattern code of mistake cannot be later than next synchronous sequence, device (110L) receives phototiming pattern Afterwards, output error pattern code first, then output represents the pattern code of index.That is, as an example, In S63A processing, wrong patterns code, the pattern for representing index and the wrong information pattern of detection (export) composition group and defeated again Out.In addition, if after receiving phototiming pattern, mistake occurs in the case where being equipped with error bit in 1 pattern code Pattern code exports on time, then device (110L) can also be passed through and once be exported with unfavorable index of reference, output error bit The pattern code exported again.S63A processing is implemented for all pattern codes for detecting mistake in the processing of S638.
In turn, device (110L) executes processing identical with S638, that is, executes for the pattern code exported in S63A The processing (S63B) for receiving letter in reply pattern and being compared the code value for pattern of writing in reply with the pattern code for terminating to send.And And in the processing of S63B, if detection mistake, device (110L) make to be repeated and export again processing returns to 63A.No It crosses, in the case where errors number, which is more than, allows limit, device (110L), which can also be considered as, to be abnormal and end processing.
On the other hand, when in the judgement in S63C without mistake, device (110L) empties pattern code output buffer (183A) etc. (S63D), ends processing.In addition, device (110L) also empties pattern code in S639 judgement when no mistake (S63D) such as pattern code output buffers (183A), ends processing.
The processing of Figure 156 is to replace to obtain synchronization with light code according to synchronous, but exported according to device (110L) While synchronous synchronous with pattern code acquirement, delay is executed when 1 pattern code shown in error check ratio Figure 155 exports Processing flow chart.In Figure 156, the processing of S63F, S63G are identical as Figure 154.Then, device (110L), which receives, writes in reply Light code, be stored in (S63I) such as buffers (182).Processing after the S637 of Figure 156 is identical as Figure 155.Institute as above It states, device (110L) exports the situation of synchronous pattern code also as Figure 155, can be in outputting reference pattern to next After the pattern code string of reference pattern, error check is executed.
In addition, device (110L) is in outputting reference pattern to the figure of next reference pattern in Figure 155, Figure 155 processing After case code string, error check is executed, in case there is an error, output detects the pattern code of mistake again.But and The processing of non-device (110L) is defined in the example of Figure 155, Figure 156.There is sufficient buffer (183) at device (110L) In the case where, the pattern code string that includes in reference pattern to next reference pattern (such as the index 3 of Figure 140~index 10 Pattern code) light processing during in which timing to execute error check harmless.
In Figure 150, graphical representation of exemplary, which replaces, uses light code by information equipment (200) output is synchronous, and by device (110L) exports the processing of synchronous pattern code.Within the element also as Figure 149, device (110L) is first in element (111) outputting reference pattern (S60) in.Moreover, the response to be subjected from information equipment (200) such as device (110L).Device (110L) receives to come from the response of information equipment (200), (is in S6A when information equipment (200) identifies reference pattern It is), device (110L) exports synchronization pattern (S6B) from element (111).Moreover, synchronous with synchronization pattern, input carrys out self-information The light code (S6C) of equipment (200).
Wherein, in the processing of S6B, S6C, various form is can be used as synchronization pattern in device (110L).Such as it fills The pattern code of the fixation not comprising index can also be inputted as synchronization pattern by setting (110L).In this case, information equipment (200) by with the pattern code input timing of the fixation synchronously input light code.
In addition, device (110L) can also input index as synchronization pattern.In this case, information equipment (200) It can make input smooth code corresponding with the index inputted.That is, light code is for example as shown in Figure 71, Figure 140~Figure 144, Index is assigned for each smooth code.Therefore, in the case where device (110L) inputs synchronization pattern code, as synchronization pattern Assigned indexes, information equipment (200) shine to the light code of specified index.In this case, information equipment (200) according to the OR logic of each bit value of the synchronization pattern code of input, synchronization signal is generated, timing is adjusted, to light code Shine.
In addition, device (110L) can be inputted directly before this from information equipment (200) to as synchronization pattern code Light code write in reply.In this case, information equipment (200) is generated according to the OR logic of each bit value of synchronizing code Synchronization signal adjusts timing, shines to light code.In addition, in this case, information equipment (200) can also be right The code value that is inputted as synchronization pattern code with before this by the light generation for being sent to device (110L) of light code Code is compared, and carries out error check.
Then, device (110L) determines whether to achieve 1 message code component and (represents the information in 1 data block Light code) light code (S6D).Wherein, so-called 1 message code component refers to data as description in Figure 71 The differentiation of block to next differentiation a series of smooth codes.When the acquirement of the light code of 1 message code component does not complete, dress Setting (110L) makes that processing returns to S6B.In the case where the acquirement of the light code of 1 message code component is completed, device (110L) Determine whether to obtain next information (S6E).
The situation for obtaining next information, as the situation for the light code for inputting predetermined information, be do not obtain it is all The situation etc. of message code.In the case where obtaining next information, device (110L) makes control, and processing returns to S6B.
Light code is used by information equipment (200) output is synchronous as described above, replacing, and is exported and is synchronized by device (110L) With pattern code, in such a case it is not necessary to since obtaining reference pattern pattern code error check.This is because Information equipment (200) can also obtain from some pattern code for being defined in reference pattern, accumulate coordinate value, receive benchmark The time point of pattern or the pattern code with capacitor code (1 data block) carries out pattern code from the coordinate value of accumulation It is set.Therefore, device (110L) remembers the required amount of figure including newest reference pattern obtained by touch panel Case code implements even-odd check.It mistakes when parity errors occur, the initial information pattern of memory is omitted, using newly taking The required amount of information pattern obtained carries out error check, the processing is repeated, until when mistake does not occur.
Device (110L) will be indexed and be exported in pairs with the pattern code exported again, so as to so that information equipment (200) is examined Measuring rope draws.Information equipment (200) is identified as that exporting again for the pattern code of mistake occurs, to end if detection index The pattern code of acquirement is modified.
Figure 157 is the flow chart of the synchronous communication processing of graphical representation of exemplary information equipment (200) side.In addition, as made Illustrate, the code identification device (3) illustrated in the hardware composition and implementation form 0 of information equipment (200) equally, thus omits Illustrate (referring to Fig. 5).In this process, information equipment (200) (CPU (51) of Fig. 5) passes through touch panel detection device The reference pattern (S70) of (110L).Moreover, information equipment (200) determines whether to have detected reference pattern (S71).When not detecting When reference pattern, information equipment (200) determines whether to end processing (S72) again.For example, information equipment (200) is in both timings Between it is above can not detect reference pattern in the case where, can end processing.On the other hand, when processing is not finished, information is set Standby (200) make that processing returns to S70.Alternatively, it is also possible to be judged by user and terminated.
By the judgement of S71, information equipment (200) is if detection reference pattern, to photodiode (WPD1) etc. Position progress is specific, carries out to phototiming pattern luminous.The ad hoc approach and implementation form of the positions such as photodiode (WPD1) 17 (S11 of Figure 126) are identical.That is, for example as shown in Figure 139, for the configuration of element (111-1~111-6), two pole of photoelectricity The configuration for managing (WPD1~WPD6) (in Figure 145, photodiode (WPD1~WPD5)) is approximately fixed on device (110L). For fraction of movement, when detecting reference pattern, center is set to the check bit of each element, sets given area to Bounding box (bounding box) can identify if the position of the element detected after moving slightly enters bounding box Pattern code.In turn, if centered on the position newly detected, set bounding box again for given area, then can carry out with The mobile corresponding correction of device, can also accurately obtain pattern code even if mobile continue by this operation repeatedly.It should Processing can also the use when device (110L) identifies other pattern codes, this is self-evident.Therefore, device (110L) If can detecte reference pattern and to the configuration of element (111) carry out it is specific, can be clearly to photodiode (WPD1) etc. position carries out specific.It certainly, can be bright according to each correction of element configuration when device (110L) is mobile Really the position of photodiode (WPD1) etc. is carried out specific.Moreover, information equipment (200) display device and photoelectricity The corresponding position in each position such as diode (WPD1) is shone (S73) with light pattern to synchronous.
Then, information equipment (200) the detection parity pattern (S74) by means of touch panel.Moreover, information is set Standby (200) execution information pattern is synchronous input processing (S75).Moreover, information equipment (200) is implemented to the figure inputted in S75 The even-odd check of the code value of case code is shone (S76) to answer signal.When even-odd check occur mistake when, again from Reference pattern, which rises, to be started to export.In addition, and information equipment (200) determine whether to end processing (S77).For example, in user In the case where having selected to end processing in the menu screen of touch panel etc., information equipment (200) is ended processing.Information is set Standby (200) are moved to the processing of S70 in the case where processing is not finished.Wherein, it is not detected when in even-odd check pattern Mistake when information equipment (200) achieves correct message code, can also obtain the light generation terminated to representative information code Code carry out it is luminous, make from device (110L) pattern code end of output.In addition, it is not necessary that being opened from reference pattern acquirement The error check of beginning pattern code, memory include the pattern for needing quantity of the newest reference pattern obtained in touch panel Code implements even-odd check.It mistakes when parity errors occur, omits the information pattern previously remembered, obtained comprising new Pattern code including, using needing the information pattern of quantity to carry out error check, derive the pattern code of checked object and anti- Respective handling is carried out again, until when mistake does not occur.
Figure 159 is the synchronous input processing (Figure 157 of information pattern of graphical representation of exemplary by means of information equipment (200) S75) the process flow diagram of details.The processing is corresponding with the information pattern synchronism output processing (Figure 153) in device (110L) Information equipment (200) side processing.
In this process, information equipment (200) is decoded from the pattern code that device (110L) exports, write including The synchronization for the code value write in reply to device (110L) is with light pattern code (S750).And to the synchronization write with light pattern generation Code is shone (S751).
Then, it is synchronized with synchronous with light pattern code, input comes from the pattern code (S752) of device (110L).Moreover, Determine whether wrong specified in the pattern code of input.So-called wrong specified situation, such as shown in Figure 142, be The central member (111-5) for representing mistake is the situation of ON.In the case where representing the central member (111-5) of mistake is ON, The pattern code that is specified and inputting again of information equipment (200) input error simultaneously in S752 processing.In addition, so-called wrong Accidentally specified situation, such as it is also possible to the situation of the index inputted except information pattern.In the rope inputted except information pattern In the case where drawing, information equipment (200) exports next synchronous optical signal again, inputs the next pattern code exported again.
Moreover, information equipment (200) is by the pattern code inputted in S752 as new in the case where no mistake Pattern code saves code value (S754).On the other hand, by the judgement of S753, when finger wrong in the pattern code of input Periodically, pattern code that is specified to mistake, having terminated to input is modified.Such as shown in Figure 142, mistake is being represented In the case that central member (111-5) is ON, information equipment (200) is according to the pattern code that inputs in S752, to tying before The code value of the pattern code of beam input is modified.In another example in the index specify mistake in the case where, to index pair The code value for the pattern code answered is modified.Moreover, information equipment (200) determines from reference pattern to next reference pattern Pattern code string whether input totally.When not total input, information equipment returns to the processing of S750.
Although the situation that the central member (111-5) for being known as representing mistake here is ON, in saying for Figure 140 and Figure 146 In bright, be recorded as from information pattern, using the pattern code for the pattern that the reference pattern for being all ON is omitted and is all OFF come Information pattern is defined, but in turn, can also be omitted from information pattern and represent 1 wrong pattern and (such as there was only 5 elements For ON, remaining pattern for being OFF), corresponding pattern is represented to the wrong patterns that mistake occurs as output.Then, then rope is exported Draw and information pattern.As a result, be 5bit=64, thus (64-3) 8 powers=about 191,000,000 codes, with 4bit × 8= 32bit (about 4,300,000,000 code) is compared, and information content is significantly increased.
In the processing of Figure 159, wrong specified pattern code is exported from device (110L) to information equipment (200) Timing there is no limit.That is, device (110L) is exported for every 1 pattern code as shown in Figure 153, mistake is examined, i.e., Make in the case where exporting once vicious pattern code again, according to Figure 159, information equipment (200) can also be corrected once wrong Pattern code accidentally.In addition, device (110L) examines mistake after pattern code exports totally as shown in Figure 155, even if In the case where exporting once vicious pattern code again, according to Figure 159, information equipment (200) can also be corrected once vicious Pattern code.In addition, even if exporting again in device (110L) in the arbitrary sequence of reference pattern to next reference pattern once had In the case where the pattern code of mistake, according to Figure 159, information equipment (200) can also correct once vicious pattern code.
In addition, in the processing of Figure 159, it is omitted to the pattern code string of reference pattern to next reference pattern most The error check of pattern code afterwards.For the code value of last pattern code, information equipment (200) will it includes in making to fill Synchronization light pattern when (110L) exports next reference pattern is set, to realize error check.
In addition, only merely being malfunctioned with light pattern is synchronous without implementation with synchronous in device (110L) as shown in Figure 152 In the case where inspection, the processing of the S750 of Figure 159 also can be omitted.In the case where omitting the processing of S750, set as information The error check of standby (200) side, only carries out the even-odd check (S76) of Figure 157.But, by means of parity check sum Figure 159's The pattern code for inputting information equipment (200) is write in reply and gives device (110L), so as to realization device by S750, S751 One-hundred-percent inspection processing in (110L).
Figure 160 is the information equipment for the situation that information equipment (200) inputs synchronous pattern code from device (110L) (200) processing example.In this process, information equipment (200) inputs the pattern code (S752A) of synchronous pattern.Then, Information equipment (200) is inputted from synchronous with pattern code, inputs information pattern (S752B) in set timing.S753 with Under processing it is identical as Figure 159.
The explanation made as mentioned above, in implementation form 21, according to synchronous light pattern, device (110L) output figure Case code, information equipment (200) are sent to by the code value based on received pattern code, as error check with light code Device (110L).Therefore, device (110L) and information equipment (200) are by means of the defeated of the physical quantity variation from element (111) It is luminous with the light code of information equipment (200) display device out, so-called two-way communication can be achieved at the same time.In addition, device (110L) implements the pattern code output based on the physical quantity variation from element (111) at least part duplicate time With the energy arrival amount detection based on photodiode (WPD1~WPD5) etc..
[location information notification of touch panel handles application program]
In implementation form 21, graphical representation of exemplary information equipment (200) will detect on touch panel comes from element (111) position coordinates of physical quantity variation are notified to the processing of device (110L).According to this processing, device (110L) is logical It crosses from element (111) and exports the pattern code based on physical quantity variation, can be obtained on touch panel from information equipment (200) Coordinate.As a result, the Drawing Object that device (110L) is for example shown in the display device with information equipment (200) In the case where layout information, it is possible to implement the processing based on Drawing Object.For example, device (110L) can identify specific button, Menu, icon etc. are accessed by the element (111) of device (110L).
Wherein, device (110L) has accessed which specific button, menu, icon etc. to identify, needs from information equipment (200) the light code that touch panel has accessed which specific button, menu, icon etc. to representative carries out luminous, makes device The photodiode of (110L) can detecte, identify.As described above, device (110L) by identify have accessed specific button, Menu, icon etc., can be by the various imformation memories (being recorded in log) of access in device (110L).Letter as the multiplicity Breath, or the key of the activities such as lottery ticket or integral or accessible specific information, the stage property/product obtained in game etc. Any information such as the ticket or ideal money divide, bought.By obtaining these, device (110L) can be by corresponding operation/place Reason output is message code.Although it is not shown in the diagrams, but indicator (arrow or protrusion can be equipped in device (110L) Deng), according to the reference pattern exported from device (110L), obtain the position letter on the information equipment (200) of indicator instruction Breath, easily visual confirmation can also have accessed which specific button, menu, icon etc..
In Figure 157, graphical representation of exemplary obtains reference pattern first, synchronous after the initial detection parity pattern Input the processing of information pattern.But it is also possible to replace this processing, unrelated, information equipment whether detection with reference pattern (200) the interim coordinate position saved from device (11L) physical quantity variation inputted, is having input reference pattern, even-odd check When the pattern code of pattern and 1 capacitor code (message code) deal, pattern code is carried out from coordinate position specific.This Kind processing is effective in the case where device (110L) inputs synchronization pattern code and information pattern together.
In Figure 151, graphical representation of exemplary device (110L) and synchronization pattern code synchronisation and input information pattern is believed Cease the processing of equipment (200).In this process, device (110L) outputting reference pattern (S60) first.Then, device (110L) With synchronization pattern code synchronisation, from element synchronism output even-odd check pattern (S62A).In turn, device (11L) and synchronization pattern Code synchronisation, by given amount from element synchronism output information pattern (S63A).Moreover, device (110L) determines whether to receive Response (S6H) from information equipment (200).When the response for waiting given time also to come from information equipment (200) without receiving When, device (110L) determines whether the processing is (S67A) within predetermined number of times.
Moreover, device (110L) makes control return to S60, repeatedly identical processing when within for predetermined number of times.That is, working as It is corresponding with the physical quantity detection processing in information equipment (200) when inputting information pattern with synchronization pattern code synchronisation, it will Including reference pattern, even-odd check pattern and both the information pattern (capacitor code, message code) of fixed number data block output, Predetermined number of times repeatedly.On the other hand, by the judgement of S6H, in the feelings for having received the response from information equipment (200) Under condition, information equipment (110L) determines whether to export next message code (S68A).Moreover, exporting next information generation again In the case where code, make that processing returns to S60.
As described above, can be exported repeatedly in the case where device (110L) input information pattern synchronous with synchronization pattern Predetermined number of times, reference pattern, odd even pattern code (in addition to necessary situation, it is convenient to omit) and set number information pattern.
In Figure 158, graphical representation of exemplary information equipment (200) and reference pattern independently input pattern whether detection The processing of code.
In this process, application program (the also referred to as G firstly, in information equipment (200), for pattern code input Application program) starting (S80).Moreover, information equipment (200) determines whether detection pattern code (S81).When figure can not be detected When case code, information equipment (200) makes to wait pattern code input processing returns to S81.
On the other hand, when having detected pattern code in S81, information equipment (200) determines whether to detect reference pattern (S82).Information equipment (200) determines the direction (S83) of coordinate when having detected reference pattern.Then, information equipment (200) It inputs even-odd check pattern (S84).On the other hand, in the judgement of S82, when information equipment (200) have detected reference pattern it When outer pattern code, the coordinate value that information equipment (200) temporarily will test physical quantity variation is stored in memory etc. (S85). This is because can not limit can be to the direction of coordinate for the pattern except reference pattern, that is, to device (110L) member The configuration of part carries out specific.
Moreover, information equipment (200) determines whether to complete the acquirement (S86) of 1 message code (that is, 1 capacitor code).When When not completing the acquirement of 1 message code, processing is made to enter S87.Moreover, equipment (200) waits the input of synchronization pattern code (S87).If input synchronization pattern code (in S88 be), information equipment (200) is according to synchronization pattern code, set Timing inputs information pattern coordinate value (S89).Moreover, the coordinate that information equipment (200) will be detected when information pattern inputs Value is stored in memory etc. (S8A).Moreover, information equipment (200) makes, processing returns to S86.As described above, at device (110L) In the case where input information pattern synchronous with synchronization pattern, it can start and be held in the mouth with device (110L) in information equipment (200) side The application program (G application program etc.) connect, waits the input of pattern code.At this point, even if being not required to obtain reference pattern, The information of reference pattern, odd even pattern code (in addition to necessary situation, also can be omitted) and set number can also successively be obtained Certain one in pattern.Moreover, being inputted by multiple data block, being provided with, reference pattern, odd even pattern code are (necessary Situation) and set number information pattern time point, information equipment (200) can be from the information pattern coordinate of set number Value carries out information pattern specific.Therefore, and by reference pattern, odd even pattern code (necessary situation) and set number Information pattern sequentially input the situation of pattern code and compare, high speed processing may be implemented in information equipment (200).
On the other hand, when completing the acquirement of 1 message code in the judgement in S86, information equipment (200) is from storage The coordinate value saved in device etc. determines pattern code (S8B).Moreover, information equipment (200) carries out even-odd check etc., by response The light code of signal shines (S8C) to device (110L).Moreover, information equipment (200) determines whether to end processing (S8D).When When processing is not finished, information equipment (200) makes processing returns to S81, into next message code acquirement processing.
Figure 161 is that information equipment (200) are sent on touch panel according to the pattern code output from device (110L) Position coordinates processing example.In this process, such as device (110L) notifies reference pattern as described above, to make element (111) position is identified by information equipment (200), receives synchronous light code.Moreover, device (110L) is used up according to synchronizing Code, output pattern code send a variety of requirements to information equipment (200).In addition, device (110L) passes through the synchronous figure of output Case code, output information pattern synchronous with the pattern code of device (110L) itself.Now, in this state, information is set Standby (200) are in the coordinate from device (110L) and send desired standby mode (S100).
Moreover, believing if information equipment (200) is sent from device (110L) detection coordinate requires (in S101 be) Breath equipment (200) obtains each element (111) coordinate (S102) that detection coordinate sends pattern code when requiring.Moreover, information Equipment (200) light code is carried out it is luminous, so that the coordinate of acquirement is sent to device (110L), (S103).Then, information Equipment (200) determines whether to end processing (S104).For example, indicating that end carries out the application program of present treatment in user In the case of, information equipment (200) ends processing.Alternatively, it is also possible to be exported using the message code from device (110L), make Information equipment (200) ends processing.
Graphical representation of exemplary receives the flow chart of processing based on the position coordinates of device (110L) in Figure 162.In the shape Under state, coordinate is sent and requires to be sent to information equipment (200) by device (110L), is waiting its response.In the processing In, device (110L) receives light code (S110) from information equipment (200).Moreover, device (110L) obtains coordinate from light code It is worth (S111).Corresponding with multiple element (111), the coordinate of acquirement can also have multiple.
Then, device (110L) implements the processing (S112) based on coordinate value.For example, device (110L) operation information is set The application program of icon in coordinate value position in standby (200) display device.For example, in icon being meaned from device In the case that the information of (110L) obtains desired icon, the information that device (110L) is required from acquirements such as memories (117), It is exported according to the format of pattern code to information equipment (200).Moreover, device (110L) determines whether to end processing (S113).For example, in the case where coordinate value is the coordinate for meaning to include in the icon terminated, at device (110L) end Reason.Wherein, the location information on information equipment (200) of the photodiode identification based on light code of device (110L), thus Device (110L) can identify which position being installed on information equipment (200), which direction.Device as a result, (110L) can export operation/processing corresponding with the position, direction for message code.It in turn, can be by its position, side To imformation memory in device (110L) (being recorded in log).It is shown on information equipment (200) if device (110L) loaded on The map or game picture shown, then, although it is not shown, but can be according to the conduct device from its position, direction calculating Which position the coordinate value of the indicator (arrow or protrusion etc.) of (110L) a part, identification user indicate, can will be with The corresponding operation in the position/processing output is message code.By means of the indicator, user can easily visual confirmation Indicating where.
[adjustment of physical quantity output valve]
According to Figure 163 and Figure 164, graphical representation of exemplary device (110L) adjusts output between information equipment (200) Physical quantity output valve processing.The processing starts adjustment programme by means of the CPU (116) of device (110L) and executes.? In the processing, the CPU (116) of device (110L) is believed with the ON driving signal for scanning SW (115) in given area and OFF driving Number, physical quantity is exported from element (111), the testing result of physical quantity is obtained from information equipment (200).
The ON driving signal of SW (115) and OFF driving signal are set set value (S121) by device (110L).Wherein, The ON driving signal of so-called SW (115) is e.g. believed for the transistor for including in SW (115) to be become to the gate driving of ON Number.The OFF driving signal of so-called SW (115), the e.g. grid for making the transistor for including in SW (115) become OFF are driven Dynamic signal.
Moreover, device (110L) utilizes the ON driving signal and OFF driving signal, drive SW (115), by Test Drawing The pattern code of case is output in the touch panel of information equipment (200).Moreover, the ON for scanning SW (115) in given area drives Dynamic signal and OFF driving signal, are repeated processing (S122).Moreover, after the end of scan of given area, device (110L) From information equipment (200), ON drive signal amplitude and OFF drive signal amplitude appropriate in the opereating specification are obtained, is arranged For the ON driving signal and OFF driving signal (S123) of SW (115).The processing of S123 be according to make the semiconductor switch at For the driving signal of on state signal amplitude, make the semiconductor switch become dissengaged positions driving signal signal Amplitude implements one of the processing example of physical quantity variation adjustment.
Figure 164 is the processing stream that graphical representation of exemplary detected and determined appropriate shell according to the test pattern in information equipment Cheng Tu.In this process, information equipment (200) utilizes touch panel, and SW is scanned in given area from device (110L) detection (115) physical quantity in multiple test shells of ON driving signal and OFF driving signal exports (S130).Moreover, information is set Standby (200) are compared the test pattern and correct option pattern of detection.Information equipment (200) passes through the multiple test Shell implements the test pattern of this detection compared with correct option pattern.Moreover, information equipment (200) will with correctly answer The ON driving signal of the corresponding SW of situation (115) of the most test shell of case pattern and the setting value notice of OFF driving signal To device (110L), (S133).
According to above step, device (110L) can be set the ON driving signal of SW (115) and OFF driving signal to Appropriateness value.By setting appropriate value for the ON driving signal of SW (115), so that device (110L) can make SW (115) practical Ground becomes ON.On the other hand, by setting appropriate value for the OFF driving signal of SW (115), thus for example can reduce because Junction capacity influences caused by the formation of barrier layers such as diode, the transistor for including in SW (115).
In addition, for example being detected when the touch panel of information equipment (200) according to AC signal and the member of device (110L) , there are the feelings for the junction capacity that can not ignore SW (115) in capacitor between part (111) or when coming from the electric field strength of element (111) Shape.For example, although SW (115) is OFF, it is assumed that have because of the junction capacity of (115) SW (also referred to as parasitic capacitance, stray capacitance) AC signal flows into the situation of SW (115).According to the processing of described Figure 163 and Figure 164, the influence of the junction capacity of SW (115) subtracts Gently, so that information equipment (200) can detect physical quantity or physical quantity variation from device (110L) well.
<implementation form 22>
In graphical representation of exemplary is contacted with the touch panel of 22 relevant device (110M) of implementation form in Figure 165 The figure of the composition in face.In addition, the composition of the device (110M) illustrated in this implementation form also can be applied to the implementation form 0 code generating device (1), 1~implementation form of implementation form 9, implementation form 20 and implementation form 21 device (110~ 110L, hereinafter referred to as device (110) etc.).Alternatively, it is also possible to by the code generating device (1) of the implementation form 0, implement 110~110L of device of 1~implementation form of form 9, implementation form 20 and implementation form 21, hereinafter referred to as device (110) Deng) composition be applied to this implementation form device (110L).
The device (110M) of implementation form 22 has the inside of the round apperance of contact touch panel.As shown, device The center of (110M) inside nearby has information judging portion (11).In addition, device (110M) has in information judging portion (11) Surrounding is configured to 6 photodiodes (WPD) of round apperance.Moreover, device (110M) has in 6 photodiodes (WPD) element (111) of round apperance is configured to around.
Using the composition of Figure 165, it can ensure the distance between element (111) as far as possible in the inside of round apperance. For this purpose, when the touch panel of information equipment (200) is from physical quantitys such as multiple element (111) detection capacitor, electric field strengths, it can It is influenced caused by interaction to reduce element (111) and element (111).By means of element (111) and element (111) Interaction, for example, an element (111) be ON in the case where, due to adjacent OFF state element (111) and exist Physical quantity from ON state element (111), such as capacitor or electric field strength are detected to obtain biggish situation.By in device Ensure the distance between element (111) in the bottom surface of (110M) as far as possible, can reduce caused by interacting between element (111) It influences.
Figure 166 is the variation of device (110M).As shown in Figure 166, device (110M) can also be in information judging portion (11) around, configuration element (111) and photodiode (WPD) are alternately arranged by round apperance.
<implementation form 23>
According to figure~167~181, device (110N) relevant to implementation form 23 is illustrated.In this implementation form In, illustrate an example of shape, structure, appearance of device (110N) etc..In addition, the dress illustrated as this implementation form The composition of (110N) is set, also can be applied to code generating device (1), the implementation form 1~implementation shape of the implementation form 0 The device (110~110M, hereinafter referred to as device (110) etc.) of state 9,20~implementation form of implementation form 22.In addition, can also With by code generating device (1), 1~implementation form of implementation form 9, the 20~implementation form of implementation form of the implementation form 0 The composition of 22 device (110) etc. is applied to the device (110N) of this implementation form.
In implementation form 23, device (110N) utilizes card-type, i.e., plate substrate is formed.But, and it is non-device (110N) is limited to card-type, both can have the identical shell of code generating device (1) with implementation form 0, or case Shape etc..In addition, device (110N) can also be formed as a part of the cartoon commodity of multiplicity.Below with card-type or plate It is illustrated for shell.Wherein, so-called shell generally refers to the chest of collecting apparatus, but in implementation form 23 below In, in the situation that the substrate enclosed inside of card has the situation of electronic component, wiring etc., is inserted between the substrate of card and substrate Or it is installed on the situation of the recessed portion formed on the substrate of card, the substrate of card is also known as shell.In addition, shell can also be with It is the contour structures etc. of the code generating device (1) of implementation form 0.
The inside of contact average information equipment (200) touch panel in Figure 167 graphical representation of exemplary device (110N) Appearance.In the inside of information equipment (200), on the shell equipped with multiple (such as 5) elements (111) and multiple photoelectricity two Pole pipe (WPD), components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112).In addition, in order to express the relationship with other figures, in 5 elements (111) In, it is known as element (111-1,111-2) for 2.In addition, in the inside of information equipment (200), except the portion of element (111) outfit / outer, it is coating using printable coating layer.
In addition, the surface of element can also be coated on if coating material is the non-conducting material of high dielectric constant. At this point it is possible to when the printing or coloured coating that act on shield element.Alternatively, it is also possible to which coating layer is used 2 layers of structure, Primary coat layer of cloth implements printing, is then formed on the transparent coating layer of covering printing.There is no limit excellent for the material of coating layer Select material that is harmless, having durability.But, coating layer and nonessential, can also be for shells such as the card substrates exposed Implement printing in surface.For coating material, at least components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) and photodiode (WPD) are equipped with Part is transparent material.But, the coating material inside coverage information equipment (200) can also be with all transparent.It is being printed In the case where brush, the part except the part that components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) and photodiode (WPD) are equipped with is carried out Printing.In addition, if the ink penetrated using light a certain at least RGB, in the portion that photodiode (WPD) is equipped with Even dividing printing.
In Figure 167, the dotted line graphical representation of exemplary Inner Constitution of device (110N).Match in the inside of device (110N) Control unit is had, element (111), photodiode (WPD), components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) etc. pass through wiring and control Portion's connection.In control unit, such as equipped with the CPU (116), memory (117), capacitor (123), comparator of Figure 137 (118), the buffer (182) of Figure 138, XOR circuit (181), output buffer (183A, 183B), driving circuit (180), Selector (184) etc..
Although being omitted in Figure 167, between components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) and coating layer, it is formed with support and applies The light-transmissive of layer of cloth support construction (M1, referring to Fig.1 70).In addition, photodiode (WPD) is provided to inside substrate, From the opening being coated using clear coating material inside device (110N), light is incident on photodiode (WPD).As Other forms of not slim card, the opening portion for light incidence inside device (110N) can also without coating and Keep open state.
Figure 168 is to be truncated by " A section " arrow in Figure 167 along the plane perpendicular to paper by device (110N) Section (hereinafter referred to as A section) sectional view.Figure 169 is by " B section " arrow in Figure 167 and along perpendicular to paper The plane sectional view of section (hereinafter referred to as B section) that device (110N) is truncated.Figure 170 be by Figure 167 " C is cutd open The sectional view of face " arrow and the section (hereinafter referred to as C section) that device (110N) is truncated perpendicular to the plane of paper for edge.? In figure~168~170, no matter which kind of situation, the upside of device (110N) is surface, and downside is the inside.
As shown in Figure 168, in the cross sectional portion for including element (111), below the coating layer of table side or inside is equipped with There is conductive layer (114A).Conductive layer (114A) is and the identical structure of contact conductor (114) of implementation form 1 etc..Conductive layer (114A) is formed with the conductive material of plate or sheet, but it is also possible to print to be formed using conductive ink.It can not also set Coating layer is set, so that conductive layer (114A) is exposed to the surface of device (110N).
In device (110N), inside the housing equipped with the SW (115) of quantity identical as element (111).In addition, In Figure 168, graphical representation of exemplary element (111-1,11-2), SW (115-1), SW (115-2).Conductive layer (114A), SW (115), element (111) is connected with wiring.That is, each element (111) passes through 1 or more the SW as physical quantity control unit (115), it is connect using circuit (wiring) with conductive layer (114A).
Therefore, if a part of user's human body, such as finger pass through leading for coating layer touch-operated device (110N) Electric layer (114A) occurs then by carrying out the SW (115) and element (111) of power control (ON) in the inside of device (110N) The variation of the physical quantitys such as capacitor or electric field strength.Information equipment (200) is by touch panel, inside detection device (110N) Physical quantity variation, the presence of detecting element (111).Therefore, no matter user in the surface of device (110N) operates conductive layer Where part provisioned in (114A), effect caused by touch operation can be passed to the touch surface of information equipment (200) Plate.The finger that touch operation both can use user executes, and can also hold conductor by user, be held by means of conductor Row.In the sense that, one of the acting surface for acting on object apparatus is properly termed as inside device (110N) shell Example.
Additionally, it is preferred that surface coating layer is conductive, even if electric conductivity is low, dielectric constant height to a certain extent In the case where, according to the touch operation of user, the variation of the physical quantity occurs inside device (110N).But, as Explanation made above can also not have coating layer.
As shown in Figure 168, Figure 169, Figure 170, the side inside the substrate of device (110N) is formed with by the side wall of substrate (WW1, WW2) circular recessed portion.Moreover, including element (111) and photodiode as shown in Figure 168, Figure 169 (WPD) the region in recessed portion is filled with packing material (M2).In addition, being arranged as shown in Figure 170 in the components of photo-electric conversion (112) support construction (M1) is formed in the recessed portion of the inside side.
As described above, including element (111), photodiode (WPD) in the recessed portion of device (110N) the inside side Region is formed with and is filled with the layer of packing material (M2).It includes element in device (110N) that the layer of packing material (M2), which is used as, (111) part on periphery is in the hollow of the substrate in addition to conductive layer (114A), element (111), SW (115), coating layer The packing material of non-conductive (that is, insulating properties) or low-k is filled and the layer that is formed in part.Packing material (M2) example It can be such as the honeycomb comprising multiple gaps, the Nano capsule of confinement air.This packing material (M2) is due to largely wrapping Containing air, thus conductivity and dielectric constant are very low, for example, close to the degree of air.Packing material (M2) is filled in substrate Hollow space forms endurance plane materiel.
As the commodity example of this packing material, air glue can be produced with such as TEIJIN Co., Ltd. (Di Renzhu formula society) Capsule (registered trademark).Air bladder (registered trademark) is also referred to as high hollow structure silk, big cavity is formed in silk, in fiber A large amount of air is confined in itself.Hollow rate is increased to the limit by high hollow structure silk, includes a large amount of air.But, and Non-filling material (M2) is defined in air bladder (registered trademark) or high hollow structure silk.Packing material (M2) can be greatly geographical In the thickness of device (110N), more than given thickness (2~3mm or so), then it is relatively low that dielectric constant also can be used Electrical insulator.
But, not packing material (M2) is defined in Nano capsule or high hollow structure silk.As the close sky of dielectric constant The material less than 2 of gas, such as can be so-called low-k film.Such as document ULVAC TECHNICAL JOURNAL No.66 Shown in 2007pp.8-12, propose with the Porous material of multiplicity, such as based on Porous silica material Substance proposes substance of the relative dielectric constant less than 2.
It can be reduced while the surface and the inside of support device (110N) because using by means of packing material (M2) The presence of person's finger etc. and to the physical quantity of information equipment (200) touch panel detection influence.That is, working as information equipment (200) When detecting the physical quantity variation occurred in element (111) by means of the ON and OFF of SW (115), there are user's fingers etc. Influence be superimposed on the situation of physical quantity variation caused by the ON and OFF of SW (115).It is user's finger etc. that this, which is estimated to be, The reason of contacting device (11N) and physical quantity caused to change.In addition, be estimated as be device (110N) electric circuit and information The electric circuit of equipment (200) interact and couple so as to cause physical quantity change, be superimposed on the ON by (115) SW With OFF in the situation of the middle physical quantity variation occurred of element (111).It is equipped with recessed portion in the substrate, substrate is made Sky, thus even housings side to case surface side conductive layer (114) or be configured at the SW (115) of interior of shell, match Line layer, control unit etc. can also form air layer.From empirically it is found that if air layer be 0.1~0.2 or so, can be small The degree to interact between information equipment (200) to the electric circuit etc. that can ignore human body or device (110N).That is, By being equipped with recessed portion or cavity in the substrate, so as to reduce the influence etc. that the physical quantity changes.But, preferably exist The inside side forms the acting surface of configuration element (111).Therefore, it in implementation form 23, is filled in the substrate recessed portion of card The packing material (M2) of low dielectric constant insulation.In addition, as packing material (M2), if it is the physics can be inhibited The material of the variation of amount, any material.Packing material (M2) is an example of low dielectric constant insulating material.In addition, The layer of packing material (M2) is an example of supporting layer.
By means of the filling of packing material (M2), SW (115) can be protected from the touch panel surface of information equipment (200) The set above distance is held, and inhibits the interaction of (115) and touch panel surface SW.For SW (115) and information equipment (200) preferred distance on touch panel surface will illustrate in [boundary value of capacitor] section.In addition, packing material (M2) Layer can expose, but can also be coating with coating material.Therefore, the inside side of packing material (M2) layer can be described as filling The supporting layer of low dielectric constant insulating material exposes or using coating material is coated and is formed the example of acting surface.
SW (115) can both be fixed on conductive layer (114A), can also leave from conductive layer.Make SW (115) from conduction In the case that layer (114A) leaves, packing material (M2) can also be filled between SW (115) and conductive layer (114A).At this Kind in the case of, in the A section of Figure 168, device (110N) surface (on) side, by (coating material), conductive layer (114A), Packing material (M2), SW (115), packing material (M2), (coating material), element (111) sequentially form stratum.
Alternatively, it is also possible between SW (115) and conductive layer (114A), the substrate (substrate of card of insertion apparatus (110N) Or substrate of not formed electronic circuit etc.).That is, in the A section of Figure 168, device (110N) can also surface (on) side, By (coating material), conductive layer (114A), the substrate of card, SW (115), packing material (M2), (coating material), element (111) Sequentially form stratum.No matter which kind of situation, SW (115) and contact touch panel the inside between, inserted with packing material (M2) layer, thus it may be said that the SW (115) as 1 or more physical quantity control unit is provided to through supporting layer from acting surface In the layer left.
As shown in Figure 169, in order to reduce the interference of element (111) and information equipment (200), photodiode (WPD) is solid Due to the recessed portion inner wall (top surface) of device (110N) substrate.As described above, the B section including photodiode (WPD) is attached Although being closely filled with packing material (M2), packing material (M2) fill part equipped with opening (HL1), thus come from The light of the inside reaches photodiode (WPD).Therefore, packing material (M2) does not need transparent.But, transparent material is being utilized Material can not also form opening (HL1) as in the case where packing material (M2).It is preferred that the lower part of photodiode (WPD) is opened Mouth (HL1) is the structure that information equipment (200) can not be invaded to the light that other photodiode directions (WPD) shine, and is Light harvesting is carried out to light, the opening of the taper apperance of lower part opening can also be equipped with.
As described above, equipped with opening (HL1) in the packing material (M2) of Figure 169, because without transparent.But, exist In the case that packing material (M2) is transparent, support construction (M1) needs to cover opening using the light next door of cutting light (HL1), so that information equipment (200) is not invaded to the light that other photodiode directions (WPD) shine.
The support construction (M1) of Figure 170 is truncated in " D section " arrow by Figure 170 along the plane perpendicular to paper Section (hereinafter referred to as D section) in or clathrate wall portion.In this case, support construction (M1) is from photoelectricity Inverting element arranges (112) to the inside for contacting information equipment (200) touch panel, in the length formed with low conductivity material In the well shape of cube shape or honeycomb shape, the space of multiple openings is formed.Therefore, support construction (M1) row of could also say that Column are formed with an example of second supporting layer of multiple openings so as to light-transmissive, the inside side shape of support construction (M1) At at least part of acting surface.
As a result, become reduce dielectric constant, play as endurance plane materiel function, can low-loss receiving come self-information set The structure of the luminous energy of standby (200).Therefore, when the inside of device (110N) is in contact with or close to touch panel, carrys out self-information and set The light of the display device of standby (200) penetrates support construction (M1), and the incident components of photo-electric conversion arrange (112) and electric power occurs. Accordingly, it can be said that the components of photo-electric conversion arrange (112) in the layer left by support construction (M1) from acting surface (the inside) In, receive light from multiple openings.
As described above, being formed with can be saturating in the inside side of components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112, also referred to as solar panel) Cross the support construction (M1, the frame of endurance plane materiel) of light or support the inside coating material.Support construction (M1) is as long as be non-lead Electric body, dielectric constant be low, can be with low-loss transmitted light, then any structure.
In the top of plate enclosure bottom configuration components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112), this is in order to enable touch panel It can't detect the capacitor of components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) (parasitism) at random, or capacitor when with finger touch conductive layer.For This, can arrange the fitted underneath void layer of (112) in the components of photo-electric conversion, so that components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) can be with Do not receive the light to shine from touch panel lavishly and is transformed to energy.
The type profile of support construction (M1) is not limited to lattice shape, or triangle, pentagon, six sides Shape or the polygon more than it.Figure 173 as support construction (M1) and section that graphical representation of exemplary is known as honeycomb is six The situation of side shape.It is however also possible to replace the support construction (M1) for being equipped with Figure 170 or the section as shown in Figure 173 for polygon Support construction, but the transparent medium that the dielectric constant for the non-conductive layer that can't detect using touch panel is low.
Figure 171 is the variation of the A section of Figure 168.In Figure 171, in the downside of conductive metal element (111), That is, being formed with conducting rubber (111A) layer in the face of contact information equipment (200) touch panel.As shown in Figure 168, do not having In the case where conductive rubber (111A), user touches the inside of device (110N) in contact with or close to information equipment (200) Touch panel physical quantity detection sensitivity when panel is touched, the machining accuracy of the downside dependent on element (111).That is, relying on The inside of device (110N) is contacted information equipment (200) by the machining accuracy in the downside of element (111), such as user Touch panel when, gap occurs between element (111) and touch panel.As a result, also can when SW (115) are ON The situation that the physics detection values for having touch panel to detect from element (111) change.
Therefore, as shown in Figure 171, if forming conducting rubber in the face of the contact touch panel of element (111) (111A) layer, then can be improved the adhesion of element (111) and touch panel, and touch panel can be inhibited to examine from element (111) The variation of the physics detection values of survey.The hardness of conducting rubber (111A) is lower than made of metal element (111).
Conducting rubber (111A) although type there is no limit, preferred electric conductivity close to element (111).For example, root According to Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd. (chemical industry Co., Ltd., SHIN-ETSU HANTOTAI) website (https: // Www.silicone.jp/contact/qa/qa123.shtml), describe as " as the conductor for being mixed into silicon rubber, (electric conductivity is filled out Fill agent), in addition to carbon black, have silver powder, gold-plated silica or graphite, electric conductivity zinc white etc. a variety of ".And it records, " the body just obtained For product resistance value, the situation of carbon system is 1 × 10-2~1 × 104 (Ω m), and the situation of silver system is lower, it may be implemented 1 × 10-7~1 × 10-4 (Ω m) ".Therefore, even if element (111) is metal material, can also preferably electric conductivity electric conductivity Rubber (111A).In addition, this form is preferably used as other forms of not slim card.Element (111) is properly termed as metal Layer, thus electric conductivity that conducting rubber (111A) is properly termed as covering metal layer effect surface side, that hardness is lower than metal layer Material layer.
Figure 172 is the variation of the B section of Figure 169.Filling packing material (M2) as shown in Figure 169 can also be replaced simultaneously It is open (HL1), and is equipped with around the light next door (M3) of photodiode (WPD) in photodiode (WPD) fitted underneath. In Figure 172, photodiode (WPD) is inserted in substrate (BD1), is installed in the top part of recessed portion on the downside of device (110N). It is however also possible to not utilize substrate (BD1), but photodiode (WPD) is fixed on recessed portion on the downside of device (110N) Top part (card substrate).
172 " E section " and along perpendicular to paper plane truncation section (hereinafter referred to as E section) in may also For the wall portion of grid apperance.Therefore, light next door (M3) and substrate (BD1) together, is formed around photodiode (WPD) Section is the inner wall space of rectangle.The inner wall space has opening as shown in Figure 172, in contact touch panel side.
Therefore, when device (110N) contacts touch panel, by means of light next door (M3), each photodiode is contained (WPD) light of inner wall space information equipment immediately below (200) display device is incident on each photodiode (WPD). That is, as shown in Figure 135, display device was divided into light code light emitting region (LE1~LE6) and to light generation by information equipment (200) Code is when carrying out luminous, can make the light from each smooth code light emitting region (LE1~LE6) by with each light emitting region (LE1~LE6) corresponding photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) receives.On the other hand, by means of light next door (M3), can press down The light code of the light emitting region from the inner wall space for containing each photodiode (WPD) except immediately below is made by each light Electric diode (WPD) receives.
In addition, interval and thickness by properly selecting light next door (M3), so that light next door (M3) can be with support device Coating inside (110N).It is however also possible to and with light next door (M3) and scheme the packing material utilized in~168~171 (M2)。
Bottom surface printing layer and/or coating layer are preferably transparent, but as long as being the light for detecting photodiode (WPD) The printing of transmission.In addition, photodiode (WPD) is not limited to detection white, set light is detected.
As shown in Figure 169, Figure 172, photodiode (WPD) is configured at than bottom surface (face contacted with touch panel) More top, this is to inhibit photodiode (WPD) and be connected to the electric conductor and touch panel of photodiode (WPD) The electric circuit of equal information equipments (200) interacts.
For example, inhibiting the coupling with touch panel such as photodiode (WPD) and electric conductor by means of this structure.Separately Outside, by means of this structure, it is possible to reduce touch panel detects the capacitor of the electronic components such as SW (115) (parasitism) at random, uses Capacitor when finger touch conductive layer.In turn, ensuring (the HL1, referring to Fig.1 69) and so as to energy that is open preferably between light next door It after enough detection light codes, is filled with packing material (M2), the packing material (M2) forms non-including the air layer Conductive layer.Alternatively, it is also possible to replace packing material (M2), the low-k that can't detect using touch panel it is non-conductive Property transparent medium.In addition, for the configuration of photodiode (WPD), due to can according to the configuration of element (111) come Touch panel is identified, because without limiting, which kind of is configured.
Figure 174, Figure 175 show the variation of device (110N).Control unit is structure identical with Figure 167 in the figure At, including CPU (116) etc..In the example of Figure 174, control unit equipped with make conductive layer (114A) and element (111) it Between connection ON or OFF SW (115).As a result, in the part (referred to as wiring layer) of connecting element (111) and control unit, Wiring can be only equipped with.That is, on the inside as acting surface, it is assumed that the area, first part all including 1 or more element Domain.In addition, corresponding with the first part region, in Figure 174, the table side (conductive layer of repeatable position in the in-plane direction The side (114A)) assume second part region.Second part region is properly termed as relative to first part region, in insertion shell Position carry out specific partial region.In the part for being inserted in this 2 partial regions, as the element for becoming electric circuit, Only include element (111) and wiring.Therefore, the SW (115) as physical control portion, it may be said that be arranged in specifically for insertion Except the casing part of the part of 2 partial regions.In addition, coating, the print on surface and the inside is omitted in Figure 174 Brush.In addition, recessed portion, the packing material (M2) of recessed portion, support construction (M1) that substrate side wall (WW1, WW2) is formed etc. with Figure~168~170 is identical.
On the other hand, in Figure 175, replace the conducting rubber (111A) of Figure 171, be formed in conductive ink (111B) and formed printing layer.Conduction that printing layer can be described as covering metal layer effect surface side, that hardness is lower than metal layer Material layer.In addition, printing layer is to print an example of machining object.
Conducting rubber (111A) layer or conductive ink (111B) layer of Figure 174 inhibits in element (111) and information equipment (200) air layer occurs between touch panel, improves adhesion.Therefore, by means of conducting rubber (111A) layer or conductive ink Water (111B) layer, touch panel can steadily detect the physical quantity or physical quantity occurred with the ON and OFF of SW (115) Variation.That is, touch panel can steadily detect the representation element (111) and conducting rubber when SW (115) are ON The existing capacitor or electric field strength of the presence of (111A) or representation element (111) and conductive ink (111B).
The device (110N) of the explanation made as mentioned above, implementation form 23 has recess in the touch panel side of substrate Portion can be such that the constituent element except element (111) leaves more than set from touch panel by air layer.As a result, real The device (110N) for applying form 23 can be with the phase interaction caused by the constituent element except straining element (111) with touch panel With.Therefore, switch ON and OFF in SW (115) and the physical quantity detected by means of touch panel from element (111) occurs In the case where variation, it is possible to reduce SW (115) and electric circuit/electronic component of the information equipment except touch panel are (following Referred to as information equipment (200) etc.) cause the control units and information equipment (200) etc. such as situation, the CPU (116) of interaction to draw Situation, the components of photo-electric conversion (112) and information equipment (200) etc. for playing interaction cause the situation to interact, by finger Et al. show consideration for user and information equipment (200) of nearly conductive layer (114A) etc. and cause the situation to interact.
In addition, in implementation form 23, recessed portion in the touch panel side of plate envelope substrate material, be formed with including Air or packing material (M2) layer in gap.Packing material (M2) is the material of low-k, high insulation rate, can pressed down While making the interaction, acting surface is formed in the inside of device (110N).In addition, packing material (M2) can support The coating layer that the inside is coated.
In addition, device (110N) insulates SW (111) in control unit, so as to reduce SW (115) and touch panel Interaction.In addition, device (110N) has support construction (M1) in the touch panel side of components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112), Thus it can inhibit electric inverting element arrangement (112) and touching while keeping components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) light income Touch the interaction of panel.
It is based on as described above, the device (110N) of implementation form 23 can be inputted in touch panel from element (111) When the pattern code of physical quantity variation, inhibit error detection.
[boundary value of capacitor]
Referring to figure~176~179, illustrate assume touch panel detection physical quantity be capacitor when to boundary value Experimental result.In this experiment, the physical quantity boundary value (electricity for being intended to investigate the element (111) of touch panel detection is implemented The boundary value of appearance) experiment.
Figure 176 graphical representation of exemplary composition and experimental sequence of laboratory holder.In this experiment, connecting element (111) with The terminal (electrode) of capacitor (C) side is adjusted when the finger of experimenter encounters terminal (electrode) of another party of capacitor Look into whether touch panel will be detected as touch operation from the physical quantity variation of element (111).
In addition, having used characteristic resistance is 50 ohm of coaxial cable as capacitor (C).It is found that for coaxial electrical The size of cable and coaxial cable length L (mm) from actual measurement, the capacitor between core wire and shielding (shied) material can lead to Cross L=0.29*L (pF) calculating.Wherein, asterisk (*) is to represent the symbol being multiplied.Coaxial cable is also known as shielding line below.
In addition, element (111) utilizes brass system (brass) rounded material of diameter 7mm, 7.5mm, 8mm.In turn, as Iphone (registered trademark) 5s, iphone (registered trademark) 6 of American Apple Inc is utilized in touch panel.
Wherein, in the case where the human body not terminal of contacting capacitor (C), if by capacity between the terminal of capacitor (C) Referred to as C.In addition, the capacitor of element (111) is known as C2, the body capacitance of experimenter is known as Cm, then finger contacting capacitor (C) joint capacity when terminal is 1/CTOTAL=1/C+1/C2+Cm.Therefore, by changing capacitor C, in that case it can be decided that touch The boundary value of the joint capacity of panel detection.Furthermore it is possible to for examining touch panel by capacitor C and element (111) The boundary value of capacitor C needed for surveying body capacitance Cm carries out specific.The boundary value of capacitor C becomes to inhibit implementation form 23 SW (115), photodiode (WPD), the components of photo-electric conversion of middle explanation arrange the (device (110N) such as (112) and control unit Electric circuit) with the interaction of information equipment (200) touch panel and determine should device (110N) electric circuit with The pointer for the distance being equipped between touch panel.In addition, the boundary value of capacitor C can be to the SW (115) when SW (115) are OFF In include the junction capacity of semiconductor circuits such as transistor boundary value carry out it is specific.
That is, the electric circuit of SW (115), photodiode (WPD), the components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112), control unit etc. If, there is the electric circuit and touch panel in device (110N) in insufficient boundary value of capacitor between touch panel Between a possibility that interacting.In addition, if the insufficient boundary value of the junction capacity of SW (115), even if making SW (115) in the case where becoming OFF, in the case where touch panel utilizes alternating current signal detection capacitor, SW (115) nothing also occurs Method plays the situation of OFF function, and touch panel, which occurs, can not detect the output of the physical quantity from element (111) OFF (SW (115) OFF) situation.
Experimental result is shown in Figure 177~Figure 179.Figure 177 be element (111) diameter be 7mm when experiment knot Fruit.In Figure 177, when shielding line length 5.3mm, capacitor C=1.54pF, iphone5s, iphone6 can not both be examined Survey the presence (touch operation) of element (111).On the other hand, when shielding line length be 6.0mm or more, capacitor C=1.74pF with When upper, iphone5s, iphone6 both can detect the presence (touch operation) of element (111).Therefore, element (111) When diameter is 7mm, for the boundary value of capacitor C, iphone5s, iphone6 both can be specifically for about 1.64pF.Using The median of whole capacitors when can detecte and capacitor when can not detect.Similarly hereinafter.
Figure 178 be element (111) diameter be 7.5mm when experimental result.In Figure 178, when shielding line length is When 6mm, capacitor C=1.74pF, iphone5s, iphone6 both can not detecting element (111) presence (touch operation). On the other hand, when shielding line length is 6.8mm, capacitor C=1.972pF or more, iphone5s can detecte element (111) Presence (touch operation).Therefore, in the case where the diameter of element (111) is 7.5mm, as iphone5s, capacitor C's Boundary value can be specifically for about 1.86pF.In addition, when shielding line length is 7.8mm or more, capacitor C=2.262pF or more, Iphone6 can detecte the presence (touch operation) of element (111).Therefore, in the feelings that the diameter of element (111) is 7.5mm Under condition, as iphone6, the boundary value of capacitor C can be specifically for about 2.12pF.
Figure 179 be element (111) diameter be 8mm when experimental result.In Figure 179, when shielding line length is When 6.8mm, capacitor C=1.972pF, iphone5s, iphone6 both can not detecting element (111) presence (touch behaviour Make).On the other hand, when shielding line length is 7.6mm or more, capacitor C=2.204pF or more, iphone5s, iphone6 two The presence (touch operation) of person detectable element (111).Therefore, when the diameter of element (111) is 8mm, with regard to capacitor C's For boundary value, iphone5s, iphone6 both can be specifically for about 2.09pF.
But the capacitor C2 that element (111) is formed between touch panel is as follows.
ε: gap (for example, the glass on touch panel surface) between the sensor and electric conductor of touch panel it is opposite Dielectric constant=7.5
D: the distance (m) in gap=0.2mm
S: relative to the area (square metre) of electric conductor, electric conductor, sensor diameter 8mm.
- 12 powers from permittivity ε o=8.854 × 10 in vacuum,
C2=6.64E-11 × 2 × π × 0.004m × 0.004m/0.0002m=3.34E-10=33.4pF can be obtained.
In addition report claims, the capacitor of human body is Cm=100pF~150pF (electronic information communication association paper periodical B Vol.J84-B, no.10pp.1841-1847 in October, 2001).
Therefore, the joint capacity summation as the capacitor C of shielding line, the capacitor of element (111), body capacitance Cm, element (111) the capacitor Cm of capacitor C2, human body can almost ignore.The boundary capacitor that the above touch panel can detecte such as figure~ It, can be specifically for 1.6pF~2.2pF or so shown in 177~179.
When for OFF, or if using 1/2 as safety coefficient needed for inhibiting interaction, in order to make to touch For panel detection less than capacitor, junction capacity when SW (115) is cut off is preferably 0.8pF or less.In addition, for straining element (111) Except part, that is, in order to inhibit SW (115), photodiode (WPD), components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112), control unit etc. Interaction between touch panel, the capacitor preferably remained between part and touch panel except element (111) etc. reach To 0.8pF distance below.
In turn, if being used as safety coefficient using 1/3, in order to make touch panel can't detect capacitor, SW (115) is cut Junction capacity when disconnected is preferably 0.5pF or less.In addition, for the part except straining element (111), that is, in order to inhibit SW (115), the phase interaction between touch panel such as photodiode (WPD), components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112), control unit With the capacitor preferably remained between part and touch panel except element (111) etc. reaches 0.5pF distance below.
For example it is assumed that there is the component (P) with diameter 8mm rounded bottom surface in control unit, caused by stray capacitance Cf Situation of the function influence to touch panel.Capacitor between component (P) and touch panel is assumed to air relative dielectric constant 1, it is calculated by Cf=ε S/d, at the distance d=0.2mm of touch panel, about 0.45pF, meeting safety coefficient is The boundary value of capacitor when 1/3.In addition, at distance d=0.12mm, about 0.75pF meets when safety coefficient is 1/2 The boundary value of capacitor.In turn, at distance d=0.057mm, about 1.58pF meets the boundary of capacitor when safety coefficient is 1 Limit value.
On the other hand, if safety coefficient when by for ON is set as 2, touch panel is in order to detect as element (111) The capacitor when capacitor, preferably ON of physical quantity is 6.6pF or more.The value, can be according to the element when SW (115) are ON (111) the capacitor Cm of capacitor C2 and human body and sufficiently reach.
[boundary value of SW ON impedance]
Referring to figure~180~181, illustrate the experimental result of the boundary value to SW (115) ON impedance.Figure 176 example Property illustrates the composition and experimental sequence of experiment appliance.In this experiment, a variety of resistances are inserted between element (111) and human body Anti-, whether investigation touch panel by the physical quantity variation from element (111) is detected as touch operation.The impedance obtained at this time Value is referred to as the boundary value of SW (115) ON impedance.
Experimental result is shown in Figure 181.In this experiment, change impedance (R), investigated iphone (registration Trade mark) 5s, iphone (registered trademark) 6 whether can pass through the impedance detection human body connect element (111).Element it is straight Diameter is 7mm, 7.5mm, 8mm as the investigation of capacitor.As shown in Figure 181, in iphone (registered trademark) 5s, no matter which A diameter, can be in 1200 kilo-ohms or so following detections.In addition, can not be detected more than 1500 kilo-ohms or so.As a result, Boundary impedance value in iphone (registered trademark) 5s can be specifically for 1350 kilo-ohms or so.
On the other hand, it in iphone (registered trademark) 6, can detecte at 820 kilo-ohms or less, in 1000 kilo-ohms or more nothings Method detection.The boundary impedance value in iphone (registered trademark) 6 can be specifically for 910 kilo-ohms or so as a result,.
<implementation form 24>
Referring to figure~182~185, illustrate device (110P) relevant to implementation form 27.In implementation form 24, show Example property illustrates the pattern code (capacitor code) and information equipment (200) that device (110P) is exported according to physical quantity variation Detect the processing of the pattern code.The output of the pattern code of this implementation form and the pattern code interpretation of information equipment (200) Method can be applied to code generating device (1), the 1~implementation form of implementation form 9, implementation form of the implementation form 0 The output of the pattern code of the device (110~110N, hereinafter referred to as device (110) etc.) of 20~implementation form 23 and its sentence It reads.In addition, in the composition of device (110P) relevant to this implementation form, although not to element (111) configuration external Divide and expressed, but is identical as the composition of the device (110) of each implementation form etc..Therefore, as needed, described in reference The composition of the device (110) of each implementation form etc..
Thus, for example in Figure 40, Figure 47 etc. graphical representation of exemplary CPU (116), it is defeated to be properly termed as information input unit, information An example in portion out, SW (115) are properly termed as an example of physical quantity control unit.In addition, graphical representation of exemplary in Figure 47 Components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112A) and comparator (118) are properly termed as detecting the energy of light or electromagnetic wave based on arrival One example of one or more test sections of arrival amount.But, such as the case where using device (110K) shown in Figure 135 Under, photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) is properly termed as detecting 1 of the energy arrival amount of light or electromagnetic wave based on arrival Or multiple test sections.
In addition, in the touch panel or Fig. 5 of information equipment (200) the code identification device (3) of graphical representation of exemplary touch Panel (31) is properly termed as an example of panel.In addition, from the physics exported from device (110P) to information equipment (200) Amount variation determine pattern be the first information example, information equipment (200) from display device shine light code be the second letter The example of breath.
The composition of the element (111) of the inside of Figure 182 graphical representation of exemplary device (110P) contact touch panel and from member The pattern code of part (111) output.In this embodiment, each element (111) using junior's symbol be distinguished as 111-1~ 111-5.In addition, in the case where general name, referred to as element (111).But, in implementation form 27, and not element (111) Quantity is limited to 5.Device (110P) both can have 6 or more elements, it is possible to have 4 following elements.In the figure Symbol 1~5 is assigned in the roundel of graphical representation of exemplary 111-1~111-5.The symbol assigned in circle in figure is member Part number.Such as element number is the number of recognition component, if the position of information equipment recognition component on touch panel, Then element number is assigned in order to distinguish identified element.
1 information pattern and next information pattern for including in each pattern code in implementation form 27 utilize differentiation figure Case distinguishes.Distinguishing pattern is the pattern that whole elements (111) are OFF.So-called element (111) is OFF, it is meant that element (111) and in such as Figure 50 the SW (115) of connection contact conductor (114) illustrated is OFF.
In Figure 182, in left side upper end, the graphical representation of exemplary configuration of element (111-1)~element (111-5).Its In, in 1 pattern, element (111-1)~element (111-5) corresponds respectively to 1~bit of bit 5.Bit 1 is Bit String Right end bit, bit 5 is the bit of Bit String left distal end.It wherein, will be with element (111-1)~element (111- 5) physical quantity exports corresponding bit pattern and is shown as b5b4b3b2b1.B1 is defeated with the physical quantity from element (111-1) Corresponding bit out, b5 are bits corresponding with the physical quantity output of element (111-5) is come from.In Figure 182, exemplary diagram Show that, in left side upper end, about in the configuration of element (111-1)~element (111-5), each element is the feelings of ON (black) Shape and for OFF (white) situation combination pattern (hereinafter referred to as pattern) bit pattern.Series number 1~6 is assigned, with Just the position (timing) on the time shaft of each pattern output can be identified.The series number is referred to as identifying the volume of each pattern Code.
1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 5A, 6A in series number represent the information pattern of each series number 1~6 (by some element ON and the pattern for transmitting information) differentiation pattern after output.In a series of pattern code (block of pattern string) including patterns In, the differentiation pattern of insertion sequence 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 5A, 6A, so as to positively identify 1 pattern and next figure Case.In addition, causing ON state residual to a certain extent in the influence due to stray capacitance when ON element for example being made to become OFF In the case where staying, pattern is distinguished by being equipped with, 1 pattern and next pattern can be positively identified.
0 graphical representation of exemplary of the series number pattern of all OFF is utilized in the figure.This graphical representation of exemplary device (110P) Still the state not detected by information equipment (200).In this example, then, the pattern of device (110P) output whole ON (series number 1), in turn, output area sub-pattern export (series number 1A).Wherein, the pattern of all ON is in implementation form 27 Reference pattern.Reference pattern is also referred to as title pattern.Information equipment (200), can be with identification icon generation by detection reference pattern The element configuration in each pattern for including in code.
In Figure 182, device (110P) exports even-odd check pattern (series number 2) after reference pattern, in turn, defeated Pattern output (series number 2A) is distinguished out.Then, device (110P) exports 4 group information patterns and distinguishes the group of pattern.Moreover, Device (110P) exports same pattern code repeatedly again.
In the pattern code of implementation form 27, the information pattern of information is defined in element (111-1)~element (111- 4) in the case that at least one is OFF, element (111-5) is made to become ON.It, can be by hum pattern according to the composition of this pattern Case and the differentiation pattern of entirety OFF distinguish.On the other hand, in the case where element (111-1)~element (111-4) is ON, Device (110P) makes element (111-5) become OFF.It, can be by the mark of information pattern and entirety ON according to the composition of this pattern Topic pattern distinguishes.
In addition, even if in even-odd check pattern (series number 2), it is all in element (111-1)~element (111-4) In the case where ON, device (110P) also makes element (111-5) become OFF.It, can be by odd even school according to the composition of this pattern The title pattern for testing pattern and entirety ON distinguishes.
In each pattern of Figure 182, become the time of ON in each element (111), it may occur that time lag.Therefore, information For equipment (200) in interpretation pattern, (1) monitors which element (111) becomes ON after detecting entirety OFF.(2) if some Element (111) becomes ON, then monitors whether each element becomes ON respectively, until becoming entirety OFF.(3) next complete when detecting When body OFF, confirmation in previous entirety OFF (all OFF of (1)) between this entirety OFF (all OFF of (3)), which Element (111) becomes ON.According to this step, even if the ON time of each element has differences, information equipment (200) can also be with The combination for identifying the element (111) of at least 1 time ON state carries out information pattern specific.
As described above, the pattern of entirety OFF is foreclosed from the information pattern for defining information.This is because all The pattern of OFF becomes ON by means of at least one element (111) and is detected by touch panel, thus has to as at least one Element (111) is the effect of the differentiation pattern of the pattern of ON.
In addition, in this embodiment, the pattern and even-odd check pattern of all ON is excluded in the information for defining information Except pattern.All ON forms include 1 in the pattern of given amount for defining pattern code (that is, capacitor code).Pass through Define pattern code given amount pattern in include 1 reference pattern, information equipment can on the basis of pattern position Element number is assigned, the information pattern except reference pattern is encoded.Therefore, reference pattern has and information pattern phase The special pattern as reserved word of difference acts on, and does not include in information pattern.Alternatively, it is also possible to except reference pattern, The reserved word of specified multiplicity effect is equipped with given amount, is foreclosed from information pattern.As the special of reserved word In pattern, in addition to reference pattern, it also can be set and specify the pattern of insertion process.It is notified out alternatively, it is also possible to match to be ready for use on The reserved word of the states such as mistake.
In addition, in Figure 186, graphical representation of exemplary even-odd check pattern, but in this embodiment, touch panel takes Pattern be restored to device (110P) from display device as light code, realize mistake verify, thus device (110P) and Information equipment (200) can not also receive and dispatch even-odd check pattern, omit even-odd check.
The composition of information defined in Figure 183 (A) graphical representation of exemplary combinations of patterns of Figure 182.If in conjunction with Figure 182 Information pattern (1)~(4), then form 16 bit pattern codes.Information pattern (1) is used as element (111-1) and element (111-2) is the pattern of ON, represents bit pattern 0011.Information pattern (2) as element (111-1), element (111-3) and Element (111-4) is the pattern of ON, represents bit pattern 1101.Similarly, information pattern (3), (4) respectively represent bit diagram Case 1111,0000.Therefore, in the physical quantity output of Figure 182, information equipment (200) can be to 16 ratio shown in Figure 183 (A) Special pattern code is encoded.
The even-odd check pattern setting of Figure 183 (B) graphical representation of exemplary.For each element (111-1)~(111-4), add (exclusive or) information pattern (1)~(4) bit, can calculate Parity Check Bits.It is exemplary in the example of Figure 183 (B) Illustrate the even number parity value for adding (exclusive or) and being 0 including each bit in information pattern (1)~(4), Parity Check Bits.
Figure 184 be it is corresponding with Figure 182, graphical representation of exemplary from the pattern that element (111) exports occur mistake when The figure of signal receiving step.In this embodiment, from element (111) export pattern, by information equipment (200) by means of Display device shines and is sent to device (110P) as light code.Therefore, in Figure 184, from member shown in Figure 182 On the basis of the pattern of part (111), graphical representation of exemplary light code is gone back.In addition, using symbol in graphic display unit (110P) acting surface At the arrow instruction of (110P), the graphical representation of exemplary column of photodiode (WPD1~WPD5) (assign 1~5 in rectangle Number).
Information equipment (200) terminates if identification comes from the pattern of all OFF of element (111) from element (111) The combination of the position ON of acquirement carries out pattern specific.After information equipment (200) is specific to pattern progress, by specific pattern It is transformed into bit pattern, is sent immediately with light code from display device.In the figure firstly, information equipment (200) is to series number 1 Pattern carry out it is specific, sent from 11111 bit patterns of specific pattern change with light code.
Then, device (110P) sends the information pattern (1) (bit pattern for being equivalent to 10001) of series number 2, information Equipment (200) is specific to the pattern (1) progress, is transformed to bit pattern 10001, is sent with light code.In turn, device (110P) sends the information pattern (2) (bit pattern for being equivalent to 10011) of series number 3, but information equipment (200) institute is specific Information pattern be different information pattern the 10010 of missing (be equivalent to bit).Information equipment (200) will obtain as described above The information pattern obtained is transformed into bit pattern, is sent to device (110P).That is, being sent in series number 2 from device (110P) Information pattern (2) and information equipment (200) return and the light code sent is inconsistent.
Then, for device (110P), a part missing of information pattern (2) is sent out from the display device of information equipment The bit pattern sent is 10010, is distinguished for mistake.Device (110P) exports wrong to transmit identical information pattern (2) again Miss transmission patterns again.Transmission patterns and entirety ON, entirety OFF are the patterns not used in information pattern to mistake again, that is, are retained Word can execute mistake and correct after information equipment (200) differentiates generation mistake.In addition, the revised information pattern of mistake By similar sequence, device (110P) is sent to from information equipment (200) with light code, thus can be confirmed that mistake is corrected to be It is no correct.
Figure 185 is the figure for the pattern code that graphical representation of exemplary is sent.According to the sequence of described Figure 184,20 bits are sent Pattern code 10,000 01,111 10,011 10001.But, the entirety in information pattern 5bit=32, as reference pattern ON (11111), differentiation pattern entirety OFF (00000), transmission patterns (11110) are left out mistake again, thus available The information numerical quantity that this implementation form pattern code describes is 4 power=707,281 of (32-3).Therefore, than all 20bit Information=1,048,576 numerical value reduce about 30%.But it such as is marked to 1 bit assignment error of 5 elements (111) etc. Remaining 4 bits are used as information pattern by will, and in this case, numerical value is 4bit × 4=16bit=65, and 536.Therefore, In being equipped with such as reference pattern, differentiation pattern and the wrong communication mode of this implementation form of the reserved word of transmission patterns again, Compared with the mode for being equipped with flag bit, data can be made to be significantly greatly increased.
~186~191 graphical representation of exemplary are schemed between device (110P) and information equipment (200), are received shown in Figure 182 The processing of the physical quantity output pattern of differentiation pattern including all OFF.Figure 186 is that information equipment (200) are obtained from device The processing example of the pattern code of (110P) output.The processing is that the pattern determined by physical quantity variation is input to information equipment (200) processing of touch panel, thus referred to as panel input processing.In this process, firstly, information equipment (200) executes The acquirement operation (S140) of detecting event.So-called detecting event is CPU (the code identification of Fig. 5 of representative information equipment (200) The CPU (51) of device) information of physical quantity variation is perceived on touch panel by touch panel control circuit.Wherein, institute Physical quantity variation is called, such as in the case of capacitive touch panels, is referred on touch panel, the capacitors such as mutual capacitance are never Sufficient changes of threshold be more than threshold value value situation or capacitor from be more than threshold value value variation be deficiency threshold value situation.By In the situation for the capacitor deficiency threshold value that touch panel is detected from the element of device (110P) (111), referred to as element (111) is OFF, the capacitor detected from element (111) are the situation of the value more than threshold value, and referred to as element (111) is ON.As implementing shape As illustrating in states 1 etc., the ON and OFF of element (111P) correspond to the ON and OFF of SW (115).
In the detection processing of detecting event, scan all coordinates of touch panel, detection from OFF variation be ON (or from ON changes as the coordinate of OFF).Be reported as detecting event information be slave OFF to ON on touch panel variation or from ON to The variation of OFF and the position coordinates for detecting the variation.But, according to the driver of access touch panel control circuit Processing is existed and is notified with 1 integration region in the case where once having multiple adjoinings for the position coordinates on the touch panel of ON The situation of touch event.Such as replace once for 1 integration position coordinates group on the touch panel of ON, notify 1 integration position The centre coordinate in the region that coordinate group represents and the size in the region are (for example, the region in touch panel X-axis or Y direction Length) etc..
The details of the acquirement processing (S140 of Figure 186) of the graphical representation of exemplary detecting event in Figure 187.In the processing In, information equipment (200) determines whether some position on touch panel has the variation (S1401) of ON/OFF.Moreover, working as When there is the variation of ON/OFF in some position on touch panel, then, information equipment (200) determines whether all OFF (S1402).Wherein, so-called entirety OFF, refer to as scanning touch panel on each sensor as a result, without objects such as mutual capacitance Reason amount is more than the situation of the coordinate position of threshold value.That is, obtain entirety OFF detecting event when, by now at 1 more than Position is whole OFF from the state change that the sensor on touch panel was once ON.In addition, in the effect of device (110P) The case where face (that is, configuration face of element (111)) contact touch panel, the position of information equipment (200) recognition component (111) Under, the detection of the touch event of S140 can also be defined in the range that the acting surface of device (110P) is contacted.
In the judgement of S1402, when detecting event is not all OFF, information equipment (200) determines previous detection Whether event is all ON (S1403).So-called entirety ON refers to corresponding with all elements (111) of device (110P) number The situation of position detection ON.In addition, information equipment (200) is if corresponding with all elements (111) of device (110P) number Position detection ON is then judged to having detected all ON.When previous detecting event is entirety ON, information equipment (200) will be based on The configuration (referred to as pattern) of the position of this detecting event is remembered as even-odd check pattern in element buffer (S1405).Institute Element buffer is called, is the buffer on the memory (117) of interim deposit detecting event result, there is LD device The capacity of one group of (111-1~111-5 etc. of Figure 182) coordinate of the element (111) of (110P).In addition, information equipment (200) Both the coordinate group that can have remembered the region for the detection of 1 element (111), can also remember centre coordinate and size.Moreover, Information equipment (200) makes that processing returns to S1401.
On the other hand, by the judgement of S1403, when previous event is not all ON, information equipment (200) will be from inspection Remember in element buffer the position (that is, position of element) of the ON obtained in survey event.In addition, as described above, if complete The position of ON is remembered in portion's element buffer, then information equipment (200) is identified as having detected all ON.Information equipment (200) The location information (that is, pattern) of the element buffer of all ON is remembered for benchmark pattern.Reference pattern, which is used as, is directed to reference map Pattern except case carries out information that is specific and assigning element number to coordinate.Moreover, information equipment (200) make processing returns to S1401.In addition, when being determined as all OFF from detecting event, information equipment (200) terminates detection by the judgement of S1402 Event registration processing.
Figure 186 is returned below to continue to explain.After detecting event acquirement handles (S140), information equipment (200) delays element The pattern for rushing device is transferred to memory, empties element buffer (S141).In turn, information equipment (200) by this pattern with While light code is sent back to device, instruction exports (S142) by the next pattern that next physical quantity variation determines.For example, letter Equipment (200) are ceased as shown in Figure 142, and information equipment (200) is executed to synchronize and be shone with light code, will use up generation in respective synchronization The value (alternatively referred to as code value) representated by the preceding pattern code based on physical quantity variation detected that shines of code is directly sent back to Device (110P).It is shone by means of synchronization light code, information equipment (200) indicates that next pattern is defeated to device (110P) Out.The processing of S142 can be described as to based on including whenever the information for exporting other side's device as the first information and obtaining The energy of the light or electromagnetic wave inside carries out an example of the situation of response.In addition, the processing of S142 can be described as Representative is at least identified the OFF by the panel, the OFF state of detection 1 or more element whole OFF by other side's device The OFF identification information of state is contained in an example of the second information and the situation of output.
Then, information equipment (200) determines whether the pattern numbers remembered in pattern memory reach information pattern number+2 (S143).Information pattern number+2, it is meant that recall info pattern, reference pattern and even-odd check pattern.When in pattern memory When the pattern numbers of memory are not up to information pattern number+2, information equipment (200) makes that processing returns to S140.
In the judgement of S143, when the pattern numbers remembered in pattern memory reach information pattern number+2, information equipment (200) even-odd check (S144) is executed using a series of patterns for the both fixed numbers remembered in pattern memory.Wherein, information is set Standby (200) carry out even-odd check pattern specific by the memory sequence in pattern memory.That is, information equipment stores pattern The pattern remembered after reference pattern on device is considered as even-odd check pattern.In addition, a series of when remembering in pattern memory End of pattern be benchmark pattern when, initial pattern is determined as even-odd check pattern by information equipment (200).Moreover, information Equipment (200) forecloses reference pattern and even-odd check pattern, for the hum pattern of the given amount in pattern memory Each element of case executes XOR logic, is compared with even-odd check pattern.
142).Therefore, the even-odd check of S144 and S145 can be omitted.
On the other hand, when the even-odd check of S144 is OK, information equipment (200) is based on reference pattern, to pattern The position distribution member of each pattern elements on memory numbers (S146).When reference pattern is asymmetrical figure up and down When case, information equipment (200) can determine the direction of reference pattern, to device (110P) each element pair on reference pattern The position answered assigns element number.More specifically, information equipment (200) keeps the coordinate of each element and element number corresponding.And And information equipment (200) assigns element number based on the location information of pattern memory element, carries out to pattern special It is fixed.Moreover, information equipment (200) obtains pattern code (capacitor code), notifies to obtain to device (110P) and complete (S147).
Figure 188 is flow chart of the graphical representation of exemplary without the panel input processing of even-odd check.In this process, The processing of S140~S142 is identical as Figure 186, thus omits the description.In this process, information equipment (200) judgement is remembered Whether pattern numbers reach information pattern number+1 (S143A).So-called information pattern number+1 is added in the quantity of information situation Obtain the pattern numbers of the situation of reference pattern.When the pattern numbers of memory are not up to information pattern number+1, information equipment (200) The processing of S140 is returned, detecting event is executed and obtains operation.
On the other hand, when the pattern numbers of memory reach information pattern number+1, information equipment (200) is with reference pattern (S146) is numbered to the position distribution member of element in basis.Moreover, information equipment (200) is with the position of the element of element buffer Based on the element number of confidence breath and reference pattern, obtain capacitor code (S148).Moreover, information equipment (200) is to device (110P) notifies pattern code (capacitor code) obtains to complete (S148).
Figure 189 is the flow chart for the pattern output processing that graphical representation of exemplary is based on device (110P) physical quantity variation.At this In processing, device (110P) exports initial pattern, then exports entirety OFF pattern (S170).Moreover, device (110P) etc. Output to next pattern indicates (S171).When the output of no next pattern instruction, device (110P) replaces next pattern Output instruction, determine whether to have received completion code (S178).Device (110P) in the case where having received completion code, Terminate pattern output.On the other hand, in the judgement of S171, S178, when no next pattern output instruction, also do not receive When completion code, device (110P) returns to the processing of S171.
On the other hand, it in the judgement of S171, is indicated if there is next pattern exports, then device (110P) and next figure Case output instruction obtains the return pattern (S172) delivered with light code form together.In this embodiment, information equipment (200) if detection entirety OFF pattern, is directed to device (110P), the output instruction of next pattern is sent with light code.Separately Outside, in the output instruction of next pattern, previous device (110P) is set according to the physical quantity variation of element (111) to information The pattern of standby (200) output is return.The pattern is known as to return pattern.
In S171, S172, device (110P), which obtains, returns pattern, this is energy of the information input unit from the response Obtain an example of the situation of response message.In addition, the output instruction of next pattern and return pattern are the one of response message A example.In addition, the output instruction of next pattern and return pattern are properly termed as OFF identification information.
Moreover, device (110P) compares the pattern and foldback pattern (S173) for terminating to deliver.The so-called figure for terminating to deliver Case is device (110P) until returning pattern possessing before pattern receives, terminating previous transmission.When the pattern that end is delivered When consistent with foldback pattern (in S174 be), device (110P) exports next pattern (S176).
On the other hand, when the pattern and foldback pattern that terminate to deliver are inconsistent (no in S174), device (110P) weight The pattern (S175) that new end of output is delivered.The processing of S173 is an example of positive misinterpretation.In addition, the processing of S175 It can be described as an example for exporting corresponding both situations of quantitative information again.In addition, the processing of S175, S176 are inputs After corresponding OFF identification information, information output part by corresponding OFF identification information as synchronization signal, according to the change of next physical quantity Change and occur an example of the situation of the ON state.After the pattern output of S175, S176, device (110P) output is all The pattern (S177) of OFF.Moreover, device (110P) makes, processing returns to S191.
The processing of S175~S177 can be described as device (110P) in first time point, make described 1 or more element extremely Few 1 is ON state, the second time point after the first time point, makes all OFF shapes of described 1 or more element One example of the processing of state.In addition, device (110P) detects touch panel from element (111) as this implementation form Physical quantity variation, it may be said that be to occur by the ON state of panel detection and the physical quantity from the element is not by the panel One example of the variation of the OFF state of detection.
The deformation of panel input processing of Figure 190 graphical representation of exemplary.The information equipment of detection pattern code in the figure (200) by the reference pattern of detection entirety ON, the output of identification icon code starts.In Figure 189 processing, firstly, information Equipment (200) starts (S150) by detecting entirety ON pattern.In addition, information equipment (200) can before all ON detection Be considered as device (110) there are unrecognized states.
Information equipment (200) carries out specific (S151) if detection entirety ON, to the configuration of element (111).Moreover, Information equipment (200) waits until that element (111) are entirety OFF (S152).Information equipment (200) is if detection entirety OFF (in S152 be), then wait until that 1 or more element becomes ON (S153).Before 1 or more element becomes ON, if through It crosses given time and time-out (in S154 be) occurs, then information equipment (200) ends processing.
By the judgement of S153, if at least one element (111) becomes ON (in S153 be), information equipment (200) remember the identification of ON element (111), that is, memory is which (S155) of element (111-1~111-5).Moreover, information Equipment (200) determines whether to detect that element (111) are entirety OFF (S156).When all OFF can not be perceived, information equipment (200) make to remember ON element processing returns to S155.Information equipment (200), which so remembers which element (111), becomes ON, until Detect all OFF.
In the judgement of S156, if detection entirety OFF (in S156 be), information equipment (200) is to 1 output Pattern is carried out specific and is saved.That is, storage by the ON element (111) detected in the processing of S155 be set as bit 1, will not at 4 bit of bit pattern (S157) of bit 0 is set as the element of ON.In addition, in implementation form 27, and not element (111) Quantity is defined in 5, thus is not defined in 4 bits by the bit number that 1 pattern output determines.
Then, information equipment (200) is by wrong verification light code, that is, makes suitable with the bit pattern saved in S157 Light code, shone (S158) in the photodiode (WPD1~WPD5) of device (110).Photodiode The allocation position of (WPFD1~WPD5) for example both can as shown in Figure 69 etc. element (111) nearby, be also possible to as figure Allocation position shown in 167.According to S158, if device (110P) have received it is comparable with the bit pattern that is saved in S157 Light code, then device (110P) determines what the pattern exported from element (111) and photodiode (WPFD1~WPD5) received Whether light code is consistent.If device (110P) detects mistake, from element (111) again output pattern.Device (110P) weight The step of new output pattern, is for example identical as content shown in Figure 153, Figure 154, Figure 155, Figure 156.That is, device (110P) is protected There is the pattern code given time for terminating to export, in the light code from information equipment (200) foldback and terminates the pattern generation exported It is deposited in the case of inconsistencies between code, such as output detects the index of the pattern code of mistake, and then exports and detect mistake Pattern code accidentally.That is, being exported according to the light code of S158, device (110P) detects that the mistake of the situation of mistake is ordered Positive step is identical as implementation form 20.
Then, information equipment (200) determines whether to save the pattern of both fixed numbers, that is, determines whether to save hum pattern The pattern (S159) of case number+1.That is, the pattern of information pattern number+1, it is meant that the end of input of a kind of pattern code.Cause This, information equipment (200) carries out specific and saves (S160) to a series of pattern code (capacitor code).In the preservation In pattern code, including and Figure 182 the corresponding bit pattern of even-odd check pattern, corresponding with information pattern (1)~(4) Bit pattern.For even-odd check, verified than executing the more supervisory program of the program of processing of Figure 190.Separately Outside, it according to the processing of S158, is inputted for every 1 pattern, executes mistake and verify, thus even-odd check can not also be implemented. In addition, as shown in Figure 190 even-odd check can also be executed after the processing of S160.Moreover, information equipment (200) returns processing S153 is returned, next pattern code is detected.
In addition, pattern code is since the title pattern (series number 1) of all ON in Figure 190.But information equipment (200) it is also not necessarily started to process from title pattern detection.Information equipment (200) is in memory even-odd check pattern, hum pattern Behind case (1)~(4), it can also identify that a series of detection of pattern codes terminates in finally detection title pattern.In another example Information equipment (200) can also identification information pattern (1)~(4) first, then identify title pattern.At this point, information equipment (200) it is considered as after title pattern that there are the inputs of even-odd check pattern, detects next pattern.
Similarly, information equipment (200) for example can also identification information pattern (2)~(4) first, then identify title Pattern.At this point, information equipment (200) is considered as after title pattern, there are the defeated of even-odd check pattern and information pattern (1) Enter, detects later pattern.Information equipment (200) is originally identified information pattern (3) or the situation of (4) is same.
Figure 191 is the flow chart of the variation of the communication process between display information device (200) and device (110P). In this process, it is indicated according to the output from device (110), information equipment (200) carries out light code luminous, makes device (110) light.In addition, information equipment (200) is executed based on the error check for returning code.The processing of Figure 191 is known as light code Output processing.
In this process, firstly, information equipment (200) exports trigger signal (S190) with light code.Then, information is set Standby (200) wait the output of next smooth code to indicate (S191).When the output of no next smooth code instruction, information equipment (200) determine whether to replace the output of next smooth code to indicate and have received completion code (S198).Information equipment (200) exists In the case where having received completion code, terminate light code output processing.On the other hand, by the judgement of S191, S198, when In the case where not having the output of next smooth code to indicate, when also not finishing receiving code, device (110P) returns to the place of S191 Reason.
On the other hand, in the judgement of S191, if there is the output of next smooth code indicates that then device (110P) obtains The return pattern (S192) that output instruction with next smooth code is delivered together.In this embodiment, in the defeated of next pattern Out in instruction, the information of the previous light code that (luminous) is sent from information equipment (200) to element (111P) is used as by element (111) determine pattern and return.The pattern is known as to return pattern.
Moreover, the light code that information equipment (200) delivers end is compared (S193) with foldback pattern.So-called knot The light code that beam is delivered is that information equipment (200) is possessed to the light code for receiving return pattern, terminating previous transmission.Work as knot When the information for the light code that beam is delivered is consistent with the information of foldback pattern, information equipment (200) exports next smooth code (S196)。
On the other hand, when the light code and foldback pattern that terminate to deliver are inconsistent, information equipment (200) exports again Terminate the light code (S197) delivered.Moreover, device (110P) makes, processing returns to S191.
As described above, the device (110P) of this implementation form is inserted into entirety OFF figure between information pattern and information pattern Case, thus when exporting physical quantity from device (110P), when after requiring to become ON from element (111) when becoming OFF Between when, or until there are the times when becoming OFF due to element (111) (or each SW (115) because being connected to each element (111)) When difference, with distinctive information pattern and information pattern and it can also export.In addition, the step of according to implementation form 27, information equipment (200) after obtaining the pattern determined by physical quantity variation, dress will be sent back to light code by the pattern specific information (110P) is set, device (110P) execution is made to correct errors inspection, in case there is an error, output pattern again.Therefore, information is set Standby (200) and device (110P) can be by means of based on the objects from element (111) (SW (115) for being connected to element (111)) The pattern and light code of reason amount variation realize high reliability communication.
<implementation form 25>
According to Figure 192~Figure 196, illustrate the processing of device (110Q) relevant to implementation form 25.In this implementation form In, illustrate to determine device (110Q) physical quantity output level (capacitance size, electric field strength) or letter from element (111) Cease the processing that the threshold value of the output level of equipment (200) physical quantity is adjusted.In addition, the device (110Q) of this implementation form Composition and processing sequence can be applied to code generating device (1), the 1~implementation form of implementation form of the implementation form 0 9, device (110~110N, 110P (hereinafter referred to as device (110) of 20~implementation form of implementation form 23, implementation form 24 Deng)) pattern code output and its interpretation.
In device (110) of the implementation form 1 etc., detected by means of the touch panel of information equipment (200) The area (hereinafter referred to as touch area) of element (111), depends on body capacitance, the element that conductor (114) are contacted including contact (111) capacitor, from element (111) to the serial stray capacitance of the people of contact contact conductor (114) including joint capacity and It changes.In this embodiment, illustrate for the device side (110Q) to the touch panel by means of information equipment (200) and The touch area of the element (111) of detection is adjusted required composition and processing.
Element has abundant distance between (111), when nearby electric component is not configured in element (111), by means of diameter 7.5 The circular element (111) of~8mm or so and the area in region (hereinafter referred to as conversion zone) exerted one's influence to touch panel Or size (such as maximum length as maximum length direction size), generally and using at finger touch intelligent mobile phone Tablet computer terminal etc. touch panel when touch area area or maximum length it is identical.
When multiple element (111) (hundreds of microns is to several millimeters or so) close to each other, because of the coupling between element (111), instead Region is answered to there is the tendency increased.In the biggish situation of conversion zone, touch panel when SW (115) is become ON causes Detection zone it is oversized, conversion zone caused by 2 adjacent elements (111) can be identified as 1.In addition, reacting In the case that region is excessive, exist the centre coordinate value of the conversion zone detected by means of touch panel from original element (111) situation that the corresponding position in center exceeds.As described above, the touch panel detection of information equipment (200) is more than that appropriateness is anti- When answering the conversion zone in region, in order to become appropriate conversion zone, is indicated, made to device side by means of light code SW1 or SW1+SW2 becomes ON, and control is so that conversion zone becomes appropriateness.
Due to the performance of the touch panel of smart phone or tablet computer terminal etc. or the dielectric constant of screening glass material or The influence of thickness, the situation being difficult to there are conversion zone reduction.As described above, when by means of information equipment (200) Whens size, area of appropriate conversion zone etc. is not achieved in touch panel and size, the area of conversion zone etc. detected, information Equipment (200) is indicated by means of light code to the side device (110Q), to reach appropriate size, area etc..
That is, in this embodiment, in the state that people contacts contact conductor (114) (Figure 40 etc.), by device (110Q) Element (111) switch between ON and OFF.Moreover, device 200 obtains touch area when element (111) are ON, that is, root It is exported according to the physical quantity from element (111), touch panel touch sensor obtains the surface portion more than touch detection threshold value Size (for example, number of electrodes of the matrix of touch sensor).At this point, device (110Q) can by SW (115) forward partially While value is changed as parameter, element (111) is switched between ON and OFF.Moreover, device (110) determines most The forward bias of appropriateness.
Figure 192 is that the signal of exemplary diagram showing device (110Q) and information equipment (200) receives the figure of relationship.As schemed Show, device (110Q) can adjust the forward bias voltage drop (or electric current) of SW (115) by means of DAC (DA1).In addition, CPU (116) Indicate the forward bias voltage drop (or electric current) exported from DAC (DA1).According to the control of (116) CPU, adjustment comes from the pressure of DAC (DA1) Electricity value (or current value), impedance when forward bias voltage drop so as to adjust SW (115).Such as when SW (115) are common two When pole pipe, for example, the relationship of electric current I and voltage V can be deposited with projected forms for the specific of diode current voltage In the memory etc. of information equipment (200), with light code form, forward bias voltage drop etc. is assigned from information equipment to device (110Q) Instruction.
In the example of Figure 192, firstly, user loads on some acting surface of the element (111) of device (110Q) The touch panel of information equipment (200).Moreover, information equipment (200) indicates to execute the adjustment of forward bias voltage drop to device (110Q) Processing.Moreover, device (110Q) is according to the instruction based on light code for coming from information equipment (200) with set piezoelectricity value (example Such as 0.7V), SW (115) edge is forward biased.Set piezoelectricity value both can be initial value, or present sets Set value.Moreover, SW (115) becomes ON, thus caused by the mutual capacitance of element (111) and touch panel (or come from element (111) electric field strength) etc. the variations of physical quantitys detected by touch panel.Moreover, physics quantitative change of the touch panel according to detection Change, the range that decision element (111) influences, that is, determine to obtain and to the comparable physical quantity variation of the touch operation of touch panel Size, the area in region etc..
When the size in the region of acquisition is the Measurement Allowance being moderately worth, information equipment (200) will represent the light generation of OK Code is sent to device (110Q).In addition, information equipment (200) is to device when the size in region is too small relative to appropriateness value (110Q) indicates the increase determined by the set increment of forward bias voltage drop etc..In addition, the size in region is excessive relative to appropriateness value When, information equipment (200) indicates the reduction determined according to the set increment of forward bias voltage drop etc. to device (110Q).Device The CPU (116) of (110Q) is received the instruction based on light code, is compiled to the instruction based on light code by photodiode Code controls DAC (DA1), adjusts forward bias voltage drop.
As described above, the detection in region described in instruction and touch panel is repeated in information equipment (200), until area The size in domain reaches appropriate value.Moreover, information is set if the size in the region obtained reaches appropriateness value Measurement Allowance Standby (200) send the light code for representing OK to device (110Q).The DAC when CPU (116) of device (110Q) is by notice OK (DA1) setting value is deposited at non-volatile register, in processing later, is used as the setting value of DAC (DA1).
According to above processing, the ruler for being equivalent to the region of physical quantity variation of the touch operation to touch panel is obtained Very little, area is adjusted to obtain the close Measurement Allowance being moderately worth.Accordingly, it can be said that CPU (116) and DAC (DA1) is used as one A example controls the SW (115) as physical quantity control unit, the physical quantity variation pair that adjustment 1 or more element (111) generates The effect degree of panel.
Figure 193 is the figure for showing the variation of Figure 192.As shown in Figure 192, device (110Q) can also replace DAC (DA1) there is impulse generator (PG1).Impulse generator (PG1) to the forward voltage of SW (115) (semiconductor switch) (or Electric current) apply set duty ratio (duty ratio) or set frequency pulse signal.Such as device (110Q) can be by making to account for Sky increases forward voltage (or electric current) than being bordering on 1 (100%), reduces the forward impedance of semiconductor switch.In addition, device (110Q) can reduce forward voltage (or electric current) and declining duty ratio from 1 (100%), increase semiconductor switch Forward impedance.
Therefore, as shown in the situation of Figure 192, information equipment (200) is in the influence region in one's power of device (110Q) element When size is too small relative to appropriateness value, information equipment (200) indicates the set increasing by pulse signal duty ratio to device (110Q) Increase caused by amount.In addition, information equipment (200) refers to device (110Q) when the size in region is excessive relative to appropriateness value Show reduction caused by the designated increments because of pulse signal duty ratio.The CPU (116) of device (110Q) is connect by photodiode By the instruction based on light code, the instruction based on light code is encoded, is controlled impulse generator (PG1), duty ratio is adjusted Or frequency.Information equipment (200) carries out instruction and the detection in the region described in touch panel repeatedly, until region Size reaches appropriate value.
In addition, CPU (116) can also replace the duty ratio of change pulse signal and change frequency.By changing frequency, The resistance change that SW (115) has.Therefore, as the situation of described Figure 192, CPU (116) and impulse generator (PG1) can So that the resistance variations of SW (115), adjust forward voltage (or electric current).
According to above processing, the ruler for being equivalent to the region of physical quantity variation of the touch operation to touch panel is obtained Very little, area is adjusted to obtain the close Measurement Allowance being moderately worth.Thus it can be said that CPU (116) and impulse generator (PG1) as an example, SW (115) of the control as physical quantity control unit, the object that adjustment 1 or more element (111) generates Reason amount changes the effect degree to panel.
Figure 194 (A), Figure 194 (B) are the figures for showing the variation of Figure 192, Figure 193.Figure 194 (A) is element (111) Each portion and contact conductor and semiconductor switch (SW1~SW4) in the top view of top view and graphical representation of exemplary element (111) The figure of connection, Figure 194 (B) are that the element (111) of Figure 194 (A) is truncated along the plane perpendicular to the paper for including P1 arrow Sectional view.
In Figure 194 (A), Figure 194 (B), element (111) has central metal membrane part (conductor 1) and surround in described Entreat 1 or more the annular metal membrane part (2~conductor of conductor 4) of metal film portion.Moreover, make 1~conductor of conductor 4 by It can be connect with contact conductor (114) in switch (SW1~SW4).Therefore, CPU (116) and switch (SW1~SW4) together Play the role of adjustment section, by means of central metal membrane part (conductor 1) and 1 or more annular metal membrane part (conductor 2~ Conductor 4) in SW1~SW4, adjustment with contact conductor (114) conducting part quantity.Device 200 and Figure 192,203 Situation is the same, obtains the conversion zone based on element (111A) in original state or current setpoint value, decision make SW1~ SW4 becomes the combination of ON, so that the size of conversion zone, area reach appropriate value.Switch combination as ON signal is, for example, SW1, SW1+SW2, SW1+SW2+SW3 or SW1+SW2+SW3+SW4 etc..
As shown in the situation of Figure 192, Figure 193, information equipment (200) is in the influence region in one's power of device (110Q) element Size relative to appropriateness value it is too small when, information equipment (200) with light code to device (110Q) instruction increase become opening for ON Close (SW1~SW4) etc..In addition, information equipment (200) is with light code to dress when the size in region is excessive relative to appropriateness value Setting (110Q) instruction increase becomes switch (SW1~SW4) of OFF etc..The CPU (116) of device (110Q) passes through two pole of photoelectricity Pipe receives the instruction based on light code, encodes to the instruction based on light code, according to instruction, increasing or decreasing becomes ON Switch.Information equipment (200) carries out instruction and the detection in the region described in touch panel repeatedly, until region Size reaches appropriate value.
According to above processing, the ruler for being equivalent to the region of physical quantity variation of the touch operation to touch panel is obtained Very little, area is adjusted to obtain the close Measurement Allowance being moderately worth.Thus it can be said that CPU (116) as an example, is controlled It is made as SW1~SW4 of physical quantity control unit, work of the physical quantity variation that adjustment 1 or more element (111) generates to panel Use degree.
In addition, in this example, element (111A) is divided into 1~conductor of conductor 4, but not segmentation number is defined in 4 area Point.That is, conductor number both can be 3 or less, or 5 or more.In addition, switch number is suitably equipped with according to conductor number and is It can.In addition, conductor 1 is circle in Figure 20 4,2~conductor of conductor 4 is annular shape, but these conductors is not defined in circle Shape or annular shape.Such as conductor 1 can be polygon, 2~conductor of conductor 4 can be polygonal ring shape pattern.
Figure 194 (A), 194 (B) example in, although allowing to select the conductor of diameter 6mm, 7mm, 8mm, 9mm, But in manufacturing device, can according between the distance between conductor and conductor material, conductor whether with certain non-conducting material Various conditions such as the dielectric constant of the material of conductor junction, the length of conducting wire are filled, protected, determine the diameter and ring-type of conductor Conductor number.In addition, preferably being filled with electrical insulator to advanced low-k materials between ring-shaped conductor.This is because it is possible thereby to most Limits reduce coupling when no power.Gap can be equipped between ring-shaped conductor.Convex can be made in conductor.
Figure 195 is the flow chart of the processing for the calibration that graphical representation of exemplary information equipment (200) execute implementation form 208.? In the processing, information equipment (200) is sent calibration to device (110Q) and is started and forward bias voltage drop setting instruction with light code (S201).Then, information equipment (200) sends pattern output instruction (S202) to device (110Q).Device (110Q) is according to figure Case output instruction makes SW (115) become ON using initial value or present value.At this point, device (110Q) can be by SW (115) one Each and every one becomes ON in ground, SW (115) once can also be become multiple ON.Then, information equipment (200) obtains conversion zone Area (S203).
Moreover, information equipment (200) determines whether the area of conversion zone is appropriateness value allowed band (S204, S205). Determined by S204, S205, when the area of conversion zone is excessive, information equipment (200) reduces to device (110Q) instruction to be set Set (S206).Reduce setting for example, to reduce forward bias voltage drop, reduce duty ratio, reduce frequency, reducing switch (SW1 in Figure 195 ~SW4) in conducting person etc..
On the other hand, determined by S204, S205, when the area of conversion zone is too small, information equipment (200) is to dress It sets (110Q) instruction and increases setting (S206).Increasing setting is, for example, to increase forward bias voltage drop, increase duty ratio, increase frequency, increase Add the conducting person etc. switched in (SW1~SW4) in Figure 195.
Moreover, in the judgement of S204, when the area appropriateness of conversion zone, information equipment (200) is with light code to dress It sets (110Q) and is sent completely notice (S208).Device (110Q) is if receive completion notice, by working as based on calibration process Preceding setting is deposited at non-volatile register, uses in later processing.
As described above, device (110Q) can be set in the information equipment (200) of this implementation form, so that device (110Q) Conversion zone on the touch panel of the influence of element (111) in one's power reaches appropriate value.Device (110Q) is according to information equipment (200) testing result of the conversion zone in touch panel is adjusted, so that the size of conversion zone, area reach suitable Angle value.
Figure 196 is the figure for showing the processing of information equipment (200) relevant to the variation of implementation form 28.Described In implementation form 28, information equipment (200) indicates the forward bias voltage drop when SW (115) are semiconductor switch to device (110Q) Deng setting value so that conversion zone reaches appropriate value.In the variation shown in Figure 196, information equipment (200) adjustment touching The limit for touching the touch sensor detection mutual capacitance variation of panel, so that the size of conversion zone, area reach appropriate value.Figure 196 another processing is identical as Figure 195.That is, S201~S205 processing is identical as Figure 195 in Figure 196, thus omits and say It is bright.
Determine that, when the size of conversion zone, area are excessive, information equipment (200) makes touch surface by S204, S205 The threshold value of the touch sensor of plate increases (S216).By increasing threshold value, the touch sensor for reaching the detected value of threshold value subtracts Few, size, area of conversion zone etc. reduce.On the other hand, determined by S204, S205, size, face when conversion zone When product is too small, information equipment (200) reduces the threshold value (S217) of the touch sensor of touch panel.By reducing threshold value, reach The touch sensor of the detected value of threshold value increases, and size, area of conversion zone etc. increase.Moreover, if the ruler of conversion zone Very little, area reaches appropriate value (in S204 be), then threshold value is stored in nonvolatile memory by information equipment (200), to Device (110Q) notice completes (S218).
According to the processing of Figure 196, it is not equipped with special composition in device (110Q), passes through setting for information equipment (200) It sets, the size of conversion zone, area can be made to reach appropriate value.
<implementation form 26>
Referring to figure~197~199, the device (110) of implementation form 29 is illustrated.Figure 197~Figure 199 is shown The variation of element (111).In addition, the composition of the device (110) of this implementation form can be applied to the implementation form 0 Code generating device (1), 1~implementation form of implementation form 9,20~implementation form of implementation form 23, implementation form 24, real Apply the device (110~110N, 110P, 110Q (hereinafter referred to as device (110) etc.)) of form 25.
Figure 197 is the figure of the composition of graphical representation of exemplary element (111B).The figure be combined with element (111B) top view and Side view (main view).As shown, part that element (111B) is proximate to center it is thicker, closer to the thinner solid in periphery Shape.That is, the face of the contact touch panel of element (111B), central portion are higher than peripheral portion.It is connect that is, becoming element (111B) The height of the normal direction of the immediate vicinity of contacting surface is higher than the convex shape of periphery.
Therefore, the center portion of element (111B) is easy to be adjacent to touch panel.On the other hand, more it is proximate to element The part on the periphery (111B), is more easy to happen tiny air layer between touch panel.By means of this structure, touch surface Plate detects the capacitor of center portion strongly, and the accuracy of identification centre coordinate position improves.That is, element (111B) is contacting The physical quantity variation that the immediate vicinity of each contact surface of touch panel generates, also larger forms than contact surface peripheral appendix member.
Figure 198 is the figure of the composition of graphical representation of exemplary element (111C).Black portions are conductors in figure.That is, element (111C) has cancellous conductor, and the conductor area ratio periphery for covering the per unit area of contact surface immediate vicinity is big. That is, element (111C) reaches the distribution of the conductor density by means of the combination of radial conductor and cricoid conductor.Root According to this structure, touch panel detects the capacitor of center portion strongly, and the precision of identification centre coordinate position improves.That is, first The physical quantity variation that part (111C) is generated in the immediate vicinity of each contact surface of contact touch panel, forms to compare contact surface Periphery is bigger.
Figure 199 is the figure of the composition of graphical representation of exemplary element (111D).Element (111D) uses resistance closer to center It is worth low material, closer to periphery, uses the high material of impedance value.That is, element (111D) is the conduction of contact surface immediate vicinity Rate is higher than the composition of periphery.For example, keeping the printing of conductive ink close when being formed element (111D) by means of printing (site) gradual change as gray scale is spent, density can be improved in immediate vicinity, reduce impedance value.
According to this structure, touch panel detects the capacitor of center portion strongly, identifies the precision of centre coordinate position It improves.That is, the physical quantity variation ratio that element (111D) forms to occur in each contact surface immediate vicinity for contacting touch panel Contact surface periphery is big.
<implementation form 27>
00, Figure 20 1 according to fig. 2 are illustrated device (110S) relevant to implementation form 30.Figure 20 1 is device The top view of (110S), Figure 200 are the sections of the cutting device (110S) at arrow P2, P2 of Figure 20 1.In addition, this implementation shape The composition of the device (110S) of state can be applied to the 1~implementation form of implementation form 9,20~implementation form of implementation form 23, device (110~110N, 110P~110Q (hereinafter referred to as device (110) of 27~implementation form of implementation form 28 Deng)).
Device (110S) is coating above (opposing face of acting surface) using conductive sheet.But, it can use dielectric constant height Film be coated, allow in surface printing decorative pattern.Figure 20 1 be the upper surface of removal device (110S) (acting surface it is opposite Face) conductive sheet state top view.
As shown, device (110S) has CPU (116), memory (117), battery on the substrate of conductive sheet lower layer (122), SW (115), photodiode (WPD).Battery (122) is button cell.In addition, being slim at device (110S) In the case of, battery (122) can be replaced and be equipped with solar panel.In the case where observing device (110S) along in-plane, Region existing for CPU (116), memory (117), battery (122), SW (115), photodiode (WPD) is known as to control electricity Road region.
On the other hand, as shown in Figure 20 1, Figure 200, element (111) are configured on the acting surface of device (110S).? As shown in Figure 200 along in-plane observe device (10S) in the case where, element (111) is present in the area for leaving control area Domain.The existing region along the observation of device (110S) in-plane of element (111) is called element area.On the other hand, element (111) the control circuit region being not present is alternatively referred to as not element region.
As shown in Figure 20 1, element (111) is inserted in low dielectric constant.That is, acting surface is in low-k Insulating layer forms the structure of element (111).Element (111) is properly termed as conducting element, with aluminium foil, conductive paper, conductive ink watermark Brush etc. is formed.But, high-k films can be formed on the surface of acting surface, allows to print.The skin covering of the surface of acting surface It is properly termed as coating or protective film.
Low dielectric constant is the electrical insulator of low-k, preferably includes the material of air layer.Low dielectric is normal The insulating layer of number insulation layers for example porous structure, hollow structure or the structure filled with low dielectric constant insulating material, such as The air layer of Figure 113, Figure 114, Figure 119~Figure 121, Figure 122 etc. or gap, the air layer including Figure 167~Figure 175 it is non- Conductive layer, packing material (M2) layer etc..
In turn, in the upper layer of low dielectric constant (in the opposite side of acting surface) equipped with substrate.Moreover, such as Shown in Figure 200, in element area, it is equipped with from element (111) and penetrates through top side (in the opposite side of acting surface), low dielectric The perforation wiring of constant insulator layer and substrate.Wiring is penetrated through in the lower layer of conductive sheet, from the upper surface of substrate (phase of acting surface Reverse side), it is connect with the conducting wire for being connected to SW (115).That is, conducting wire is provided to the upper surface of substrate, connection SW (115) and perforation Wiring.Therefore, element (111) by means of perforation wiring and thereon side conducting wire and connecting element (111).In addition, controlling The wiring of circuit region processed, connection SW (115), CPU (116), memory (117), battery (122) etc. omits in Figure 20 1 It records.
In addition, opening is formed in acting surface, inserted with photodiode (WPD).Photodiode (WPD) is installed on The effect surface side of substrate, by means of the conducting wire on perforation wiring (not shown) and thereon, with the control electricity including CPU etc. The connection of road region.In addition, being covered for the opening transparent body of photodiode (WPD) insertion.Opening is taper apperance, can be with It is the structure that can concentrate light.
As described above, device (110S) is the device for acting on the panel of the sensor with detection physical quantity, Ke Yiru Shown in lower.That is, device (110S) has acting surface and operating surface, from device forward surface the panel occurs for the acting surface can The physical quantity variation of detection, the operating surface receive the operation of user in the opposing face of effect.Acting surface has configuration 1 The element area of the above element (111) and the not element region except element area.
In addition, there is porous structure, hollow structure or exhausted filled with low-k between acting surface and operating surface The insulating layer and wiring control layer of the structure of edge material, the wiring control layer include making 1 in the operation surface side of insulating layer A above element causes the physical quantity control unit of physical quantity variation respectively and the physical quantity control unit is connected to described 1 The wiring part of the above element.
In addition, 1 or more element is connected to wiring control layer by means respectively of the penetrated wire for penetrating through insulating layer, The top substrate layer part of the operation surface side corresponding with not element region of wiring control layer, is configured with physical quantity control unit, wiring Portion connects the physical quantity control unit and perforation wiring in wiring control layer.
By taking this composition, conducting wire, CPU (116), the memory (117), battery on substrate can be reduced (122), coupling influence caused by the control units such as SW (115).That is, by means of porous structure, hollow structure or being filled with low Jie The low dielectric constant insulation of the structure of permittivity insulating material can reduce influence of the control unit to touch panel.In addition, Battery (122) can be replaced, by means of solar panel, such as with implementation form 1 etc., by means of the components of photo-electric conversion (112) etc. are arranged, using the light from receiving such as display device, room lightings, supply electric power to each portion of device (110S). In addition, as implementation form 1, it, can be by means of electromagnetic wave, piezoelectric transduction, thermoelectric (al) inversion etc. as shown in Figure 48~Figure 50 And supply electric energy.
In addition, when device (110S) implements power supply by means of the light of solar panel etc., in solar cell The surface side of the light source of the display device of plate orientation information equipment (200) etc. forms the structure of light-transmissive, such as Figure 170 institute The support construction (M1) (forming multiple open spaces in rectangular-shape or cellular well shape) shown, the honeycomb as shown in Figure 173 Structure, so as to from light such as the display devices of information equipment (200).
Therefore, made the physical quantitys such as touch panel detection capacitor, electric field strength by means of SW (115) when element (111) When, it can reduce coupling influence caused by the control unit.Therefore, device (110S) can be such that touch panel steadily examines Survey the physical quantity variation for coming from element (111).In addition, for photodiode (WPD), as long as can receive to come from touch surface The light of plate display device can be inserted in greatest extent close to the position of thereon.
<implementation form 28>
6 02~Figure 20 according to fig. 2 illustrate device (110T) relevant to implementation form 28.Figure 20 2 is in device The top view of upside (opposite side of the acting surface) observation of (110T), Figure 20 3 be the arrow P3 by Figure 20 2 and along hanging down Directly in paper plane cutting device (110T) section.As shown, device (110T) has and the element on acting surface (111) the elastic low dielectric constant and net-shaped metal layer of acting surface are formed.Elastic low dielectric constant and implementation The low dielectric constant of form 30 is the same, is porous structure, hollow structure or filled with low dielectric constant insulating material The insulating layer of structure.But, low-k of the elastic low dielectric constant of Figure 20 2 preferably than implementation form 30 is exhausted Edge layer is flexible.Elastic low dielectric constant is for example as shown in Figure 114, can be by with honeycomb or spongy material The elastic insulator (CA4) and partition (CA5) of formation are constituted.
Net-shaped metal layer in user by finger close to the upper surface of device (110T) (referred to as operating surface) when, finger is cut Real contact net-shaped metal layer, the extremely large size formation of width of mesh.For example, being several millimeters of sides when for the mesh of rectangle Shape.2 graphical representation of exemplary of Figure 20 in the upper surface of element (111) institute configuring area side (opposite side with acting surface) also has net The composition of shape metal layer.That is, perforation wiring penetrates through low dielectric constant from element (111), it is connected to net-shaped metal layer.
Device (110S) is loaded on to the touch panel of information equipment (200), if user contacts netted gold with finger Belong to layer, then element (111) surface of the physical quantity variations such as capacitor, electric field of user on acting surface occurs.Then, information Equipment (200) detects physical quantity variation by touch panel.Such as in the case where 2 Figure 20, touch panel is detected by closing It counts 4 elements (111) and causes position at the 4 of physical quantity variation.
In turn, if user presses net-shaped metal layer, elastic low dielectric constant recess.Then, recessed at this Sunken part, net-shaped metal layer cause physics quantitative change close to touch panel, thus by means of close net-shaped metal layer part Change, for example, the mutual capacitance variation between the touch sensor of touch panel, the electric field strength in touch panel surface is caused to become Change etc..As a result, detecting the recess on the basis of position of touch panel physical quantity variation caused by the element (111) Physical quantity variation caused by part.
In the composition of Figure 20 2, user is in the region that element (111) is configured, that is, also presses on element (111) periphery Net-shaped metal layer is pressed, the position of touch panel detection physical quantity variation can be made.In addition, in Figure 20 2, it is assumed that touch panel Detectable multiple point touching number is up at 5.Therefore, because physical quantity variation position caused by detection depressed section, thus will Physical quantity variation position caused by element (111) is set at 4, therefore element (111) is equipped with 4.In turn, in order to use 2 hands Refer to and touch, is equipped with 3 elements (111).Element (111) can made with aluminium foil, conductive paper, conductive ink printing etc. It is formed with face (elastic low dielectric constant surface).Furthermore it is possible to be equipped with the film of high dielectric constant on acting surface surface And it prints and to be formed.
In addition, in Figure 20 2, although it is assumed that the detectable multiple point touching number of touch panel is up at 5, but not more Touch number is limited at maximum 5.That is, multiple point touching number deducts finger simultaneously according to from maximum number as device (110T) Quantity after the positional number of operation is equipped with element (111).In turn, the material covering that can use high dielectric constant is made Above the net-shaped metal layer of operating surface, decorative pattern can be printed on the high dielectric constant material of covering, form button etc..
Figure 20 4, Figure 20 5 are device (110) variations.Figure 20 4 is in the upside of device (110T) relevant to variation The top view of (opposite side of acting surface) observation, Figure 20 5 is according to fig. 2 04 arrow P4 and cutting device (110T) bows View.
In Figure 20 2, Figure 20 3, in the region that element (111) is configured, that is, also press pressure network on the periphery of element (111) Shape metal layer can make the position of touch panel detection physical quantity variation.On the other hand, in Figure 20 4, Figure 20 5, work as vertical view When observing device (110T), the region that element (111) is configured is separated with net-shaped metal layer.By means of this composition, user The region of pressable net-shaped metal layer does not limit, but more stably can act on touching by means of the compressing of net-shaped metal layer Touch panel.This is because the part being recessed by user's finger and the coupling of element (111) can be inhibited.
Figure 20 6 is the figure of the composition of graphical representation of exemplary device (110U) relevant to the 4th variation.Figure 20 6 is device The figure that (110U) combines top view, left side view and main view and connected with dotted line.
As shown, device (110U) has the net-shaped metal layer on the dielectric layer upper layer for being formed with groove portion.But, may be used Conductive printing layer is formed to replace net-shaped metal layer.It is normal that conductive printing layer is for example equipped with high dielectric on the upper layer of dielectric layer Number film forms circuit by means of printing with conductive ink.Conductive printing layer can be printed on the same face printing with other.Under Net metal or conductive printing layer are known as net-shaped metal layer by face.In the case where net is clathrate, the left side 6mm is divided between grid The right side, so that in the case where being touched with finger, it is necessary to touch conducting wire or conductive ink track, and touch panel is perceived Finger.In addition, net-shaped metal layer is referred to as reticulated conductive body layer, a rule conducting wire of net-shaped metal layer is properly termed as electricity Road.It is printed as the forming method of dielectric layer and net-shaped metal layer, such as by the piece for being configured with metal mesh or with conductive ink Piece, be pasted on the slotted dielectric layer in clathrate along following direction.Therefore, by means of this, metal mesh or conduction Ink etc. is hidden in the back side.In this composition, in the case where sufficiently thin or dielectric constant is high for piece, because people contacts netted gold Belong to layer and causes the variations of the physical quantitys such as capacitor or electric field strength in element (111).
The device following side (110U) becomes the acting surface for acting on touch panel, has multiple (being 4 in figure) elements (111).Element (111) is connected to net-shaped metal layer by means of penetrating through the perforation wiring of dielectric layer.Therefore, by using Person touches net-shaped metal layer with finger, so that the capacitor of user is connect with element (111), in acting surface by perforation wiring Cause the physical quantity variations such as mutual capacitance or electric field strength.
In addition, as shown, device (110U) is situated between in part corresponding with the conducting wire for including in net-shaped metal layer in electricity There is groove portion in matter layer.The conducting wire of net-shaped metal layer is formed by path and directly moved in parallel in dielectric layer by groove portion, is Section is rectangle, polygon or the shape being made of the space of circular path shape of 0.3mm or so or more.That is, dielectric The groove portion of layer with the circuit parallel for constituting net-shaped metal layer it may be said that form.The width of groove portion is 1mm or so, so as to touch surface Plate reacts the contact of dielectric layer by means of finger.In addition, the depth of groove portion is 0.3mm or so or more, so that touch surface Plate does not perceive the capacitor from conducting wire.
By means of the presence of the groove portion, in the device (110U) for loading on touch panel, even if the finger of user touches Net-shaped metal layer is touched, touch panel is also difficult to the physical quantity variations such as mutual capacitance, electric field strength caused by detecting net-shaped metal layer. That is, reducing the conductor pair of net metal or netted printing part in the circuit slot immediately below for forming clathrate of net-shaped metal layer The influence of touch panel.
On the other hand, net-shaped metal layer is connect by means of penetrating through the perforation wiring of dielectric layer with element (111).Cause This touches net-shaped metal layer by the finger of user, and the physical quantity variation in element (111) is detected by touch panel.Into And the finger of user touches dielectric, so that by dielectric layer, the physical quantity variations such as mutual capacitance, electric field strength are touched Panel detection.In addition, wherein printed in the case where net metal is configured inside piece, or inside piece with conductive ink And in the case where being formed with reticulation circuit, and the finger of non-user directly touches the dielectric of circuit or piece lower layer.But When sufficiently thin or dielectric constant is sufficiently high for piece itself, user contacts influence (capacitor or electricity caused by circuit by piece The variation of field intensity) element (111) can be involved.In addition, user is logical when sufficiently thin or dielectric constant is sufficiently high for piece itself Cross piece and (variation of capacitor or electric field strength) is influenced caused by contact bottom layer dielectric can involve touch panel.
Therefore, in the composition of Figure 20 6, it is different from 2~Figure 20 of Figure 20 5, even if dielectric layer is nonelastic, net metal Layer is not recessed, by means of net-shaped metal layer, while the physical quantity variation in element (111) is detected by touch panel, finger The physical quantity variations such as mutual capacitance caused by dielectric touch operation, electric field strength are detected by touch panel.
In addition, the maximum value of the multiple point touching of information equipment (200) is set as 5.At this point, user's finger sets information The touch operation of standby (200) touch panel is considered as effectively, and therefore, the number of element (111) is set as 4.In addition, user is It is touched the touch panel using 2 fingers, element (111) is set as 3.
Therefore, it in Figure 20 6, can use the material close to common plastics card, form the dress of card shape easy to use Set (110U).
In the example of Figure 20 6, in the region that element (111) is configured, it is also formed with net-shaped metal layer or netted printing Layer.Therefore, in the device (110U) of Figure 20 6, even if user can also pass through net in the region that element (111) is configured Shape metal layer makes function influence caused by element (111) to the touch panel in contact with or close to acting surface.
Figure 20 7 is the variation of device (110U).In the example of Figure 20 7, configured with conductive element (111) The different region of element area, be formed with net-shaped metal layer or netted printing layer.Wherein, at overlook view device (110U) In the case where, element area, which refers to, is configured with the plane domain of element (111) in effect surface side.In composition in figure, due to Operating surface (above) element area there is no a net-shaped metal layer, thus the element area in operation surface side can not make by element (111) physical quantity variation caused by influences touch panel.But, when user touches net-shaped metal layer with finger, due to Finger also touches dielectric layer, thus the operation of user is transmitted to touch panel by dielectric layer.At this point, user Operating is being more than the region progress of element area, thus the influence of element (111) reduces, and user can steadily implement to lead to Cross the operation of dielectric layer.
Figure 20 8 is the figure that graphical representation of exemplary device (110U) relevant to another variation is constituted.Figure 20 8 is device The figure that (110U) combines top view, left side view and main view and connected with dotted line.As shown, in Figure 20 8, device (110U) also with dielectric layer and as below the dielectric layer of acting surface element (111), as the dielectric of operating surface Net-shaped metal layer above layer.Moreover, the device (110U) of Figure 20 8 has the connection of control element (111) and net-shaped metal layer SW (115), receive from the display device of information equipment (200) photodiode (WPD) of light code.Though moreover, in figure It so omits, but the same with Figure 40, Figure 47 etc., the device (110U) of Figure 20 8 has CPU (116), memory (117), photoelectricity change Change element arrangements (112) etc..SW (115), photodiode (WPD), CPU (116), memory (117), photoelectricity become in the figure It changes the part such as element arrangements (112) and is known as element ON/OFF control portion.Therefore, the device (110U) of Figure 20 8 operating surface (on Face) there is element area, element ON/OFF control portion and equipped with the region of touch area of net-shaped metal layer etc. 3.
Therefore, the device (110U) of Figure 20 8 is when user touches net-shaped metal layer, by means of the ON/OFF of (115) SW Movement can make touch panel detect physical quantity variation by element (111).In addition, touching net metal by user The dielectric layer of layer lower section, device (110U) can make the touch operation of touch panel detection user.Moreover, device (110) Light code caused by being shone by the display device of information equipment (200) can be received by means of photodiode (WPD).
In addition, the composition for the device (110T) that this implementation form illustrates, that is, combination net-shaped metal layer and the low dielectric of elasticity Constant insulator layer, by means of element (111) to the effect of touch panel and user's finger to the effect of touch panel and with touching The composition that panel is communicated is touched, can be applied to the 1~implementation form of implementation form 9,20~implementation form of implementation form 23, device (110~110N, 110P~110Q (hereinafter referred to as device (110) of 27~implementation form of implementation form 28 Deng)).Such as in the device (111) of Figure 40, element (111) is inserted in elastic low dielectric constant, is made being formed While with face, replaces contact conductor (114) and form net-shaped metal layer.In another example in Figure 113, Figure 135, Figure 136 etc. In, at touch area (TC2) and touch area (TC4), upside protection/printing layer (referring for example to Figure 113) it is tight under Side replaces conductor plate (CA2) and is equipped with net-shaped metal layer, replace inboard insulator (CA3) and i.e. using elastic insulator It can.
Similarly, the composition of device (110U), that is, combination net-shaped metal layer and the dielectric with cavity, by means of member The structure that part (111) communicates the effect of touch panel and user's finger to the effect of touch panel with touch panel At can be applied to the 1~implementation form of implementation form 9,20~implementation form of implementation form 23, implementation form 27~reality Apply the device (110~110N, 110P~110Q (hereinafter referred to as device (110) etc.)) of form 28.Such as the device in Figure 40 (111) in, element (111) is inserted in the low-dielectric in cavity, while forming acting surface, replaces contact conductor (114) net-shaped metal layer is formed.In another example in Figure 113, Figure 135, Figure 136 etc., in touch area (TC2) and touching Touch in region (TC4), upside protection/printing layer (referring for example to Figure 113) it is immediately below, replace conductor plate (CA2) and match Standby net-shaped metal layer replaces inboard insulator (CA3) and uses the dielectric for having cavity.
<implementation form 29>
Referring to Figure 21 0, Figure 21 1, illustrate device (110V) relevant to implementation form 32.Figure 21 0 is to act on touch The top view of effect surface side observation device (110V) of panel, Figure 21 1 be the arrow P5 by Figure 21 0 and along perpendicular to paper The sectional view of the plane cutting device (110V) in face.In this embodiment, device (110V) is configured in element (111) Element area has solar panel (112C).Solar panel (112C) is supplied to the control circuit region of device (110V) Electric power.Other of implementation form 32 are constituted and are acted on identical as device (110S) of implementation form 30.
In implementation form 32, solar panel (112C) is provided to element area.That is, in the effect of device (110S) Equipped with element (111) on face.As implementation form 30, as shown in Figure 21 1, along in-plane observation device (10S) In the case of, element (111) is present in the region separated with control area.It can be by the device (110S) where element (111) Region along in-plane observation is known as element area.On the other hand, there is no the control circuit regions of element (111) can be with Referred to as not element region.
As shown in Figure 21 1, element (111) is inserted in low dielectric constant.As implementation form 30, acting surface It is the structure that element (111) are formed with low dielectric constant.Element (111) and implementation form 1 or implementation form 30 etc. one Sample.
Low dielectric constant is the electrical insulator of low-k, preferably includes the material of air layer.That is, low Jie Dielectric constant insulating layer is, for example, the insulating layer of porous structure, hollow structure or the structure filled with low dielectric constant insulating material, For example, including air for the air layer of Figure 113, Figure 114, Figure 119~Figure 121, Figure 122 etc. or gap, Figure 167~Figure 175 Non-conductive layer, packing material (M2) layer etc. of layer.But, in the effect surface side of solar panel (112C), forming light can be saturating The structure crossed, such as support construction shown in Figure 170 (M1) (it is empty to form multiple openings in rectangular-shape or cellular well shape Between), the honeycomb as shown in Figure 173, so as to from light such as the display devices of information equipment (200).
Moreover, the upper layer (opposite side of acting surface) of low dielectric constant is identical as implementation form 30, thus save Slightly its explanation.
By taking this composition, it can be ensured that the region of configuration solar panel (112C).Moreover, even if in device In the case that (110V) loads on touch panel, touch panel and solar panel (112C) and touch panel (112C) it Between inserted with low dielectric constant, thus touch panel and solar panel (112C) and touch panel can be reduced The coupling of (112C).Therefore, touch panel can be made critically to detect physical quantity variation from element (111).
<implementation form 30>
Referring to 9~Figure 21 of Figure 20 3, illustrate based on device (110W) relevant to implementation form 33 and information equipment (200) Authentication processing.Wherein, device (110W) is, for example, the identical composition of device (110K) with Figure 135.But, implementation form Device (110W) in 33 is not limited to the device (110W) of Figure 135.That is, the processing of implementation form 33 can be applied to institute State the code generating device (1), 1~implementation form of implementation form 9,20~implementation form of implementation form 23, reality of implementation form 0 Apply the device (110~110N, 110P~110V (hereinafter referred to as device (110) etc.)) of 27~implementation form of form 32.
As shown in Figure 20 9, the device (110K) of device (110W) and implementation form 20 equally, is divided into electric device area Domain (110K-1) and non-electrical appliance area (110K-2).Electric device region (110K-1) has electronic circuit component, electric power Supply part etc., by means of electric circuit, electronic circuit effect and receive the operation of user, make information equipment (200) Touch panel detects physical action.Electric device region (110K-1) is for example with the code generating device with implementation form 0 (1), the card-type device (110~110G, hereinafter referred to as device (110) etc.) of 1~implementation form of implementation form 9) identical structure At.Such as electric device region (110K-1) has CPU (116), memory (117), SW shown in Figure 137 or Figure 138 (115), element (111), photodiode (WPD1~WPD6), fingerprint sensor (113), components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112A, 112B) etc..
In addition, being equipped with contact conductor (114) identical with implementation form 20 or real in the lower part of touch area (TC2) Apply the net-shaped metal layer of form 31.Therefore, device (110W) is loaded on into touch panel, by user by finger close to touching Region (TC2) is touched, so that user can star the processing in touch panel, such as the processing of starting " certification card ".
Non-electrical appliance area (110K-2) does not have electronic circuit component, power supply component etc., such as works as user When the surface of press device (110K), the mechanical-physical by means of forming the material that device (110K) is formed is deformed, user's hand What is referred to is detected close to (touch operation) by the touch panel of information equipment (200).But, in this embodiment, it is not based on The close touch operation of user's finger, which is defined in, to be formed the mechanical-physical of the material of device (110W) and deforms and be detected.Example As the net-shaped metal layer lower layer of the device of implementation form 30 (110U), can use thickness and dielectric constant meet from Touch panel detects the dielectric of the touch operation of user, to make the touch operation of touch panel detection user.
In addition, non-electrical appliance area (110K-2) can have and the trip that does not need power supply shown in implementation form 16 Play card, other identical structures of article (stage property).As non-electrical appliance area (110K-2), also can be used Figure 113, Certain structure of Figure 114, Figure 116, Figure 119~Figure 122.In addition, the touch area as non-electrical appliance area (110K-2) It (TC4), can be just like transparent touch region shown in Figure 123.
In this embodiment, device (110W) for example plays the function of executing the ID card of user's authentication processing.That is, The password etc. of registration user in the nonvolatile memory (117) of device (110W).User loads device (110W) Touch panel in information equipment (200) passes through device if touching the touch area (TC2) for posting " certification card " label The element (111) of the acting surface (the inside, referring for example to Figure 135) of (110W), information pattern (configuration of element (111)) input To information equipment (200).
Information equipment (200) from information pattern (configuration of element (111)), the direction of device (110W) is carried out it is specific, To touch corresponding with the position for being affixed on the label " login " of touch area (TC4), " certification ", " ENTER ", " 0 "~" 9 " etc. Coordinate (region) on panel carries out specific.
If user touches and for example " logs in " label, mechanical-physical deformation occurs for the material for forming device (110W) Or to dielectric effect.Moreover, information equipment (200) detects touch operation of the user to " login " label, login is executed Processing.In login process, the touch operation to " 0 "~" 9 " and " ENTER " is detected, login password is received.Device The login received is registered in nonvolatile memory (117) with password by (110V).
Similarly, if user touch " certification " label, device (110W) start authentication processing, detect to " 0 "~ The touch operation of " 9 " and " ENTER " receive certification password.Device (110W) is to the certification password that receives and non-volatile The password of memory (117) registration is compared, and comparison result is exported from element (111) as the hum pattern to touch panel Case (pattern code).
As shown in Figure 20 9, there is the touch area (TC2) for being printed with " 0 "~" 9 " and " ENTER " etc. labels.In addition, dress Setting (110W) has 1 or more element (111) (referring to Fig.1 35) in acting surface.Therefore, device (110W) in acting surface One region be configured with 1 or more element, different from acting surface first area second area with dielectric formation.Moreover, filling It sets in (110W), in the opposing face of second area acting surface, assigns the label of display text, be based on 1 or more component information On the basis of pattern, label is contacted with finger by user, so that label is contacted relative to touch panel, so as to make Touch panel detects physical quantity variation.
The flow chart of card authentication processing of the graphical representation of exemplary based on information equipment (200) in Figure 21 2.Wherein, device (110W) is known as card-type device.Firstly, after device (110) loads effect face contact touch panel, information equipment (200) from the configuration identification device (110W) (card) of ON element (111).Wherein, the configuration of ON element is according to non-volatile memories The information remembered in device (117) is specified by means of SW (115).
Moreover, information equipment (200) waits the instruction for coming from device (110W).Instruction as described above, by be affixed on touching It touches the touch of the label in region (TC4) and inputs.When instruction is registration password (in S221 be), information equipment (200) is held Row password registration/update processing (S222).In password registration/update processing, information equipment by means of to " 0 "~" 9 " and The touch operation of " ENTER " receives current password, new password etc. by touch panel.Moreover, information equipment (200) will be received To current password, new password etc. device (110W) is input to light code.Device (110W) is inputted current close with light code Based on code, new password etc., login password is registered in nonvolatile memory (117).
When instruction is cipher authentication (in S223 be), information equipment (200) executes cipher authentication processing.In password In authentication processing, information equipment receives to recognize by means of the touch operation to " 0 "~" 9 " and " ENTER " by touch panel The card input (S224) of password.Moreover, the certification received is input to device with password with light code by information equipment (200) (110W),(S225).Moreover, information equipment (200) utilizes the information pattern (pattern code) for coming from element (111), from device (110W) obtains authentication result (S226).Moreover, information equipment (200) determines whether authentication result is OK (S227).Work as certification When being as a result OK, information equipment (200) executes the processing (S228) after certification.On the other hand, when authentication result is OK, letter It ceases equipment (200) and mistake is shown in display device (S229).Moreover, instructing as the feelings except password registration, cipher authentication When condition, information equipment (200) is ended processing.
The graphical representation of exemplary flow chart of the card authentication processing of device (110W) in 213.In this process, device (110W) loads on the touch panel of information equipment (200), receives instruction input (S230).When instruction is password registration (in S231 be), device (110W) execute password registration/update processing (S232).In password registration/update processing, dress It sets (110W) and current password, login password etc. is received according to the light code for passing through display device from information equipment (200). Moreover, device (110W) based on current password, new password for receiving etc., is stepped in nonvolatile memory (117) Employ password.The CPU (116) of device (110W) as registration process an example and execute S232 processing.
In addition, device (110W) is according to the light generation for passing through display device when instruction is cipher authentication (in S233 be) Code, receives the input (S234) of certification password.Moreover, password and nonvolatile memory of the device (110W) to input (117) password registered in is compared (S235).Moreover, device (110W) is by being based on element (111) physical quantity variation Information pattern (pattern code) and authentication output result (S236).It in turn, is except password registration, cipher authentication instructing When situation, device (110W) is ended processing.The CPU (116) of device (110W) as authentication processing an example and execute The processing of S233~S236.CPU (116) as information output part an example and execute the processing of S236.
The explanation made as mentioned above, according to this implementation form, device (110W) is based on coming from using touch panel detection The operation of the information pattern (pattern code) of the physical quantity variation of element (111) and user to device (110W), so as to Information is inputted to information equipment (200) according to the input of location information.Moreover, device (110W) connects from information equipment (200) By the authentication information based on light code.That is, device (110W) is connected with information equipment (200), receive from information equipment (200) User for authenticating user operates, and in turn, by coming from the light code of information equipment (200), obtains from information equipment (200) information received.According to this composition, the function as certification card is provided, that is, what combination unit (110W) had consolidates There is the operation of instruction (for example, the processing of starting certification card) and user to touch panel, authenticates user itself.
In addition, information equipment (200) detects touching of the user to label on device (110W) in described S222, S224 Operation is touched, receiving, reception, input of password of certification instruction of registering instruction etc. are executed.But in the processing of S222, S224 In, information equipment (200) can by using display device and touch panel as the user interface of usual information equipment, Carry out receiving, reception, the input of password of certification instruction etc. of registering instruction.Moreover, receiving to lead to using touch panel Normal registering instruction receives certification instruction, Password Input, can use light code, requires to carry out password to device (110W) Registration/update or cipher authentication.
Therefore, information equipment (200) and device (110W) will be by the labels and touch panel of device (110W) by making The authentication information of user's input, the nonvolatile memory portion of device (110W) is registered in by means of light code.In addition, information The authentication information that equipment (200) and device (110W) will be inputted by the label and touch panel of device (110W), by means of Light code and input unit (110W), compared with the authentication information registered in nonvolatile memory portion.In addition, information equipment (200) and the input that is carried out according to user by the display device and touch panel of information equipment (200) of device (110W) Execute this processing.Therefore, information equipment (200) and device (110W) are the systems for being mutually linked and sufficiently executing certification One example.This certification can utilize in the scene of multiplicity.Information equipment (200) and device (110W) are according to from member The output pattern of part (111) and to processing or service carry out it is specific.Moreover, information equipment (200) and device (110W) are to using The authentication information of person's input is compared with the authentication information registered in nonvolatile memory (117), can be made having authenticated After user, processing or service are provided.It therefore, can also be according to device except simple ID card or electron key function The authentication information registered in the nonvolatile memory of (110W) authenticates user.
<implementation form 31>
For the processing of the implementation form 30, due to the code generating device (1) in the implementation form 0, implementation 1~implementation form of form 9,20~implementation form of implementation form 23,24~implementation form of implementation form 29 device (110~ 110N, 110P~110V (hereinafter referred to as device (110) etc.)) in, the physical quantity variation for coming from element (111) occurs, thus The SW of graphical representation of exemplary in the semiconductor switch or Figure 40~Figure 40 of 19~Figure 21 of control figure etc., Figure 41, Figure 47, Figure 137 etc. (115).In addition, code generating device (1) is according to pattern code setting/output device (403) contact switch in Figure 16 (404), definition constitutes 1 numerical value of pattern code.
But in each device of the above implementation form, semiconductor switch, SW (115) or contact switch can also be replaced And Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS) is used to switch.It is opposite that there is semiconductor switch PN junction to be biased to Junction capacity or barrier layer capacity when direction, thus even if in the off condition, also having pulse signal or AC signal flowing through Principle shape.On the other hand, common contact switch due to size it is big, have the feelings for being not suitable as midget plant (110) etc. Shape.
Therefore, in the device of each implementation form, can by means of mems switch, in code output section (13) or The variation of physical quantity is generated in element (111) etc..MEMS is held by means of starting electrode and to what the starting electrode was driven Row device switches on or off the circuit that 1 or more element (111) is connected.The actuator of MEMS does not limit.Actuator is for example It can be electrostatic drive, Piezoelectric Driving.Such as CPU (116) by means of driving transistor or directly drives actuator, and it is described SW (115) of implementation form etc. is the same, and mems switch is controlled between ON and OFF.
By utilizing mems switch, the various parasitic capacitance that can at least inhibit the junction capacity of PN junction or barrier layer to occur Problem.MEMS is thus also advantageous in terms of miniaturization due to being formed with a few micrometers to hundreds of microns or more of size.
<implementation form 32>
Referring to 4~Figure 21 of Figure 21 7, illustrate implementation form 32.In this embodiment, illustrate using device (110) and each The experimental result of kind information equipment.Firstly, the state of device when 4 graphical representation of exemplary of Figure 21 is tested.Experiment is by experimental tool It loads on the touch panel of information equipment (200) and implements.Experimental tool and device (110) equally, have element (111), SW (115) driving circuit of (semiconductor switch) and the ON/OFF of driving SW (115).The terminal of (115) one side of SW is connected to element (111), the termination contact human body (finger) of another party.Distance between centers be configure 2 element (111) when element (111) it Between distance between centers.
Experimental procedure is as follows.By the ON/OFF of SW (115) 100 times repeatedly, counting can identify ON/OFF several times, can Identify that ratio as discrimination, finds out percentage.
At this point, length, the thickness, touch panel (information equipment of the conducting wire between measurement SW (115) and element (111) (200)) type, OFF time amplitude, passes through information equipment when SW (115) is converted to OFF from ON at ON burst length amplitude (200) the slave ON state of touch panel measurement is switched to the average value of the time of OFF state, shortest time, maximum duration. In addition, in the case where only carrying 1, being tested, being taken in the case where carrying 2 element (111) as shown in Figure 21 4 Distance in the case where carrying 2 elements (111), between change element (111).As information equipment (200), American apple is utilized Iphone (registered trademark), the ipad (registered trademark) of company.
Figure 21 5 display when the length of conducting wire be 5cm when, change the ON time, display by touch panel measure slave ON to The discrimination of OFF variation, the average value of switching time (hereinafter referred to as " ON ", " OFF time ") from ON state to OFF state, Shortest time, maximum duration.Diameter of wire is 0.33mm.In addition, the radius of element (111) is 8mm, material is aluminium.As schemed Show, discrimination rises as the ON time is elongated, when ON time 20ms~30ms, be 81~85% or so, ON time 40ms~ It is 90% or more when 100ms.On the other hand, ON, OFF time have the increased inclination together with the ON time.Result above is not Type dependent on information equipment (200).
The above preferably ON time is 30ms.But, when the ON time is 40ms or more, it is identified above to can get 90% Rate, thus more preferably.In addition, if the sample time of touch panel detecting event is set as T, then it may be assumed that it is sampled as T, That is, control circuit can be assumed the starting point (for example, left side topmost pixel) from touch panel to end point (for example, under right side Square pixel) during substantially T.Moreover, for example sampling starting point near, element (111) sampling in element (111) Becoming in the case where terminating before ON, the ON for detecting the element (111) then becomes next sample time, as detecting event, It is second of detecting event from element (111) becomes ON.If 1 detecting event reports 1 sampling knot to OS Fruit, then near sampling starting point, in the case where the sampling of element (111) terminates before element (111) becomes ON, from From when element (111) becomes ON, 2 times of the sample time T that is substantially delayed, detecting event is reported.On the other hand, terminate in sampling Element (111) near point becomes in the case where executing sampling after ON, and when element (111) becomes ON, the first sub-sampling is almost Terminate, almost without time lag Reports component (111) becomes ON.Therefore, for the sample time T of touch panel, from member From at the time of part (111) becomes ON, it may occur that substantially 2 times of detection error of sample time.
Therefore, element (111) is become to the time of ON, that is, the ON time of the pulse of driving SW (115), preferably approximately 2 times or so of sample time (that is, sweep time of touch panel).This is because member occurs if the above ON time is short A possibility that ON of part (111) is not detected by information equipment (200).It is considered that reason is the experimental result in described Figure 21 5 In, in the case where the ON time is short, discrimination is low.It is therefore contemplated that the time needed for entirety OFF is same.If all The time of ON is shorter than 2 times or so of sample time, then generates a possibility that all OFF are not detected.
In addition, though presumption thinks that the sample time of the touch panel of information equipment (200) depends on type, still, example If, for 16.6ms, preferably ON time, all OFF times is if being set to 1/60 second close to conventional display device frame per second 30ms or so or more.In addition, the experimental result of Figure 21 5 is shown, these times are that 40ms is more advantageous.
In addition, ON, OFF time extend together with the ON time in Figure 21 5, this is because when being ON in element (111) Pulse front nearby when detecting ON, the later ON burst length is detected directly as ON by information equipment (200).
Figure 21 6 is the situation that the length of the conducting wire in the condition of Figure 21 5 is set as to 10cm.In this case, discrimination And ON, OFF time are identical as Figure 21 4.
Figure 21 7 is the result that discrimination and ON, OFF time are measured using 2 elements (111).At this point, the length of conducting wire Degree is 7.cm, and thickness 0.33mm, the ON time is 40ms.As shown, being the feelings of 13 ㎜ or more in distance between centers abundance Under condition, the intermediate distance of discrimination and ON, OFF time independent of element (111).Therefore, when the diameter of element (111) When for 8mm or so, if there is 12 ㎜ or more, then information equipment (200) can be identified steadily.
Figure 21 8 is the length using 1 element (111) change conducting wire and the result for measuring discrimination and ON, OFF time. The thickness of conducting wire is 0.07mm, and the ON time is 40ms.As shown, discrimination and ON, OFF time are independent of element Length.
Figure 21 8 is the measurement result that diameter of wire is 0.33.As shown, discrimination and ON, OFF time do not depend on In the length of element.
<implementation form 33>
Referring to 0~Figure 22 of Figure 22 3, illustrate device (110V) relevant to implementation form 33.Wherein, device (110X) example The identical composition with the device of Figure 40 (110) in this way.That is, the processing of implementation form 33 can be applied to the implementation form 0 Code generating device (1), 1~implementation form of implementation form 9,20~implementation form of implementation form 32 device (110~110N, 110P~110V, hereinafter referred to as device (110) etc.).In addition, in Figure 22 0, for composition similar with Figure 40, assign with The identical symbol of Figure 40, the description thereof will be omitted.
As shown in Figure 22 0, device (110X) has according to the electric power from components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) and is arranged For the power switch (hereinafter referred to as power supply SW, 122A) of ON or OFF.When power supply SW (122A) is ON, by battery (122) Electric power is supplied to each portion of device (110X) by power supply line (120).Therefore, in device (110X), if in light-to-current inversion The electric power of benchmark or more occurs for element (112), then starts the power supply from battery (122) to device (110X).
That is, the components of photo-electric conversion (112) are played to be supplied for starting the electric power from battery (122) in implementation form 33 The function of the accessory power supply or standby power answered.
In addition, not accessory power supply or standby power are defined in components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) in Figure 22 0.Example Such as, it also can use photodiode (WPD1) of graphical representation of exemplary in Figure 69 etc. and replace components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112). That is, device (110X) is when receiving the light of light code of display device of information equipment (200) etc., it can also be by power supply SW (122A) is set as ON.In addition, device (110X) can also be by the day of the reception electromagnetic wave of graphical representation of exemplary in Figure 48~Figure 50 The electric power supply apparatus such as line (124), piezoelectric element (126) or thermoelectric element (128) are used as accessory power supply or standby power.Light Electric inverting element arrangement (112), photodiode (WPD1) etc. as detection light arrival amount test section or detect from having One example of the test section for the energy arrival amount that the information equipment of panel arrives and play a role.
In addition, although graphical representation of exemplary battery (122) in Figure 22 0, can also replace battery (122) and utilize Than the solar panel of components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) higher power.That is, being not limited to power supply in implementation form 33 The generating device of the electric power of SW (122A) supply.
The graphical representation of exemplary details of power supply SW (122A) in Figure 22 1.As shown, power supply SW (122A) has half Conductor switch (FET) sets ON's or door for semiconductor switch (FET) based on the electric power of the components of photo-electric conversion etc. , and the trigger (FF) for keeping the ON state of DD1 (ORG) and resistance (R).
If components of photo-electric conversion etc. to or door (ORG) side input terminal supply a reference value more than electric power, or Door (ORG) is output into high level (H1), so that semiconductor switch (FET) is become ON by resistance (R).Then, in electricity While pond, solar panel etc. supply electric power to power supply line (120) by semiconductor switch (FET), to trigger (FF) Electric power is supplied, in addition, trigger setting (set) is ON.The output terminal (OUT) of trigger (FF) is input to or door (ORG) one The terminal of side, thus semiconductor switch (FET) keeps ON state.In this state, power supply line (120) is to device (110X) Each portion supplies electric power.On the other hand, for example, the components of photo-electric conversion are as after OFF, CPU (116) resets trigger (FF), Semiconductor switch (FET) becomes OFF, the power supply of cutting battery etc..Power supply SW (122A) could also say that be examined in test section When having surveyed the energy of a reference value or more, the power supply is made to supply an example of the power control part of electric power into device.
The graphical representation of exemplary boot sequence of device (110X) in Figure 22 2.The components of photo-electric conversion of device (110X) (112) if receiving the light of the display device from information equipment (220), the arrival energy (S301) of light is detected.And And power switch (122A) is become ON by the components of photo-electric conversion (112), thus electric power is supplied to power supply line from battery (122) etc. (120),(S302).As a result, CPU (116) starting (S303).Moreover, CPU (116) is stored according in memory (117) etc. Computer program and execute processing (S304).
Figure 22 3 is the flow chart of the processing of the CPU (116) of exemplary diagram showing device (110X).In this process, CPU (116) (shown in the RGB photodiode of graphical representation of exemplary in 112 or Figure 61~Figure 72 F, Figure 69 by the components of photo-electric conversion The photodiode (WPD1~WPD6) etc. of example property diagram), receive the light code (S3041) from display device.For coming from With the implementation form 21,24 and furthermore the light code of display device, the implementation form is identical.Moreover, CPU (116) sentences Whether the light code received surely meets set beginning condition (S3042).So-called set beginning condition, refers to for example set Whether the optical flare at interval, the detection of set color, color change of time orientation etc. meet established condition.The variation of color Including from white to grey variation, to colored variation.Device (110X) is according to the components of photo-electric conversion (112), photoelectricity two Pole pipe etc., determines whether to receive the light of this condition, and device (110X) can be made whether close to information equipment (200) Display device.That is, device (110X) arranges (112), photodiode by the components of photo-electric conversion for being installed on device (110X) The light of equal receiving, identifies whether to communicate with display device.In addition, information equipment (200) is for example by starting specific answer With program, to be issued and the consistent smooth code of the established condition to device (110X).The judgement of S3042 it may be said that It is to determine that wavelength of light and arrival measure at least one example for whether meeting established condition.The CPU of device (110X) (116) it can be described as an example of processing unit.
If device (110X) executes processing (S3043) moreover, the light code received meets set beginning condition.Its In, so-called processing, including being exported by means of element (111) to the physical quantity of information equipment (200) and from information equipment (200) display device arranges the communication based on light code light of (112) or photodiode to photoelectric cell.These processing It is the communication process, the Password Input of implementation form 30 etc. of implementation form 21,24 etc..
Moreover, whether device (110X) determination processing terminates (S3044).Wherein, the so-called situation ended processing, such as A series of situations that processing terminate, or the situation etc. terminated from information equipment (200) using the instruction of light code.
As above narration, the device (110X) of this implementation form is by the light of the display device of information equipment (200) As accessory power supply or standby power, started.Moreover, receiving the light for meeting established condition from information equipment (200) When code, identifies the situation close to the display device of information equipment (200) and execute processing.Therefore, in device (110X) not Be equipped with power switch, user by device (110X) close to display device, so that device (110X) is started and carried out processing.
<implementation form 34>
Referring to 4~Figure 24 of Figure 22 4, device (110Y1~110Y6) relevant to implementation form 34 is illustrated.Separately Outside, in the case where general name card-type device (110Y1~110Y6), referred to as device (110Y).
In implementation form 34, graphical representation of exemplary does not include having for driving by means of the power supply of semiconductor switch etc. The composition of the card device of source circuit.It is however also possible to by the structure of the circuit illustrated in the 0~implementation form of implementation form 33 At the card-type device for being applied to graphical representation of exemplary in implementation form 34.For example, reality can also be combined as shown in implementation form 20 Apply the dress of card-type device (110~110G, hereinafter referred to as device (110) etc.) and implementation form 34 of 1~implementation form of form 9 Set (110Y).
4~Figure 22 of Figure 22, the 8 graphical representation of exemplary composition of device (110Y1).In this embodiment, device (110Y1) Structure with 2 dielectric layers of splicing.In this embodiment, information will be acted in 2 faces of card-type device (110Y) to set The acting surface (such as face of contact touch panel) of standby (200) is known as the inside.On the other hand, by 2 faces of card-type device (110Y) In face for a user to operate be known as surface.Surface is properly termed as the opposite face of acting surface.
Moreover, will include claiming in 2 dielectric layers as the dielectric layer in face of card-type device acting surface (that is, the inside) For lower layer.In addition, will include being known as upper layer as the dielectric layer in face on card-type device surface in 2 dielectric layers.In turn, The face mutually spliced in 2 dielectric layers is known as joint surface.
Figure 22 4 (A) graphical representation of exemplary composition of the upper surface of device (110Y1).Figure 22 4 (B) is constitutional diagram 224 (A) figure of a part of sectional view.That is, in Figure 22 4 (B), towards paper, upside will be filled along the A1 arrow of Figure 22 4 (A) The section for setting (110Y1) truncation, in Figure 22 4 (B), towards paper, downside is the A2 arrow along Figure 22 4 (A) by device The section of (110Y1) truncation.In Figure 22 4 (B), the 2 swash distinguishing identifiers in boundary of 2 kinds of sections.
As shown in Figure 22 4 (A), device (110Y1) dielectric layer substrate surface (upper surface), with clathrate shape At there is wiring layer (WR1).Wiring layer (WR1) is the structure that the wirings such as metal, such as copper, aluminium are carried out with lateral longitudinal combination connection At.The interval of wiring layer (WR1) is the interval of accessible wiring layer (WR1) if user's finger touches upper surface, The device (110Y1) used for adult user, such as be set as several millimeters or so.In the case where determining surface, wiring Layer (WR1) is properly termed as the wiring layer formed in the opposite surface side of dielectric layer.
In addition, the dielectric layer on upper layer, towards paper, in the wiring intersection point shape of upper-side area (referred to as first area) At there is through-hole (TH1).Through-hole (TH1) is plated with conductive metal, or inserted with conductive metal.Therefore, in through-hole (TH1) Metal is electrically connected dielectric layer surface and the joint surface on upper layer.Moreover, joint surface of the through-hole (TH1) on upper layer, that is, scheming The inside side of 224 (A) assigns the contact (ATP1) of metal.Conductive layer and lower layer of the contact (ATP1) of metal on engagement upper layer Conductive layer when, the electric conductor of lower layer, such as through-hole etc. are connected to for the through-hole (TH1) by upper layer.
In turn, in the dielectric layer on upper layer, towards paper, the wiring of underside area (referred to as second area) with match Contact terminal (114A) is formed between line.Contact terminal (114A) is metal thin-slab structure.Contact terminal (114A) Plane is overlooked having a size of the size for not contacting wiring layer (WR1) wiring.Moreover, contact terminal (114A) is by being plated on or filling In the metal of through-hole (TH1), it is electrically connected in the contact (ATP1) of joint side.By means of above composition, if user Finger is contacted into contact terminal (114A), then the patch bay constriction of wiring layer (WR1), thus finger touches wiring layer (WR1).Contact terminal (114A) can be the wiring for including in wiring layer of the card shape for second area with respect to surface side Between wiring, an example of 1 or more the contact terminal to be formed that insulate with wiring.
Although in addition, the dielectric layer surface on upper layer defines " first area ", " second area " herein, " first Region ", " second area ", on the surface of the dielectric layer on upper layer, can also define in the joint surface of the dielectric layer on upper layer The opposite face of " first area ", " second area ".In addition, even if in the dielectric layer of lower section, as the dielectric with upper layer " first area ", " second area " corresponding region of layer, can also define " first area ", " second area ".Wherein, institute Call corresponding region, it may be said that be " the firstth area of dielectric layer on upper layer when engaging the dielectric layer on upper layer and lower layer In domain ", " second area ", perpendicular to (i.e. overlook direction) above to the region of lower layer's projection.
Figure 22 5 (A) graphical representation of exemplary connecing before element (111) is formed in the dielectric layer of device (110Y1) lower layer The composition in conjunction face.Figure 22 5 (B) is the sectional view that the device (110Y1) of Figure 22 5 (A) is truncated along B1 arrow.In addition, Figure 22 6 (A) composition on joint surface of the graphical representation of exemplary after element (111) is formed in the dielectric layer of device (110Y1) lower layer.Figure 226 (B) are the sectional views that the device (110Y1) of Figure 22 6 (A) is truncated along B1 arrow.
As shown in Figure 22 5 (A), Figure 22 5 (B), on the joint surface of lower layer, frame portion is formed with around, by frame portion Circular joint surface is formed with multiple lug bosses (PIR1).Frame portion and multiple lug bosses (PIR1) are on engaging dielectric layer When layer is with lower layer, play the role of the partition that gap (SPC) is formed between upper layer and lower layer.Lug boss (PIR1) with upper layer Corresponding lower layer joint surface is formed between the wiring and wiring of surface wiring layer (WR1).Therefore, by means of frame portion with it is multiple Lug boss (PIR1) and the gap (SPC) formed between upper layer and lower layer, in matching including upper surface wiring layer (WR1) Part including line is immediately below is formed.
In Figure 22 5 (A), on upper layer, the region of the engagement face bonding of second area is formed with through-hole (TH2), described logical Multiple raised (PR2) and raised (PR2) are penetrated into side inside lower layer from joint side by hole (TH2).The plating in through-hole (TH2) Have or filled with conductive metal, it is ensured that the electric conductivity of side inside joint side and lower layer.In the joint side of through-hole (TH2), It is formed with for the contact (ATP2) with upper layer contact (ATP1) electrical contact.
Figure 22 6 (A), Figure 22 6 (B) graphical representation of exemplary Figure 22 5 (A), Figure 22 5 (B) underlying dielectric layer in formed The composition of the state of element (111A).Element (111A) fills or is filled with gold in the hole perforated to underlying dielectric layer Belong to and is formed.Therefore, if the dielectric layer on engagement upper layer and lower layer, element (111A) contact the contact on upper layer joint surface One of (ATP1), by means of the metal in through-hole (TH1), it is connect with the wiring layer (WR1) of upper surface.Therefore, lower layer's electricity is situated between The element (111A) of matter layer is formed in lower region corresponding with first area, the metal of the through-hole (TH1) of the first area It is connected to the wiring of upper layer wiring layer (WR1).The interval of through-hole (TH1) is set to be less than the size of element (111Al), element No matter (111Al) is formed in which position of lower layer corresponding with first area, is connect with through-hole (TH1).
Figure 22 7 (A) graphical representation of exemplary the inside (the inside of lower layer) of device (110Y1), that is, act on information equipment (200) composition of the acting surface of touch panel.But, in the figure as with reference to using, with dotted line virtually graphical representation of exemplary Raised (PIR1).Therefore, between raised (PIR1), gap (SPC) is formed with inside dielectric.In addition, Figure 22 7 (B) shows Example property illustrates the section summary of the device (110Y1) after engagement upper layer and lower dielectric.
As shown in Figure 22 7 (A), Figure 22 7 (B), in the region of the inside corresponding with the device upper layer first area (110Y1), It is formed with multiple element (111A).Element (111A) is connected to wiring layer by contact (ATP1), the through-hole (TH1) on upper layer (WR1) (referring to Figure 22 4 (A), Figure 22 4 (B)).Contact (ATP1), through-hole (TH1) can be described as perforation dielectric layer and connect In an example of the first perforation circuit of 1 or more the element and wiring layer that the first area is formed.
If the finger of user contacts wiring layer (WR1), user and multiple element (111A) are connected, relative to In contact with or close to information equipment (200) touch panel inside device (110Y1), cause the change of static capacity or electric field strength Change.Therefore, the allocation position of information equipment (200) detection multiple element (111A), to letter corresponding with the shape of allocation position Breath carries out specific.It can be said that multiple element (111A) defines fixed configurations pattern from this meaning.In addition, in first area 1 or more the element formed forms the physical quantity that sensor can detecte when user's finger contacts wiring layer, is using When person's finger does not contact wiring layer, the detectable physical quantity of the sensor can not be formed.
In addition, not contacting the shape of wiring layer (WR1) in user's finger if sufficiently improving wiring layer (WR1) density Under state, even if make touch panel of the device (110Y1) in contact with or close to information equipment (200), information equipment (200) can also To detect the allocation position of multiple element (111A), information corresponding with the shape of allocation position is carried out specific.This be because For the static capacity formed by means of wiring layer (WR1) and multiple element (111A) is sufficiently increased, and information equipment is reached (200) touch panel can identify the degree of touch operation.Element (111A) can be described as being formed in acting surface first area 1 or more element an example.
In addition, being formed with multiple element in the region of the inside corresponding with the second area on the upper layer device (110Y1) (111B).Multiple element (111B) can be formed with conductive material, such as printed electric conductivity ink and formed.
Multiple element (111B) respectively by the through-hole of lower layer side (TH2), contact (ATP2), upper layer side contact (ATP1), through-hole (TH1) is electrically connected with surface contact terminal (114A) respectively.Therefore, table is contacted by user's finger Face contact terminal (114A), user and element (111B) are connected, relative in contact with or close to the letter inside device (110Y1) Equipment (200) touch panel is ceased, the variation of static capacity or electric field strength is caused.User can successively contact multiple contacts Desired terminal in terminal (114A) can be in the member of information equipment (200) touch panel according to the operation of user's finger The position part (111B), successively executes so-called touch operation.Therefore, it is configured at the contact terminal (114A) of surface second area, Play the role of the input units such as keyboard or Trackpad.For example, respectively in contact terminal (114A) with conductive material Icon is formed, by the application program of operation identification information equipment (200) icon configuration, information equipment can be obtained from user It obtains based on the information operated to contact terminal (114A).Element (111B) can be described as formed in the second area of acting surface 1 One example of a above element.The through-hole (TH2) of lower layer side, contact (ATP2), upper layer side contact (ATP1), through-hole (TH1), it is also possible to connection perforation dielectric layer and contacts use with described in 1 or more the element that the second area is formed One example of the second perforation circuit of terminal.
Moreover, wiring layer (WR1) is by means of with the interval sufficiently smaller than user finger width in device (110Y1) The wiring of configuration and formed, thus if user implements operation to contact terminal (114A), the finger of user is touched Wiring layer (WR1).Therefore, from the fixed configurations pattern to the information input of information equipment (200) and from as input dress The information input for the contact terminal (114A) set can be executed in identical timing.Thus, for example information equipment (200) is according to institute It states fixed configurations pattern and identifies specific identifiers, execute the processing based on the identifier, it can be from user's receiving and this Manage corresponding input.Accordingly, it can be said that wiring layer in user's finger in device (110Y1) to contact relative to the secondth area When the opposite face of the card shape in domain, the finger can contact the patch bay configuration of some wiring.
0 28~Figure 23 according to fig. 2, as another example of implementation form 33, graphical representation of exemplary device (110Y2) It constitutes.The composition on the dielectric layer upper layer of device (110Y2) is identical as device (110Y1), Figure 22 4 (A), Figure 22 4 (B), thus The description thereof will be omitted.Figure 22 8 (A) graphical representation of exemplary top view on the dielectric layer lower layer joint surface of device (110Y2).In addition, Figure 22 8 (B) is the figure of 2 swash virtual links of D1 sectional view and D2 sectional view and utilization of constitutional diagram 228 (A).As schemed Show, in lower region corresponding with upper layer first area, raised (PIR2) is arranged in multiple clathrates and is formed.In each protrusion (PIR2), it is formed with the through-hole (TH2) of perforation joint side and the inside.Through-hole (TH2) is coated with or filled with metal, electrically connects Connect joint side and the inside.In addition, the joint side in through-hole (TH2) is formed with contact (ATP3).Therefore, if upside with The dielectric layer of downside engages, then the through-hole (TH2) of lower layer passes through contact (ATP3), contact (ATP1), the through-hole on upper layer (TH1) it is connect with the wiring layer on surface (WR1).The structure of lower region corresponding with the upper layer second area of device (110Y2) At due to identical as device (110Y1), thus simultaneously the description thereof will be omitted for the identical symbol of imparting.
It is formed inside lower dielectric in Figure 22 9 (A), Figure 22 9 (B) graphical representation of exemplary Figure 22 8 (A), Figure 22 8 (B) The state of element (111C).The element (111A) of device (110Y1) by dielectric lower layer by perforating and being inserted into or fill metal And it is formed.On the other hand, in Figure 22 9 (A), Figure 22 9 (B), element (111A) is formed with conductive material, such as printing is led Electrical ink and formed.In dielectric lower layer, it is formed with the through-hole (TH2) and contact (ATP3) being coated with or filled with metal. Therefore, if upside is engaged with the dielectric layer of downside, element (111A) passes through upside contact (ATP1) and through-hole (TH1) And it is connected to the wiring layer (WR1) on surface.
Figure 23 0 (A) graphical representation of exemplary the inside (the inside of lower layer) of device (110Y2), that is, act on information equipment (200) composition of the acting surface of touch panel.But, in the figure as with reference to using, with dotted line virtually graphical representation of exemplary Raised (PIR2) and through-hole (TH2).Therefore, gap (SPC) is formed with inside dielectric between raised (PIR2).In addition, (B) graphical representation of exemplary of Figure 23 0 engages the section summary of device (110Y2) after upper layer and lower dielectric.As shown, device (110Y2) printing formed element (111C) by the through-hole (TH2) of lower layer, contact (ATP3), upper layer contact (ATP1), Through-hole (TH1) and the wiring layer (WR1) for being connected to surface.
Therefore, it by means of device (110Y2), can be acted in the same manner with device (110Y1).It is formed in printing In the case where element (111C), the multiplicity configuration pattern of multiple element (111C) can be flexibly formed.Therefore, according to device (110Y2) is easy various application program that reply information equipment (200) executes, can cope with the volume production of device (110Y2).
3 31~Figure 23 according to fig. 2, as another example of implementation form 33, graphical representation of exemplary device (110Y3) It constitutes.The upper surface of Figure 23 1 (A) graphical representation of exemplary device (110Y3) is constituted.Figure 23 1 (B) is constitutional diagram 231 (A) The figure of a part of sectional view.That is, in Figure 23 1 (B), towards paper, upside is the E1 arrow along Figure 23 1 (A) by device The section of (110Y3) truncation, in Figure 23 1 (B), towards paper, downside is the E2 arrow along Figure 23 1 (A) by device The section of (110Y13) truncation.In Figure 23 1 (B), display is distinguished with 2 swash in the boundary of 2 kinds of sections.
As shown in Figure 23 1 (A), the composition and device (110Y1), device of the upper surface of device (110Y3) dielectric layer (110Y2) is identical.On the other hand, as shown in Figure 23 1 (B), the joint surface of device (110Y3) layer on the dielectric layer forms more A lug boss (PIR4), lug boss (PIR5), lug boss (PIR6), in this regard with device (110Y1), device (110Y2) phase It is different.Lug boss (PIR4) in position corresponding with the through-hole position (TH1) of wiring layer (WR1) is connected in the first area of upper layer, It is formed in joint side.Therefore, it at lug boss (PIR4), penetrates through upper layer dielectric layer and is formed with and is connected to wiring layer (WR1) Through-hole (TH1).
In addition, lug boss (PIR4) with position through-hole (TH1) that contact terminal (114A) is connected in the second area of upper layer Corresponding position is set, is formed in joint side.Therefore, it at lug boss (PIR5), penetrates through upper layer dielectric layer and is formed with connection In the through-hole (TH1) of contact terminal (114A).Lug boss (PIR6) is low in the density of lug boss (PIR4) and lug boss (PIR5) Region, play the role of between the upper layer and lower layer of engagement formed gap needed for partition.
Figure 23 2 (A) is the top view on the lower layer joint surface of exemplary diagram showing device (110Y3) dielectric layer.In addition, figure 232 (B) are F1 sectional view and the F2 sectional view of constitutional diagram 232 (A) and the figure that is virtually connect with 2 swash.As shown, The lower layer of device (110Y3) dielectric layer forms hole in the planar dielectric layer of no convex-concave.That is, as shown in Figure 23 1 (B), upper Layer joint surface forms multiple lug bosses (PIR4), lug boss (PIR5), lug boss (PIR6), as a result, when engagement upper layer and lower layer Gap supported by lug boss (PIR4), lug boss (PIR5), lug boss (PIR6).Therefore, device (110Y3) dielectric The lower layer of layer is the composition of almost flat.
In the lower layer of device (110Y3) dielectric layer, multiple holes (hole) (HL1 and HL2) is formed.With the firstth area of upper layer The hole (HL1) that the corresponding lower region in domain is formed, for penetrating through the lug boss (PIR4) on upper layer joint surface in engagement.Separately Outside, in the hole (HL2) that lower region corresponding with upper layer second area is formed, for making the convex of upper layer joint surface in engagement Play portion (PIR5) perforation.
The inside (the inside of lower layer) of device (110Y3) behind Figure 23 3 (A) graphical representation of exemplary engagement upper layer and lower layer, That is, acting on the composition of the acting surface of information equipment (200) touch panel.In addition, in the engagement of Figure 23 3 (B) graphical representation of exemplary The section summary of layer and the device (110Y3) after the dielectric of lower layer.But, it is used in the figure as reference, it is virtual with dotted line Ground graphical representation of exemplary raised (PIR4~PIR6) and through-hole (TH1).That is, in position corresponding with upper layer first area, protrusion (PIR4) through hole (HL1).As a result, the surface of through-hole (TH1) electrical connection arrangement (110Y3) in raised (PIR4) with The inside.Therefore, molding element (111C) is inside printed, surface is connected to by the through-hole (TH1) in raised (PIR4) Wiring layer (WR1).
In addition, similarly, in position corresponding with upper layer second area, raised (PIR5) through hole (HL2).As a result, The surface and the inside of through-hole (TH1) electrical connection arrangement (110Y3) in raised (PIR5).Therefore, it inside prints molding Element (111B) is connected to the contact terminal (114A) on surface by the through-hole (TH1) in raised (PIR4).
Therefore, according to the composition of device (110Y3), profile member (111B, 111C) is equally printed with device (110Y3), The multiplicity configuration pattern of multiple element (111C) can be thus flexibly formed.Therefore, according to device (110Y3), it is easy reply Various application program that information equipment (200) executes, can cope with the volume production of device (110Y2).Moreover, such as Figure 23 3 (A), figure Shown in 233 (B), for device (110Y3), lower layer is that very simple plate is constituted, it may be said that is more to meet printing molding Composition.
6 34~Figure 23 according to fig. 2 are illustrated device (110Y4).Above-described device (110Y1)~device In (110Y4), composition of the wiring layer (WR1) with netted, clathrate and furthermore is layed in above dielectric layer upper layer almost Whole faces.According to this composition, the effect of acquisition is, the surface area of wiring layer (WR1) increases, can make wiring layer (WR1) with Static capacity caused by element (111A, 111C) etc. increases, even if the finger of user does not contact wiring layer (WR1), information is set The touch panel of standby (200) may also detect that device (110Y) in contact with or close to.
On the other hand, if the wiring layer (WR1) of wiring layer (WR1) causes surface area to increase, when user's finger not When contacting the so-called physical quantity output OFF of wiring layer (WR1), do not detect as with the touch panel of information equipment (200) by matching Application program premised on static capacity caused by line layer (WR1) and element (111A, 111C), it may occur that error detection.Therefore, Below by way of device (110Y4), graphical representation of exemplary minimizes because wiring layer (WR1) and element (111A, 111C) are led The composition of the static capacity of cause.
The upper surface of Figure 23 4 (A) graphical representation of exemplary device (110Y4) is constituted.Figure 23 4 (B) is constitutional diagram 234 (A) A part of sectional view figure.That is, in Figure 23 4 (B), towards paper, upside is the G1 arrow along Figure 23 4 (A) by device The section of (110Y4) truncation, in Figure 23 4 (B), towards paper, downside is the G2 arrow along Figure 23 4 (A) by device The section of (110Y1) truncation.In Figure 23 4 (B), display is distinguished with 2 swash in the boundary of 2 kinds of sections.
As shown in Figure 23 4 (B), in the section of device (110Y4) is constituted, contacts conductor (114A) and be connected to contact The through-hole (TH1) of conductor (114A), the composition of contact (ATP1) are identical as device (110Y1).
On the other hand, in device (110Y4), in upper layer first area, wiring layer (WR3) is formed in joint side.Cause This, in Figure 23 4 (A), wiring layer (WR3) is recorded with dotted line.Moreover, the joint side in wiring layer (WR3) is formed with contact (ATP5).Contact (ATP) is to be electrically connected institute with the contact (ATP3) on lower layer joint surface for when upper layer is engaged with lower layer The contact needed.Wiring layer (WR3) is formed in joint side, and user contacts the outer portion of the wiring layer (WR2) of second area, A possibility that so as to reduce fixed configurations WRONG PATTERN input information equipment.But, second area is contacted by user Wiring layer (WR2) except part can also be in fixed configurations the pattern not application program of mistake input information equipment Wiring layer (WR3) is formed on surface.
In addition, the second area on upper layer, wiring layer (WR2) is not with netted, but with one dimensional line and interval (line- And-space) structure is formed, and in one end of each wiring, is connected to 1 wiring.In addition, wiring layer (WR3) is in joint side It is formed with one dimensional line and spacer structure, is connect by through-hole (TH5) with the wiring layer (WR2) on surface.
Figure 23 5 (A) graphical representation of exemplary composition on the lower layer joint surface of device (110Y4).Figure 23 5 (B) is constitutional diagram The figure of a part of sectional view of 235 (A).That is, towards paper, upside is the H1 arrow general along Figure 23 5 (A) in Figure 23 5 (B) The section of device (110Y4) truncation, in Figure 23 5 (B), towards paper, downside is the H2 arrow along Figure 23 5 (A) by device The section of (110Y4) truncation.In Figure 23 5 (B), display is distinguished with 2 swash in the boundary of 2 kinds of sections.In addition, Figure 23 6 (A) It is the top view of the composition inside the device (110Y4) of graphical representation of exemplary engagement upper layer and lower layer, Figure 23 6 (B) is display engagement The section of the device (110Y4) of upper layer and lower layer constitutes the figure of summary.
As shown in Figure 23 5 (A), on lower layer joint surface, equally with device (110Y1), it is formed in lug boss (PIR3) logical Hole (TH2) is connect with the element (111C) of the inside side.Contact (ATP3) is formed in the joint side of through-hole (TH2).Therefore, Lug boss (PIR3), through-hole (TH2) and contact (ATP3) are only formed in part corresponding with element (111C), in this regard, dress It is different from device (110Y1) to set (110Y4).But the composition and device of the part of the attachment device surface (110Y4) and the inside (110Y1) is identical.
The line on wiring layer (WR2) straight line so contacted by user's finger is constituted with interval, and is utilized minimum The lead of limit is constituted for being connected to wiring layer (WR3) needed for element (111C) inside device (110Y4), can be reduced The static capacity of wiring layer (WR2, WR3).Moreover, the composition of 34 (A)~Figure 23 6 (B), the finger of user contact according to fig. 2 Wiring layer (WR2), so that the touch panel of information equipment (200) can identify the so-called fixed configurations based on element (111C) Pattern.On the other hand, the information input and device (110Y1~110Y3) of the contact terminal (114A) based on device (110Y4) It is identical.
The graphical representation of exemplary composition of the inside of device (110Y5) in Figure 23 7.But, in Figure 23 7, with dotted line void Intend the protrusion (PIR1) that ground graphical representation of exemplary supports gap (SPC) inside the dielectric layer that upper layer is engaged with lower layer.Separately Outside, in the figure with the dotted line virtually graphical representation of exemplary surface contact terminal (114A) and wiring layer of device (110Y5) (WR10).Contact terminal (114A) for example prints to be formed with conductive material.
As shown, inside printing is formed with element (111C), by means of through-hole (TH2) etc., with device (110Y1~ 110Y4) equally, it is connect with the wiring layer on surface (WR10).But, in device (110Y5), wiring layer (WR10) be not as The composition that mesh-shape, clathrate or line and intermittent pattern are unfolded extensively like that, but can in the shortest distance connecting element The configuration of (110B) and contact terminal (114A).
According to this composition, by means of fixed configurations pattern to the multiple element of information equipment (200) input information (111B) forms 3 groups for being connected to contact terminal (114A1,114A2,114A3).At this point, the wiring layer (WR10) of each group Wiring lengths are sufficiently short, only rely on the static capacity of the wiring layer (WR10) and element (111B) by means of each group, can make information equipment (200) touch panel can't detect device (110Y5) acting surface (the inside) in contact with or close to.Furthermore, it is possible to adjust each group Wiring layer (WR10) and element (111B) static capacity so that only user's finger contact each group wiring layer (WR10) when, the configuration pattern of ability detecting element (111B).Therefore, user is desired by each group by sequentially operating, thus Information equipment (200) is set to detect the combination of configuration pattern.In this example, contact terminal is contacted according to user's finger The sequence of (114A1,114A2,114A3) can have 6 kinds of inputs.Therefore, pattern is configured by preparing multiple element (111B) Different devices (110Y5) can provide a variety of application programs to user.
In addition, touch area of the circle of dotted line as surface, is the contact terminal (114A) formed on surface.But, may be used Contact terminal (114A) is installed to replace, and the wiring (conducting wire) for making wiring layer (WR10) include passes through dotted line circle center, in turn The end for extending to circle of dotted line, as touch conducting wire.
Therefore, it can be said that in device (110Y5), 1 or more element being formed in first area and it is connected to described 1 The combination of the wiring layer of a above element forms multiple groups.In addition, finger successively contacted in user corresponding with each group Contact terminal (114A1,114A2,114A3) in the case where, by the way that finger successively to be contacted to the multiple groups of each wirings for including Layer, so that the information based on the physical quantity variation from 1 or more the element formed the multiple groups of first areas for including, defeated Enter panel.
The graphical representation of exemplary composition of the inside of device (110Y6) in Figure 23 8.The dress of device (110Y6) and Figure 23 7 It sets (110Y5) to compare, the information input unit based on element (111B) is installed.Therefore, according to device (110Y6), user It can be solid being inputted to information equipment (200) by means of the combination of the fixed configurations pattern of contact terminal (114A1,114A2) While determining information combination, key input, the selection based on dedicated key, cursor of general alphanumeric/additional character etc. are carried out Operation etc..
[application]
9~Figure 24 of Figure 23 2 is the conductive pattern configured on identification card and then touches in card surface printing text or graphic diagram The multiple touch areas for marking (a part for being also possible to figure), execute the input of data or starting/operation of application program Embodiment.
Figure 23 9 is the embodiment of various member card.According to the configuration pattern of electric conductor, can identify be which kind of facility or Clubbable classification etc..Moreover, touching digital icon, after inputting password, ENTER icon is touched, then can input password, It can be authenticated in person.When termination codon inputs or malfunctions, CANCEL icon is touched, is re-entered.Complete this After people's certification, the various information and service of the facility that can read/use.Accumulating card in addition to member card, as various shop Or seal card, store information can also be used using smart phone.Moreover, it is also possible to be used to register, reading Diagnostic Time table and Prescription etc..In addition, after card face constitutes and scrapes area etc. and printing code, using the card as promote with etc. be supplied to user, It is connected to WEB, by the nearly given area of sticker and scrapes, inputs the password of acquisition, then can provide preferential and special information/interior Hold.
Figure 24 0 is the embodiment for going sightseeing to block.It then can be with this after touching language icon by the nearly touch panel of sightseeing sticker The explanation at language reading sight spot or action message etc..It is used as tourist industry, it can also be in hotel or facility, tourism consultation service etc. Place's setting card and touch panel.In addition, the settings such as travel agencies or communication/distribution card, it is also possible that utilizing user Smart phone read.In addition, it is set along commodity card with commodity on the store shelf shown in various shop, By the commodity card close to the product information reading touch panel display device being arranged in specific part, it is hereby achieved that quotient The information such as product explanation and color category, price.In a display device, the frames such as display performance, color category, by close to the area Domain can show its information.Even the commodity of not in stock, by display of commodity card, information can also be provided or ordered Goods.And then throughout show the advertising cards for having printed the design and photo that attract eyeball, and provided to user, it can also be with Make it possible to obtain the content with advertisement.
Figure 24 1 is embodiment of the education with " science learning card ".By learning card close to tablet computer, touches and puts question to icon, Then go wrong.If answer is 4 option multiselect types, 1~4 number is touched, (corrects errors), then touches if it is OX problem OX.If answer is correct, OX result can be exported in the position along with ding-dong sound.In addition, answering figure if touched Mark, then can answer and carry out answer explanation.In turn, icon is putd question to if touched, exports lower topic.If touching marking figure Mark is then exported close to the answer marking result (answering questions 3 topics etc. in 5 topics) after card.If touching finish icon, enquirement is removed Process etc., if again touch put question to icon, since first topic.It is this put question to, answer, marking can multiplicity It is applied in education sector, this is self-evident.It is possible to further which touch selection region is largely arranged, from this point, It may be used as questionnaire survey.In addition, showing answer project in tablet computer, card is set to be moved to corresponding answer project, and touch Icon is selected, then can choose corresponding answer project.By rotating card, rotation can be identified, thus rotation can also be passed through Direction selects answer.
Figure 24 2 is the embodiment of game card.If card is loaded into tablet computer, the role of the card is shown.If touching The arrow icon is touched, then role is mobile to the direction.If touching STOP icon, stop moving.If touching JUMP icon, Then role jumps.If touching GET icon, stage property can be obtained.If touching ATTACK icon, attacked to other side It hits.By rotating card, the direction of attack can be changed, the direction is attacked.If showing MAP in a display device, Then game can also be carried out while will block and be moved to commitment positions.It, can also be in smart phone in addition to tablet computer It uses, can also be used in card to be loaded on to the arcade game that plane broadcasting face plays.If touch panel is used for This card and plane play face, then, even if the heart in gaming, can also carry out joining with the smart phone of family or tablet computer Dynamic game.
In the conductive pattern configured in described 4 (A)~Figure 24 2 of Figure 22, the size/shape of conductor is single, can not define A large amount of pattern.But existing touch panel can identify to touch area or touch maximum width and pass through from this point The size for changing each pattern can define the pattern of suitable number as shown in Figure 26 7.In turn, it is contemplated that connect touch shape later It can also identify, by changes shape, allow to the more conductive patterns of definition/identification.
Figure 24 4 is the embodiment for changing conductor sizes.Scheming a) hypothesis can be set/identify the size of 2 kinds of conductors, be Using the situation of the conductor in 3 and 4 recognizable directions, the distance between conductor A and conductor B are set as maximum, by this 2 It is inquired into as reference conductor.Such as scheme b) shown in, according to 3 configurations, conductors of information is configured at certain at 33, leads Body pattern is 33.Wherein, including reference conductor, at 35 in, if roundlet is known as 0, great circle is known as 1, then 3 A conductor has the combination of 8 kinds (3bit).It therefore, is 33 × 8=264.Such as scheme c) shown in, if conductor be 4, believe Conductor 2 configuration patterns of breath are the combinations that 2 are selected in 33, are 528,4 conductors have 16 kinds (4bit) combinations, are 528 × 16=8,448.As a result, if along with electric conductor is 3 and 4 situations, for 264+8,448=8, 712.Moreover, can define/identify more conductive patterns if configuring distance between a variety of longest conductor A and conductor B. Certainly, if size also becomes the multistage from 2 stages, the conductive pattern of vast number can be set.
The card not controlled by electric circuit is discussed above, but it is big what is electrically reacted to change conductor Small and shape similarly, using conductor sizes/change in shape of conductive pattern, can be defined/be identified more electrically also feasible Multi information, this is self-evident.
<implementation form 35>
Figure 24 3 is the figure of graphical representation of exemplary device (110Z) relevant to implementation form 35.Figure 24 3 can be described as Figure 20 1 The variation of (device (110S)).(A) be the device (110Z) from upside top view, (B) is left side view, and (C) is Bottom view.In addition, in the top view of (A), with the element inside dotted line virtually graphical representation of exemplary device (110Z) (111)。
Device (110Z) is characterized in that, relative to the inside that element (111) is configured, be equivalent to its it is tight above Surface location is configured with SW (115).Element (111) and SW (115) in through-hole (TH10) for example by being coated with or filled with gold The circuit of the substrate vertical direction of category and connect.By this composition, SW (115) can be made to reach to the wiring of element (111) Minimum length.Therefore, in the case where SW (115) are OFF, the output terminal of (115) SW can be made (for example, the yin of diode Pole) to the wiring of element (111), to be formed by static capacity very small.As a result, can increase quiet when SW (115) are OFF The difference of static capacity when capacitance and SW (115) are ON can increase the touch panel detection of information equipment (200) Physical quantity variation (static capacity variation, electric field strength variation).If the physics that the touch panel of information equipment (200) detects Amount variation increases, then the information input that the element (111) of the device (110Z) from information equipment (200) can be improved is accurate Degree, can reduce erroneous input (error detection).
2 features of Figure 24 3 are to be equipped with slot below wiring layer wiring as shown in the bottom view of (C).By the way that this is arranged Kind slot, can reduce the coupling between wiring and the touch panel of information equipment (200), reduce the erroneous detection of information equipment (200) It surveys.
In addition, in Figure 24 3, light collection cylinder be used to limit light harvesting in photodiode (WPD) light on the display apparatus Region.That is, the light of specific region is incident on light collection cylinder, by light collection cylinder in the display device of information equipment (200) Photodiode (WPD) detect.Therefore, device (110Z) can be filled by means of 5 photodiodes (WPD) from display 5 regions set obtain light code side by side.
Moreover, can make to be controlled by means of SW (115) by means of the gap of graphical representation of exemplary in (B) left side view The control unit of element (111) ON/OFF is separated from the touch panel of information equipment (200).As a result, control unit pair can be mitigated The coupling of touch panel reduces the malfunction of information equipment (200).
As the description in the implementation form 0~33, by being equipped with 3 or more elements (111), by non- Symmetrical positional relationship configuration, thus information equipment (200) touch panel detect element (111) occur physical quantity or When physical quantity variation, information equipment (200) can configuration shape to element (111) and configuration direction carry out it is specific.In addition, Information equipment (200) can rotation angle with identification device (110Z) relative to touch panel.
Communication between device (110Z) and information equipment (200) is as shown in implementation form 21,24 etc., according to based on next Pattern code (static capacity code) from the physical quantity of element (111) and the light generation from information equipment (200) display device Code carries out.It is however also possible to install wireless communication device in device (110Z), communicates and be used in combination with these.Device (110Z) to Touch panel transmitting comes from the physical quantity of 3 or more elements (111), can be by touch surface in addition to transmitting bulk information merely The direction of position and device (110Z) on plate passes to information equipment (200), this is previous unexistent feature.
In turn, due to being equipped with memory (117) in device (110Z), thus from the display of information equipment (200) fill It sets, by light code, data accumulating in memory (117) and is updated, so that device (110Z) can be applied to various application Program.For example, tour guide, the description of product in exhibition, the guidance based on various language (day English-Chinese etc.) may be implemented.
<implementation form 36>
Referring to 5~Figure 25 of Figure 24 3, illustrate device (110AA) relevant to implementation form 36.Wherein, device (110AA) The e.g. identical composition with the device of Figure 40 (110).That is, the composition of implementation form 36 can be applied to the implementation form 0 Code generating device (1), 1 device below (110) of implementation form etc..In Figure 24 5, for composition identical with Figure 40, It assigns label identical with Figure 40 and omits the description.
But, in Figure 24 5, can also there is no fingerprint sensor.Alternatively, it is also possible to replace battery (122), install all Such as components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (122), such as solar panel.In addition, in Figure 24 5, driving circuit (121) driving SW (115) or SW (115A), but can also be in the input/output interface of (116) CPU, such as General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) directly drives SW (115) or SW (115A).In addition, driving SW (115) in driving circuit (121) Or in the case where SW (115A), as driving circuit (121), D/A converter can use, and as needed, use transistor Amplifying circuit.In addition, element (111) is in the case where SW (115) are ON in Figure 24 5, by contacting conductor (114), even It is connected to user's finger etc. or earthing potential.Alternatively, it is also possible to and pass through element (111) without contact conductor (114) SW (115) is connected to earthing potential.In addition, touching the situation of contact conductor (114) even with the finger of person, contact is led Body (114) is connected to earthing potential by the human body of user.Therefore, either without contact conductor (114), element (111) by SW (115) be connected to earthing potential situation or user finger touch contact conductor (114) feelings Shape generates similar physical quantity variation in the touch panel of information equipment (200).
In Figure 24 5 also as implementation form 1, with the ON and OFF of SW (115), the acting surface of device (110AA) On element (111) act on touch panel, detect the physical quantitys such as static capacity or electric field strength.Device (110AA) is in institute Stating on the device formation base of 0~implementation form of implementation form 35 has coupling conductor (114A), and conductor is used in the coupling The SW (115A) and SW (115A) that (114A) is driven by means of driven circuit (input/output interface of 121 or CPU (116)) ON and OFF and with earthing potential be powered.In this composition, if SW (115A) becomes ON, couple with conductor (114A) even It is connected to earthing potential, generates physical action for touch panel.Such as coupling detects touch panel with conductor (114A) The physical quantitys such as static capacity or electric field strength.
Moreover, driving circuit (input/output interface of 121 or CPU (116)) is ON's with one in multiple SW (115) Timing synchronization makes SW (115A) become ON.Therefore, touch panel is superimposed on by means of the SW (115) for ON by contact conductor (114) or it is connected to physical quantity variation caused by the element (111) of earthing potential, caused by by coupling conductor (114A) Physical quantity variation effect.For example, detection is used by coupling on the basis of touch panel static capacity caused by element (111) Static capacity caused by conductor (114A).Alternatively, on the basis of touch panel electric field strength caused by element (111), detection by Coupling electric field strength caused by conductor (114A).
Alternatively, driving circuit (input/output interface of 121 or CPU (116)) is with certain one in multiple SW (115) The timing synchronization of OFF makes SW (115A) become OFF.Therefore, it is that the situation of ON is identical with SW (115) and SW (115A), touches Panel is superimposed on by contact conductor (114) or leads from the element (111) that earthing potential is cut off by means of the SW (115) for OFF The physical quantity variation of cause, by the effect as coupling physical quantity variation caused by conductor (114A).For example, touch panel exists On the basis of the reduction for the static capacity that element (111) is formed, the static capacity of detection coupling conductor (114A) formation subtracts It is few.Alternatively, touch panel, on the basis of the reduction of the electric field strength from element (111), detection comes from coupling conductor The electric field strength of (114A) reduces.
Figure 24 6 is that exemplary simulated diagram does not have the device (110) of coupling conductor (114A) and SW (115A) composition Figure.As shown, each element (111) (also referred to as PAD1, PAD2, PDA3) passes through each SW (115) (SW1, SW2, SW3), It is connected to earthing potential (not shown).The input/output interface of CPU (116) becomes each SW (115) (SW1, SW2, SW3) ON is grounded each element (111) (PAD1, PAD2, PDA3).Alternatively, the input/output interface of CPU (116) makes each SW (115) (SW1, SW2, SW3) becomes OFF, cuts off each element (111) (PAD1, PAD2, PDA3) from earthing potential.According to The ON and OFF state of this SW (115) (SW1, SW2, SW3), touch panel detection by element (111) (PAD1, PAD2, PDA3 physical quantity variation caused by).
Figure 24 7 is the figure of exemplary simulated diagram SW (115) (or SW (115A), hereinafter referred to as SW (115) etc.).SW (115) etc. it will become connection status (ON) or dissengaged positions (OFF) between element (111) and earthing potential.
Figure 24 8 is the figure of the specific composition of graphical representation of exemplary SW (115) etc..As shown, SW (115) etc. has series connection Connect the composition of resistance (R115), diode (D115) and bias circuit (B115).One end of bias circuit (B115) is grounded. In addition, one end of resistance (R115) is connected to the input/output interface of CPU.Diode (D115) connects by means of from CPU's Input/output interface towards earthing potential voltage and forward driving.That is, the anode of diode (D115) passes through resistance (R115) It is connected to the input/output interface of CPU.In addition, the cathode of diode (D115) is grounded by bias circuit (B115).Moreover, Element (111) are connected in the anode of diode (D115).By this composition, touch panel detecting element can be alleviated (111) because of the influence caused by detection voltage to diode (D115) switching action when physical quantity.
That is, being arranged with static capacity sensor on the surface of touch panel.Static capacity sensor perceives such as element (111) etc. near to or in contact with touch panel surface object static capacity.The control circuit of touch panel is passed to static capacity Sensor applies such as pulse voltage, from the variation of resistance, perceives the static capacity near to or in contact with the object on touch panel surface Variation identifies the close of object, contact etc..Thus, for example the driving voltage of touch panel control circuit acts on diode (D115) if partial pressure be higher than diode forward voltage, there are diodes (D115) to be transformed into ON state from OFF state Situation.That is, even if there is also be in the two of OFF in the case where the driving voltage from CPU input/output interface is 0 Pole pipe due to touch panel control circuit and become the situation of ON.At this point, diode (D115) does not play as SW (115) Function.
But by means of taking the composition of Figure 24 8, the driving voltage of touch panel control circuit acts on diode (D115) partial pressure is correspondingly reduced with the voltage of bias circuit (B115).Therefore, 48 circuit is constituted according to fig. 2, can To reduce the partial pressure that the driving voltage of touch panel control circuit acts on diode (D115), two in OFF can be inhibited Pole pipe due to touch panel control circuit and become ON.
In addition, applying back voltage to diode, help to reduce capacity when diode OFF, but if replacing battery Using the reverse voltage of processor control terminal, then desired effect is obtained.
In addition, the very small high frequency of junction capacity when the diode as Figure 24 8, preferably diode (D115) OFF is with two Pole pipe or PIN diode.If the junction capacity of diode (D115) is big, even the situation of diode (D115) OFF, right In pulse signal or AC signal, also become on state.This is because when diode even (D115) OFF, there is also The static capacity sensor of touch panel is mistakenly perceived the physical quantitys such as the static capacity of element (111) by junction capacity For the situation for approaching physical quantity when diode (D115) ON.
Figure 24 9 is the variation of Figure 24 8.In order to be by the connection control for controlling figure elements (111) and earthing potential etc. ON or OFF can also be changed to diode (D115), utilize transistor (T115).Furthermore it is also possible to replace the crystal of Figure 24 9 It manages (T115), takes the composition of the series connection transistor as implementation form 0.
Figure 25 0 is coupling conductors (1114A), SW in the device (110AA) of this implementation form of graphical representation of exemplary The figure of the connection of (115A), element (111) and CPU (116).As shown, multiple element (111, be referred to as PAD1, PAD2, PAD3 etc.) by each SW (115), the contact conductor (114) or earthing potential for being connected to Figure 24 5 (hereinafter referred to as connect Ground potential etc.).In addition, coupling passes through SW (115A) with conductor (114A), it is connected to earthing potential.But, it in Figure 25 0, connects It touches conductor (114) and earthing potential omits.In this embodiment, CPU (116) is in multiple SW (115, PAD1, PAD2, PAD3 Deng) in certain one become ON for 1 or more when, SW (115A) is controlled as ON.In addition, CPU (116) multiple SW (115, PAD1, PAD2, PAD3 etc.) whole OFF when, SW (115A) is controlled as OFF.
Therefore, coupling conductors (1114A) link with the element (111) for being connected to earthing potential etc., are connected to ground connection electricity Position.As a result, make physical quantity variation on touch panel if element (111) ON more than some, then with the physics quantitative change Change is connected, and coupling conductors (1114A) occur on touch panel.Moreover, coupling uses conductor (114A) and element (111) such as Fruit is detected on touch panel in the sensor arrangement of physical quantity, in the positional relationship for acting on identical sensor, then by coupling Physical quantity variation caused by conductor (1114A) is closed, the physical quantity variation as caused by element (111) is overlapped in.For example, touching In panel surface, coupling is overlapped with conductor (114A) and element (111) along the normal direction, from the point of view of panel, if become Coupling is configured at the positional relationship on the upside of element (111) with conductor (114A), then as coupling object caused by conductor (114A) The variation of reason amount is overlapped in the physical quantity variation as caused by element (111).
In the example of Figure 25 0, multiple SW (115, PAD1, PAD2, PAD3 etc.) are placed between, in multiple SW (115) Upside (with the opposite side of touch panel) configuration couple with conductor (114A), all to cover multiple SW (115).If Coupling has sufficiently broad area with conductor (114A) and touch panel, can ignore the end effect of peripheral portion, then couple It is directed to touch panel with conductor (114A), generates uniform electric field or static capacity as parallel plate capacitor.Therefore, On the basis of the physical quantity variation as caused by each element (111), it is overlapped as coupling physics quantitative change caused by conductor (114A) Change.As a result, the physics as caused by the element (111, hereinafter referred to as ON state element (111)) for being connected to ON state SW (115) Amount variation, even the physical quantity variation of the detection boundary of insufficient touch panel, due to by coupling with caused by conductor (114A) Physical quantity variation overlapping, touch panel can also perceive the physical quantity variation of ON state element (111).
Figure 25 1 is the variation of Figure 25 0.CPU (116) input/output interface port number be less than multiple SW (111, SW1, SW2, SW3 etc.) with SW (115A) number in the case where, CPU (116) can also be by I/O expander, such as by multiple SW (111) control is ON and OFF.
I/O expander is for example connect by serial line interface with CPU (116), drives multiple SW (111) using GPIO. That is, I/O expander for example receives the instruction based on serial communication from CPU, side by side by multiple SW (111, SW1, SW2, SW3 etc.) it controls as ON or OFF.CPU (116) by means of serial communication, to I/O expander send the channel number of GPIO, ON or OFF is specified.Multiple SW (111) are controlled as ON or OFF according to the instruction of (116) CPU by I/O expander.
In turn, in the circuit of Figure 25 1, the control signal of multiple SW (111, SW1, SW2, SW3 etc.) passes through or Men Shixian The output signal of logical operation, utilization or door controls SW (115A).Therefore, in the composition of Figure 25 1, if multiple SW (111, SW1, SW2, SW3 etc.) at least one be controlled as ON, then or the output of door is ON, and SW (115A) is controlled as ON.But, Utilization or door can also be replaced, but utilize a communication of the GPIO from I/O expander, controlled SW (115A).That is, When CPU (116) controls at least one of multiple SW (111, SW1, SW2, SW3 etc.) for ON, it is connected with the control, it can also Controlling SW (115A) for ON.It links in CPU (116) and multiple SW (111, SW1, SW2, SW3 etc.) and controls SW (115A) In the case where, it does not need or door.
Figure 25 2 is the variation of Figure 25 0.In Figure 25 2, integrated coupling is with conductor (114A) in Figure 25 0, Figure 25 1 As coupled shown in conductor (114A1,114A2,114A3) etc., it is separated into part.Wherein, although exemplary list 3 parts Coupling with conductor (114A1,114A2,114A3), but not isolated coupling is limited to 3 parts with conductor (114A1).
Moreover, coupling passes through SW (115A1,115A2,115A3) respectively with conductor (114A1,114A2,114A3) etc. It is connected to earthing potential.(111, PAD1, PAD2, PAD3 etc.) and multiple SW (111, SW1, SW2, SW3 in addition, multiple element Deng) connection, it is identical as Figure 25 1.Moreover, coupling is with conductor (114A1,114A2,114A3) etc. relative to touch panel surface On multiple element (111, PAD1, PAD2, PAD3 etc.), device (110A) acting surface normal direction (that is, working as acting surface When contacting touch panel, the normal direction of touch panel) on, in the positional relationship being overlapped respectively.In the following, will be in device The pass of coupling conductor (114Ak) and element (111, PADk) in the normal direction of (110A) acting surface in overlapping relation System, is determined to be in overlapping relation.Wherein, k is integer.
In this composition, CPU (116) becomes the feelings of ON being connected to the SW of element (111, PADk) (115, SWk) Under condition, the SW (115Ak) for being connected to the coupling conductor (114Ak) for being overlapped in element (111, PADk) is made to become ON.In addition, CPU (116) is overlapped in the case where will be connected to the SW of element (111, PADk) (115, SKw) becomes OFF by being connected to The SW (115Ak) of the coupling conductor (114k) of element (111, PADk) becomes OFF.Wherein, k is integer.
Therefore, coupling conductors (1114Ak) link with the element (111, PADk) for being connected to earthing potential etc., are connected to and connect Ground potential.As a result, if element (111, PADk) be ON, so that physical quantity is changed on touch panel, then with the physical quantity Variation linkage, occurs the physical quantity variation as caused by coupling conductors (114Ak) on touch panel.Moreover, in device When the acting surface of (110AA) is near to or in contact with touch panel, couples conductor (114Ak) and element (111, PADk) is touching It is detected on panel in the sensor arrangement of physical quantity, in the positional relationship for acting on identical sensor.Therefore, it is led by coupling Physical quantity variation caused by body (1114Ak) is overlapped in the physical quantity variation as caused by element (111, PADk).
If the coupling of Figure 25 2 is shown in conductor (114Ak), coupling with it is free of conductors for multiple segments in the case where, The uniform electric field as parallel plate capacitor occurs on touch panel or the place of static capacity is defined.As a result, in coupling The region that conductor (114Ak) is overlapped on touch panel is shared, i.e., by the coupling edge on touch panel conductor (114Ak) Inside the region of normal direction projection, the electric field close to parallel plate capacitor occurs, on the other hand, except coupling conductor (114Ak) is overlapped in except the region on touch panel, and electric field strength subtracts according to the distance away from coupling conductor (114Ak) It is small.It is understood that when device (110AA) is near to or in contact with touch panel, the physical quantity (electric field of touch panel detection Intensity, static capacity), it is overlapped on touch panel in coupling with conductor (114Ak) coupling immediately below with conductor (114Ak) Region in become both quantitative, and if coupling with conductor (114Ak) far from the region being overlapped on touch panel, Then more weaken.
Therefore, as described above, CPU (116) and SW (115, SWk) are linked, SW (115Ak) is become into ON, or become OFF, Can on the basis of the physical quantity variation occurred in the element (111, PDAk) by the SW (115, SWk) as ON, overlapping by Coupling physical quantity variation caused by conductor (114Ak).In addition, as coupling physical quantity variation pair caused by conductor (114Ak) Influence except coupling overlapping region conductor (114Ak) is reduced with distance.On the other hand, CPU (116) can cut off by Coupling physical quantity caused by conductor (114Ak), is allowed to not be overlapped in the member from the SW (115, SWk) for being connected to OFF state The physical quantity of part (111, PDAk).As described above, 52 device (110AA) according to fig. 2, for by ON state SW (115, SWk) the physical quantity variation occurred in element (111, PDAk), can make the physical quantity as caused by coupling conductor (114Ak) Variation limits ground overlapping to a certain extent.This can be considered as, according to fig. 2 52 composition, can widen by means of SW (115, SWk ON and OFF) is controlled and the dynamic range of the physical quantity variation of generation.That is, the results are as follows, touch panel is easy will ON is perceived as by the physical quantity variation that the SW (115, SWk) of ON state occurs in element (111, PDAk), being easy will be by OFF The physical quantity variation that the SW (115, SWk) of state occurs in element (111, PDAk) is perceived as OFF (being difficult to be mistakenly considered ON).
In addition, in Figure 25 2, CPU (116), can also be with although driving SW (115A) independently of SW (115, SWk) The control signal path of from CPU (116) to SW (115, SWk) is separated, is driven SW (115A).
Figure 25 3 is the variation of Figure 25 0.Figure 25 3 is combined with the composition of Figure 25 0 and the composition of Figure 25 2.That is, in Figure 25 3 In, the coupling as shown in Figure 25 2 is coupled with free of conductors with conductor (114Ak) into multiple segments, but all couplings are used It more than certain one links in conductor (114Ak) and multiple element (111, PAD1, PAD2, PAD3 etc.), is connect with earthing potential etc. Or cutting.In addition, in Figure 25 3, it, can also be as shown in Figure 25 1, so that being directed to although CPU (116) driving SW (115A) The control signal of multiple SW (115) carries out or the signal of gate logic operation drives W (115A).
Threshold values when Figure 25 4 graphical representation of exemplary touch panel perception physical quantity, the judgement result determined according to threshold values. In the following, ON will be become with SW (115), the testing result definition generated by the physical quantity variation occurred in element (111) For ON.So-called testing result ON, as testing result when user's finger contact touch panel.In addition, will be with SW (115) become OFF, the testing result generated by the physical quantity variation occurred in element (111) is defined as OFF.
In this embodiment, there is lag in the threshold values when touch panel determines ON and OFF from physical quantity.Such as When touch panel is determined as OFF (that is, the state for not being determined as ON), it will be deemed as threshold values needed for becoming ON and be defined as STON.In addition, will be deemed as threshold values needed for becoming OFF for example when touch panel is determined as ON and be defined as STOFF.Such as figure Shown in 254, usually, STON value is higher than STOFF.In the following, exemplary touch panel of enumerating is according to based on two kinds of threshold values The physical quantity variation from this implementation form device (110AA) of (STON and STOFF) determines the processing of ON and OFF.
(1) slave OFF to ON when physical quantity variation is sufficiently big or the perception from ON to OFF
Wherein, exemplary to enumerate in the state of making device (110AA) near to or in contact with touch panel, when CPU (116) The testing result of touch panel when certain one in multiple SW (115) being made to become ON or OFF.Firstly, in device (110AA) When power supply OFF, the physics of certain one in multiple element (111) on device (110AA) acting surface is not detected in touch panel Amount variation.Therefore, touch panel can not determine ON, be determined as OFF (OK1).
Then, if engaging means (110AA) power supply, device (110AA) execution processing etc., thus by multiple SW Certain one becomes ON in (111, SWk).Then, by means of SW (111, SWk), element (111, PADk) is connected to earthing potential Or contact conductor (114), so that physical quantity variation (increase of physical quantity) occurs for the sensor on touch panel.As a result, working as When physical quantity based on the physical quantity variation is threshold values (STON) or more, touch panel is determined as ON (OK2).In addition, at this point, In device (110AA), SW (115Ak or SW (115A)) is ON, thus (conductor is used in 114Ak or coupling by coupling conductor (114A)) caused by physical quantity variation (increase of physical quantity) be also overlapped in touch panel.
Device (110AA) re-executes processing etc., so that the SW (111, SWk) of ON state be made to become OFF.Then, make to borrow Help SW ((111, SWk) be once connected to earthing potential or contact the element (111, PADk) of conductor (114) from earthing potential or Conductor (114) cutting is contacted, so that the sensor on touch panel causes physical quantity variation.As a result, when being based on the physical quantity The physical quantity of variation be threshold values (STOFF) below when, touch panel is determined as OFF (OK3).In addition, at this point, in device In (110AA), the SW (111, SWk) of SW (115Ak or SW (115A)) and ON state links, and becomes OFF, thus is used by coupling (114Ak or the coupling physical quantity variation (reduction of physical quantity) caused by conductor (114A)) are also overlapped in touch surface to conductor Plate.It is that touch panel is based on the physical quantity variation from element (111, PADk) above, it can be determined that the variation from OFF to ON And the example of the variation from OFF to ON.
But due to the functional limitation of (115, PIN diode, transistor etc.) SW, dynamic range is insufficient, in multiplicity In the touch panel of type, if use environment is different, touch panel can not suitably determine ON and OFF (referred to as NG feelings Shape).Specifically, there is (2) below~(4) situation.The example that NG situation occurs is set forth below.
Due to by the constituting of circuit, the capacity (size, wiring) of the type of switch, element (111, PADk), different circuits To the presence or absence of the presence or absence of touch panel coupling, the type of touch panel, touch panel screening glass, touch panel caused by part The capacity itself possessed, there are the situations that touch panel can not accurately determine ON and OFF.In addition, there is also due to user The situation of usage.In addition, for example due to touch panel it is whether hand held in, whether on metal desk, on Wooden table Deng and Difference of physical environment, finger or the individual difference of people such as temperature, can not prepare to determine ON and OFF there are touch panel Situation.
(2) it when physical quantity variation is insufficient, can not perceive from OFF to ON
Illustrate that touch panel can not be determined from OFF to ON based on the physical quantity variation from element (111, PADk) below The situation of variation.Firstly, currently assuming that touch panel is judged as OFF (can not be determined as ON), (OK4).OK4 is for example equivalent to When device (110AA) power supply OFF.Then, if engaging means (110AA) power supply, device (110AA) execution processing etc., from And certain one in multiple SW (111, SWk) is become into ON.Then, by means of SW (111, SWk), element (111, PADk) connection To earthing potential or contact conductor (114), so that the physical quantity variation (increasing of physical quantity occurs for the sensor on touch panel Add).But, when the physical quantity variation is insufficient, that is, when the physical quantity of touch panel detection is not up to threshold values (STON) When, touch panel can not be determined as ON (NG5).
(3) it when physical quantity variation is insufficient, can not perceive from ON to OFF
When physical quantity when off is close to threshold values (STON) (OK6), even the situation that physical quantity variation is insufficient,
Physical quantity after physical quantity variation reaches threshold values (STON) or more, and touch panel can be determined that ON (ON7).But, In this case, when becoming OFF from ON, there are the reduction of physical quantity is insufficient, physical quantity does not become threshold values (STAFF) Situation below.At this point, touch panel can not determine OFF (NG7).
(4)
In addition, engaging means (110AA) power supply, even if also being had in the case where multiple SW (111, SWk) whole OFF The physical quantity formed by means of element (111, PADk) is the situation (NG8) of threshold values (STON) or more.At this point, there are devices (110AA) can not become the physical quantity from element (111, PADk) to be determined as OFF shape due to the control of SW (111, SWk) The situation of state.At this point, even if touch panel becomes and is judged as ON in the case where SW (111, SWk) is become ON by CPU (116) State (OK9).Therefore, device (110AA) execution processing etc., thus even if by certain one in multiple SW (111, SWk) In the case where becoming OFF, the physical quantity from element (111, PADk) does not become threshold values (STOFF) below.Therefore, touch surface Plate can not determine OFF (NG10).
(5) countermeasure (variation from OFF to ON) when physical quantity variation is insufficient
As shown in situation of the OK4 to NG5, when physical quantity variation is insufficient, the physical quantity of touch panel detection is not up to valve When being worth (STON), the physical quantity variation of coupling conductors (conductor (114A) is used in 114Ak or coupling) is overlapped by device (110AA), To make touch panel can detecte the variation from OFF to ON.In device (110AA), link with SW (115), SW (115Ak or SW (115A)) becomes ON, thus as coupling object caused by conductor (conductor (114A) is used in 114Ak or coupling) Reason amount variation (increase of physical quantity) is also overlapped in touch panel.By coupling conductor, (conductor is used in 114Ak or coupling (114A)) caused by physical quantity variation be overlapped in the physical quantity variation as caused by element (111, PADk), near to or in contact with element (111, PADk) if sensor in total physical quantity variation reach threshold values (STON) or more, sensor can be determined that For ON (OK12).
(5) countermeasure (variation from ON to OFF) when physical quantity variation is insufficient
In turn, examination, will be multiple by means of device (110AA) execution processing etc. in the state that the judgement of OK12 is ON Certain one becomes the situation of OFF in SW (111, SWk).At this point, in this embodiment, CPU (116) and it is connected to OFF state The SW (115, PADk) of element (111, PADk) links, and will be connected to coupling conductors (114Ak or coupling conductor (114A)) SW (115Ak or SW (115A)) become OFF.Then, by coupling conductor, (114Ak or coupling are drawn with conductor (114A)) Rise physical quantity variation be overlapped in the physical quantity variation as caused by element (111, PADk), near to or in contact with element (111, PADk total physical quantity variation in sensor) becomes threshold values (STOFF) below.By means of this, touch panel can be sentenced It is fixed, it is OFF (OK13) from ON variation in the sensor position near to or in contact with element (111, PADk).
As described above, linking with the SW (111, SWk) for being connected to element (111, PADk), coupling conductor will be connected to SW (115Ak or SW (the 115A)) control of (conductor (114A) is used in 111Ak or coupling) is ON and OFF, can make object when ON Reason amount increases, and reduces physical quantity when OFF.Therefore, can use coupling conductor, (conductor is used in 114Ak or coupling (114A)), increase the physical quantity variation amplitude of element (111, PADk) effectively.Therefore, even if by element (111, PADk) In the case that caused physical quantity variation does not have sufficient amplitude of variation relative to threshold values (STON) and threshold values (STOFF), benefit With coupling conductor (114Ak or coupling conductor (114A)), so as to so that touch panel identifies the variation of ON and OFF.
<implementation form 37>
Referring to 5~Figure 26 of Figure 25 3, graphical representation of exemplary is based on element (111) the position identification side of information equipment (200) Method and the processing of the program of the location recognition method.Wherein, device (110) is for example constituted with the device of implementation form 34 (110Y) It is identical.Therefore, in this embodiment, the object of information equipment (200) enforcing location identification is, for example, power free lamellar Device.But, the processing based on 37 touch panel of implementation form, the code that can be applied to the implementation form 0 fill Set (1), 1 device below (110) of implementation form etc..In addition, the composition of information equipment (200) is identical as implementation form 1, because And the description thereof will be omitted.
Figure 25 5 is in the acting surface of the device (110) of information equipment (200) process object as this implementation form The arrangement example (referred to as Class1) of element (111), Figure 25 6 are that another arrangement example of the element (111) of device (110) (claims For type 2), Figure 25 7 is the figure for illustrating the region ID and touch area of the configuration element (111) in device (110) acting surface. In this embodiment, as shown in 5~Figure 25 of Figure 25 7, device (110) as approach or touch information equipment (200) touch On the acting surface in the face of panel, in the grid point virtually formed, it is configured with element (111).That is, element (111) is arranged to make The center of element (111) is located at each grid point.But, in grid point, grid point and touch area including the region ID Grid point.
In the region ID, totally 4 conductors are provided in advance, 2 reference conductors, 2 conductors of information,.So-called reference conductor, Referring to becomes the element (111) for determining the benchmark of grid position in the element (111) for be configured at the region ID grid point.Benchmark is led Body is configured at the 2 of diagonal position 4 jiaos usually in the region ID of rectangular shape.That is, the allocation position of reference conductor limits For the upper left corner and the lower right corner 1 group (hereinafter referred to as types of patterns 1) and the upper right corner and 1 jiao of the lower left corner (hereinafter referred to as types of patterns 2) 2 kinds.
In addition, so-called conductors of information refers to the rectangular shape as the element (111) for being configured at the region ID grid point The region ID in element (111) except reference conductor.Conductors of information can be in each device (110), in multiple grid points (at 7 Ⅹ 8=56-4=52 in Figure 25 7) is freely configured, and is had and is determined code (ID) needed for identification device (110) The effect of justice.
So-called touch area is touched in the finger contact for the opposing face for being provided to device (110) acting surface for user Operation, is to cause the area of physical quantity variation relative to touch panel on the acting surface of finger contact (inboard) immediately below Domain.As an example of finger contact, can for example described implementation form 34 contact terminal (114A).In addition, following In implementation form including this implementation form, will by means of on device (110) above (reverse side of acting surface) finger contact and Touch operation to finger contact, position on the acting surface that touch panel surface causes physical quantity variation be (finger contact Inner position), collectively referred to as touch point.In this embodiment, touch point is for example equipped with 3 Ⅹ 4=12.But, and it is non-tactile The quantity of point is limited to 12.(physical quantity variation caused by touch operation is sent out for position on acting surface corresponding with touch point Raw position), element (111) corresponding with points are touched can also be equipped with.In addition, on acting surface corresponding with touch point Element (111) and touch point can also for example be connected by conductor (circuit).
But, the position on touch point and acting surface corresponding with touch point, can not also be equipped with element (111) and Conductor (circuit).In the case where not being equipped with element (111) and conductor (circuit), if user's touch operation touch point, According to the dielectric constant of the substrate on the thin plate of device (110), on acting surface corresponding with touch point (inside touch point), It has an effect in the physical quantity variation of touch panel.In the case where substrate dielectric constant is sufficiently high, even if in no element (111) or in the case where circuit, the touch panel of information equipment (200) also perceives this physical quantity variation.As described above, The device (110) of this implementation form is properly termed as with 4 elements (111,2 reference conductors, 2 letters configured in the region ID Cease conductor) and touch area at 12 touch point touch card.But, it is also included within touch area below without element (111) Situation, exist and be added together 2 reference conductors, 2 conductors of information and touch point, the situation of referred to as 5 conductors.
Figure 25 5 is the device (110) of types of patterns 1.In addition, Figure 25 6 is the device (110) of types of patterns 2.In order to anti- Only misidentification, in this embodiment, the conductors of information in the region ID are not configured at 2 adjacent grid points.That is, 2 conductors of information Configuration (diagonal line up and down), be setting configuration at least 1 at dotted line zero represent configuration candidate locations (at least sky one A grid point).Conductors of information is shown by means of there is the conductors of information of dot hachure (T1-3, T1-4, T2-3, T2-4) in the figure Example property diagram.In addition, reference conductor exemplary diagram is shown as dark circles in the figure, graphical representation of exemplary be benchmark conductor (T1-1, T1-2,T2-1,T2-2).In addition, not 2 reference conductors are defined in 4 jiaos of the region ID, for example, it is also possible to be configured at 4 jiaos Upper and lower or left and right.The position of 2 reference conductors is determined as except 4 jiaos, can correspondingly largely be arranged and card is identified ID。
The group of ID and the touch input (l) based on touch operation is collectively referred to as ID area code.Types of patterns can be defined Code number (also referred to as ID number) 977 Ⅹ touch areas in 1 region ID touch the ID area code of 11,724 kinds of 12=of points. In addition, being directed to types of patterns 2,976 Ⅹ touch area of ID area code number can be defined and touch points 12=11,712 kinds of ID Area code.In addition, the code number of types of patterns 2 from the code number 977 of types of patterns 1 reduce one, be 976, this be because For the code for being configured with conductors of information at 2 with 14 jiaos of the duplicate region ID of types of patterns is foreclosed.
According to figure~Figure 25 8, illustrate the recognizer of ID area code.
(algorithm summary)
Algorithm summary is as follows.
(step G1) information equipment (200) identifies 5 conductor sensing positions, retrieves 2 from 5 by means of touch panel A reference conductor.
The perception of (step G2) touch panel is from the region ID that the inspection of 2 reference conductors arbitrarily determines both fixed number (such as 48 Place) conductors of information allocation position (grid point) 2 at configure conductors of information, to identify the ID of definition.
(step G3) in turn, information equipment (200) is to the touch by constituting from 12 that 2 reference conductors arbitrarily determine Region carries out specific.Moreover, on information equipment (200) detection touch area corresponding with the touch point of touch operation is carried out Grid point identifies touch operation relevant to ID to perceive the touch selection (at 12 1 at) in particular card ID.Example Such as, in the device of card-like (110), it is formed with the mark for representing process object.Information equipment (200) is to progress touch operation The position of device (110) carry out specific, the operation of application program corresponding with the mark in specific position, content are provided The functions such as operation/reading.Therefore, the representative selecting object that user is formed in card-like device (110) by touch operation Mark near touch point, it is possible to implement operation, operation/reading of content of the application program etc..
(algorithm detailed content)
The graphical representation of exemplary algorithm detailed content in Figure 26 3.The CPU of information equipment (200) is by means of can be on RAM The computer program of operation executes the processing of Figure 26 3.
(step D1) information equipment (200) is detected and is sent out in the element (111) and touch point in the region ID on touch panel The coordinate position of raw physical quantity variation.The coordinate value perceived in coordinate system on the touch panel of Figure 25 9 a little is known as T1-1:P1 (X1’、Y1’)、T1-2:P2(X2’、Y2’)、T1-3:P3(X3’、 Y3’)、T1-4:P4(X4’、Y4’)、T1-5:P5(X5’、 Y5').Information equipment (200) all calculates 4 points of the region ID and 1 point of the touch area distance between 2 points in totally 5 points of perception. For information equipment (200) from the longer side of distance between 2 points, sequence (sort) is L1~L10.Ranking results such as L1 > L2 > It is obtained shown in L3 > L4 > L5 > L6 > L7 > L8 > L9 > L10.Information equipment (200) perceived in the coordinate system on touch panel L1~ L10, thus the numerical value of L1~L10 of information equipment (200) acquisition is different from the numerical value of actual size.In addition, the XY of Figure 25 8 Coordinate system is using the lower left of touch area as the coordinate system on device (110, card-like medium) acting surface of origin.In addition, The XiYi coordinate system of Figure 25 8 is based on standardized coordinate value, so as in the ID retrieval worksheet (area ID of Figure 26 2 Domain coordinate value-ID number code table, the hereinafter also referred to as region ID table) in coordinate value is combined.As described above, by Figure 25 9 Each perception point coordinate value of card-like medium rotation θ degree when loading on touch panel, with the X ' Y '-coordinate system table of touch panel It is existing.That is, X ' Y '-coordinate system is the coordinate system of touch panel when card rotation θ degree being made to load on touch panel.In addition, Figure 26 1 X " Y " coordinate system be using will rotate θ degree load card rotation-θ after card direction as positive (Y " axis direction), each point is sat Mark the coordinate system of transformation.This coordinate system will can also largely make using lower left as origin in the perception of touch panel coordinate Upper left side (can also be upper right side, lower right side) is as origin.
In the present embodiment, in the geometry arrangement of element (111), 2 reference conductors are longer from distance between 2 points Side rise, be included in the 1st~5 range (L1~L5).2 reference conductors are included in the basis of range within the 5th, as From Figure 25 8 it is found that this is because in the presence of from least certain point in touch area to 4 points of the distance perceived in the region ID The situation of distance between 2 reference conductors.In addition, if it is being arranged to away from T1-2 (X2, Y2) the farthest touch region ID 1 point of respective distance is shorter than the card of distance between 2 reference conductors, then 2 reference conductors between 2 points apart from longest side, It is included in the 1st~4 range.
(step D2) in Figure 25 9, both ends coordinate corresponding with the 1st~5 all distance L1~L5 line segments be known as Pi, Pj.Pi (Xi ', Yi '), Pj (Xj ', Yj '), i=1~5, j=1~5,2 points of i ≠ j are considered as benchmark by information equipment (200) Conductor is in cornerwise rectangular area between with corresponding 2 points, and whether retrieval can perceive 2 conductors of information.Scheming In 255 types of patterns 1, for bottom edge, to form 2 triangles that vertex is right angle between 2 points, so that 2 being lighted from this, 2 sides Length reaches the ratio of width to height m:n=7:6 of the grid block number of Figure 25 8 along clockwise direction, and (card actual size such as 42mm is to card Actual size 36mm) ratio, so as to generate rectangle.
In the types of patterns 2 of Figure 25 6, for bottom edge, 2 sides are formed, so that lighting from this 2,2 sides between 2 points Length reaches the ratio of the ratio of width to height m:n=7:6 in the counterclockwise direction.
In Figure 26 0, the region ID is found out as follows relative to the rotation angle θ of touch panel.
The diagonal angles of connection P1 and P2 relative to the region the ID direction Xi are θ 0=tan-1 (n/m) (but, m= 7, n=6).
The angle relative to 2 points of connection of T1-1 (P1) of X-direction, T1-2 (P2) when inclination load card be θ '= tan-1{(Y2’-Y1’)/(X2’-X1’)}。
At this point, the card gradient relative to the direction touch panel Y ' is θ=θ '-θ 0.It, can be with moreover, as shown in Figure 26 0 Based on 2 points that are considered as reference conductor, calculated by θ 0=tan-1 (n/m).Therefore, pass through
(formula 1)
θ=tan-1 ((Y2 '-Y1 ')/(X2 '-X1 '))-θ 0；
Calculate direction θ.Information equipment (200) is coordinately transformed 5 perception points, for example, allowing to be considered as base Center is rotation angle center (but, information equipment (200) can also be using certain position as rotation center) between 2 points of quasi-conductor, The angle rotation-θ, along forward direction (Y " axis direction) configuration of card.By means of coordinate transform, from 2 point T1-1:P1 (X1 ", Y1 "), T1-2: P2 (X2 ", Y2 ") rises, and the region ID becomes in X1 "~X2 " and Y1 "~Y2 ", can readily recognize leading in the region rectangle ID Body.Similarly, touch area can be geometrically determined as lower section by information equipment (200).When in corresponding touch area It is interior there are when 1 conductor, information equipment (200) can identify 2 reference conductors, 2 conductors of information, 1 touch point.
In addition, considering element (111) when whether information equipment (200) determine has conductor in the region ID and touch area Perceptual error (caused by conductor sensing resolution ratio as touch panel etc.), determine and in left and right up and down direction add set sky The determinating area of complementary space.Information equipment (200) can be directed to types of patterns 1, types of patterns 2, implement the step D3 Processing, all elements (111, reference conductor, conductors of information and touch point) are identified as types of patterns 1, in types of patterns 2 Certain one.
(step D3) information equipment (200) utilizes the coordinate value of ID regional work table coordinate system, to 5 points in Figure 26 1 of warp The coordinate value of coordinate transform is standardized, and is applied to relevant work table, is found out corresponding ID code.In standardisation, information Equipment (200) first by through coordinate transform the P3 (X3 ", Y3 ") for being considered as conductors of information and P4 (X4 ", Y4 ") be reduced to P0 (X0 ", Y0 ") finds out relative coordinate values Δ P3 (Δ X3=X3 "-X0 ", Δ Y3=Y3 "-Y0 ") and Δ P4 (Δ X4 from P0 =X4 "-X0 ", Δ Y4=Y4 "-Y0 ").Then, if distance between 2 reference conductors is known as L0, information equipment (200) Then by each coordinate value of Δ P3 and Δ P4 divided by K=L0/ (m2+n2) 1/2, to become the seat of ID regional work table coordinate system Scale value.The coordinate value of ID regional work table coordinate system is as shown in Figure 25 8, for example, integer value of (0,0)~(7,6).Wherein, Coordinate value rounds up and realizes integer (i) after decimal point.Wherein, misidentification in order to prevent, only by i- α or more, less than i+ α's is known as i, preferably α=0.25 or so.That is, information equipment (200) determine within the scope of error alpha (Δ X3, Δ Y3), (Δ X4, Δ Y4) whether become Figure 25 8 ID regional work table coordinate value.In addition, information equipment (200) is by i-1+ α values above, deficiency I- α value, i+ α values above are considered as mistake less than i+1- α value.
(step D4) information equipment (200) determines whether the result of D3 is mistake.Information equipment (200) is being determined as mistake It mistakes, be considered as reference conductor for 2 points below and recalculate (return step D2).
(step D5) when suitable ID regional work table coordinate system coordinate value, information equipment (200) finds out T1-5:P5 (X5 ", Y5 ") is found out from 2 point T1-1:P1 (X1 ", Y1 "), T1-2:P2 (X2 ", Y2 ") in geometrically determining touch area 12 at coordinate value (center of Figure 26 1).Information equipment (200) make remaining 1 point with find out 12 in coordinate value It is applied within the scope of the permissible value of the heart.That is, information equipment (200) considers the perceptual error of conductor (by touch panel conductor sensing point Caused by resolution etc.), to remaining 1 point whether from 12 points of each centers, belong within the radius r as set spare space (or Rectangle) range, determine to correct errors.And, if it is decided that result be it is correct, then information equipment (200) obtain touch location number Code.If being not belonging to the range of certain one at 12, it is determined as mistake, be considered as reference conductor for 2 points below and recalculates (return step D2).
Integer in (step D4) is found out the seat of 2 conductors of information of ID regional work table coordinate system by (step D6) Scale value is checked in ID area coordinate value-ID number code table shown in Figure 26 2, and ID number is retrieved.Identify the ID number and touching of retrieval After touching region touch location number, the reading of corresponding application program (also including the input of parameter) or implementation content can be run. Fortune alternatively, it is also possible to the θ that will be found out by card centre coordinate value PC ' (XC ', YC ') and the formula 1, for application program The reading of row (also including the input of parameter) or content.
<implementation form 38>
Referring to 4~Figure 26 of Figure 26 9, graphical representation of exemplary is identified by means of element (111) position of information equipment (200) Method and based on the location recognition method program processing.In this embodiment, information equipment (200) is with the configuration of the region ID 4 elements (111, conductor) and 1 touch point be conductors of information, identification conductor configures pattern, defined in 5 perception points, Obtain ID.Other of this implementation form are constituted and are acted on identical as implementation form 37.
In this embodiment, using 4 elements (111, conductor) of the region ID configuration and 1 touch point as conductors of information, Identify that conductor configures pattern, composition and effect in addition to this, implementation form 37 directly applies to this implementation form.In addition, being Misidentification is prevented, in the present embodiment, the configuration (diagonal up and down) between 2 kinds of elements (111) is at setting 1 with dotted line The zero configuration candidate locations represented, so that the not adjacent configuration of element (111).
(algorithm detailed content)
(step E1) graphical representation of exemplary algorithm detailed content in Figure 26 9.In the present embodiment, with regard to the touch of Figure 26 5 For perception point in coordinate system on panel, coordinate value be known as P1 (X1 ', Y1 '), P2 (X2 ', Y2 '), P3 (X3 ', Y3 '), P4(X4',Y4'),P5(X5',Y5').Information equipment (200) all calculates 1 point of 4 points of the region ID and touch area perceived Distance between 2 points in totally 5 points.From the longer side of distance between 2 points, it is ordered as L1~L10.Ranking results such as L1 > L2 Shown in > L3 > L4 > L5 > L6 > L7 > L8 > L9 > L10.In addition, the XY coordinate system of Figure 26 4 is using touch area lower left as origin Coordinate type.In addition, each perception point coordinate when card-like device (110) the rotation θ degree in Figure 26 5 to be loaded on to touch panel Value is showed with the X ' Y '-coordinate system of touch panel.The longest line segment L1 for connecting 2 perception points is made of P1 and P5, relative to card Forward direction (Y direction), constitute the angle, θ 1 of L1.θ 1 as with the corresponding information of longest line segment of 2 perception points of connection it One, information equipment (200) are pre-set at, such as be stored in ROM.
(step E2) is in the ID identification based on 5 perception points, firstly, information equipment (200) finds out composition connection 2 The starting point PS and terminal PE for perceiving the longest line segment L1 of point (are in this variation P5 and P1).When inclination load card, relative to The direction touch panel Y ' connected by starting point of PS the angle of the line segment of 2 points PS, PE for θ '=tan-1 (Y1 '-Y5 ')/ (X1’-X5’)。
(step E3) information equipment (200) finds out the phase by L1 other 4 perception points being standardized with PS origin To coordinate value Δ P1 { Δ X1 '=(X1 '-X5 ')/L1, Δ Y1 '=(Y1 '-Y5 ')/L1 }, Δ P2 X2 '=(X2 '-X5 ')/ L1, Δ Y2 '=(Y2 '-Y5 ')/L1 }, Δ P3 { Δ X3 '=(X3 '-X5 ')/L1, Δ Y3 '=(Y3 '-Y5 ')/L1 }, Δ P4 ' { Δ X4 '=(X4 '-X5 ')/L1, Δ Y4 '=(Y4 '-Y5 ')/L1 }.
In turn, information equipment (200) makes the coordinate value rotation-θ ' on touch panel as shown in Figure 26 7, carries out coordinate and becomes It changes.Coordinate after the coordinate transform is known as normalized coordinates, the coordinate value after coordinate transform is known as normalized coordinates value. Wherein, it due to that can not differentiate starting point and terminal, thus finds out respectively using P5 and P1 as the coordinate value of each perception point of origin.
(step E4) is moreover, information equipment (200) is calculated in advance except the starting point (PS) and terminal for constituting longest line segment (L1) (PE) the normalized coordinates value of 3 points except, the angle (θ 1) with longest line segment (L1) relative to card positive (Y axis direction) Accordingly, it is stored in normalized coordinates-ID number code table.Information equipment (200) checks longest line segment (L1) relative to the positive (Y-axis of card Direction) angle (θ 1) and normalized coordinates-ID number code table in the angle (θ 1) of longest line segment that stores.
Figure 26 8 is normalized coordinates-ID number code table example.For the configuration coordinate of the element (111) in 4 regions ID And the grid point combination of touch area calculates in the angle (θ 1) of each longest line segment (L1) and removes starting point (PS) and terminal (PE) Except 3 points normalized coordinates value, be stored in ROM." origin system " field is according to longest line segment (L1) in figure Which one determines in endpoint (P1, P5) for origin, shows 2 kinds of coordinate systems." ID number " field shows the table in Figure 26 8 Each row determine ID." angle (θ 1) of longest line segment " field is longest line segment (L1) relative to positive (Y direction) Angle (θ 1).Information equipment (200) possesses the length of longest line segment (L1) and the corresponding table of angle (θ 1) in RAM or ROM, If thus calculating the length of longest line segment (L1), angle (θ 1) can be found out." determining range radius " is in Figure 26 8 The position coordinates of 3 points that specific coordinate value is obtained with information equipment (200) from touch panel are carried out in table to be allowed to miss Difference." conductors of information coordinate 1 "~" conductors of information coordinate 3 " is 3 points except the endpoint (P1, P5) by longest line segment (L1) Combinatorial coordinates normalized coordinates value.When longest line segment (L1) angle (θ 1) unanimously, and the endpoint of longest line segment (L1) The coordinate of 3 points except (P1, P5) is in the error range for determining range radius, with conductors of information 1~conductors of information of coordinate When coordinate 3 is consistent, information equipment (200) is by the ID number of corresponding line specifically for ID.
For set error, the perceived resolution of touch panel is affected, and error becomes the absolute of actual size Value.On the other hand, respectively perception coordinate by connection 2 perception point longest line segments (L1) be standardized, thus error range without Method is determined according to ID (that is, distance of L1).Therefore, in Figure 26 8, even if in standardized coordinate value, for appropriateness It is consistent to determine, error range radius (r) is provided in normalized coordinates-ID number code table.If with the coordinate value in worksheet Centered on (I, J), interior into radius (r), then information equipment (200) is determined as unanimously.In addition, information equipment (200) can also be with Rectangle is set by the error range to determine.
(step E4) is held moreover, information equipment (200) from the coordinate value obtained, carries out ID and touch location number specific The corresponding processing of row.
(effect) as described above, information equipment (200) is checked in normalized coordinates-ID number code table of Figure 26 8, When consistent in set error range, the ID as corresponding ID number can be found out.Therefore, information equipment (200) can execute Multiplicity processing corresponding with the ID found out.
[variation 1] perceives the normalised coordinate value put by each of origin of starting point to check, such as 8 institute of Figure 26 Show, when being arranged in worksheet respectively using P5 and P1 as the situation of origin, rotation-θ ' and carry out coordinate transform, utilize structure Implement at the certain point (P5 and P1 in certain one) of 2 of Figure 26 6 perception point longest line segments.On the other hand, worksheet Certain 1 situation can be only set, carried out using 2 kinds of coordinate values being coordinately transformed with 2 points (both P5 and P1) for origin Verification., can also be with touch panel coordinate sense in addition, although the coordinate system of 4~Figure 26 of Figure 26 7 is using lower left as origin The upper left side (or upper right side, lower right side) largely used in knowing is origin.
[variation 2] is in addition, normalized coordinates-ID number code table is not limited to the example of Figure 26 8.For example, as standard Change coordinate-ID number code table, the region ID can also be divided into and touch area is encoded, and be included in worksheet.It is standardizing It in coordinate-ID number code table, is standardized, thus is excluded because of similar figures size using the longest line segment determined by 2 perception points Caused conductor configuration, then can also be attached but if the coordinate system (coordinate value of per unit length) of touch panel can be identified Add the similar figures combinations of patterns for depending on the longest line segment distance determined by 2 perception points, a large amount of ID can also be defined.Separately Outside, standardized to be advantageous in that, it can not be influenced, be identified by the coordinate system or differences in resolution of each touch panel The configuration of conductor.
[variation 3] in this variation, although with the region ID with touch area is interdependent saves as premise, be not limited to This, can be used for ID definition and identification based on 5 conductor sensings.In turn, in tablet computer or office touch panel etc. In, 10 points or more can be perceived, thus it is not limited at 5 points, it can be generated in multiple conductors, identification id.In addition, such as Figure 26 4 Shown, conductor allocation position or touch location are arranged by predetermined distance, but if being set to any position and forming Subgraph Case then can be set, identify more ID.But, the configuration of conductor, touch point need the abundant conductor sense for grasping touch panel Know resolution ratio, consider distance between conductor, conductor sizes, influenced caused by coupling etc., so as not to which wrong identification occurs.
[variation 4] is if will be relative to card positive (Y direction) to connect 2 longests for perceiving point (PS and PE) The PS of line segment is that the angle of origin is known as θ 1, then the accounting of 66 card loading direction according to fig. 2, the card relative to Y-direction tilts Spending θ and calculating is θ=θ '-θ 1, but can also operation (packet by θ or card centre coordinate value PC ' (XC ', YC ') for application program Include the input of parameter) or content reading.In turn, if the direction for loading card on touch panel is specific, θ 1 can also be attached It is added on the combination of pattern, can also define, identify the ID of vast number.In order to cope with use as described above, preferably in Figure 26 8 Normalized coordinates-ID number code table in include θ 1.In the present embodiment, the setting of the conductive pattern of card, identification are chatted It states, but without the electronic system of electrical control and carry out can also be similarly in smart card, digital stamp etc. of electrical control It uses.
[variation 5] is stored with longest line segment (L1) relative to card just in normalized coordinates-ID number code table of Figure 26 8 To the angle (θ 1) of (Y direction).In addition, information equipment (200) possesses longest in RAM or ROM in the step E4 The corresponding table of the length of line segment (L1) and angle (θ 1) finds out angle (θ 1) based on the length of longest line segment (L1), with Based on angle (θ 1), reference standard coordinate-ID number code table.But it is also possible to replace this processing, in normalized coordinates- Longest line segment (L1) is stored in ID number code table.In the step E4, information equipment (200) possesses longest in RAM or ROM The corresponding table of the length of line segment (L1) and angle (θ 1), based on the length of longest line segment (L1), reference standard coordinate- ID number code table can also check the normalized coordinates value obtained from touch panel and lead with normalized coordinates-ID number code table information Body 1~conductors of information of coordinate coordinate 3.
<implementation form 39>
[threshold values of the beginning-about the conductive contact of touch panel]
(1) threshold values variation when smart phone etc. was by 10 seconds
In many types of iPhon (registered trademark), occur to touch condition events as the capacity according to detection Condition has the first, second threshold values (furthermore, it is assumed that each conductor situation that also wrong processing is arranged).The member of device (110) The conductors such as part (111) are in contact touch panel moment, and using the first low valve valve, touch panel is also perceived compared under low capacity Conductor.Threshold values can be set after touch panel sense conductor, OFF can not be immediately become because of lag and (perceive non-sense Know), and then become OFF under more low capacity.But touch panel perception conductor in, if at least one conductor with The second valve then was arranged for all conductors continuously across 10 second time in the state (stationary state) not moved on touch panel Value.If the perception capacity of respective conductors is lower than the OFF capacity of the second threshold values, then touch panel is not felt immediately in the moment Know conductor.But, in addition, during all conductors are mobile, it is assumed that finger is the state moved, is continued using the first valve Value.That is, in the state that at least one is static, in the case where the capacity of no finger degree, it is judged as leading for not finger Body is touching, and conductor OFF event is published to OS and application program from device driver.In addition, if including exceeding second The conductor of threshold values OFF capacity, and respective conductors are static, then while not perceiving.Then, it is moved slightly perceiving respective conductors In the case where, it perceives again, but become unstable behavior (being determined as that mistake is arranged).In turn, in the conductor of stationary state In the case where not perceiving, when beyond the second threshold values OFF capacity conductor just when moving, respective conductors be do not perceive state, but Touch panel becomes unstable behavior (being determined as that mistake is arranged).In addition, being more than the second threshold values OFF capacity in all conductors In the case where, it is unrelated with stationary state and/or moving condition, do not become and does not perceive state.In various situation, even if In the presence of not perceiving or the conductor of nonsteady behavior, later when touch panel perceives new conductor, only respective conductors are normal Perception realized the processing according to the capacity of respective conductors, static/movement during 10 seconds again.I.e., it is believed that every A conductor all implements the first, second threshold values, mistake setting.
On the other hand, unrelated with first and second threshold values, the presence of conductor, as long as there is provided capacity, even if not felt Know, also detect always, when conductor is mobile, touch panel tracks its movement, and detects conductor.But, according to the threshold values of setting Condition represents the event (also including mistake setting) of conductor ON/OFF, the sense of various application program identification conductor of exploitation Know (also including mistake setting) situation.On the other hand, in the state of perceiving capacity smaller conductor, in conductor level Or in the state of enumerating vertically, due to the characteristic of touch panel, the capacity of detection declines again, the whole for occurring 1 or enumerating Conductor becomes the situation of OFF.Wherein, as long as other conductors do not become not perceived, become not under horizontal or vertical state Perceived conductor it is not horizontal or vertical enumerate it is mobile in the case where, perceived by touch panel.Such as to avoid this feelings Condition improves the capacity of conductive contact, preferably to perceive sufficient capacity.In addition, either at finger or children's hand Refer to or the small situation etc. of contact surface, due to off-capacity, if using the second threshold values, perception less than.Then, if plus Wide contact area increases capacity, and keeps conductor mobile, then perceives again, but the behavior of touch panel becomes unstable (false It is set to mistake setting).In addition, if the area of connector is big, degree of being adjacent to is high, including wiring for the capacity perceived The capacity of connector is big, then can not say and be easier to perceive.
(2) threshold values variation when tablet computer is more than 10 seconds
In iPad (registered trademark), equally with iPhone (registered trademark), as the item that touch condition events occur Part has first and second threshold values (also assuming that in the presence of the third threshold values for including error handle), is considered as the base of first and second threshold values Present treatment is identical as smart phone.But in the big iPad of shell (registered trademark), compared with smart phone, significantly feel Know conductor capacity, reaction is good.Conductive contact in the region ID of this implementation form (is equivalent to each implementation form The code output section (13) of element (111), embodiment 0) etc. conductor in, in principle be used as the second threshold values, the inspection of touch panel Surveying result does not become OFF.It therefore, can be as card game, when making to be stuck in the movement of touch panel surface after continued broadcasting It puts.As tablet computer personality card, in the touch area of this implementation form, such as implement the utensil of aspect graph 291A~Figure 29 6 It is shown, in order to inexpensively manufacture, it is not equipped with via hole, conductive contact in touch area, only passes through outfit immediately below Jie in touch Electric column can perceive touch.But the conductive contact in the region ID perception capacity (also including the wiring of connection) is small, when in wood On table in the case where (perception capacity is smaller than iron) use, also there is the situation not being perceived during 10 seconds.That is, with regard to touch surface For the capacity of plate perception, if the area of connector is big, the capacity of the connector including wiring is big, the degree of being adjacent to touch panel Height can not then be said and be easier to perceive.That is, no matter under which kind of situation, it is so-called can normal sense conductor, if second Threshold values has the abundant capacity that can perceive all conductors, then is not limited to 10 seconds or more stationary states and/or movement shapes State can normally continue to perceive.
[secondly-touch panel use environment]
Smart phone, tablet computer, the perception capacity of office touch panel are different because of type or use environment, thus It is preferred that the utensil that no matter can be functioned under which kind of type or which kind of use environment, but if via hole, contact, connector Quantity increase, then expense rise.The personality card specification determined by each touch panel characteristic can also be thus considered as.
(about touch area when using smart phone)
For use environment, it is assumed that hold the situation of smart phone with hand and be placed on the situation used on desk.Table Son has the wooden table and iron desk, and condition is set to and is difficult to work orderly on the wooden table perceived in conductor capacity.
1) smart phone is held with hand to use.
2) it is placed on the wooden table and uses.1) it, 2) as shown in Figure 27 of this implementation form 0, Figure 27 1 equipped with finger touches It in the case where point, via hole, conductive contact, is perceived well, reaction especially 1) is more preferable.
But as shown in 1~Figure 29 of Figure 29 6 of implementation form 40, in the case where only dielectric post, 1) although in slightly It slightly reacts, but is difficult to perceive touch capacity, thus be preferably equipped with finger contact, via hole, conductive contact.In addition, if making card Thickness is sufficiently thin, reach 0.8mm or so hereinafter, using high dielectric constant material, then only can also easily be felt using dielectric post Know touch capacity.On the other hand, as shown in Figure 29 1B~Figure 29 1E of implementation form 40, preferably using dielectric post as conductive column Utensil (bottom surface of upper plate and bottom plate in addition to touch area is non-conductor).At this point, not needing the via hole inside column, both Conductive column can be placed on bottom plate, it is also possible by means it is multiple molding and be provided on bottom plate.Alternatively, it is also possible to by metal Stick, metal wire are as the conductive column.In addition, compared with 2), 1) via the human body of touch and the shell of smart phone, with touch Panel constitutes circuit, thus the capacity perceived is more, completely reacted.
(about the region ID when using smart phone)
Default does not have to finger and touches yet retained storage capacity, in order to perceive the conductive contact in the region ID, is equipped with and extends 30cm or so Above wiring and retained storage capacity, are connected by the via hole being equipped on wiring with conductive contact, it is possible thereby to make touch surface Plate detects conductive contact.The design condition of the 30cm is obtained from experiment.Using 0.07mm, 0.15mm, 0.33mm, The conducting wire of 1mm extends the conducting wire for being welded in diameter 8mm circular gold-plated conductor along vertical direction, is fixed on wooden stick, Hand is set close to conducting wire, not change conductive length, whether experiment perceives conductive contact.As a result, when holding smart phone with hand When, from 21cm, conductive contact is definitely perceived, when smart phone to be placed on the wooden table, from 28cm, is definitely perceived Conductive contact.In tablet computer, when being put on iron table, from 27cm, conductive contact is definitely perceived, when being placed on the wooden table When upper, from 29cm, conductive contact was definitely perceived.From this result, diameter in 0.07mm between 1mm, even The thickness variation of about 14 times of the 1mm of 0.07mm, can only recognize the error of number %, it is therefore apparent that conductor length is that perception is conductive An important factor for connector.Accordingly, with respect to smart phone and tablet computer, no matter under which kind of behaviour in service, as not inciting somebody to action Conducting wire extension is determined as 30cm by the nearly conducting wire of hand sticker or conductive contact and the design condition for perceiving conductive contact.
1) smart phone is held with hand to use.
2) it is placed on the wooden table and uses.1), 2) good, especially 1), even if finger not close to wiring, conductive contact Sensitive and reactive is also good, but in the case where 2), preferably the size of increase wiring lengths, contact and connector, even if so as to finger Without impinging on wiring, device (110) is only loaded on into touch panel, touch panel just can definitely perceive the institute in the region ID There is the capacity of conductive contact.In the iP1hone (registered trademark) of many types, if conductive contact surpasses under static state 10 seconds are spent, then does not perceive all conductive contacts.On the other hand, as smart phone, in the state for not perceiving conductive contact Under, conductive contact is horizontal or vertical enumerate in the state of, due to touch panel characteristic, the capacity of detection is low, it occurs In certain 1 or the conductor equal OFF all enumerated situation.Such case is such as avoided, Figure 27 1, figure such as this implementation form 273, shown in Figure 27 6, even if being also equipped with via hole and conductive contact, to perceive sufficient capacity, then in touch area Perceive less than frequency decline to a great extent.
From " if touching wiring, in the action test more than 1) situation, even more than 10 seconds, touch panel can also be with Perceive the conductive contact in the region ID " angle for, preferably in touch area wiring and be conducting to ID zone conducts current connector The utensil of (AC signal can be connected), even more than 10 seconds, to perceive and lead again whenever to contact touch area Electric connection.In addition, the screen of smart phone is due to small, thus after load blocks and touches 1 touch area, in order to will block from Application program or view content are removed and run on screen, it is believed that use condition is also possible to touch within 10 seconds after load card Touch touch area.After loading card-like device (110), if even if touch panel only once perceives the 4 of the region ID conscientiously A conductive contact does not need the conductive contact for being conducting to the region ID from finger by wiring then, can separate touch area with The region ID.In turn, the size for loading the region of card-like device (110) is substantially identical as card-like device (110), if card-like fills The loading direction set also limits, then, if touch panel perceives 4, the region ID conductive contact, after 10, no Touch after misidentification to touch area, smart phone can perceive.
(about touch area when using tablet computer)
As use environment, think that holding both device (110) and tablet computer with hand without using person uses in principle, To be placed on desk premised on use, condition is to be difficult to perceive the wooden table of the capacity of conductive contact (conductor) in touch panel On work orderly.
In tablet computer, compared with smart phone, touch panel is more preferable to the sensitive and reactive of conductive contact, Ke Yichi Continuous perception.Via hole, conductive contact can not also be equipped in touch area.But, the dielectric constant of the material of dielectric post is formed It is low, according to dielectric column diameter less than 8mm, card thickness be 0.8mm with first-class condition, touch panel is difficult to perceive conductive contact Capacity.In addition, not being equipped with via hole, conductive contact, manufacturing cost can be suppressed to inexpensively.
(about the region ID when using tablet computer)
Default does not have to finger touching device (110) yet retained storage capacity, in order to perceive conductive contact, be equipped with extend 30cm with On wiring, in the via hole on the conductive contact in each region ID being equipped on wiring, wiring is connected with conductive contact. Shell is big, and the retained storage capacity between the human body of ground connection or operation is big, thus perception capacity is more, applies second even more than 10 seconds Threshold values can continue to the conductor sensing in the region ID, very well.On the other hand, it as smart phone, is led perceiving In the state of body, conductor is horizontal or vertical enumerate in the state of, due to the characteristic of touch panel, the capacity of detection is low, hair Raw wherein 1 or whole conductors for enumerating become the situation of OFF.In order to avoid such case, as the present embodiment Figure 27 0, Figure 27 1, even if being also equipped with via hole in touch area and conductive contact not being perceived then to perceive sufficient capacity Frequency decline to a great extent.It is preferred that being conducting to the conductive contact in the region ID in touch area wiring, increase length, the contact of wiring And the size of connector, when being touched with finger, to substantially ensure the connector capacity in the region ID, or only load card shape installed (110) are set, the capacity of all conductive contacts in the region ID can be definitely perceived.If loading the region of card-like device (110) Substantially identical as card size, card loading direction also limits, then, if 4 conductive contacts in the touch panel perception region ID, Then more than 10 seconds after the touch to touch area, smart phone can without misidentification sense conductor connector touch.Knot Card-like device (110) is loaded on touch panel by fruit, even if once, if 4 conductive contacts in the definitely perception region ID, Do not need through wiring from ID zone conducts current connector to the conducting of finger (AC signal), can separate touch area with The region ID.
[utensil (slim upper plate+convex-concave bottom plate) of implementation form-C-CARD]
5 70~Figure 28 according to fig. 2 illustrate device (110AB) relevant to implementation form 39.The device of this implementation form It is the laminal device without using battery (110AB) and implementation form 37, implementation form 38 etc..With the implementation shape States 1 etc. are the same, will be known as acting surface near to or in contact with touch surface plate face in the face of overlook view thin plate.In addition, by acting surface Reverse side is known as above.The acting surface of device (110AB) and all have above with as implementation form 37, implementation form 38 etc. The region ID and touch area.In addition, the touch point of the element (111) in the region ID and touch area is known as conductor below, will borrow Help the element (111) in the region ID and the touch point of touch area shape and configuration and the flat shape that is formed is known as conductor Pattern.
In this embodiment, it is formed by upper plate with bottom plate 2, in order to carry out a large amount of pattern configurations in the region ID, is utilized Without to each conductive pattern production mold including ID zone components (111) and touch area touch point design and technique, Material.As shown in Figure 27 0 (a), upper plate is made of non-conductive high piece or profiled sheeting, so that not being bent when pasting.For This, using hard or not flexible material.In order to make the physical quantitys such as the easily perceivable capacity of touch panel, electric field, touch panel with The contact surface of card preferably forms to form the bottom plate of Figure 27 0 (c), (d) can possess the material of plane.Particularly preferably utilize Dielectric hard heat-curing resin passes through (1) injection molding method, (2) compression forming methods, (3) transfer moudling etc. Molding.When do not make to be stuck in rotated on touch panel and/or mobile stationary state under in use, it is preferable to use as being stained in touching Touch the non-conducting material of high adhesion as panel.
In order to cope with the conductive pattern for representing multiplicity ID, as shown in Figure 27 0 (a), (b), (c), preferably for conductor the bottom of at The upper plate and bottom plate of the overcentre of the candidate locations configured on plate are equipped with the via hole being attached to conductor and wiring (TH1) hole is used.This some holes can both perforate at the time of molding, can also perforate at needs after shaping.In addition, via hole is used Hole needs 0.3~1.0mm of diameter or so.On the other hand, also had as shown in Figure 29 1A, 4 Figure 29~Figure 29 6 etc. according to utensil The situation that can not be perforated in upper plate.This is because can represented there are the dielectric constant of upper plate and baseboard material is sufficiently high The feelings that touch panel can perceive the sufficient static capacity of degree are formed in the conductive pattern (arrangement of element (111)) of ID Shape.In addition, in this embodiment, using hole equipped with via hole (TH2) at the 12 of the touch area of bottom plate.It is preferably fabricated Process is shaped to the plate of Ⅹ 50cm of 40cm or so or more, using printing or gold-plated equal implementations wiring based on conductive ink, attached After, with conductive ink fill via hole.It is provided in the situation for the via hole that upper plate is connected with bottom plate before attachment, is equipped with There is contact, so that the via hole of the two connects.For the printing of card surface and the inside, upper plate, can with a thickness of 0.2~0.3mm To be handled in various printing machines, from this point of view, can directly print.Bottom plate is thicker, thus preferably in other white tablets Then upper printing is pasted on the inside of bottom plate.In addition, needing to cover conductive contact (element (111)) or wiring, contact In the case of, it is preferably covered with white tablets (according to figure, being also possible to other colors), on it printed pattern, production printing Piece.Printed sheet includes ink layer and adhesive layer, is 0.1~0.15m or so, should not influencing conductive contact (element (111)) Perception.In turn, in the case where implementing the conducting based on finger, the thickness of printed sheet is preferably 0.1m or so.Manufacturing process It is preferred that fully considering cost, wiring, contact, via hole, conductive contact etc. are formed on upper plate and bottom plate, it is real in appropriate order It applies printing or printing chip bonding is truncated into card size after bonding upper plate and bottom plate.In addition, element (111) are known as conduction Connector or abbreviation connector.
Figure 27 0 (b), (c) base plate thickness be, for example, 0.6mm~0.8mm, by the interval 6mm equipped in the region ID The via hole of lateral 7 column, longitudinal 8 column Ⅹ 2mm of 2mm of totally 56 conductive contacts of configuration is with column (region ID column).The ruler of these columns Very little and number is design condition, and conductive contact (element (the 111)) number being connect by column and via hole with wiring is any 's.At the position except the conductive contact that finger touches configuration, a possibility that perceiving, is big, but in order to increase conductive contact The candidate of configuration is determined as the interval 6mm.In this way, which the capacity except ID pattern is perceived by the application program of touch panel side Error handle is carried out as misrecognition.If being preferably equipped with via hole hole by the interval of 8mm or so according to original.More Importantly, in volume production process, even if not forming the column of via hole in the position candidate of conductive contact configuration, if there is Whenever at this time can manufacturing process molding at an arbitrary position, then do not need by predetermined distance configure column.At this point, be equipped with not because The pillar for blocking the pressure of bending or finger pressing and being recessed.In the peripheral region of column, equipped with such as deep 0.4~0.5 Slot (cavity between upper plate and bottom plate).The slot is for being equipped with the minimum air layer of dielectric constant (1), to make touch panel To not be touched because of finger or upper plate wiring/contact caused by coupling be mistakenly considered the physical quantity variation from device (110AB), only Correctly perceive the conductive contact in the region ID.Column can be round or polygon, but preferred profile size as small as possible. This is because, if the size of column is big, perceiving finger when touching upper plate with finger by column there are touch panel and holding The worry of amount.The original region ID is configured with to the specific conductive pattern (arrangement of element (111)) of card progress, thus if with Finger touches the position except corresponding configuration and is perceived, then genetic definition is that the ID of conductive pattern is misidentified.Certainly, exist The conductor tab of the position that can not have pattern identification of touch panel side perceives, and is taken as mistake, but touch whenever with finger It frequently malfunctions when touching card, leads to not normally start.Therefore, via hole column is as small as possible, in the feelings that section shape is rectangle Under condition, within preferably 2 Ⅹ 2mm or so, in the case where section shape is circular situation, preferably diameter is within 3mm or so.No It crosses, even if corresponding column is small, if the interval of column is narrow, when finger touches, there are touch panels using multiple columns as 1 4~6mm or more distance is arranged in conductor and the situation for perceiving capacity, the preferably at least interval of column end.The size of the distance also by To upper plate thickness or the extreme influence of bottom plate gap (depth of slot) or base slab dielectric constant characteristic.If being equipped with the gap, Then base plate thickness is 0.2~0.3mm, which can be by the dielectric hard of conduct for maintaining card soffit plane Heat-curing resin molding.In turn, in the case where bottom surface configures conductive contact, when stickup is for covering the white of conductive contact When the pieces such as color (according to figure, or other colors), preferably carry out being intended to keep the pressure of abundant plane attached.
In touch area, by lateral 14mm, the longitudinal direction interval 12mm equipped with laterally 4 column, longitudinal direction for being configured in bottom surface 3 via holes (TH2) for arranging totally 12 conductive contacts are used and are made the unbending column of card (touch area column).The column also referred to as touches Point column.
The shape of column section in Figure 27 0 (b) is circle, preferably diameter 3mm~8mm or so.When equipped with via hole When, as the region ID, the diameter of column section can be 3mm or so, but when being not equipped with via hole, the diameter of column section is excellent 8mm or so is selected, so as to perceive the capacity of finger.In Figure 27 0 (c), the shape of column is rectangle, and preferred profile is having a size of 2 7mm of Ⅹ 2mm~7 Ⅹ or so.When being equipped with via hole, as the region ID, the size of column section be 2 Ⅹ 2mm or so also without Harm, but when being not equipped with via hole, preferably the size of column section is 7 Ⅹ 7mm or so, so as to perceive the capacity of finger.? The touch area of Figure 27 0 (b), (c), 4 rows 3 column of graphical representation of exemplary except the column of totally 12 touch points in figure can also be with It is suitably equipped with the column of certain shape, to make card not be bent but, in the case where finger is encountered at 12 except touch point, It should fully consider the size and configuration space of the column that touch panel does not perceive.In addition, region and the area ID except the touch point Domain is the same, and equipped with the slot of deep 0.4~0.5mm, function is identical as the region ID.Wherein, for not being equipped with the column of via hole It uses, also includes without using the method for the conductive contact of lower part, therefore, insufficient capacity can be efficiently used to be configured in upper plate Finger contact or wiring caused by coupling.
In covering of the card surface to wiring or finger contact etc., the white of printable figure is pasted as described above (according to figure Shape, or other colors) piece etc. (being 0.1~0.15mm or so including adhesive layer).Wherein, it is touched when by finger When white tablets, covered by white tablets the region ID configuration conductive contact connection wiring on, in order to make by finger come From the detection signal conduction of touch panel, it is preferably equipped with the electrode with given area, in Figure 27 6, Figure 27 7, is equipped with round Conductor (114D) be equipped with cricoid conductor (114C) in 1~Figure 27 of Figure 27 3.Even if the size of conductor (114C, 114D) Increase, finger is also switched on without impinging on adjacent electrode, then the electrode contact in the region ID is functionally without obstacle.When there is barrier When hindering, the finger of user contacts the finger contact of adjacent touch point simultaneously, and touch panel perceives leading for 2 touch areas Electric connection, but in touch area, can match as shown in graph 270 by (for example, longitudinal direction 12mm, the transverse direction interval 14mm) is spaced apart sufficiently from Conductive contact is set, is designed to touch simultaneously.In addition, if the area of the finger contact of touch point is excessive, even if existing The situation of touch is not touched also by way of coupling and perceived, thus is needed to pay attention to.General conductor, Ke Yitong are led by means of configuration It crosses via hole and is conducting to the conductive contact of touch area, the position that perception touches really.Additionally, it is preferred that ring-shaped conductor and hand Refer to and leave 1mm or so or more between contact, make to be not turned between the two, so that touch panel can only perceive the region ID of conducting Conductive contact and touch touch area immediately below conductive contact.Although showing ring-shaped conductor and circular finger herein Contact, but if the conductor and conductive contact for being conducting to the region ID are not turned on between finger contact, then using ellipse Even any shapes such as shape, polygon or combination.
In the upper surface of the upper plate of Figure 27 1 (a), equipped with the ring-shaped conductor for being conducting to ID zone conducts current connector (114C, such as diameter 6mm).At its center, equipped with the finger contact (rectangle for being conducting to touch area conductive contact 1.0 × 1.0~2.0 × 2.0 or so or 1.5~3mm of diameter or so).If touching the touch area of diameter 6mm or so, lead to Figure 27 1 (b) and the finger contact and via hole of the figure (c) are crossed, is connect being conducting to the conduction in the configuration immediately below of Figure 27 1 (d) While head (element (111)), 4 conductive contacts (element (111)) in the configuration of the region ID are conducting to, by means of touch surface Plate perceives all 5 elements (111).For the extension of wiring, only with the wiring of the fixation of touch area, be 30cm with On, the capacity more than threshold values with touch panel perception utilizes iPHON (registered trademark) and iPAD (registered trademark), confirmation 4 conductive contacts in the region ID only can be perceived with device (110AB) loaded on touch panel.In the figure 30cm with On wiring be foot shape, but any wiring such as clathrate, helical form is harmless.In addition, confirming the information equipment of this implementation form (200) etc., such as in smart phone, if passing through 10 from being loaded into the operation of touch panel etc. by device (110AB) Second, then the threshold values of the physical quantity (for example, static capacity) of touch panel perception changes, and becomes non-perception, but in tablet computer In, it can unlimitedly continue to perceive conductive contact with the time.Therefore, will implement device (110AB) loading on intelligent hand below Determine that threshold values when whether touch panel perceives physical quantity is known as the first threshold values after the operation of machine touch panel etc. immediately.Separately Outside, the threshold values being arranged after about 10 from the operation is known as the second threshold values.It confirmed that the second threshold values is higher than the first threshold values.
In the upper intralamellar part of Figure 27 1 (b), be formed with the via hole of 0.3~1.0mm, by means of finger to finger contact or The touch of ring-shaped conductor (114C), the finger of user and conductive contact (element (111)) are connected.As shown in Figure 27 1 (c), Substrate is conducting under bottom plate as shown in Figure 27 1 (d) in the inside of height 0.4~0.5mm column equipped with via hole 4 conductive contacts in the region ID of face configuration.In touch area, connect by longitudinal 12mm, the transverse direction interval 14mm configured with conduction Head, corresponding conductive contact are diameter 8mm or so.The conductive contact of diameter 8mm is roughly equivalent to the touch area (phase of finger The maximum length connect).
In turn, the aspect ratio of finger contact, it is laterally slightly longer, this is because when the contact of the finger of people, connection surface zone It is laterally slightly long.By means of this, so that not encountering adjacent finger contact simultaneously.It is printed with respectively not in this 12 touch areas Same icon on the basis of 4 conductive contacts in the region ID, then perceives 1 conduction and connects if touching wherein 1 touch area Head can execute application-specific using icon relevant to the image printed in device (110AB), alternatively, utilizing figure Mark reading specific content.It is excellent in order to properly ensure to be connected when being equipped with the via hole of the two before upper plate and bottom plate bonding It is selected in the contact point of the via hole of upper plate and the via hole of bottom plate, is equipped with rectangle 1.0 Ⅹ 1.0~2.0 Ⅹ 2.0 or so or diameter The engaging contact of 1.5~3mm or so.
On the other hand, engagement upper plate, if perforated to via hole with hole, fills conductive ink, then may be used with after bottom plate To be certainly equipped with the via hole of high conductivity.In above the upper plate, in order to cover the wiring and finger contact of Figure 27 1 (a), It is preferred that the white tablets (can also be other colors) of 0.1~0.15mm of attachment.When ring-shaped conductor (114C) circumferential shapes wire spoke compared with When narrow, existing can not be from finger conduction to ring-shaped conductor a possibility that (114C).Therefore, in order to improve the conducting from finger, As shown in the lower part in Figure 27 1 (a), the wire spoke of ring-shaped conductor (114C) circumferential shapes is widened, shape is formed into baked donut shape, Area increased.
On the other hand, it can also configure in the center portion (each touch point) of 12 touch areas to print leading for icon The button of the molding 6~10mm of diameter of electric material, rectangle 5 Ⅹ 5mm~8 Ⅹ 8mm or so.Between adjacent button setting 1mm or more Every so that not mutual conduction.But, if the area of conductive buttons is excessive, cause to couple, because of the capacity model of perception It encloses excessive and mistake occurs, the inconsistent situation in the position of the position and perception that touch, therefore, the size of button need It gives one's full attention to.It can also be controlled by the electric conductivity for the conductive material that button uses.
In addition, be equipped with several gaps in button and finger contact, the region only pressed with finger, just with card wiring part Tap is touched and is connected.It is preferred that 12 conductive buttons are configured at the on piece formed with non-conductive material.But, the conduction of piece is pressed Button lower part should perforate, so as to be connected.In addition, electric conductivity button with non-conductive can also by means of it is multiple molding and It is integrally formed.In turn, if by the strong and weak control (selection of conductive material) of electric conductivity without inducing because of aforementioned coupling influence Caused misidentification, then button and piece can also be integrally formed with the material with weaker suitably electrically conductive property.In addition, figure 271 (c), the aftermentioned upper plate of (d) is preferably used as the bottom plate of 2~Figure 28 of Figure 27 5.
It on the other hand, can also be in set Petting Area in order to guide each touch area touched for game or safety Domain issues guidance light from touch panel.The guide post of touch area lower part can be made translucent, or matched in guide post Standby hollow portion, so that user easily identifies.In addition, when the conductive contact (element (111)) of Figure 27 1 (d) configuration blocks guidance Conductive contact can also be formed baked donut shape by the light time.
Figure 27 2 changes the conductor configurations of the upper plate of two figures (a) relative to Figure 27 1.As shown in Figure 27 2 (a), in upper plate In, the wiring on ID zone conducts current connector is formed into wavy extensive part, so as to possess larger capacity.That is, by leading Through-hole and the length for being connected to the wiring of conductive contact increase, as a result, touch panel with wavy extensive part is formed The conductive contact of perception and the static capacity of wiring increase.As a result, card is loaded on touch panel, even if finger is encountered, touch Panel can easily perceive 4 conductive contacts.In addition, have in the lower part of wavy wiring, it is further by means of coupling Improve the effect of perception capacity.This is to make aforementioned iPHON (registered trademark) or iPAD (registered trademark), i.e., by means of this Make to reach the second threshold values, can continue to perception capacity.The extensive part of wavy wiring may be multiple circle or spiral Shape, clathrate.
Figure 27 3 changes the conductor configurations of the upper plate of two figures (a) relative to Figure 27 2.As shown in Figure 27 3 (a), in the area ID On wiring on the conductive contact in domain, the conductor (114B) as conductive contact is configured, possesses larger capacity therefrom, it is special It is not to have the effect of improving perception capacity by means of coupling.
Figure 27 4 changes the conductor configurations of the upper plate of two figures (a), design is to be not connected to the region ID relative to Figure 27 2 Card is loaded on only using the wiring wiring of 30cm (be enough be more than) on rectangle wiring and ID conductive contact with touch area Touch panel, though finger without impinging on, can also perceive 4 conductive contacts (referring to Figure 27 1 (d) element (111)).In order to Realize this design, the adhesion with touch panel is a big project, needs to keep plane below bottom plate.
Figure 27 5 changes the conductor configurations of the upper plate of two figures (a) relative to Figure 27 4, such as its design is by card-like shape Device (110AB) loads on touch panel, even if user's finger is without impinging on device (110AB), the touching of information equipment (200) Touch panel also and can perceive 4 conductive contacts below bottom plate (referring to the element (111) of Figure 27 1 (d)).As shown in Figure 27 5 (a), By the wiring on ID zone conducts current connector, conductor (114B) identical with conductive contact is configured by means of this and possesses more great Rong Amount especially has the effect of further increasing perception capacity by coupling.
In addition, Figure 27 4 and Figure 27 5 is since the conductive contact in the region ID and the finger contact of touch area are not turned on, thus If card deformation, or be attached with small dust etc. or screening glass on touch panel surface and paste improper, then the capacity perceived reduces, In the presence of the situation that can not identify conductive contact, it should be noted that.
The pieces such as white that Figure 27 6 graphical representation of exemplary is pasted for wiring or contact for blocking card surface etc. (including it is viscous Paste layer is inside 0.1~0.15mm), when being touched with finger, by piece, it is connected to the conductive contact configured in the region ID Wiring and finger, conducting as from touch panel detect signal AC signal composition.For this reason, it may be necessary to will have The conductor of given area is provided to piece touch point immediately below, herein equipped with round (any shapes such as polygon) Conductor (finger contact (114D)).As a result, making the exchange transducing signal from touch panel be conducting to piece, so that touch panel The conductive contact (element (111)) in the region ID can be perceived.In addition, in its underpart, by upper plate, configuration is round (can also be with For the shape of polygon etc.) conductor, bottom plate may be the utensil of Figure 27 1, as shown in Figure 28 5 (c), be formed with The dielectric post of the high dielectric constant of the diameter 8mm that respective conductors are adjacent to or so also occurs because finger touches by dielectric post Coupling caused by the conductor of portion's configuration can be the capacity that touch panel can perceive, be encountered with finger in Figure 27 6 when herein (a) when conductor (114D) configured, even if the conductor (114D) of other touch areas is conducting to by wiring (WR), due to not It is the direct touch of finger, thus the degree by lower dielectric column sensitive volume is not achieved.But, also have by means of upper plate And the thickness or material of bottom plate, touch panel type, use environment and the situation of capacity can be perceived.In addition, in the region ID, such as Shown in Figure 27 3 (a), Figure 27 5 (a), on the wiring on the conductive contact in the region ID, conductor identical with conductive contact is configured, Thus possess larger capacity, especially have the effect of further increasing perception capacity by means of coupling.
The touch area of Figure 27 7 is identical as Figure 27 6 (a) (b), function having the same.On the other hand, the bottom in the region ID It is identical as the wiring of Figure 27 1 (a) below plate and upper plate, but above the upper plate of the region ID on, the region ID below bottom plate Conductive contact (element (111) of Figure 27 1 (d)) position immediately above, be configured with conductor (114B).That is, the conduction in the region ID Below same figure upper plate on connector, from the wiring (WR) above the upper plate of Figure 27 7 (a), by via hole (TH), will with lead The identical conductor of electric connection (114B), is configured at below upper plate as shown in Figure 27 7 (b).By means of the configuration, shorten conductor Distance below (114B) to bottom plate, further has an impact coupling, has the effect of improving perception capacity.
In general, card is often printed with high-quality graphics.As this implementation form, touch area function is preferential, often without It needs persistent in figure.In the following, 8~Figure 28 of Figure 27 5 is that region except touch area directly prints high-quality graphics, or will When the piece of end high-quality printing is pasted on card, it is not equipped with anything on upper plate, is equipped with wiring or contact below, To make conducting wire or via hole etc. not dimly visible or the embodiment of convex-concave not occur.But, due on all upper plates and under Face configures wiring and/or conductor, thus expense is high.
Figure 27 8 and Figure 27 9 is that the wiring above the upper plate in the region ID of Figure 27 4 and Figure 27 5 is configured at below upper plate Embodiment.For this purpose, the region ID above upper plate is not equipped with the utensil for touching conducting from finger.On the other hand, the bottom of touch area Conductive contact (element (111)) below plate only by means of finger touch and be connected above upper plate, it is therefore preferable that on Finger contact as unobtrusive as possible is equipped with above plate.On the other hand, due in not no the leading from finger in the region ID It is logical, thus capacity is possessed by the wiring in the region ID (also including coupling conductor) or conductive contact.But if card becomes Shape is attached with small dust etc. or screening glass on touch panel surface and pastes improper, then the capacity perceived reduces, and existing can not Identify the situation of conductive contact, it should be noted that.
Figure 28 0 and Figure 28 1 is that the wiring above the upper plate in the region ID of Figure 27 1 and Figure 27 2 is configured at below upper plate Embodiment.This is also utensil needed for forming high-quality graphics for the region except touch area.With Figure 27 8 and Figure 27 9 The difference is that ring-shaped conductor (114C) above upper plate by wiring (WR) below circuit, with upper plate in via hole and The conductive contact connection in the region ID below bottom plate.Therefore, it is touched by means of the finger to conductor (114C), user and the region ID Conductive contact conducting, from this point, even if the perception capacity for being adjacent to situation or touch panel of card and touch panel is slightly It reduces, which can also definitely perceive capacity.Wherein it is possible in printed thereon figure, or the piece for terminating printing is pasted, make It is less obvious to obtain touch area, in the center of each touch area of upper panel surface, matches around finger contact (114A) and its circumferentially Standby ring-shaped conductor (114C) is equipped with the circuit for passing through via hole on ring-shaped conductor (114C), is connected to following wiring (WR).It is equipped with via hole, so that being conducting to conductive contact immediately below from finger contact (114A), and is formed in via hole Circuit.Therefore, card surface is at the 12 of each touch area, unobtrusively with finger contact (114A) and ring-shaped conductor (114C) Design and printing.According to circumstances, as touch area design a ring, can also highlight finger contact (114A) and Ring-shaped conductor (114C), or with the graphic printing of same colour system.
Figure 28 2 is the touch in order to guide game or safe required touch area, and in set touch area, from touching Touch the utensil that panel issues guidance light and recognizes user.Figure 28 2 (a) is touched with baked donut shape conductor as finger Point is equipped with via hole in the conductor, but may be identical cyclic annular conducting wire with Figure 27 9 (a).In turn, preferably make Figure 28 2 (c) Touch area bottom plate below guide post (touch area column) be it is translucent, or be equipped with hollow portion in guide post, make light Line penetrates, so as to identify.In addition, when conductive contact blocks guidance light, it, can also will be conductive as shown in Figure 28 2 (d) Connector forms baked donut shape.The present embodiment be although the region ID conductive contact can not by means of finger touch and be connected match Line, but may be the wiring that the two can be connected.For example, in figure ZU27~Figure 27 3,6~Figure 28 of Figure 27 1, baked donut shape Conductive contact or conductor etc. for being conducting to ID zone conducts current connector, can be designed so that guidance light can be identified.Make For the application field of the present embodiment, even if there is no icon printing on card surface, it is also possible by means guidance light and indicate to touch position It sets.Guidance light also can use shining for different colours, selectively guide finger touch.In turn, it can also convert between flashing Every (shining/fall time), finger touch is selectively guided.The light of setting and the light except setting can also be sent out simultaneously Light.Furthermore it is also possible to carry out many places touch simultaneously.In amusement class, the next position by touch can be indicated, or pass through hair Light color or optical flare determine the selection of stage property or the movement of role, direction of attack, language etc..In security classes, user Luminescent color or flashing are set, as disposal password, various light is made to carry out time change in part or all of touch area It shines with changing, if selecting pre-set light, touches corresponding touch area, then can input disposal password.In turn, If multiple colors or flashing is arranged including touching frequency, highest safety may be implemented.In addition, if making The position of the light of setting is not touched, but touches up and down/diagonal of corresponding position, then is not easy to be calculated Meter.In addition, if card moulding material be it is transparent, image can also be shown except touch area.It, can also by means of this For touching switching or respective image (product or service) order, the clearing etc. of realizing image by finger.Certainly, card is made For that in utensil of the touch area configured with the conductor for blocking light, can also not show image in touch area and freely cut It changes.
Figure 28 3 is the embodiment that the wiring above the upper plate by Figure 27 7 (a) is configured at below upper plate (Figure 28 3 (b)).Figure 283 (a) be in order to enable if finger touch shielding plate, be conducting to the region ID configuration conductive contact connection wiring, It is equipped with the conductor (114D) with the circle (or any shapes such as polygon) of given area, using in Figure 28 3 (b) The wiring (WR) of outfit, is conducting to the conductive contact in the region ID.Wherein, in the bottom plate of each touch area lower part, such as Figure 28 5 (c) Dotted line shown in, the dielectric post of the high dielectric constant of diameter 8mm or so is formed, even if not being conducting to conduction because finger touches Connector also occurs to couple caused by the conductor because configuring on dielectric post top, becomes the capacity that touch panel can perceive.Separately Outside, the circular conductor (114D) being equipped in each touch area of Figure 28 3 (a), even if the conductor from other touch areas (114D) is connected by circuit in wiring (WR) and via hole, due to not being the direct touch of finger, is not achieved under The degree of portion's dielectric post sensitive volume.
Figure 28 4 is equipped with cyclic annular wiring on upper plate, on the wiring below upper plate, is equipped with the via hole of perforation upper plate, Wiring below cyclic annular wiring and upper plate above upper plate is connected into circuit, in printed thereon, is become least to figure The wiring impacted.This wiring is directly printed in upper plate in which can not damage figure quality.(Figure 28 4 below upper plate (b)), equipped with the conductor of baked donut shape identical with Figure 28 2 (a).For the conductor of the baked donut shape as shown in Figure 28 2, being can be with In set touch area, guidance light, the utensil for identifying user are issued from touch panel.In addition, this implementation form Device (110AB) as shown in Figure 28 3, the conductive contact of the touch area configured below bottom plate is unworthy of being ready for use on conducting Via hole.That is, the conductive contact of touch area is not connect with the round conductor of upper plate (114D).Therefore, using touch panel The utensil that finger touches capacity is perceived by the dielectric post being equipped in each touch area of bottom plate.But the slave ring of Figure 28 4 (a) Shape wiring is conducting to the conductor of the baked donut shape formed in figure ZU40 (b) by via hole, has sufficient area, as a result, Even if the dielectric post of each touch area by bottom plate, perception capacity is also bigger than Figure 28 3.As with accordingly compared with low capacity into The touch panel of row perception, there is a possibility that touch area except finger touch place is perceived as conductor, it should be noted that.
Figure 28 5 is the ideograph that the embodiment of conductive contact is not equipped with below bottom plate.The so-called ideograph of Figure 28 5 is Because the region ID column and amount of touch region column is omitted, is recorded with dotted line in Figure 28 5 (c).In addition, amount of touch region column with Dotted line describes 12, but the region ID column only records 4 with dotted line, remaining omission is not recorded.
It is that touch panel merely with the dielectric post (dotted line of the figure (C)) being equipped in the touch area of bottom plate perceives hand Refer to the utensil of capacity caused by touching, dielectric post should have high dielectric constant.As shown in Figure 28 5 (a), on upper plate, it is equipped with Identical wiring and finger touch conductor (the finger touching with round (or the arbitrary shapes such as polygon) with Figure 27 7 (a) Point (114A)), it is equipped with via hole in wiring end, is conducting to the conductive contact in the region ID below bottom plate.The capacity in the region ID Perceived position is not the touch location of finger, thus is equipped with the conductor tab for the finger contact (114A) being conducting to above upper plate, So that touch panel can perceive capacity.In addition, the dielectric of the finger contact (114D) of the joint area of Figure 28 5 (a) has There is the area of diameter 8mm or so (under other shapes, 50 square millimeters of area), by means of this, finger couples when touching Effect perceives capacity immediately below with making it easy to.Alternatively, it is also possible to corresponding with shielding plate.In turn, due to there is no Petting Area The conductive contact in domain, guidance light is not blocked, even if conductor is arranged at top, is also shone, is easily identified from touch panel on periphery Guidance light.Although the present embodiment is the situation that conductor tab is configured below the bottom plate of touch area, perception capacity ratio makes hand Refer to that the form that contact is connected with conductor tab reduces, but can be with most cheap cost manufacture.In addition, the bottom plate of the embodiment It can be used as upper plate, be applied to 4~Figure 27 of Figure 27 7, Figure 28 92~284.But, it does not need for being conducting to touch area The via hole of conductive contact.
Specific embodiment as 26 structure of application drawing ZU above describes 1~Figure 28 of Figure 27 5, but can also combine Multiplicity conductive wires, conductor, via hole, contact, the conductive contact, are formed with the utensil of Figure 27 0.
<utensil (convex-concave bottom plate+slim lower plate) of 40 C-CARD of implementation form>
9 86~Figure 28 according to fig. 2 illustrate device (110AC) relevant to implementation form 40.The device of this implementation form (110AC) is identical as 37~implementation form of implementation form 39 etc., is lamellar, is the device without using battery.Device The acting surface of (110AC) and all have the identical region ID and touch area with 37~implementation form of implementation form 39 etc. above. In this embodiment, the upper plate of device (110AC) and floor structure are opposite with the implementation form 39.This implementation form Other are constituted and effect is identical as implementation form 39.
Device (110AC) is formed for 2 pieces totally by upper plate and bottom plate, in order to configure a large amount of patterns in the region ID, in design and work Make in sequence, material need not each conductive pattern make mold.It is by the slim upper plate of Figure 27 0 (a)/(b) in Figure 28 6 The bottom plate for having convex-concave of Figure 27 0 (c), (d) are used as Figure 28 6 (a)/(b) upper plate by the bottom plate as Figure 28 6 (c), (d) Embodiment.
For the embodiment there are two types of feature, fisrt feature, which can be achieved on, forms the region ID and Petting Area in the upper surface of bottom plate The conductive contact (element (111)) in domain, with the bottom plate of touch panel junction below do not form the utensil of conductive contact.If Conductive contact is formed below bottom plate, then it is upper below that several staggered floors occur.As a result, for example loading on letter in device (110AC) In the case where the touch panel for ceasing equipment (200), air is formed below the bottom plate as acting surface and between touch panel Layer, the perceived accuracy of the physical quantitys such as capacity based on touch panel are low.But it if can remain able to hard material The flatness of the slim bottom plate formed, then card is tight with touch panel face paste, inhibits the generation of air layer, so that touch panel can Easily to perceive the capacity of the conductive contact of substrate side.From replace the conductive contact of finger to touch surface plate face away from From base plate thickness is 0.2~0.3mm or so, and the common screening glass of the touch panel of covering smart phone etc. is with a thickness of 0.5mm Left and right, does not influence greatly the perception of conductive contact.But, as shown in the embodiment of Figure 28 9, since finger touches and touches The conductive contact in region is not turned on, thus the thickness of upper plate and bottom plate is as thin as possible, if not using the molding of high dielectric constant Material then exists and a possibility that can not perceiving the situation of capacity occurs.
Second feature is, if bottom plate color is shaped to white (according to design, or other colors), then by It is 0.2~0.3mm in base plate thickness, can be printed with various printing machine, the graphic printing for blocking the inside is easy.Similarly, The conductive contact of substrate can also be printed by means of conductive ink.
As shown in Figure 28 6 (c), bottom plate is high dielectric or profiled sheeting, so that not being bent in engagement.For this purpose, Using hard and/or not flexible material.In order to make the easily perceivable capacity of touch panel, preferred connecing with touch panel and card The material that contacting surface is able to maintain plane forms bottom plate.Particularly preferably use dielectric hard heat-curing resin.Do not make It is stuck on touch panel under the stationary state of rotation and/or movement in use, it is preferable to use the high adhesion for being adjacent to touch panel Non-conducting material.
In order to corresponding with various ID conductive pattern, as shown in Figure 28 6 (a)/(b), in matching for conductive contact for substrate The position candidate set needs to be equipped with the hole of the via hole of connection conductive contact and wiring.This some holes can both be worn at the time of molding Hole can also perforate at necessity after shaping.In addition, the hole of via hole needs 0.3~1.0mm of diameter or so.It is another As shown in Figure 28 9, there is the situation without perforating on upper plate according to utensil in aspect.In Figure 28 7, Figure 28 9, in upper plate At the 12 of touch area, equipped with the hole of via hole.Preferably fabricated process is shape in plate more than Ⅹ 50cm of 40cm or so At upper plate, with by means of the printing of conductive ink or it is gold-plated etc. implement wiring, after docking, fill via hole with conductive ink. In the case where being equipped with the via hole that upper plate is connected with bottom plate before docking, contact is equipped with so that the via hole of upper plate is connected to The conductive contact of bottom plate.
Upper plate is due to thicker, thus the printing on card surface is preferably pasted on upper plate after printing in other white tablets Surface.In addition, when needing to block conductive contact or wiring, contact, preferably with white tablets (according to figure, or its His color) it blocks, printed pattern, makes printed sheet on it.Printed sheet includes ink layer and adhesive layer, is 0.1~0.15m Left and right, impacts so as not to the perception to conductive contact.In turn, when implementing conducting based on finger, printed sheet with a thickness of 0.1m or so is preferable.Manufacturing process fully considers price, preferably forms wiring, contact, via hole, conduction in upper plate and bottom plate Connector etc., implements printing in appropriate order or the docking of printed sheet is truncated into card size after pasting upper plate and bottom plate.
Figure 28 7 (a)/(b) upper plate is identical as Figure 27 0 (b), (c), and below upper plate, the region except column is equipped with There is deep 0.4~0.5 slot, thus substantially, to the finger contact for leading general-purpose distribution and touch area of ID zone conducts current connector With conductor, formed in the upper surface of upper plate.The upper surface of upper plate and following conductive wires, it is identical as Figure 27 1 (a)/(b), by means of Finger touches touch area (above conductive contact), and conductive contact immediately below is connected with the conductive contact in the region ID, touches Panel can perceive 5 conductive contacts.4 conductive contacts are formed in the region ID of Figure 28 7 (c)/(d) bottom plate, in Petting Area The upper surface of domain forms 12 conductive contacts.The conductive wires of this upper plate can also use figure in addition to Figure 27 1 (a)/(b) 272 (a)/(b), Figure 27 3 (a)/(b).In addition, due in the wiring and conductor for configuring conducting wire above, thus in order to block him , preferably adhere to white (according to figure, or other colors) piece etc., the printed pattern on shielding plate.When for operation Between efficient activity, preferably fabricated process is to adhere to upper plate and bottom plate after printing or after printed sheet attachment.This part is shown below It is same in Figure 28 8, the Figure 28 9 shown.
Figure 28 8 (a)/(b) upper plate, the region ID is identical as Figure 27 2 (a)/(b), touch area and Figure 28 2 (a)/(b) phase Together, touch area (above conductive contact) is touched by means of finger, is only conducting to conductive contact immediately below.In the region ID Conductive contact can possess larger capacity by means of this with the wiring above wavy formation conductive contact.That is, for example will The device (110AC) of card-like loads on touch panel, even if finger is not touched, also easily perceivable 4 conductions connect touch panel Head.In addition, having the effect of further increasing perception capacity by means of coupling in the lower part in the intensive portion of wavy wiring.This Be in order to by means of this so that even if reaching the second threshold values in aforementioned iPHON (registered trademark) or iPAD (registered trademark), Also continue to perceive capacity.Wavy wiring may be multiple circle or helical form, clathrate.In the upper surface of touch area, it is equipped with The finger contact conductor of baked donut shape has given area, even if to paste shielding plate, it is also possible by means finger touching It touches and is connected.In turn, in the touch area of the substrate of Figure 28 8 (c), it is equipped with the baked donut of size identical as upper plate conductor The conductive contact of shape easily identifies to penetrate the guidance light from touch panel.It, can also as this conductive wires To use Figure 27 4 (a)/(b), Figure 27 5 (a)/(b).
It is identical conductive wires, shape below the upper plate of Figure 28 9 (b) above the upper plate of Figure 28 9 (a) with Figure 28 4 (b) The via hole of Cheng Youzhi ID zone conducts current connector.Figure 28 9 (b) is formed with the identical conductive contact with Figure 28 8 (b).Different from figure It is in place of 288 embodiments, finger touches the conductive contact for being conducting to the region ID, increase the capacity of the conductive contact in the region ID, It makes it easy to perceive.In turn, due to not being conducting to underlying conductive connector, thus the conductive contact of touch area from touch area It is difficult to be perceived.Shielding plate is corresponding with guidance light, identical as Figure 28 8.As this conductive wires, figure also can be used 274 (a)/(b), Figure 27 5 (a)/(b).
Specific embodiment as application drawing 286 above describes 7~Figure 28 of Figure 28 9, can also be with constitutional diagram 271~figure 285, various conductive wires of 7~Figure 28 of Figure 28 9, conductor, via hole, conductive contact, are formed with the utensil of Figure 28 6.
[variation]
It can be taper in the dielectric column that the upper plate of this implementation form and the bottom plate of the implementation form 39 are equipped with.? In Figure 29 0, laminal substrate of the graphical representation of exemplary with tapered dielectric column.The substrate of Figure 29 0 is used as implementation form The bottom plate of JS4 or the upper plate of JS5.For example, when device (110AB, 110AC) etc. loads on touch panel, when being dielectric column The relatively thin shape in face thicker, far from touch surface plate face in close touch panel side when, close to the dielectric column of touch panel The sectional area of end is small, and the physical quantity for perceiving touch panel on the acting surface of device (110AB, 110C) increases, meanwhile, It can be with the touch point interval in (opposing face of acting surface) above the upper plate of Widening device (110AB, 110AC) etc..By adding The interval of wide touch point, can be to avoid the interference touched to the finger between touch point.
On the other hand, on the contrary, by dielectric layer in the case where the physical quantity formed on acting surface is sufficiently big, Or the shape of thin, far from touch surface plate face the face thickness in the side of the close touch panel of dielectric column.
In addition, being equipped with the multiple region ID columns for being formed with via hole in the region ID in Figure 27 0, Figure 28 6.But this To configure 4 kinds of elements (111) below the bottom plate in the region ID as shown in Figure 27 1 (d), if making 4 kinds of elements (111) and upper The wiring connection that plate is equipped with, the then region the ID column for being equipped with via hole have 4.But as shown in Figure 27 0 (b) (c), pass through The column for being formed with via hole is provided to multiple regions ID, can produce in batches element (111) formed before device (110AB, 110AC etc. or its upper plate, bottom plate).That is, such as to produce multiple bottom plates as shown in Figure 27 0 (b) (c) same mold (or upper plate as shown in Figure 28 6 (b)), when being engaged with the upper plate of other side (or bottom plate), formation, printing or insertion element (111), so as to producing the device (110AB, 110AC etc.) of different ID in batches.
Element (111) is an example of the multiple first conductive pattern components formed on the first face.Wiring be One example of both set a distances the second conductive pattern component formed above is set in first face.In via hole circuit be through The hole in the first conductive pattern members form part opening in the first face is crossed, the first conductive pattern structure is connected One example of the first circuit of part and the second conductive pattern component.Slot between upper plate and bottom plate is the one of cavity A example.In the example that the shape of the pursuit diverse operations of upper plate printed thereon is mark.
<implementation form 41>
[utensil (slim upper plate+multiple molding convex-concave bottom plate) of C-CARD]
91A~Figure 29 1F according to fig. 2, the manufacturing method of n-lustrative graphic display unit (110).In Figure 29 1A~Figure 29 1F, Device (110) is formed by upper plate and 2 pieces of bottom plate, bottom plate shape by the multiple molding based on conductive material and non-conducting material At.12 fixed conductive columns, 2 information A conductive columns, 2 information B conductive columns are formed using conductive material.12 fixed conductive Column becomes the utensil of the lower part perception capacity of only fixed conductive column, so that when finger is when touch area touches, even if touching Position beyond fixed conductive column will not misidentification.2 information A conductive columns are configured at fixed position, and 2 information B conductive columns are matched It is placed in any position, by means of this, forms the conductive pattern in the region ID.But in order to increase pattern numbers, 2 information A are conductive Column can also be configured at any position.According to the composition of mold, allow to configure conductive column and non-conductive at the desired position Property support column.Support column, with unbending degree, is configured in the case where pressing slim upper plate with finger by predetermined distance.It is right In the size of support column, when for rectangle, within preferably 2 Ⅹ 2mm or so, when for circle, preferably diameter 3mm or so Within, 4~6mm or more distance is at least arranged in the interval of column end.The all conditions of bottom plate utensil including above-mentioned are recorded In the explanation of Figure 27 0.
In the sectional view (AY section) of Figure 29 1B, with the conductive column of logos below the bottom plate of thickness 0.3mm Top is formed with thickness 0.4mm, diameter 8mm, from this point, can be directly printed or be pasted on the surface below bottom plate 0.1mm very thin printed sheet below.In addition, conductive column has diameter 8mm, from this point, by by thickness 0.3mm's Below bottom plate and dielectric layer that the printed sheet of 0.1mm or so is constituted, abundant capacity can also be perceived.In the upper plate of Figure 29 1A, It is equipped with finger contact above, is equipped with the contact with conductive column below.The wiring of conducting wire is formed above and/or below.? Equipped with via hole in upper plate, but in bottom surface, due to being configured with conductive column, even if even not being equipped with via hole.In addition, In addition to multiple molding, common molding can also be carried out with non-conductor, configure conductive column in substrate and bond following. It, can be with application drawing 271 (a)/(b), 2~Figure 27 of Figure 27 5 as the upper plate of the bottom plate.Even if Figure 27 6 (a)/(b) is not formed down The conductor of the touch area in face can also be applied.Figure 27 7 (a)/(b) can also be answered even if the conductor for not forming the region ID above With, but need the contact of via hole and conductive column.Wavy wiring of Figure 27 8 (a)/(b) below not can also be applied. Figure 27 9 (a)/(b) can also be applied even if not forming following conductor.Furthermore, it is possible to application drawing 285 (a)/(b), Figure 28 7 (a)/(b)。
In Figure 29 1C, the conductive column of diameter 8mm is shaped to cylinder-shaped (hollow portion is gap or transparent non-leads Body), in order to guide the touch of each touch area, in set touch area, guidance light is issued from touch panel, it can be from card table Face identification.In addition, in addition to multiple molding common molding can also be carried out with non-conductor, conductive column is configured simultaneously in substrate It bonds following.It, can be with application drawing 279, Figure 28 8 (a)/(b), Figure 28 9 (a)/(b) as the upper plate of the bottom plate.Figure 28 2 (a)/ (b) the wavy wiring below not can also be applied.In Figure 29 1D, the diametrically central vertical side of 8mm conductive column To notch is equipped with, as Figure 29 1C, in order to guide the touch of each touch area, in set touch area, from touch surface Plate issues guidance light, can identify from card surface.In addition, in addition to multiple molding, can also be carried out with non-conductor it is common at Type configures conductive column in substrate and bonds following.It, can be with application drawing 279, Figure 28 3, Figure 28 8 as the upper plate of bottom plate (a)/(b) Figure 28 9 (a)/(b).In addition, Figure 28 3 can not identify guidance light from card surface.Figure 29 3 and Figure 29 4 is embodiment figure The upper plate wiring diagram of the feature of the notch conductive column of 291D.On upper plate, the cyclic annular conducting wire of finger contact or finger are only formed Contact, from this point, can directly printing or paste the very thin printed sheet of 0.1mm or less.When stickup 0.15mm's or so When shielding plate, in order to implement the conducting from finger conscientiously, as shown in Figure 28 9 (c), Figure 29 3 (a) is formed with baked donut shape conductor The cyclic annular conducting wire of finger contact.In addition, the wiring in the region ID of Figure 29 3 and Figure 29 4 also can be used Figure 28 1 (b) or The wiring of Figure 28 8 (b).In addition, the wiring of the conducting wire below upper plate can also be formed on all upper plates.At this point, should will lead Through-hole is configured at the conductive column in the region ID in an electrically conductive manner.In Figure 29 1C, slaughterhouse cover shape is configured by means of multiple molding Conductive column.Conductive column lower diameter 8mm, thickness 0.3mm, upper diameter 3mm, thickness 0.4mm, under the lower part and bottom plate of conductor Face becomes a face, can perceive capacity conscientiously.In addition, in addition to multiple molding, can also be carried out with non-conductor it is common at Type is inserted into non-conductor from substrate, pastes in the lower periphery of conductive column.But since conductive column lower part can identify, Thus coating shielding plate.As the upper plate of bottom plate, can with application drawing 271 (a)/(b), 2~Figure 27 of Figure 27 8, Figure 28 0, Figure 28 1, Figure 28 5 (a)/(b).In addition, even if without Figure 27 6, Figure 27 7 upper plate below touch area conductor and Figure 28 1 upper plate Following wavy wiring, can also apply.Figure 29 1 (f) be in addition to multiple molding, with non-conductor carry out it is common at Type, the appropriate utensil for being inserted into conductive column from substrate and being pasted.Substrate has feature identical with Figure 29 1A, Applicable upper plate is also identical.But since conductive column lower part can recognize, thus need shielding plate.
[utensil (multiple molding convex-concave upper plate+slim bottom plate) of C-CARD]
It in Figure 29 4, is formed by upper plate and 2 pieces of bottom plate, upper plate is by multiple based on conductive material and non-conducting material It forms and is formed.This implementation form is that the bottom plate of Figure 29 1A~291F is used for upper plate and makes utensil opposite in table, related to lead The molding of electric column and support column is then identical.In the sectional view of Figure 29 4 (b), with the conductive column of logos, in thickness 0.3mm Substrate lower part, formed with thickness 0.4mm, diameter 8mm, thus in principle, conductive wires should on upper plate shape At, ID zone conducts current column be equipped with via hole and to be connected.On the bottom plate of thickness 0.2mm, furthermore, in bottom plate In the following, abundant capacity can also be perceived by these dielectric layers by being equipped with the printed sheet of 0.1mm or so.The bottom plate of the upper plate is The plate or piece of white (can also be other colors) 0.2mm thickness.It is directly printed in addition, can be below bottom plate.Separately Outside, for bottom plate in order to realize that junction then needs to possess plane with touch panel, bottom plate is high dielectric or profiled sheeting, is made It obtains and is not bent in engagement.For this purpose, using hard or not flexible material.In addition, can also be led in addition to multiple molding with non- Body carries out common molding, configures conductive column in substrate and bonds following.As the wiring of the substrate, Ke Yiying With 1~Figure 27 of Figure 27 5, Figure 28 5, each wiring above of Figure 27 7, finger contact, via hole.
In Figure 29 4 (c), shape is identical as Figure 29 1C conductor, becomes a face, hair above conductor upper surface and upper plate Wave the effect of finger contact.The upper plate carries out common molding in addition to multiple molding, with non-conductor, is inserted into from substrate Conductive column and the appropriate utensil bonded.But since the top of conductive column can identify, thus need shielding plate.
It is shown above about the conductive contact that is formed using metal or printing gold-plated, based on conductive ink or simultaneous With the various embodiment for the conductive column of conductive contact and via hole formed with conductive material, but wiring or confession based on conducting wire Finger touch and be connected finger contact, make 2 conductive parts be connected contact, make plate penetrate through and to thickness direction be connected leading The combination of through-hole etc. can use in any combination as long as possessing original function.In addition, if can not be in the flat of convex-concave plate Surface side directly forms wiring or figure, can also be also equipped with a synusia, and wiring or figure are formed in respective flap.In turn, although It is not shown, but can also minimize when convex-concave plate is downward up to the wiring for becoming plane above, in convex-concave The depressed section wiring of side.
<implementation form 42>
Referring to Figure 29 7~300, to the information system for including 42 relevant apparatus of implementation form (110) and information equipment (200) System is illustrated.Wherein, device (110) possesses citing in the device (110) of the implementation form 1 in each implementation form The components of photo-electric conversion arrange the photodiode (WPD) illustrated in (112) or Figure 21 8, receive aobvious from information equipment (200) The information (also including light code) based on optical signal of showing device.In addition, device (110) possesses element arrangements in acting surface (111), physical quantity can be caused in the touch panel near to or in contact with acting surface, transmitting comes from the ON and OFF of element (111) Combined information (also referred to as information pattern, static capacity code).In addition, information equipment (200) and each implementation form one The code identification device (3) illustrated in sample, with implementation form 0 equally, thus omits the description.
Figure 29 7 is the dynamic of the touch sensor on graphical representation of exemplary control circuit scanning information equipment (200) touch panel The ideograph of work.For example it is assumed that touch sensor on touch panel, scans from top to bottom.Now, it is assumed that in moment TIME0 Start to scan, in moment TIME0+Tscan, terminates the scanning of the first picture part.Moreover, at the time of being identified as TIME1, It is scanned across at the arrow of the TIME1, the position TCP1 after following closely, element (111) becomes ON.At this point, to TCP1 The scanning for the touch sensor set is over, and is become ON in TCP1 location aware element (111), is then belonged to next scanning.
On the other hand, it is assumed that at the time of being identified as TIME1, be scanned across at the arrow of the TIME2, before it The position TCP2, element (111) become ON.Wherein, the ON of so-called element (111), as being chatted in the implementation form It states, is the physical quantity of finger element (111) perception, such as static capacity is the state of set threshold values (STON) or more.Another party Face, the OFF of so-called element (111) is the physical quantity of finger element (111), for example, static capacity be set threshold values (STOFF) with Under state.
In this case, the scanning (that is, the moment (TIME0) into moment (TIME0+Tscan)), at TCP2 It sets, induction element (111) becomes ON.That is, according to element (111) become ON at the time of and position, scanned from touch sensor Relationship in, exist in 1 touch panel perceive multiple element (111) ON timing, repeatedly with touch panel control circuit Scanning touch panel before touch sensor when scan period (referred to as Tcycle) be staggered a cycle a possibility that.
In turn, according to touch panel, for 1 touch sensor, continuous scanning is multiple, when detecting ON (or OFF) When, the event of ON (or OFF) notifies application program by device driver (hereinafter referred to as driver) and OS.It will be determined as Detect that the continuous detection number of the ON event, referred to as benchmark determine number.
For example it is assumed that when the driver of information equipment (200) detects ON (or OFF) in continuous 2 times scanning, it will ON (or OFF) event notifies OS.In this case, benchmark determines that number=2 notify multiple in information equipment (200) There is a possibility that being scattered in the 1st time to the 3rd time scanning in the timing of element (111) ON event.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the application program of information equipment (200) determines+1 scanning of number week by benchmark Phase, monitoring come from the physical quantity variation of device (110), i.e. ON and OFF.That is, the application program of information equipment (200) is in (benchmark Determine number+1 time) during the * scan period (Tcycle), monitoring comes from the physical quantity variation of element (111), is passing through (base Standard determines number+1 time) during the * scan period (Tcycle) after, determine ON or OFF.Wherein, " * ", which is represented, is multiplied.
On the other hand, when inputting information to touch panel, confirmation carrys out self-information and sets the device (110) of this implementation form After the synchronization optical signal of standby (200), during (benchmark determines number+1 time) * scan period (Tcycle), continue element (111) ON state or OFF state.By using this data inputting method, device (110) can be by each element (111) ON or OFF almost effectively passes to information equipment (200).Therefore, device (110) is needed when information pattern inputs by institute There is the short-circuit signal of OFF to be placed between information pattern and information pattern.
But, in the case where combining the ON and OFF of certain one in multiple element (111) as synchronization signal, device (110) it during (benchmark determines number+2 times) * scan period (Tcycle), keeps information pattern and continues to output.Example Such as, when benchmark determines number=2, device (110) is not necessarily to the short-circuit pattern of all OFF, passes through the output 4* scan period (Tcycle) during, information pattern can be input into touch panel.This is because information equipment (200) is in application program When receiving synchronization signal, it can not judge that this is scanning for the first time (before benchmark determines number -1 time) or second of scanning (base Standard determines the last scanning of number).Therefore, the phase of information equipment+1 scan period (Tcycle) from confirming ON signal Between, continue the ON or OFF in induction element (111).Then, when accidentally in second of scanning, (benchmark determines finally sweeping for number Retouch) in when having perceived first time synchronization signal, can continuously perceive synchronization signal, this becomes the third time scan period.Therefore, Information equipment (200) can use the third time scan period, complete the perception of the information pattern from element (111), but can not Judge that information pattern completion perception is second of scanning (benchmark determines before number) or third time scanning (benchmark judgement time + 1 scanning of number).Therefore ,+1 time after the completion of information equipment (200) waits synchronization signal to confirm always, as a result, benchmark is waited to sentence Determine the subsynchronous signal of number+2.Corresponding with the processing of this information equipment, device (110) determines number+2 times in benchmark The ON or OFF of period holding element (111).
Therefore, when all exporting OFF between information pattern and information pattern, the output of information pattern needs 3* to sweep It retouches the period (Tcycle), the output of whole OFF needs 3* scan period (Tcycle), thus in the method for this implementation form, Device (110) can accelerate the input time of information pattern.
Figure 29 8 is to utilize light code and information pattern between graphical representation of exemplary information equipment (200) and device (110) The timing diagram of the communication sequence of (static capacity code).In this process, first information equipment (200) and device (110) it Between establish synchronize.Synchronous method is established between information equipment (200) and device (110) not limit.For example, information equipment (200) application program or information equipment (200) according to the display device in the service of website that shows, information equipment (200) from Display device, the photodiode (WPD) of issue device (110) or components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) are prespecified repeatedly Light code (lead code) then makes synchronous optical signal shine.If device (110) perceives the lead code, It is considered as after lead code, inputs the initial synchronization signal based on light code, the processing of operation anticipated input synchronization signal is It can.Moreover, after device (110) perceive lead code, if perception synchronization signal, inputs information pattern.
Just as has been described, device (110) is in TST=(benchmark determines number+1 time) the * scan period (Tcycle) Period continues the output of information pattern, that is, continues the ON state or OFF state of element (111).On the other hand, information equipment (200) physics quantitative change during (benchmark determines number+1 time) * scan period (Tcycle), in monitoring element (111) Change, if obtaining information pattern from device (110), issues next synchronous optical signal.In addition, at this point, next synchronizable optical Signal both can be simple synchronous optical signal, and the up-to-date information pattern change for being also possible to input is at light code.Information equipment (200) so continue to handle with device (110), until sign off.
Figure 29 9 is the flow chart of the processing for the device (110) that graphical representation of exemplary executes phototiming communication.In this process, Firstly, foundation is synchronous between device (110) and information equipment (200), and then receive synchronous optical signal (S271).Then, it fills It sets (110) and is synchronized to received synchronous optical signal, from element (111) output information pattern (S272).In addition, device (110) will Information pattern (combination of ON and OFF) output keeps (benchmark determines number+1 time) during the * scan period (Tcycle).
Then, device (110) receives synchronous optical signal (S273).The synchronization optical signal of S273 is also possible to represent simple Variation between synchronous ON and OFF.But, the synchronization optical signal of S273 also may include by information equipment in S272 (200) The information pattern of input is transformed into the information of light code and feedback.The synchronous optical signal of graphical representation of exemplary is contained in back in the figure The situation of the light code of feedback.
Moreover, device (110) compares feedback light code received in the information pattern exported in S272 and S273 Compared with determining whether wrong (S274).When errors are detected, the processing of S272 is returned to, export again terminates output in S272 Information pattern.On the other hand, when inerrancy, whether device (110) determination processing terminates (S275).Processing terminate just like Under a variety of situations, such as without should from device (110) export information pattern situation, according to come from device (110) finger The situation shown, based on user to situation of operation of device (110) etc..When processing is not finished, device (110) is synchronized to Received synchronization signal in S273 exports next information pattern (S272).On the other hand, when ending processing, device (110) Implementation ends processing (S276).Caching needed for ending processing e.g. release information pattern and the transmitting-receiving of light code etc..
In addition, the processing of S273 is omitted when synchronous optical signal received in S273 does not include feedback light code.At this In implementation form, implement phototiming, in addition, executing during (benchmark determines number+1 time) * scan period (Tcycle) Exported by the information pattern of element (111), thus mistake establish it is very low, can be abundant using other even-odd check etc. Mistake is detected, because communication speed decline caused by mistake is also small.
Figure 30 0 is the flow chart of the processing for the information equipment (200) that graphical representation of exemplary implements phototiming communication.At this In reason, firstly, foundation is synchronous between information equipment (200) and device (110), and then synchronous optical signal (S281) is issued.In It is that device (110) is synchronized to received synchronous optical signal, from element (111) output information pattern, thus information equipment (200) It is synchronized to synchronous optical signal, obtains the information pattern exported from element (111).Output for information pattern, device (110) From receiving synchronous optical signal, during TST=(benchmark determines number+1 time) * scan period (Tcycle), continue letter The output of pattern is ceased, thus during this time period, information equipment (200) can determine the ON or OFF of element (111).
In addition, information equipment (200) issues the synchronous optical signal of response in S286, but information equipment (200) is in S282 Perception will be transformed into light code based on the information pattern of determining ON and OFF combination, can also be used as feedback light code, be inserted into It is carried out in the synchronization optical signal of S286 luminous.Information equipment (200) by feedback light code be put into synchronous optical signal carry out it is luminous In the case where, information equipment (200) judges whether the information pattern obtained in S282 is the information inputted again by previous mistake Pattern (S283).Moreover, in the case where no previous mistake, information pattern that information equipment (200) will obtain in S282 It is stored in RAM.On the other hand, in the case where there is (the inputting again) of previous mistake, information equipment (200) is using in S282 The information pattern of acquirement revises previous acquirement and is stored in the information pattern on RAM (S285).
Moreover, information equipment (200), which issues response, synchronizes optical signal (S286).As described above, information is set in S286 Standby (200) feedback light code can also be contained in the synchronous optical signal of response carry out it is luminous.But, information equipment (200) not In the case that feedback light code is contained in the synchronous optical signal of response, the processing of S283, S285 are omitted.
Then, whether information equipment (200) determination processing terminates (S287).Processing terminate following a variety of situations, such as It is set according to the situation of the instruction from device (110), the situation based on the processing result on information equipment (200), based on information The situation, the situation based on user's operation of processing result of website etc. of standby (200) access.When processing is not finished, information is set Standby (200) return to S282, are synchronized to the synchronization optical signal of S286, obtain the information pattern of input.
On the other hand, at the end of processing, information equipment (200) implementation ends processing.End processing e.g. release letter Caching needed for ceasing pattern and the transmitting-receiving of light code etc..
As described above, 99,300 processing according to fig. 2, device (110) and information equipment (200) are synchronized to letter The synchronization optical signal that equipment (200) issue is ceased, the phase of TST=(benchmark determines number+1 time) * scan period (Tcycle) is continued Between, execution information pattern receives, thus can be substantially reduced the received mistake of information, and implementation information receives.
Therefore, it is not necessary to which the letter based on feedback light code of S283, S285 of S274, Figure 30 0 of such as Figure 29 9 must be implemented Breath transmit again, can also reduce mistake generation, for example, can by means of other even-odd check etc., obtain high reliability and Communication throughput (throughput).
In addition, all OFF are being placed in information pattern and information pattern as described in other implementation forms Between and receive in the system of information, during require 2* (benchmark determine number+1 time) compared with, utilizing synchronous optical signal In the case where, can with (benchmark determine number+1 time) during receive information.That is, not including all OFF just accessible information Pattern, in addition, 2 times of communication throughput can be obtained compared with the program comprising all OFF.
In addition, as synchronization signal, utilizing the synchronizable optical of information equipment (200) display device in Figure 29 9, Figure 30 0 Signal is illustrated.But and nonsynchronous signal be defined in synchronous optical signal.As long as can from information equipment (200) to The mode of device (110) communication, any mode are used equally for synchronization signal.For example, there is wireless office in information equipment (200) In the case where the communication interfaces such as domain net, bluetooth, it is also equipped with the communication interface of same size in device (110), is used as synchronous letter Number path.
[variation]
In the implementation form 42, device (110) has the device of the implementation form 1 in each implementation form (110) photodiode (WPD) etc. of graphical representation of exemplary in the components of photo-electric conversion arrangement (112) illustrated in or Figure 20 8 such as, Receive the information (also referred to as light code) based on optical signal for coming from information equipment (200) display device.But there is no this In the case where the light-receiving function of kind optical signal, device (110) can will have synchronization by the touch panel of information equipment (200) The information pattern of signal inputs information equipment (200).In this variation, the device of no optical signal light-receiving function is listed (110) information pattern input step.In addition, the step can be applied to each implementation form device (110, also include There is optical signal light-receiving function person).
Wherein, there is information pattern such as Figure 85 pattern of synchronization signal.In the pattern of Figure 85, synchronization signal is equivalent to The symbol (11) of alternate repetition ON/OFF.
Figure 30 1, which is exemplary diagram showing device (110), inputs information equipment 200 for the information pattern for having synchronization signal) place Manage flow chart.Information input based on the information pattern for having synchronization signal is known as electrostatic synchronization process.In this process, first First foundation is synchronous (S291) between device (110) and information equipment (200).In order to establish synchronization, device (110) continues both Between periodically, the lead code that will be combined with defined unit cell pattern is input into the touch panel of information equipment (200).It is leading After code output, device (110) has the information pattern (S292) of synchronization signal from element (111) output.Wherein, synchronization signal phase When the symbol for including in information pattern, i.e., the ON letter of one or more specific elements (111) in multiple element (111) Number and OFF signal.Information pattern (unit cell pattern that ON is combined with OFF) output is continued (benchmark judgement number by device (110) + 2 times) during the * scan period (Tcycle).
Moreover, device (110) determines whether to terminate (S293).Terminate to be, for example, to there is the information pattern of synchronization signal to input In touch panel, until being combined with the situation of the end of data block of multiple information patterns (unit cell pattern).In addition, terminating to be to make User executes the situation ended processing after set operation in device (110).At the end of not, device (110) is returned S292 exports next information pattern (unit cell pattern).Then, holding (benchmark judgement number+2 is repeated in device (110) It is secondary) information pattern output during the * scan period (Tcycle), until end of data block.
Figure 30 2 is that graphical representation of exemplary information equipment (200) obtains the information pattern for having synchronization signal from device (110) Process flow diagram.In this process, foundation is synchronous (S301) first between information equipment (200) and device (110).In order to It establishes and synchronizes, what information equipment (200) acquirement was exported from device (110) is combined with the lead code of defined unit cell pattern.It obtains After lead code, information equipment (200) obtains the information pattern for having synchronization signal from each element (111) of device (110), saves In RAM (S302).Device (110) by information pattern (unit cell pattern that ON is combined with OFF) output keep (benchmark determine number+ 2 times) during the * scan period (Tcycle), thus information equipment (200) can be perceived by the sensor of touch panel And obtain information pattern.
Moreover, information equipment (200) determines whether to terminate.For terminating, hum pattern is combined with for example, predefining The data block number of case (unit cell pattern), determines whether to achieve the information pattern of both fixed numbers.
As described above, in this variation, device (110) is in (benchmark determines number+2 times) the * scan period (Tcycle) it during, keeps information pattern (unit cell pattern), input comes from the ON and OFF of element (111) in touch panel Information, information equipment (200) can by means of scan touch panel touch sensor and steadily obtain information.
<implementation form 43>
According to Figure 30 3~305, illustrate implementation form 43.In this embodiment, as Figure 12, Figure 13, by crystal 2 sections of arranged in series of pipe semiconductor (transistor, FET) point, when the device (110) for being connected to element (111) is close or loads on touching When touching panel and being acted on, the direct capacitance of touch panel detection is calculated.Figure 30 3 is the circuit that serial transistor is become to ON Example.In the circuit, the power supply side transistor by capacitor (C1), into point 2 sections of concatenated transistors (X1, X2) (X2) collector supplies power supply.
Now, it is assumed that as supply voltage, apply set frequency (such as 100kHz), the situation of V3 volts of voltage.And And, it is assumed that the voltage of the collector of transistor (X2) is VC.At this point, the collector of the position VC, i.e. transistor (X2) and ground connection electricity Equivalent capacity (or impedance) between position can calculating proportional to capacity=C1* (IN-VC)/VC.For Figure 30 3, in base Extreme son supply 3V, thus the capacity is known as ON capacity.
Using with set base current, collector voltage, collector current characteristic simulator calculate result such as Under.
RG=500k Ω, ON capacity=2pF* (6v-6.5mV)/6.5mV=1841pF
RG=1M Ω, ON capacity=2pF* (6v-13mV)/13mV=921pF
RG=2M Ω, ON capacity=2pF* (6v-26.4mV)/26.4mV=452pF
RG=4M Ω, ON capacity=2pF* (6v-55.6mV)/55.6mV=213pF
Reduce base impedance known to if, ON capacity increases.That is, being connected by changing by means of the circuit of Figure 30 3 To the base impedance (RG) of basis set, can will divide in 2 sections of concatenated transistors (X1, X2) from power supply side transistor (X2) current collection The capacity of pole observation, controls the range in 200pF or so to 2000pF or so.Thus, for example in the circuit of Figure 12, Figure 13, By adjusting base impedance, static capacity when can be by element (111) ON is controlled in 200pF or so to 2000pF's or so Range.
In addition, Figure 30 4 is to make the circuit of base earth for Figure 30 3.In this case, it is calculated by means of simulation Capacity due to transistor OFF, thus referred to as OFF capacity.The calculated result of Figure 30 4 is as follows.
RG=2.2M Ω, OFF capacity=2pF* (6v-5.201V)/5.202V=0.307pF
In addition, the Ccb of transistor (X1, X2) is difficult to obtain the influence of 0.27pF and smaller base impedance (RG).Therefore, Even if change RG, the calculated result of OFF capacity also not big difference.Therefore, by means of properly selecting transistor, for example, In the circuit of Figure 12, Figure 13, base impedance is adjusted, it is possible thereby to which static capacity when by element (111) ON is controlled in deficiency 0.3pF。
Figure 30 5 is the circuit for the result of proof diagram 302.In Figure 30 5, by supply voltage, in left side connection figure 303 circuit, on right side, by capacitor C2=2F, capacitor (C3) and impedance (R3) are in parallel.
Moreover, when RG=2.2M ohm, if the current potential of capacitor C3=416pF, V1 are consistent with the current potential of VC2. It is therefore contemplated that the capacity of slave power supply side transistor (X2) the collector observation in point 2 sections of concatenated transistors (X1, X2) It is almost equivalent with C4=416pF, it is almost consistent with the result of Figure 30 3.
Figure 30 6 is transistor (X1, X2) base stage that subordinate connects in the bipolar transistor circuit of Figure 12, inter-collector It connects capacitor (Ccb).In addition, assume the emitter in transistor (X1) in the figure, be connected with the finger of user etc. The terminal of human contact.In addition, capacitor (Ccb) has capacity (Ccb).
In addition, Figure 30 7 is to connect capacitor between the grid of the FET (X3, X4) of subordinate, drain electrode in the FET circuit of Figure 12 Device (Cdg).In addition, assuming the emitter in FET (X3) in the figure, it is connect with the terminal for contacting the human bodies such as user's finger. In addition, capacitor (Cdg) has capacity (Cdg).
The equivalent circuit of Figure 30 6 when Figure 30 8 is transistor ON.Electricity between the base stage of transistor (X1X2), collector Container (Ccb) by means of transistor (X1, X2) the Miller effect, in collector lateral circuit, as with Cc=hfe*Ccb The capacitor of capacity is acted on.In addition, if the impedance of collector, transmitting interpolar when by transistor (X1, X2) ON is set to Rc is connected to the static capacity that the person has then as shown, capacity (Cc) is connect with the parallel circuit in series of impedance (Rc).
In addition, as described later, in the case where transistor (X1, X2) is OFF, base stage, transmitting interpolar capacity (Ceb) are accounted for Ascendancy, thus connected by means of the subordinate of transistor (X1, X2), (1/2) Ceb is smaller value, can inhibit touch panel Perceive capacity caused by human body.The circuit operation of Figure 30 6 as described above is same in the figure GC5 using FET.
Figure 30 9 is the electricity for replacing the user of Figure 30 6 and being connected in parallel reference capacitor (Cref) Yu impedance (Rref) Road.But, in the figure as Figure 30 6, it is also possible that the emitter of user's finger et al. body-contacted transistor (X1). In addition, the junction of reference capacitor (Cref) and impedance (Rref) are not limited to emitter and the ground connection of transistor (X1) Between current potential.It, can also be in the current collection of collector/emitter, transistor (X1) from transistor (X2) in element (111) Pole/emitter is connected to the circuit any place of earthing potential, is equipped with Cref and Rref.
Equivalent circuit when Figure 31 0 is the transistor ON of Figure 30 9.As shown, the base stage of transistor (X1, X2), current collection The capacitor (Ccb) of interpolar by means of transistor (X1, X2) the Miller effect, as in collector lateral circuit have Cc= The capacitor of hfe*Ccb capacity is acted on.Wherein, hfe is the current amplification degree of transistor (X1, X2).
In addition, if the impedance of collector, transmitting interpolar when by transistor (X1, X2) ON is set to Rc, as shown, Capacity (Cc) is connect with the parallel circuit in series of impedance (Rc), is connected to capacitor (Cref).Therefore, by capacity (Cc) or The impedance (Rc) of collector, transmitting interpolar, touch panel can perceive caused by reference capacitor (Cref) when transistor ON Capacity.
In addition, as described later, in the case where transistor (X1, X2) is OFF, base stage, the capacity (Ceb) for emitting interpolar Mastery status is accounted for, thus is connected by means of the subordinate of transistor (X1, X2), (1/2) Ceb becomes smaller value, can inhibit to touch Touch panel perception capacity (Cref).The movement of 9 circuit of Figure 30 as described above is same in the circuit using FET.
Figure 31 1 is by reference capacitor (Cref) excluded circuit of 9 circuit of Figure 30.As the slave crystal of Figure 30 9 It manages indicated by the equivalent circuit (figure GC8) when (X1, X2) is ON, in the circuit of Figure 31 1, when transistor (X1, X2) is ON When, for touch panel, in collector side, the collector when capacity of Cc=hfe*Ccb and transistor (X1, X2) are ON, Impedance (Rc) parallel circuit for emitting interpolar perceives slave circuit.Therefore, by controlling Ccb and hfe for appropriate value, work as crystalline substance When body pipe (X1, X2) is ON, more than threshold values when (1/2) Cc of subordinate connection is touch panel perception capacity, make touch panel Capacity caused by the effect because of Cc can be perceived.
In addition, as described later, in the case where transistor (X1, X2) is OFF, base stage, the capacity (Ceb) for emitting interpolar It is dominant, thus connected by means of the subordinate of transistor (X1, X2), (1/2) Ceb becomes smaller value, can inhibit to touch Panel perceives capacity (1/2) Ceb.The circuit operation of Figure 31 1 as described above is same for FET circuit.
Figure 31 2 is to exclude the base stage of the transistor (X1, X2) in 9 circuit of Figure 30, inter-collector capacitor (Ccb) Outer circuit.In this case, equivalent circuit when transistor (X1, X2) is ON is identical as Figure 31 0, but by means of Miller Effect, the capacity that capacity (Cc) has between base stage, collector due to the element of transistor (X1, X2) itself, therefore, By collector, emit the impedance of interpolar with Rc compared with, it is small to negligible degree.Therefore, in the circuit of Figure 31 2, work as crystalline substance When body pipe (X1, X2) is ON, touch panel perceives capacity (Cref) by the impedance (2*Rc) being connected in series.In addition, scheming In 312 circuit, the movement when transistor (X1, X2) is OFF is identical as Figure 30 9.
6~Figure 31 of figure 30 above 2 illustrates the circuit of subordinate connection transistor (or FET).Transistor is connected by subordinate (or FET), have can by from transistor be OFF when current collection best emitter transistor (or drain electrode to source electrode FET) Capacity becomes 1/2 effect.Therefore, caused by can easily being perceived from touch panel because of the capacity from element (111) OFF.But, in the case that the capacity when transistor etc. is OFF is sufficiently small, transistor (or FET) can not also subordinate company It connects.
Figure 31 3 is that transistor is lined up to 1 section of circuit for Figure 31 1.In addition, Figure 31 4 be transistor (X2) be ON when Equivalent circuit, Figure 31 5 be transistor (X2) be OFF when equivalent circuit.In addition, in Figure 31 4, it is also considered that source side Impedance (RD).In addition, in Figure 31 5, it is also considered that the impedance (RG) of base stage side.
As shown in Figure 31 4, in the case where transistor (X2ON), become impedance (RD) between collector and power supply, rice Strangle the circuit of ON impedance (Rc) parallel connection of transistor between capacity (Cc) and collector/emitter caused by effect.Therefore, pass through Cc=hfe*Ccb is controlled, capacity (Cc) caused by touch panel induction element (111) can be made.Pass through control base current etc. And capacity (Cc) is made to be more than the detection threshold of touch panel touch sensor, it can be inputted in touch panel and come from element (111) ON signal.
In addition, as shown in Figure 31 5, in the case where transistor (X2) is OFF, except base stage, the capacitor of inter-collector connection Outside capacity caused by device (Ccb), there are collectors, the capacity (Cce, engagement capacity) of transmitting interpolar.But, in capacitor (Ccb) it in, is connected by the impedance (RG) of base circuit, therefore, general RG is sufficiently big, and the influence of capacitor (Ccb) is small. Therefore, in this case, the capacity (Cce) between the collector of transistor (X2), emitter is dominant.Therefore, brilliant Capacity (Cce) between the collector of body pipe (X2), emitter becomes through element (111) without what is perceived by touch panel Threshold values the following value of degree, so as to input OFF for touch panel.
The situation of 1 section of transistor circuit using Figure 31 3 is illustrated above, as shown in figure GG4 etc., by crystal The situation that pipe subordinate connects 2 sections or more is same.But, transistor is connected by subordinate, collector, hair when transistor OFF Capacity (Cce) between emitter-base bandgap grading declines with series connection, makes it easy to detect OFF in touch panel.
<implementation form 44>
Referring to 6~Figure 32 of Figure 31 0, code generating device (1A) relevant to implementation form JS8 is illustrated.Figure 31 6 It is the perspective view of code generating device (1A), Figure 31 7 is the main view of code generating device (1A), and Figure 31 8 is that code fills The ground plan of (1A) is set, Figure 31 9 is by the line segment of the point (P1P2) of connection figure HG2, in plane perpendicular to the ground into figure The sectional view of the code generating device (1A) of arrow direction observation, Figure 32 0 is that graphical representation of exemplary eliminates code generating device The figure of the internal structure of (1A) shell.
The code generating device (1) of code generating device (1A) and implementation form 0 equally, has the seal for constituting bottom surface (16).In addition, as shown, code generating device (1A) has the outer of seal portion (16) the more top of covering than constituting bottom surface Shell.Shell has the band-like lower casing (HS2) of close bottom surface and covers the upper casing than the more top lower casing (HS2).
Code generating device (1A) has information judging portion as implementation form 0, in the bottom surface of seal portion (16) (11), code output section (13).In addition, being formed with USB terminal (20) on lower casing (HS2).In addition, being equipped at upper casing (HS1) There are operation button (14), power knob (15).Although in addition, in this embodiment omit, code generating device (1A) with As implementation form 0, there is code generating unit (12), CPU (17), internal storage (18), PCBA (19), loudspeaking in inside Device (21), button switch (22), from master switch (23), wireless device (24) and power supply unit (25).
Code generating device (1A) and one of the difference of code generating device (1) are that code output section (13) pass through bullet Spring (SP) is supported in the internal substrate (BS) of lower casing (HS2).Code output section (13) passes through wiring (WR) and upper casing (HS1) According to the movement of the control circuit on PCBA (19) the appreciable physics of touch panel occurs for internal PCBA (19) connection Amount.Wiring (WR) is flexible conducting wire, absorbs code output section (13) along with the pressing of spring (SP) and along touch panel Shift in position when normal to a surface direction (up and down direction) is mobile.
Contemporary code generating device (1A) is pressed by spring (SP) by means of code output section (13) and contacts touch panel When, by means of spring (SP), code output section (13, electroconductive member) are adjacent to touch panel, and touch panel is easily perceivable to be come from The ON state of code output section (13).Spring (SP) is an example of elastic component.
The columnar part (PL) of spring (SP) and support spring (SP) is not made of metal, but plastics system, inhibits parasitic capacitance And the generation for the capacitor that swims.In the figure in the spiral-shaped inside of spring (SP) equipped with columnar part (PL), but can also make It obtains by means of the cylindrical portion around the spiral-shaped outside spring (SP) and support spring (SP).Utilize the situation also one of cylindrical portion Sample, preferably cylindrical portion are plastics system.Spring (SP) and the component not instead of made of metal for supporting spring (SP), plastics system, thus Inhibit the generation of acceptable capacity and the capacity that swims, reduce from spring (SP) and supports the component of spring (SP) to touch panel Coupling.In this way, which the touch panel of the code generating device (1A) of implementation form 44 is easily perceivable to come from code output section (13) OFF state.
<implementation form 45>(paper card)
1. the threshold values of the conductive contact about touch panel
(1) threshold values variation when smart phone passes through 10 seconds
In the different types of machines of iPhon (registered trademark), occur to touch condition events as the capacity according to detection Condition has first and second threshold values (furthermore, it is assumed that each conductor situation that also wrong processing is arranged).Touching conductor Moment can also be with sense conductor using relatively low capacity using the first low valve valve.It is set as the OFF under more low capacity, After perceiving, by means of lagging without immediately becoming OFF (perceive → not perceiving).But if intracorporal in leading for perception State (stationary state) of at least one conductor not move then was directed to all conductors, setting second continuously across 10 second time Threshold values.In the moment, if perception capacity caused by respective conductors is lower than the OFF capacity of the second threshold values, immediately become not Perception.But, in addition, during all conductors are mobile, it is assumed that finger is the state moved, is continued using the first threshold values. That is, in the case where the capacity of no finger degree, being judged as the conductor touching of not finger in the state that at least one is static It touches, conductor OFF event occurs.In addition, including more than the conductor of the second threshold values OFF capacity, if respective conductors are static, together Shi Chengwei is not perceived.Then, perceive respective conductors it is mobile slightly in the case where, perceive again, but become unstable row For (being estimated as wrong setting).In turn, in the case where the conductor of stationary state does not perceive, when beyond the second threshold values OFF capacity Conductor just when moving, respective conductors do not become the state that do not perceive, but become unstable behavior and (be estimated as mistake to set It sets).In addition, in the case where all conductors are more than the second threshold values OFF capacity, it is unrelated with stationary state and/or moving condition, Do not become and does not perceive state.In various situation, even if there is the conductor of perception or nonsteady behavior, work as perception later When to new conductor, only respective conductors are normally perceived, during 10 seconds, according to the capacity of respective conductors, it is static/mobile and The processing is realized again.I.e., it is believed that each conductor implements the first, second threshold values, mistake setting.
On the other hand, unrelated with first and second threshold values, the presence of conductor, as long as there is provided capacity, even if not felt Know, also detect always, when conductor is mobile, tracks it and move and detect conductor.But, according to the threshold values condition of setting, occur The event (also including mistake setting) of conductor ON/OFF is represented, the perception of various application program identification conductor of exploitation (also includes Mistake setting) situation.On the other hand, it in the state of perceiving capacity smaller conductor, enumerates conductor is horizontal or vertical In the state of, due to the characteristic of touch panel, the capacity of detection further declines, and the whole conductors for occurring 1 or enumerating become The situation of OFF.Wherein, as long as other conductors, which do not become, does not perceive state, become under horizontal or vertical state and do not perceive The conductor of state it is not horizontal or vertical enumerate it is mobile in the case where it is perceived.Such case is such as avoided, preferably improves and leads The capacity of electric connection, to perceive sufficient capacity.In addition, either at finger or children's finger or contact surface Small situation etc., due to off-capacity, if using the second threshold values, perception less than.Then, if widening contact area, increasing Add capacity, and keep conductor mobile, then perceives again, but the behavior of touch panel becomes unstable (being estimated as wrong setting). In addition, if the area of connector is big, degree of being adjacent to is high, and the capacity of the connector including wiring is big, then for the capacity perceived Also it is easier to perceive It is not necessary to say.
(2) threshold values variation when tablet computer is more than 10 seconds
In iPad (registered trademark), equally with iPhone (registered trademark), as the item that touch condition events occur Part has first and second threshold values (also assuming that the situation in the presence of the third threshold values for including error handle), is considered as first and second valve The basic handling of value is identical as smart phone.But it in the big i-PAD of shell, compared with smart phone, significantly perceives To conductor capacity, reaction is well.In the conductive contact in the region ID of this implementation form, in principle in the second threshold values, conductor Do not become OFF.Therefore, can continue to play when making and being stuck in the movement of touch panel surface as card game.As Tablet computer personality card, in the touch area of this implementation form, as shown in the utensil for implementing aspect graph 321, in order to cheap Manufacture, is not equipped with via hole, conductive contact in touch area, only by the outfit dielectric post immediately below in touch, can feel Know touch.But the conductive contact in the region ID perception capacity (also including the wiring of connection) is small, when (the perception capacity on the wooden table It is smaller than iron) in the case where use, also there is during 10 seconds not perceived situation.In addition, for the capacity perceived, such as The area of fruit connector is big, and the capacity of the connector including wiring is big, high with the degree of being adjacent to of touch panel, then is easier to perceive, this is It is self-evident.That is, no matter under which kind of situation, it is so-called can normal sense conductor, as long as the second threshold values, which has, to be felt The abundant capacity for knowing all conductors is then not limited to 10 seconds or more stationary states and/or moving condition, can be normally Continue to perceive.
<use example about the card for not including circuit>
In Figure 110~Figure 124, Figure 22 4~242, to not including being driven by means of the power supply of semiconductor switch etc. The card-type device of active circuit is illustrated.(it is recorded as " C- below below for the card-type device for not including this circuit Card ") use example be illustrated.
In addition, design and its application method for card-type device, are not limited to example in detail below certainly.
Firstly, user using (being recorded as " smart phone " below) such as smart phone or tablet computers, opens and wishes to take The website of business.Moreover, C-Card is adjacent to the website.Then, smart phone identifies the card ID that each C-Card is equipped with, thus C-Card is carried out specific.
In C-Card, such as equipped with 12 icons.User touches icon, so as to implement diverse operations, interior Hold output.
Alternatively, it is also possible to utilize smart phone display device, icon area or icon periphery is made to shine.By to send out Light can guide or arouse the operation of user.
For the situation for keeping C-Card luminous, all or part of for preferably making C-Card is transparent or semitransparent.
The particular use of C-Card is as follows.
(1) music card
Music card is sold together with CD.It is printed with personal identification number in card face, if the personal identification number is inputted intelligence Mobile phone can then appreciate live performance.
(2) advertising cards
Attractive photo is published, the synchronization for being directed to smart phone is assigned, receives in smart phone.In intelligent hand The content of advertisement is shown in machine.Photo is also prompted in icon.Distribute, postal delivery, leaflet, DM, shops provide
(3) prepaid card
Unique personal identification number, which is recorded, on card surface touches digitized map on one side if checking personal identification number on one side Mark can then do shopping or confirm remaining sum.Primary dispatching ground need to be only inputted, is just connected later with smart phone ID, does not need again defeated Enter.Personal identification number requires every time.No matter which kind of smart phone can be used.It is stuck in convenience store etc. sale.
(4) it orders goods and blocks
By the tight shopping website of sticker, setting icon, input dispatching ground or credit card information are touched.Touch product setting/purchase Enter, selects the commodity to be bought, be registered in commodity (1)~(10).Then, the commodity to be bought are touched, in the picture of smart phone Quantity is determined in face and is bought.Commodity (1)~(10) image can also print for icon.For reinforcing manufacturer Product online spending.
(5) physical card
In the photo of the various sport players such as card surface printing baseball, football, sumo, icon is touched, view content, or Buy admission ticket.Physical card can both be sold, and can also gratuitously be provided by sponsor.
In addition it is also possible to for multiplicity such as Gift Card, idol content, tourism, voice content card, safety/disposal passwords Purposes.
[appended drawing reference]
1... code generating device, 3... code identification device, 11 ... information judging portions, 12... code generating unit, 13... code output section 31... touch panel, the identification part 32... test section 33...
110.. device, card-type device, 200... information equipment, 111... element, the 112... components of photo-electric conversion arrangement, 113... fingerprint sensor, 114... contact conductor (conductive pad), 114A... conductive layer 115...SW, 116...CPU, 117... memory, 118... comparator, 119... control line, 120... power supply line, 121... driving circuit, 122... electricity Pond, 123... capacitor, 124... antenna, 125... power transformation circuit, 126... piezoelectric element, 127... rectification circuit, 128... thermoelectric element, 129... light quantity measuring cell arrangement<form furthermore>
This implementation form further includes following form.
(form 1)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more each element cause the physical quantity variation；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
The information output part exports the first set letter in the state that the acting surface is in contact with or close to the panel Breath,
The physical quantity control unit inhibits the physical quantity of deposit, so that becoming that will export from the physical quantity of the element In the case where for OFF, the physical quantity of deposit described in the panel nonrecognition.
(form 2)
The device recorded in a kind of form 1, wherein there is the physical quantity control unit parasitic capacitance between terminal to be suppressed In 1.6Pf or less, preferably in 0.8pF or less, more preferably in 0.5pF semiconductor switch below.
(form 3)
The device recorded in a kind of form 2, wherein the semiconductor switch is provided with reverse blas, so that when switch OFF Impedance value reach 800 kilo-ohms or more, junction capacity reach 2.1pF or less.
(form 4)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more each element cause the physical quantity variation；；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
Power supply circuit supplies electric energy based on from the energy that other side's device with the panel arrives；
The information output part exports the first set letter in the state that the acting surface is in contact with or close to the panel Breath.
(form 5)
The device recorded in a kind of form 4, wherein the power supply circuit is in the acting surface and relative to described There is on the face of at least one party transformation component in behind acting surface, the transformation component from light, electromagnetic wave, from external pressure Temperature difference between power or terminal and electric energy occurs.
(form 6)
A kind of device recorded in form 4, wherein it include display device in the panel,
The transformation component is provided to the acting surface, and electric energy occurs from the light that the display device shines,
The energy of the arrival is the light to shine from the display device.
(form 7)
The device recorded in a kind of form 6, wherein the transformation component is solar power generation.
(form 8)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more each element cause the physical quantity variation；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
The multiple element is equipped with the number for the element maximum number that can be identified simultaneously more than panel,
The information output part drives the physical quantity control unit, so that generating the element of the physical quantity variation simultaneously Number reach the maximum number or less.
(form 9)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more each element cause the physical quantity variation；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
The physical quantity of the synchronous element more than at least one in multiple elements occurs for the information output part Time change is synchronized to the physical quantity of the information output element in multiple elements to export synchronization signal Synchronization signal and time of origin change, to send information to the panel.
(form 10)
The device recorded in a kind of form 9, wherein the information output part is in the physics from the synchronous element The output of amount is the OFF for the value that in the ON given time of the value that the panel can detect or more and the insufficient panel can detect It is synchronous in given time, the first set information is sent to the panel for driving the physical quantity to control.
(form 11)
The device recorded in a kind of one of form 9 or 10, wherein the synchronization is equipped with 2 or more with element, using both Determine method, keep the time change of the physical quantity from the element different, other side's device identification with the panel is not The configuration of same element.
(form 12)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more each element cause the physical quantity variation；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
The information output part drives the physical quantity control unit, causes at least part of the set element Physical quantity variation, or combined using one or more set described elements, the physical quantity variation of the element is repeated several times, To which other side's device with the panel identifies all configurations of the element.
(form 13)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more each element cause the physical quantity variation；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
By the way that cause can be by scheduled time interval, with other content differently to the physics quantitative change from the element The control of change carries out specific physical quantity variation, thus when showing repeatedly the output of the described first set information it is described both Determine the differentiation of information.
(form 14)
A kind of device recorded in form 13, wherein show the set differentiation, can be by between given time Every differently being carried out in specific physical quantity variation with other content, the error check including the described first set information.
(form 15)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more each element cause the physical quantity variation；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
Non-conductive layer, in the acting surface, in a part in the region different from the region that element is configured or complete Portion is formed；
Conductive layer, the opposing face in the region that the element of the acting surface is configured have and lead to leading for the element Electrical path is the conductive layer with conductive material and in part or all of formation, or is formed with non-conductive layer on upper layer Certain one of the conductive layer；
Operation portion is formed in the opposing face of the non-conductive layer of the acting surface；
If position or electric conductor with human body, touches the conductive layer or be formed with the non-conductive layer on upper layer Certain one of conductive layer then drives described 1 or more physical quantity control unit, exports the first set information, in turn, if utilized The position of human body or electric conductor touch the operation portion, then the panel is made to identify the touch location.
(form 16)
The device recorded in a kind of form 15, wherein the operation portion includes non-conductive layer, in the non-conductive layer Lower layer, the conductive layer further include the operation portion and are integrally equipped with.
(form 17)
The device recorded in a kind of form 16, wherein in the conductive layer for being provided to the operation portion lower layer and be equipped with Between the non-conductive layer of the acting surface, equipped with due to the compressing at the position of human body or electric conductor by compression and energy Enough identify the air layer of touch location.
(form 18)
The device recorded in a kind of form 16, wherein be provided to the non-conductive layer of the operation portion opposing face, wrap The gap of touch location is compressed and can identified due to including the compressing because of the position of human body or electric conductor.
(form 19)
The device recorded in a kind of form 18, wherein the non-conductive layer is with the material shape of honeycomb or spongy state At.
(form 20)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 15~19, wherein the operation portion and form the operation portion lower layer Part or all of layer is transparent.
(form 21)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 15~20, at least the operation portion part or all, formed There are figure or text.
(form 22)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 20 or 21, wherein the panel has display device,
Described element configuration 3 or more, or by means of the touch to the operation portion of position or electric conductor of human body, Other side's device with the panel identifies the position of the transparent region of the operation portion, by means of the display device The set image of display in the transparent region.
(form 23)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more each element cause the physical quantity variation；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
Imaging sensor is provided at least certain one of the acting surface or opposing face.
(form 24)
The device recorded in a kind of form 23, wherein described image sensor shoots at least part in the position of human body Or the apperance in the convex-concave portion on part of it surface.
(form 25)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 23 or 24, wherein described image sensor shooting is input into the dress Bar code, dot code, 2 d code or the colour coding for the input information set.
(form 26)
The device recorded in a kind of form 25, wherein the input information is to be formed on set medium or filled in display Set certain one of middle display.
(form 27)
The device recorded in a kind of form 26, wherein the display device is provided to the panel.
(form 28)
A kind of device recorded in form 26 or 27, wherein described image sensor be equipped with load on it is described set Medium or the display device certain one in the state of, keep outer light not incident,
Also there is irradiation portion, be directed to the input information, irradiate the light of given wavelength；
When loading on the set medium, the reaction of the light irradiated to the set medium is shot,
When loading on the display device, the image that the display device is shown is shot.
(form 29)
The device recorded in a kind of form 28, wherein it is described set that described image sensor detects the irradiation portion irradiation The reaction of light when wavelength still loads on the display device so that identification is to load on the set medium.
(form 30)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 23~30, wherein also there is processing unit, passed according to described image The information execution information processing of sensor shooting,
The information output part output includes the described first set information of the result of the information processing.
(form 31)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more each element cause the physical quantity variation；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
Touch panel receives the input operation for touching or drawing from the position of human body or electric conductor.
(form 32)
The device recorded in a kind of form 31, wherein part or all at least in the touch panel is formed with figure Shape or text.
(form 33)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 31 or 32, wherein at least in the touch panel there is identification to utilize The character recognition device for the track that the position of human body or the electric conductor are drawn.
(form 34)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 31~33, wherein there is the convex of the surface for identifying the human body The organism identification device of the apperance of recess portion.
(form 35)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 31~34, wherein also there is processing unit, according to utilizing the touching Touch panel acquirement information and execution information handle,
The information output part output includes the described first set information of the information processing result.
(form 36)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 1~35, wherein also include one or more test sections, detection from The arrival amount for the energy based on light or electromagnetic wave that other side's device with the panel arrives；
Message input device, with the time change of the arrival amount of the energy detected by means of the test section Based on, obtain the second set information.
(form 37)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more each element cause the physical quantity variation；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
One or more test sections are detected from other side's device arrival with the panel based on light or electromagnetic wave Energy arrival amount；
Information input unit, the time change with the arrival amount of the energy detected by means of the test section are Basis obtains the second set information；
The energy arrival amount that the above test section of at least one is changed according to the time detects synchronization signal, and same The arrival amount variation for walking the synchronous detection different-energy of signal, so that the information input unit obtains the second set information.
(form 38)
The device recorded in a kind of form 37, wherein the information input unit is the test section in the synchronization signal The value that can be detected more than ON given time in and the insufficient test section the value that can be detected OFF given time in together Step obtains the second set information from the panel.
(form 39)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more each element cause the physical quantity variation；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
One or more test sections are detected from other side's device arrival with the panel based on light or electromagnetic wave Energy arrival amount；
Information input unit is obtained based on the time change of the energy detected by means of the test section Second set information；
The detection of the physical quantity variation and energy arrival amount is implemented at least part duplicate time.
(form 40)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more each element cause the physical quantity variation；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
One or more test sections are detected from other side's device arrival with the panel based on light or electromagnetic wave Energy arrival amount；
Information input unit is obtained based on the time change of the energy detected by means of the test section Second set information；
The energy arrival amount being changed according to the time, the test section detect synchronization signal, make from the member The physical quantity of part is synchronized to synchronization signal and time of origin changes, so that the information input unit sends first to the panel Set information.
(form 41)
The device recorded in a kind of form 40, wherein the information output part is the test section in the synchronization signal It is synchronous in the OFF given time for the value that the interior and insufficient test section of ON given time more than value that can be detected can detect, to driving The panel of the physical quantity control unit sends the first set information.
(form 42)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more each element cause the physical quantity variation；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
One or more test sections are detected from other side's device arrival with the panel based on light or electromagnetic wave Energy arrival amount；；
Information input unit is obtained based on the time change of the energy detected by means of the test section Second set information；
The physical quantity of the synchronous element more than at least one in multiple elements occurs for the information output part Time change, so that synchronization signal is exported,
The information input unit and the synchronization signal synchronously detect the variation of the energy arrival amount, to obtain The second set information.
(form 43)
The device recorded in a kind of form 42, wherein the information input unit is in the physics from the synchronous element The output of amount is the OFF for the value that in the ON given time of the value that the panel can detect or more and the insufficient panel can detect It is synchronous in given time, the second set information is obtained from the panel.
(form 44)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more each element cause the physical quantity variation；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
One or more test sections are detected from other side's device arrival with the panel based on light or electromagnetic wave Energy arrival amount；
Information input unit is obtained based on the time change of the energy detected by means of the test section Second set information；
The test section detection can be by scheduled time interval, with other content differently to the energy arrival amount Variation carries out specific physical quantity variation, thus the area of current set information when exporting to the second set information repeatedly Divide and is shown.
(form 45)
The device recorded in a kind of form 44, wherein can be according between the given time for showing the set differentiation Every, in the variation that specific arrival amount is differently carried out with other content, the error check comprising the described second set information.
(form 46)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more each element cause the physical quantity variation；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, the physical quantity control unit of driving described 1 or more, output first Set information；
One or more test sections are detected from other side's device arrival with the panel based on light or electromagnetic wave Energy arrival amount；
Information input unit, with the arrival amount of the energy that is detected by means of the test section or arrival amount when Between change at least one of based on obtain the second set information；
The message input device whenever formed the first set information based on the element physical quantity variation When both the information pattern of fixed number exports in information pattern, it is connected to defined in corresponding both information patterns of fixed number comprising obtaining The arrival energy including code, the information input unit for the test section detection respective code with it is corresponding both Code defined in the information pattern of fixed number carries out positive misinterpretation, when two sides are inconsistent, exports corresponding both fixed numbers again Information pattern.
(form 47)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: multiple element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes the multiple element cause the physical quantity variation respectively；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
One or more test sections are detected from other side's device arrival with the panel based on light or electromagnetic wave Energy arrival amount；
Information input unit, with the arrival amount of the energy that is detected by means of the test section or arrival amount when Between change at least one of based on obtain the second set information；
The information output apparatus is whenever the letter based on the arrival energy variation for forming the second set information When ceasing the information pattern arrival of both fixed numbers in pattern, generation defined in corresponding both information patterns of fixed number of the output comprising acquirement The physical quantity including code, other side's device for code defined in corresponding both information patterns of fixed number with it is described The respective code of test section detection carries out positive misinterpretation, when two sides are inconsistent, obtains the information pattern of corresponding both fixed numbers.
(form 48)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: multiple element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes the multiple element cause the physical quantity variation respectively；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
One or more test sections are detected from other side's device arrival with the panel based on light or electromagnetic wave Energy arrival amount；
Information input unit, with the arrival amount of the energy that is detected by means of the test section or arrival amount when Between change at least one of based on obtain the second set information；
In the arrival amount include the panel location information,
The information input unit measures to obtain the location information from the arrival detected by means of the test section.
(form 49)
The device recorded in a kind of form 48, wherein the information output part utilizes corresponding with the location information the One set information drives the physical quantity control unit, makes the multiple element that the physical quantity variation occur respectively.
(form 50)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: multiple element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes the multiple element cause the physical quantity variation respectively；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
One or more test sections are detected from other side's device arrival with the panel based on light or electromagnetic wave Energy arrival amount；
Information input unit, with the arrival amount of the energy that is detected by means of the test section or arrival amount when Between change at least one of based on obtain the second set information；
At least one the above test section is configured at the inside of the element or the annulus mould centered on respective element At least one of region of sample.
(form 51)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more element cause the physical quantity variation respectively；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
One or more test sections are detected from other side's device arrival with the panel based on light or electromagnetic wave Energy arrival amount；
Information input unit, the time change with the arrival amount of the energy detected by means of the test section are Basis obtains the second set information；
Counting device counts the identification information of identification described device and other devices；
The counting device counts coding letter based on the described second set information that the information input unit obtains Breath,
The information output part output includes the described first set information of the encoded information.
(form 52)
A kind of device recorded in form 51, wherein also there is ID memory storage, record identification described device and its The ID of his device,
The counting device is at least using the described second set information of aforementioned message input device acquirement and the ID as base Plinth counts encoded information.
(form 53)
The device recorded in a kind of form 51 or 52, wherein also there is clock signal generating unit, set initial In the set clock cycle clock signal occurs for the time,
The the described second set information and the clock signal that the counting device is at least obtained with the information input unit Based on, count encoded information.
(form 54)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 51~53, wherein also there is detection circuit, detection is from outside Etalon time signal,
The counting device is at least with the described second set information of information input unit acquirement and the etalon time Based on signal, encoded information is counted.
(form 55)
A kind of device that a certain item is recorded in form 51~54, wherein part or all of the second set information It is the information being changed every given time,
The second set information is the information that there is other side's device of the panel voluntarily to occur or from cloud to phase Certain one in information sent to other side's device of panel.
(form 56)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 51~55, wherein based on the described first set information, have Other side's device of the panel or the cloud that identification information is had sent from other side's device with the panel, identification identification Information identifies described device.
(form 57)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more element cause the physical quantity variation respectively；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
One or more test sections are detected from other side's device arrival with the panel based on light or electromagnetic wave Energy arrival amount；
Information input unit is obtained based on the time change of the energy detected by means of the test section Second set information；
The information input unit is using the testing result of physical quantity variation described in the panel detection with the sensor as base Plinth obtains the described second set information as the instruction for moderately being maked corrections to the variation of respective physical amount,
The information output part is based on the described second set information, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, Implement the adjustment to the physical quantity variation, exports the first set information.
(form 58)
A kind of device recorded in form 57, wherein the physical quantity control unit is semiconductor switch,
According to make the semiconductor switch become on state driving signal signal amplitude, open the semiconductor The signal amplitude for becoming the driving signal of dissengaged positions is closed, the adjustment to the physical quantity variation is implemented.
(form 59)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: multiple element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes the multiple element cause the physical quantity variation respectively；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information；
One or more test sections are detected from other side's device arrival with the panel based on light or electromagnetic wave Energy arrival amount；
Information input unit, with the arrival amount of the energy detected by means of the test section or arrival amount time Based at least one of variation, the second set information is obtained；
The information output part, in contact with or close to the state of the panel, exports the first set information in the acting surface,
The test section is configured at the position for being identified as one of multiple element configuration of the panel detection physical quantity.
(form 60)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 8~58, wherein the information output part is with the effect face contact Or the state close to the panel, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information.
(form 61)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 37~58, wherein the information input unit is in the effect face contact Or close in the state of the panel, based at least one of time change of the arrival amount of the energy or arrival amount, Obtain the second set information.
(form 62)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 2~59, wherein the physical quantity control unit inhibits the deposit Physical quantity, so that the panel identification is less than deposit in the case where will export from the physical quantity of the element becomes OFF Physical quantity.
(form 63)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 1~3 or 8~59, wherein there is power supply circuit, with from tool Electric energy is supplied based on the energy for having other side's device of the panel to arrive.
(form 64)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 1~7 or 9~59, wherein equipped with number be more than the panel energy The element of enough while identification element maximum number,
The information output part drives the physical quantity control unit, so that the element of the physical quantity variation occurs simultaneously Number reaches the maximum number or less.
(form 65)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 1~8 or 12~59, wherein the information output part makes from multiple The physical quantity time of origin variation of more than at least one synchronous element, exports synchronization signal, makes from multiple in the element The physical quantity of information output element in the element is synchronized to synchronization signal and time of origin changes, thus to the face Plate sends information.
(form 66)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 1~11 or 13~59, wherein described in the information output part driving Physical quantity control unit makes at least part of the set element cause physical quantity variation, or both using one or more The combination of the fixed element, repeatedly causes the physical quantity variation of respective element, so that other side's device with the panel identifies All configurations of the element.
(form 67)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 1~12 or 15~59, wherein cause by scheduled time interval without It is same as other ground and specific physical quantity variation is carried out to the control of the physical quantity variation from the element, to show anti- The differentiation of corresponding set information when multiple first set information output.
(form 68)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 1~14 or 23~59, wherein included in the acting surface non-conductive Layer, part or all of formation in the region different from the region that element is configured；
Conductive layer has the conduction for leading to the element in the region opposing face that the element of the acting surface is configured Property path, be the conductive layer that is formed at part or all or on it layer is formed with non-conductive layer with conductive material Certain one in corresponding conductive layer；
Operation portion is formed in the opposing face of the non-conductive layer of the acting surface；
If human body or electric conductor touch the conductive layer or are formed with the conductive layer of the non-conductive layer on upper layer In certain one, then drive described 1 or more physical quantity control unit, the first set information exported, in turn, if the position of human body Or electric conductor touches the operation portion, then the panel is made to identify corresponding touch location.
(form 69)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 1~22 or 31~59, wherein have be provided to the acting surface or The imaging sensor of at least certain one of opposing face.
(form 70)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 1~30 or 37~59, wherein have by touch or draw from The position of human body or electric conductor receive the touch panel of input operation.
(form 71)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 36 or 39~59, wherein for the information input unit, at least 1 The energy arrival amount that a above test section changes according to time of origin detects synchronization signal, detection synchronous with synchronization signal The variation of other energy arrival amounts, to obtain the described second set information.
(form 72)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 36~38 or 40~59, wherein the physical quantity variation and energy arrive Detection to measure is implemented at least part duplicate time.
(form 73)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 36~39 or 42~59, wherein for the information input unit, The arrival amount for the energy that the test section changes according to time of origin detects synchronization signal, makes the object from the element Reason amount time of origin variation synchronous with synchronization signal, to send the first set information to the panel.
(form 74)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 36~41 or 44~59, wherein the information output part is from from more The physical quantity time of origin variation of more than at least one synchronous element in a element, so that synchronization signal is exported,
The variation of the information input unit detection energy arrival amount synchronous with the synchronization signal, to obtain institute State the second set information.
(form 75)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 36~43 or 46~59, wherein the test section detection can be by both It fixes time and is spaced and is different from other ground and specific arrival amount variation is carried out to energy arrival amount variation, to show The differentiation of corresponding set information when exporting the second set information repeatedly.
(form 76)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 36~45 or 47~59, wherein the message input device whenever Form the information pattern output of both fixed numbers in the information pattern based on the element physical quantity variation of the described first set information When, the arrival energy being connected to including code defined in corresponding both information patterns of fixed number comprising acquirement, the information Input unit carries out just for the respective code of test section detection with code defined in the information pattern of corresponding both fixed numbers Misinterpretation exports the information pattern of corresponding both fixed numbers when the two is inconsistent again.
(form 77)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 36~46 or 48~59, wherein the information output apparatus whenever The information pattern for forming both fixed numbers in the information pattern based on the arrival energy variation of the described second set information arrives When, output includes the physical quantity including code defined in corresponding both information patterns of fixed number of acquirement, other side's dress The respective code detected for code defined in corresponding both information patterns of fixed number with the test section is set just to be judged by accident It is fixed, when the two is inconsistent, re-fetch the information pattern of corresponding both fixed numbers.
(form 78)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 36~47 or 50~59, wherein comprising described in the arrival amount The location information of panel,
The information input unit obtains the location information from the arrival amount detected by means of the test section.
(form 79)
A kind of device that a certain item is recorded in form 36~49 or 51~59, wherein the detection more than at least one Portion is configured at least certain of the inside of the element or the annulus apperance region centered on respective element.
(form 80)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 36~50 or 59, wherein also have to identification described device and other The counting device that the identification information of device is counted；
The counting device is based on the described second set information that the message input device obtains, calculation code Information,
The information output part output includes the described first set information of the encoded information.
(form 81)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 36~58, the test section are configured at from the panel detection physics The position clearly identified in the configuration of the multiple element of amount.
(form 82)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 1~81, wherein the physical quantity is capacitor or electric field strength,
Described 1 or more element is formed with conductive material.
(form 83)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 1~82, wherein non-conductive layer is included in the acting surface, Part or all of formation in the region different from the region of element configuration；
Conductive layer has the conduction for leading to the element in the region opposing face that the element of the acting surface is configured Property path, be the conductive layer that is formed at part or all or on it layer is formed with non-conductive layer with conductive material Certain one in corresponding conductive layer；
If human body or electric conductor touch the conductive layer or are formed with the conductive layer of the non-conductive layer on upper layer In certain one, then drive described 1 or more physical quantity control unit, export the first set information.
(form 84)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 1~59, wherein also there is contact conductor, in the acting surface Opposing face is formed with conductive material, receive from it is external near to or in contact with；
Described 1 or more physical quantity control unit includes switch, and the switch control make to be formed from described 1 or more The path that element arrives the contact conductor respectively is also turned off the path.
(form 85)
The device recorded in a kind of form 84, wherein be equipped on the surface of the contact conductor and be used as protection/printing layer Non-conductive layer.
(form 86)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 1~59, wherein the element be formed in the acting surface it is thin Film semiconductor.
(form 87)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 1~59, wherein described device is the seal type dress for acting on panel It sets or card-type device.
(form 88)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 1~59, wherein other side's device with the panel is intelligent hand One of machine or tablet computer.
(form 89)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 36~59, wherein the test section more than at least one is configured at Near the position that the element is configured.
(form 90)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 36~59, wherein the test section is to detect one or more colors Light acceptance part,
The information input unit is utilized with the time change of each light quantity of one or more colors and light quantity at least Optical signal based on certain one obtains the second set information.
(form 91)
A kind of device recorded in form 90, wherein
At least one of multiple color color detection is that described synchronize uses optical signal by the acceptance part.
(form 92)
The device recorded in a kind of form 91, wherein the optical signal of the multiple color is R, G, B.
(form 93)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 36~59, wherein the test section is from the forward surface interpretation figure Picture,
The information input unit obtains the described second set information based on the image of interpretation.
(form 94)
A kind of device that a certain item is recorded in form 36~59, wherein the first set information and described second set Information is in the transmission information of docking collection of letters breath or in the relationship for the reception information for sending information.
(form 95)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 36~59, wherein also there is processing unit, it is defeated according to the information Enter portion acquirement the described second set information and execution information handle；
The information output part output includes the described first set information of the information processing result.
(form 96)
A kind of device recorded in form 96, wherein the information output part by sent based on wireless information, language It is a certain in sound output, luminous or vibration, export set third information.
(form 97)
A kind of information equipment, comprising: panel carries sensor, and the sensor detects the physics quantitative change from element The position that the generation of change and the variation of respective physical amount occur carries out the position of the element specific；
Control unit controls the sensor and panel；
The control unit when the element is near to or in contact with the sensor, make the panel with from the element Configuration in the corresponding partial region in clearly defined position the variation of light quantity time of origin, send the second set information.
(form 98)
A kind of program, for (wherein, the sensor inspection in being connected to the computer for being equipped with the panel of sensor The position that the generation and the variation of respective physical amount for surveying the physical quantity variation from element occur, carries out the position of the element It is specific) it executes:
When the element is near to or in contact with the sensor, from the configuration of the element, to the position for being defined as one Carry out it is specific,
Change the light quantity time of origin of the partial region of the panel corresponding with the position,
(form 99)
A kind of program, for executing: receiving the input from test section, wherein the test section detection is from panel The energy arrival amount based on light or electromagnetic wave that arrives of other side's device, or read from built-in memory storage, to obtain Second set information；
Based on the described second set information, make to be formed in the acting surface for generating the detectable physical quantity variation of panel 1 or more element the physical quantity variation occurs respectively.
(form 100)
A kind of program, for executing: receive the input from imaging sensor, or is read from built-in memory storage, from And obtain the second set information；
Based on the described second set information, make to be formed in the acting surface for generating the detectable physical quantity variation of panel 1 or more element the physical quantity variation occurs respectively.
(form 101)
A kind of program, for being executed in the computer for being connected to panel:
By the panel, the position of generation and the variation generation of respective physical amount of the physical quantity variation from element is detected It sets；
Physical quantity variation and position from detection carry out the position of the element specific；
The first set information is obtained based on the position of the element；
Implement set processing based on the described first set information.
(form 102)
A kind of program, for executing: receiving the set input from test section, wherein test section detection is from having The energy arrival amount based on light or electromagnetic wave that other side's device of panel arrives, or read from built-in memory storage, thus Obtain the second set information；
Based on the described second set information, make to be formed in the acting surface for generating the detectable physical quantity variation of panel 1 or more element the physical quantity variation occurs respectively；
When other side's device sends the energy based on light or electromagnetic wave, corresponding energy is detected by the test section Arrival amount；
With at least one of the energy arrival amount detected or time change of arrival amount by means of the test section Based on, obtain the set information of third.
(form 103)
A kind of program, for executing: receiving the set input from imaging sensor, or from built-in memory storage It reads, to obtain the second set information；
Based on the described second set information, make to be formed in the acting surface for generating the detectable physical quantity variation of panel 1 or more element the physical quantity variation occurs respectively；
When other side's device sends the energy based on light or electromagnetic wave, corresponding energy is detected by the test section Arrival amount；
With at least one of the energy arrival amount detected or time change of arrival amount by means of the test section Based on, obtain the set information of third.
(form 104)
A kind of program, for being executed in the computer for being connected to panel:
By the panel, the position of generation and the variation generation of respective physical amount of the physical quantity variation from element is detected It sets；
Physical quantity variation and position from detection carry out the position of the element specific；
Based on the position of the element, the first set information is obtained；
With established approach, the second set information is obtained；
Based on the described second set information, the energy based on light or electromagnetic wave is sent to described device.
(form 105)
A kind of communication system, the communication system include
Physical quantity occurs for device；
Information equipment, with panel, the panel has the sensor for detecting the physical quantity；
In the communication system,
Described device includes
1 or more element, forms in acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more element cause the physical quantity variation respectively；
Test section detects the energy arrival amount based on light or electromagnetic wave to arrive from other side's device；
Imaging sensor；
Memory portion；
Information input unit；
Information output part, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit；
The information input unit receives set defeated from least one of the test section or described image sensor Enter, or is read from the memory storage, so that the first set information is obtained,
The information output part is driven the physical quantity control unit, is made described 1 based on the described first set information The physical quantity variation occurs respectively for a above element,
The information equipment passes through the panel,
The position that the physical quantity variation and the variation of respective physical amount occurred from described device detection occurs,
Physical quantity variation and position from detection, it is specific to the position progress of the element,
Based on the position of the element, the first set information is obtained,
Based on the described first set information, set processing is executed.
(form 106)
A kind of communication system, the communication system include the device that physical quantity occurs；Information equipment with panel, institute Stating panel has the sensor for detecting the physical quantity；In the communication system,
Described device has:
1 or more element, forms in acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more element cause the physical quantity variation respectively；
Test section detects the arrival amount of the energy based on light or electromagnetic wave to arrive from other side's device；
Imaging sensor；
Memory portion；
Information input unit；
Information output part, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit；
The information input unit receives at least one the set input of the test section or described image sensor, or from The memory storage is read, so that the first set information is obtained,
The information output part is driven the physical quantity control unit, is made described 1 based on the described first set information The physical quantity variation occurs respectively for a above element,
The information equipment passes through the panel,
The position that the physical quantity variation and the variation of respective physical amount occurred from described device detection occurs,
Physical quantity variation and position from detection, it is specific to the position progress of the element,
Based on the position of the element, the first set information is obtained,
With established approach, the second set information is obtained,
Based on the described second set information, the energy based on light or electromagnetic wave is sent to described device；
Described device detects the arrival amount of the corresponding energy of transmission by means of the test section,
By means of the information input unit, with the energy arrival amount detected or arrival by means of the test section Based at least one of time change of amount, the set information of third is obtained.
(form 107)
A kind of communication means, in the communication means of information equipment,
When element is near to or in contact with the sensor, from the configuration of the element, to being configured at the position for being defined as one The progress of position provisioned in the acceptance part set is specific,
The second set information is obtained with established approach,
Based on the described second set information, make the faceplate part region corresponding with the position of the acceptance part Light quantity time of origin variation.
(form 108)
A kind of communication means, device receive the input from test section, wherein the test section detection is from panel The arrival amount of the energy based on light or electromagnetic wave that arrives of other side's device, or read from built-in memory storage, to take Obtain the second set information；
Based on the described second set information, make to be formed in the acting surface for generating the detectable physical quantity variation of panel 1 or more element the physical quantity variation occurs respectively；
Information equipment with panel (it has the sensor for detecting the physical quantity),
By means of the panel, the physical quantity variation and respective physical amount occurred from described device detection changes generation Position；
Physical quantity variation and position from detection carry out the position of the element specific；
Based on the position of the element, the first set information is obtained；
Based on the described first set information, set processing is executed.
(form 109)
A kind of communication means, device receives the input from imaging sensor, or reads from built-in memory storage, from And the second set information is obtained,
Based on the described second set information, make to be formed in the acting surface for generating the detectable physical quantity variation of panel 1 or more element the physical quantity variation occurs respectively；
Information equipment with panel (it has the sensor for detecting the physical quantity),
By means of the panel, the physical quantity variation and respective physical amount occurred from described device detection changes generation Position；
Physical quantity variation and position from detection, obtain the position of the element；
Based on the position of the element, the first set information is obtained；
Based on the described first set information, set processing is executed.
(form 110)
A kind of communication means, device receive the input from test section, wherein the test section detection is from panel The energy arrival amount based on light or electromagnetic wave that arrives of other side's device, or read from built-in memory storage, to obtain Second set information；
Based on the described second set information, make to be formed in the acting surface for generating the detectable physical quantity variation of panel 1 or more element the physical quantity variation occurs respectively；
Information equipment with panel (it has the sensor for detecting the physical quantity),
The position that the physical quantity variation and the variation of respective physical amount occurred from described device detection occurs；
Physical quantity variation and position from detection carry out the position of the element specific；
Based on the position of the element, the first set information is obtained；
Using established approach, the second set information is obtained；
Based on the described second set information, the energy based on light or electromagnetic wave is sent to described device；
Described device detects the arrival amount of the corresponding energy of transmission by means of the test section；
By means of the information input unit, with the energy arrival amount detected or arrival by means of the test section Based at least one of time change of amount, the set information of third is obtained.
(form 111)
A kind of device, comprising: one or more test sections are detected from other side's device arrival with panel based on light The arrival amount of the energy of line or electromagnetic wave；
Message input device is taken based on the time change of the energy detected by means of the test section Obtain the second set information；
Include the location information of the panel in the arrival amount；
The information input unit obtains one or more described location informations of detection by means of the test section.
(form 112)
The device recorded in a kind of form 111 also includes processing unit, executes and one or more described described positions The corresponding information processing of information；Information output part implements set output based on the information processing.
(form 113)
A kind of device recorded in form 112, wherein the information output part by sent based on wireless information, language Sound output, shine or vibration a certain kind and implement set output.
(form 114)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 111~113, wherein the test section includes photodiode.
(form 115)
A kind of device that a certain item is recorded in form 111~114, wherein phase of the information input unit in described device To face contact or close in the state of the panel, the location information is obtained.
(form 116)
A kind of device has shell, and the shell has the acting surface for acting on other side's device,
At least part of the acting surface by be filled with low dielectric constant insulating material supporting layer expose and formed or It is coated with to be formed by means of coating material, meanwhile, equipped with the element of 1 or more electric conductivity,
The shell by the supporting layer from the layer that the acting surface leaves, have make described 1 or more member Part causes 1 of physical quantity variation or more physical quantity control unit respectively,
The opposing face of the acting surface in the housing, conductive layer, which exposes to be formed or be coated with by coating material, to be formed,
Described 1 or more element passes through circuit and the conductive layer by each described 1 or more physical quantity control unit Connection.
(form 117)
The device recorded in a kind of form 116, wherein described 1 or more element, which has, is covered each by metal layer and described The effect surface side of metal layer, hardness are lower than the conductive material layer of the metal layer.
(form 118)
The device recorded in a kind of form 117, wherein the conductive material layer is printing machining object.
(form 119)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 116~118, wherein at least another part of the acting surface is formed There is the second supporting layer, the second supporting layer arrangement is formed with multiple openings, so as to transmitted light；
From the layer that the acting surface leaves, receiving light equipped with from the multiple opening by the supporting layer The components of photo-electric conversion of line.
(form 120)
The device recorded in a kind of form 119, wherein the components of photo-electric conversion are equipped with multiple, form solar cell Plate.
(form 121)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 116~120, wherein the low dielectric constant insulating material has height Hollow structure or porous structure.
(form 122)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of 116~121, wherein the physical quantity control unit is directed to shell above-mentioned Whole on interior, the described acting surface includes the part area on the partial region and the opposing face of described 1 or more element Domain, in the position for being inserted into the shell, by means of specific partial region, by specifically for being inserted into 2 partial regions It is configured outside partial casing part.
(form 123)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 116~122, wherein the shell is flat structure.
(form 124)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of form 1~95, wherein also all with a certain item in form 116~123 The composition of record.
<example furthermore>
This implementation form further includes following example.
(example 1)<insertion entirety OFF and carry out the device (Figure 199) of physical quantity output>
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more element cause the physical quantity variation respectively；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Information；
The variation of the physical quantity is so that the physical quantity from the element occurs by the ON state of the panel detection With the physical quantity from the element not by the variation of the OFF state of the panel detection,
The information output part is executed repeatedly in first time point, and at least 1 of described 1 or more element is made to become ON State at the second time point after the first time point, makes described 1 or more element all become the place of OFF state Reason.
(example 2)
The device recorded in a kind of claim 1, wherein also include one or more test sections, detect from institute State the arrival amount of the energy based on light or electromagnetic wave of other side's device arrival of panel；
Information input unit is obtained based on the time change of the energy detected by means of the test section Second information.
(example 3)
The device recorded in a kind of claim 2, wherein defeated as the first information whenever from the information output part Out both quantitative information when, other side's device is to the energy based on the light or electromagnetic wave including the information comprising acquirement Carry out response, the information input unit obtains response message from the energy of the response, according to the response message of acquirement and described Both quantitative information implements positive misinterpretation, and in the case where the two is inconsistent, the information output part exports accordingly both again Quantitative information.
(example 4)<synchronization signal (Figure 198, Figure 200)>
The first set information is defined by the combination of the element of ON state in described 1 or more element, meanwhile,
For other side's device by the panel, the OFF state of described 1 of detection or more all OFF of element will generation The OFF identification information that table at least identifies corresponding OFF state is contained in second information and is exported, and response is carried out to this, After the information input unit inputs corresponding OFF identification information, information output part by corresponding OFF identification information as synchronization signal, The ON state occurs according to the next physical quantity variation.
(example 5) (Figure 200)
A kind of device recorded in claim 4, wherein the information input unit as the OFF identification information and Response message is obtained above.
(example 6) (Figure 20 7~209)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more element cause the physical quantity variation respectively；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output letter Breath；
Described 1 or more element forms to make the institute occurred in the immediate vicinity for contacting each contact surface of the panel The variation for stating physical quantity is greater than the contact surface periphery.
(example 7) (Figure 20 7~209)
The device recorded in a kind of claim 6, wherein described 1 or more element satisfaction is selected in following three kinds of conditions A kind of condition selected:
(condition 1) is that the height of the normal direction of the immediate vicinity of each contact surface is higher than the periphery Convex shape；
The conductor area that (condition 2) covers the per unit area of the immediate vicinity of each contact surface is greater than the week Near side；
The conductivity of the immediate vicinity of (condition 3) described each contact surface is higher than periphery.
(example 8)<calibration>(Figure 20 2~206)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more element cause the physical quantity variation respectively；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output letter Breath；
Adjustment section controls the physical quantity control unit, the physical quantity variation pair that described 1 of adjustment or more element occurs The effect degree of the panel.
(example 9)<adjustment>(Figure 20 2) of switch bias
A kind of device recorded in claim 8, wherein
The physical quantity control unit is semiconductor switch,
The adjustment section controls driving voltage value or driving current value when the semiconductor switch to be become to ON.
(example 10) (Figure 20 3)
A kind of device recorded in claim 8, wherein
The physical quantity control unit is semiconductor switch,
The adjustment section controls the pulse while semiconductor switch is driven to ON using pulse signal The period repeatedly of the duty ratio of signal or the pulse signal.
(example 11) (Figure 20 4A, Figure 20 4B)
The physical quantity control unit is semiconductor switch,
Described 1 or more element has 1 or more ring of central metal membrane part and surrounding said central metal film portion Shape metal film portion,
The adjustment section adjusts in the part and described 1 or more the part of annular metal film of the central metal film The quantity of the part be connected by means of the semiconductor switch.
(example 12) (Figure 20 2~205)
The device that a certain item is recorded in a kind of claim 8~11, wherein
Also there are one or more test sections, detect arrive from other side's device with the panel based on light or The arrival amount of the energy of electromagnetic wave；
The physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more element that the physical quantity variation of adjustment occur respectively；
The test section is obtained from other side's device to the response for adjusting the physical quantity variation；
The adjustment section adjusts the effect degree to the panel according to the response.
(example 13)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 with MEMS (Micro Electro Mechanical Systems) The above element causes the physical quantity variation respectively；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output letter Breath.
(example 14)
The device recorded in a kind of claim 12, wherein the MEMS is electric by means of starting electrode and to the starting The actuator that pole is driven, the circuit of the connection of 1 or more element described on or off.
(example 15) (2~Figure 21 of Figure 21 7)
A kind of device, the card shaped device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Dielectric layer, between the opposing face between the acting surface and relative to the card shape of the acting surface；
Mesh-shaped conductor layer is formed in the opposite side of the dielectric layer；
The dielectric layer is formed by insulant, includes described in the mesh-shaped conductor layer by user's contact Dielectric layer surface, so as to detect the physical quantity variation for acting on the panel from corresponding contact position.
(example 16) (Figure 21 6~217)
The device recorded in a kind of claim 15, wherein in the dielectric layer, be formed with and constitute the net form The groove portion of the circuit parallel of shape conductor layer.
(example 17)
The device recorded in a kind of claim 15 or 16, wherein also include
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more element cause the physical quantity variation respectively；
Information output part, according to the physical quantity variation, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, output first Set information.
(example 18) (Figure 125, Figure 126, Figure 129)
A kind of device recorded in claim 1~17, wherein the element is equipped with 3 or more, can relative to 2 intersecting axles on the acting surface and 3 or more positions cause physical quantity variation on asymmetrical panel respectively.
(example 19) (Figure 196, Figure 200)
The device recorded in a kind of claim 1~18, wherein the variation of the physical quantity is so that the object occurs Reason amount by the panel detection to ON state and the variation of OFF state do not arrived by the panel detection of the physical quantity,
The first set information is defined by the pattern combined as the element of the ON state, meanwhile, it does not include institute State the element combination that 1 or more element is whole OFF states.
(example 20) (Figure 196, Figure 200)
The device recorded in a kind of claim 1~19, wherein the variation of the physical quantity is so that the object occurs Reason amount by the panel detection to ON state and the variation of OFF state do not arrived by the panel detection of the physical quantity,
The first set information is defined by the pattern of the element configuration as ON state, meanwhile, it will be comprising being used for The reservation pattern of given amount including the reference pattern in panel identification described device direction forecloses.
The presence (Figure 179~187, Figure 21 0, Figure 21 1) of (example 21)<air layer>
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With the acting surface for generating the physical quantity variation that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device and The opposing face of the effect receives the operating surface of the operation of user, and the acting surface has the element of configuration 1 or more element Not element region except region and element area,
Between the acting surface and the operating surface, comprising:
Insulating layer for porous structure, hollow structure or is filled with the structure of low dielectric constant insulating material；
Wiring control layer in the operation surface side of the insulating layer, including draws described 1 or more element respectively It plays the physical quantity control unit of the physical quantity variation and matches the physical quantity control unit with what described 1 or more element was connect Line portion；
Described 1 or more element is connected to wiring control layer by means respectively of the penetrated wire for penetrating through the insulating layer；
Top section in the operation surface side corresponding with the not element region of the wiring control layer, configuration There is the physical quantity control unit, the wiring part connects the physical quantity control unit and match with the perforation in wiring control layer Line.
(example 22)<test section of energy arrival amount>(as the embodiment of Figure 21 0,79~186B is said referring to Fig.1 It is bright)
The device recorded in a kind of claim 21, wherein on the upper layer of the operation surface side of the insulating layer, match Have one or more test sections, the base that one or more test sections detection arrives from other side's device with the panel Light is formed to obtain from the acting surface between one or more described test sections in the energy arrival amount of light or electromagnetic wave Or electromagnetic wave can penetrate.
(example 23)<power supply>(as the embodiment of Figure 21 0, Figure 21 9,79~186B is illustrated referring to Fig.1)
The device recorded in a kind of claim 21 or 22, wherein in the upper of the operation surface side of the insulating layer Layer, equipped with power supply circuit, the power supply circuit from other side's device with the panel to arrive based on light Electric energy is supplied based on the energy of line or electromagnetic wave, from the acting surface between the power supply circuit, forms to obtain light Or electromagnetic wave can penetrate.
(example 24)<in card internal registration password, carries out my certification>(Figure 22 0, Figure 22 1)
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more element cause the variation of the physical quantity respectively；
Information output part, described 1 or more physical quantity control unit of driving export the according to the physical quantity variation One information；
One or more test sections are detected from other side's device arrival with the panel based on light or electromagnetic wave Energy arrival amount；
Information input unit is obtained based on the time change of the energy detected by means of the test section Second information；
Nonvolatile memory portion；
The information input unit executes:
Authentication information is registered in the registration process in the nonvolatile memory portion as the second information；
By the recall info remembered in the second information inputted after the registration process and the nonvolatile memory portion into The authentication processing that row compares；
The information output part exports the result of the authentication processing for the first information.
(example 25)
A kind of device recorded in claim 24, wherein described device is card-type, described 1 or more element configuration in The first area of the acting surface, the second area different from the first area of the acting surface by dielectric formation, The opposing face relative to acting surface of the second area assigns the label of display text, is being based on described 1 or more element Information pattern on, user contacts the label with finger, the label is contacted relative to the panel, to make object The variation of reason amount can be by the panel detection.
(example 26)
A kind of information system, in the information equipment with the device recorded in claim 24 and with touch panel In information system,
Second information is inputted by the touch panel.
(example 27)<information equipment corresponding with claim 1>(Figure 196)
A kind of information equipment, comprising:
Panel physical quantity variation to the position in plane and can occur the position of the physical quantity variation and carry out It is specific；
Control unit；
The variation of the physical quantity is so that the ON state and the object that the physical quantity is arrived by the panel detection occurs The variation for the OFF state that reason amount is not arrived by the panel detection,
The control unit grasps the first time point of 1 or more all OFF state in test object position on panel, inspection Measure described 1 or more test object position at least one be ON state after, it is whole to described 1 or more test object position It carries out specific for the second time point of OFF state, is detected as according in during the first time point~second time point The test object position grouping of ON state obtains the first information.
The presence of (example 28)<reference pattern, the restriction>(Figure 196~198) of test object position
The information equipment recorded in a kind of claim 27, wherein the control unit obtains work by means of the panel For multiple patterns of the position grouping of the generation physical quantity variation in position in the plane, the multiple pattern includes specified The reference pattern of the test object position, the information pattern for defining the first information.
(example 29)<is synchronized to light code (A~172 Figure 164 confirm again)>
A kind of information equipment, the information equipment are communicated with device, and described device receives optical signal and inputs letter Breath, meanwhile, the information based on the physical quantity variation except optical signal is exported, the information equipment includes
Display device；
To the physical quantity variation in the position in the display device and the physical quantity variation can occur for panel Position carry out it is specific；
Control unit；
The control unit makes the luminance of given area in the display device change, detection and the luminance variations It synchronizes and by means of the variation of the physical quantity of described device generation on panel.
(example 30)<is synchronized to physical quantity variation (A~172 Figure 164 confirm again)>
A kind of information equipment, the information equipment are communicated with device, and described device receives optical signal and inputs letter Breath, meanwhile, the information based on the physical quantity variation except optical signal is exported, the information equipment includes
Display device；
To the physical quantity variation in the position in the display device and the physical quantity variation can occur for panel Position carry out it is specific；
Control unit；
The control unit detects the physical quantity variation of the commitment positions on the panel, synchronous with the physical quantity variation, The luminance of the given area in the display device is set to change.
(example 31)<(identification based on capacitor+people touch) (Figure 125~139)>
A kind of communication equipment, comprising:
Display device；
To the physical quantity variation in the position in the display device and the physical quantity variation can occur for panel Position carry out it is specific；
Control unit；
The control unit is specific to the first multiple position progress on the panel that the physical quantity variation occurs, Based on the physical quantity state (ON or OFF) in the first the multiple position, the first processing (starting application program is executed Or service is provided), in the state of keeping the physical quantity state (ON or the OFF) in the first the multiple position, in institute It states except the first multiple position on panel, grasps second of position on the panel that the physical quantity variation occurs, Execute the second processing (instruction input, numeral input etc.) determined by second of position.
The detection of (example 32)<physical quantity variation and energy arrival amount is implemented at least part duplicate time, and Figure 172>
A kind of information equipment, the information equipment are communicated with device, and described device receives optical signal and inputs letter Breath, meanwhile, the information based on the physical quantity variation except optical signal is exported, the information equipment includes
Display device；
To the physical quantity variation in the position in the display device and the physical quantity variation can occur for panel Position carry out it is specific；
Control unit；
The control unit is executing the detection processing that the position of the physical quantity variation occurs with by means of the panel At least part duplicate time time, by the second information input based on the optical signal from the display device to institute State device.
(example 33)<based on light code return error check>(Figure 196~200, Figure 166, Figure 167, Figure 168, Figure 169, Figure 171)
A kind of information equipment, the information equipment are communicated with device, and described device receives optical signal and inputs letter Breath, meanwhile, the information based on physical quantity variation is exported, the information equipment includes
Display device；
To the physical quantity variation in the position in the display device and the physical quantity variation can occur for panel Position carry out it is specific；
Control unit；
The control unit obtains both quantitative informations of the physical quantity variation based on the panel detection, makes described aobvious The luminance of the given area of showing device changes, so that described device be made to receive accordingly both quantitatively having believed comprising the acquirement The optical signal of breath.
(example 34) (Figure 196~199, Figure 171, Figure 172)
The information equipment recorded in a kind of claim 33, wherein the control unit is based on the physical quantity whenever obtaining When the both quantitative information of variation, described device is made to receive the optical signal comprising corresponding both quantitative informations.
(example 35) (Figure 196~199)
The information equipment recorded in a kind of claim 33, wherein the variation of the physical quantity is so that the object occurs The ON state and the physical quantity that reason amount is arrived by the panel detection not by the variation of the panel detection to OFF state,
The control unit makes when detecting the OFF state of described 1 or more all OFF of element by the panel Described device receives the optical signal comprising both quantitative informations.
(example 36) < it executes the error check returned based on light code, receive and implement the judgement that malfunctions from device, Figure 142, Figure 143 >
A kind of information equipment, the information equipment are communicated with device, and described device receives optical signal and inputs letter Breath, meanwhile, the information based on physical quantity variation is exported, the information equipment includes
Display device；
To the physical quantity variation in the position in the display device and the physical quantity variation can occur for panel Position carry out it is specific；
Control unit；
The control unit makes the luminance of the given area of the display device change, so that described device be made to receive Optical signal comprising both quantitative informations obtains the set of the physical quantity variation based on the panel detection from described device The information of amount, the both quantitative information to the both quantitative information for including in the optical signal, based on the physical quantity variation are real Positive misinterpretation is applied, in the case where both sides are inconsistent, described device is made to receive the light letter comprising corresponding both quantitative informations again Number.
(example 37)
The information equipment recorded in a kind of claim 36, wherein the control unit is whenever making described device receive packet When optical signal containing both quantitative informations, both quantitative informations based on the physical quantity variation are obtained from described device.
(example 38)<output slab location information, Figure 173>
A kind of information equipment, the information equipment are communicated with device, and described device receives optical signal and inputs letter Breath, meanwhile, the information based on physical quantity variation is exported, the information equipment includes
Display device；
To the physical quantity variation in the position in the display device and the physical quantity variation can occur for panel Position carry out it is specific；
Control unit；
The control unit makes the luminance of the given area in the display device change, so that described device be made to connect By the optical signal of the location information comprising the physical quantity variation occurs.
(example 39)<to device input optical signal, based on the information of input, production encoded information, Figure 67 C>
A kind of information equipment, the information equipment are communicated with device, and described device receives optical signal and inputs letter Breath, meanwhile, the information based on physical quantity variation is exported, the information equipment includes
Display device；
To the physical quantity variation in the position in the display device and the physical quantity variation can occur for panel Position carry out it is specific；
Control unit；
The control unit makes the luminance in the region in the display device change, wherein the region is from described The configuration of multiple positions of panel detection physical quantity variation is identified as one region, so that described device be made to receive comprising the The optical signal of two information obtains that described device is generated based on the second information of the input by the panel One information executes the processing (certification etc.) based on the described first set information.
(example 40)<is moderately maked corrections>(Figure 175, Figure 176, Figure 20 5) to the variation of respective physical amount
A kind of information equipment, the information equipment are communicated with device, and described device receives optical signal and inputs letter Breath, meanwhile, the information based on physical quantity variation is exported, the information equipment includes
Display device；
To the physical quantity variation in the position in the display device and the physical quantity variation can occur for panel Position carry out it is specific；
Control unit；
The control unit makes the luminance of the given area in the display device change, wherein the given area It is the region that one is identified as from the configuration of multiple positions of the panel detection physical quantity variation, so that described device indicates The physical quantity variation as subjects occurs, using the testing result of the physical quantity variation by means of the panel as base Plinth makes described device receive the optical signal comprising the instruction for moderately being adjusted to the variation of respective physical amount.
(example 41)<threshold value of modification information equipment>(Figure 20 6)
A kind of information equipment, the information equipment are communicated with device, and described device receives optical signal and inputs letter Breath, meanwhile, the information based on physical quantity variation is exported, the information equipment includes
Display device；
To the physical quantity variation in the position in the display device and the physical quantity variation can occur for panel Position carry out it is specific；
Control unit；
The variation of the physical quantity is so that the ON state and the object that the physical quantity is arrived by the panel detection occurs The variation for the OFF state that reason amount is not arrived by the panel detection,
The control unit, which has, carries out the particular result of the physical quantity variation and the position based on the panel The adjustment modes of adjustment, in the adjustment modes, according to detection when being ON state by the physical quantity of the panel As a result, adjustment determines the physical quantity for the threshold value of ON state.
When (example 42) is without ON time, experimental result, matching movement processing, OFF time is not needed.In addition, even if having A little stray capacitance, inspection software can also pass through according to the time and judge to be stray capacitance or original ON.
A kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device The variation of amount,
Have: 1 or more element is formed in the acting surface；
Physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more element cause the variation of the physical quantity respectively；
Information output part, described 1 or more physical quantity control unit of driving export the according to the physical quantity variation One information；
The variation of the physical quantity is the change for the ON state that the physical quantity from the element is arrived by the panel detection Change, the time of the ON state is set as, the control circuit controlled to the panel scanning panel and to whole in the panel The pixel data of a panel is sampled the 2 times or more time of required sample time.
(example 43)
The device recorded in a kind of claim 42, wherein the variation of the physical quantity is so that occurring from the member The physical quantity of part by the panel detection to ON state and physical quantity from the element do not arrived by the panel detection The variation of OFF state, the first information are the group of the element of ON state by the physical quantity in described 1 or more element The differentiation pattern that physical quantity described in defined information pattern and described 1 or more element is OFF state is closed alternately to give birth to At.
(example 44)
A kind of device recorded in claim 43, wherein in the differentiation pattern that the physical quantity is OFF state, institute State OFF state time be set as the sample time 2 times or more time.
(example 45)
A kind of device recorded in claim 43, wherein in the differentiation pattern that the physical quantity is OFF state, institute The time for stating OFF state is set as 30ms or more.
Symbol description
1... code generating device, 3... code identification device, 11 ... information judging portions, 12... code generating unit, 13... code output section, 31... touch panel, the identification part 32... test section 33...
110... device, card-type device, 200... information equipment, 111... element, 112... components of photo-electric conversion row Column, 113... fingerprint sensor, 114... contact conductor (conductive pad), 114A... conductive layer 115...SW, 116...CPU, 117... memory, 118... comparator, 119... control line, 120... power supply line, 121... driving circuit, 122... electricity Pond, 123... capacitor, 124... antenna, 125... power transformation circuit, 126... piezoelectric element, 127... rectification circuit, 128... thermoelectric element, the arrangement of 129... light quantity measuring cell

Claims (35)

1. a kind of laminal device, as the laminal device for the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, Include:
Non-conductive base material is formed with blank part in inside to be lamellar；
Multiple first conductive pattern components, the shape on the first face for acting on the panel of the non-conductive base material At；
Second conductive pattern component, it is formed above apart from first face both set a distance；And
First circuit is open by the part that the formation in first face has the first conductive pattern component Hole connects the first conductive pattern component and the second conductive pattern component.
2. laminal device according to claim 1, wherein
The flat shape of the first conductive pattern component is convex polygon, roughly circular or substantially elliptical.
3. laminal device according to claim 1 or 2, wherein
The second conductive pattern component is Wiring pattern.
4. laminal device according to claim 3, wherein
When making first face act on the panel, the Wiring pattern has not by the broad-ruler of the panel detection While very little, by means of being connect with the first conductive pattern component, for the first conductive pattern component, make described Physical quantity increases to panel limit that can be detected or more.
5. laminal device as claimed in any of claims 1 to 4, wherein
The second conductive pattern component has first part and second part, and the first part fills described in overlook view In the region set, formed in the region for being formed with the cavity, the second part in the region of overlook view described device, It is formed in the region in no cavity.
6. laminal device according to claim 5, wherein
The first part is on the second face as first face opposing face, in the non-conductive base material immediately below It is formed between the inner wall or second face and the inner wall of the region in cavity, second surface side in the cavity It is formed in the non-conductive base material.
7. laminal device according to claim 6, wherein
Inner wall of the first part in second surface side in the cavity is formed,
On second face, equipped with the contact of the human contact for user, contact company by means of second circuit It is connected to the first part.
8. laminal device as claimed in any of claims 1 to 7, wherein
The second conductive pattern component includes the wiring formed on the second face as first face opposing face,
The two sides of the wiring formed on second face, be formed with separated from the wiring and the human contact that makes user Contact patterns.
9. laminal device as claimed in any of claims 1 to 6, wherein
Also there is second circuit, make the second conductive pattern component formed in the inner wall of second surface side in the cavity It is conducted on second face.
10. laminal device as claimed in any of claims 1 to 9, wherein
It is described cavity in, be formed with section be convex polygon, roughly circular or substantially elliptical and support first face and The columnar part in the second face.
11. laminal device according to claim 10, wherein
In the columnar part, it is formed with through-hole in the columnar part of the first type, first circuit is formed by the through-hole.
12. laminal device described in 0 or 11 according to claim 1, wherein
On second face, it is formed with the label as user's finger contact object,
In the label non-conductive base material immediately below, it is formed with the columnar part of second species in the columnar part, The columnar part of second species has when the finger of the user contacts the label, in order to form institute on first face State the physical quantity of the detectable limit of panel or more and required abundant section size.
13. laminal device according to claim 12, wherein
The columnar part of the second species is formed with the second surface side taper narrower than first surface side.
14. according to claim 1 to laminal device described in any one of 13, wherein
It further include the printing layer for being coated second face,
The second conductive pattern component has the wiring being provided between the printing layer and second face.
15. laminal device according to claim 14, wherein
The first contact being connect with the wiring being provided between the printing layer and second face, in the printing layer surface shape At.
16. laminal device according to claim 14 or 15, wherein
It is formed with the second contact of the second conductive pattern component insulation in the printing layer surface.
17. laminal device described in any one of 4 to 16 according to claim 1, wherein
On first face, it is formed with the third electroconductive member with the second conductive pattern component insulation,
It is formed with the tertiary circuit for connecting second contact and the third electroconductive member.
18. laminal device according to claim 14, wherein
It is formed with first electrode between the printing layer and second face, the first electrode and is provided to the printing layer Wiring between second face is connect, by means of the finger contact of the printing layer to the sensor of the panel Transmitting is for effect needed for detecting the physical quantity.
19. laminal device described in 4 or 16 according to claim 1, wherein
Second electrode, the second electrode and second electric conductivity are also formed between the printing layer and second face Pattern elements insulation connection, by means of the finger contact of the printing layer to the sensor passes of the panel for examining Effect needed for surveying the physical quantity.
20. laminal device according to claim 17, wherein
On first face, it is formed with the third electroconductive member with the second conductive pattern component insulation,
It is formed with the tertiary circuit for connecting the second electrode and the third electroconductive member.
21. a kind of device, the device of the card shape as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the change for the physical quantity that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device Change,
Have:
In 1 or more the element that the first area of the acting surface is formed；
In 1 or more the element that the second area of the acting surface is formed；
The dielectric layer between the card shape opposing face between the acting surface and relative to the acting surface；
In the wiring layer that the opposite side of the dielectric layer is formed；
1 or more contact terminal, with the wiring in the card shape opposite side relative to the second area The wiring for including in layer insulate to be formed；
First perforation circuit, penetrates through the dielectric layer, be connected to 1 or more element that the first area is formed with it is described Wiring layer；And
Second perforation circuit, penetrates through the dielectric layer, be connected to 1 or more element that the second area is formed with it is described Terminal is used in contact；
It is described when the wiring layer is to contact the card shape opposing face relative to the second area in the finger of user The patch bay that finger can contact certain wiring is configured.
22. device according to claim 21, wherein
Described 1 or more contact is respectively formed a pair with terminal and is placed in the wiring that the wiring layer of the opposite side includes Between plane domain.
23. a kind of device, as the device for the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity,
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the change for the physical quantity that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device Change,
Have:
In 1 or more the element that the acting surface is formed；
First physical quantity control unit, makes described 1 or more element cause the variation of the physical quantity respectively；
Conductive pattern component, it is formed above at a distance of both set a distances in the acting surface；
Second physical quantity control unit causes physical quantity variation relative to the panel from the conductive pattern component；And
Control unit, described 1 of driving or more physical quantity control unit, while exporting the first set information, with described 1 The above physical quantity control unit linkage, controls the second physical quantity control unit.
24. device according to claim 23, wherein
The control unit controls second physical quantity when controlling 1 the above the first physical quantity control unit for ON Portion's control is ON, when control all first physical quantity control units for OFF, by the second physical quantity control unit control For OFF.
25. device according to claim 23, wherein
Conductive pattern component is corresponding with multiple element domain of the existence on the acting surface at a distance of both spacings From in above face, integrally it is equipped with relative to the multiple element.
26. device according to claim 23, wherein
Conductive pattern component is corresponding with multiple element domain of the existence on the acting surface at a distance of both spacings From in above face, relative to the multiple element, be individually equipped with respectively it is multiple, from multiple conductive pattern structures of outfit Individually by means of the second physical quantity control unit the physical quantity variation occurs for part respectively.
27. device according to claim 23, wherein
Conductive pattern component is corresponding with multiple element domain of the existence on the acting surface at a distance of both spacings From in above face, relative to the multiple element, be individually equipped with respectively it is multiple,
The control unit links with the multiple element respectively, drives from the multiple conductions matched respectively with the multiple element The physical quantity of property pattern elements.
28. the device according to claim 23 to 27, wherein
The first physical quantity control unit and the second physical quantity control unit be to formed conductive path or the cutting path into The switch of row control.
29. device according to claim 27, wherein
It is also conductive by contact material portion, the electric conductivity by contact material portion in relative to the acting surface Face is formed, and is received from external contact,
The first physical quantity control is from described 1 or more element to ground connection (Earth) current potential and described non-to being formed The switch that the conductive path or the cutting conductive path of contact material portion electric conductivity are controlled, second physical quantity Control is to from the conductive pattern component to the earthing potential and the electric conductivity road of the non-contact material portion electric conductivity The switch that diameter or the cutting conductive path are controlled.
30. the device filled according to claim 26 or 29, wherein
The switch has diode and bias circuit, and the bias circuit is series at the diode, so that occurring described The voltage decline added on the basis of the forward voltage decline of diode.
31. a kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the physics quantitative change that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device Change, have:
In 1 or more the element that the acting surface is formed；And
Described 1 or more element is set to cause the physical quantity control unit of the physical quantity variation respectively；
In the physical quantity control unit, it is connected with the bipolar junction transistor and field effect transistor of one or more subordinates connections At least one, the bipolar junction transistor is connected with capacitor between base stage and collector, by means of the collector and hair Each element control is to be connected to the ON state of earthing potential and cut off from earthing potential by the circuit between emitter-base bandgap grading OFF state, the field effect transistor are connected with capacitor between grid and drain electrode, by means of between the drain electrode and source electrode Circuit, be the OFF state for being connected to the ON state of earthing potential and being cut off from earthing potential by each element control.
32. device according to claim 29, wherein
Putting for the capacitor and the bipolar junction transistor is arranged in the bipolar junction transistor of described one or more subordinates connection Big rate, so that under the ON state, the physical quantity that described 1 or more element generates respectively reaches described in the panel detection It is more than the threshold values of physical quantity；The capacitor and field effect is arranged in the field effect transistor of one or more subordinates connection The magnifying power of transistor is answered, so that under the ON state, the physical quantity that described 1 or more element generates respectively reaches described It is more than the threshold values of physical quantity described in panel detection.
33. the device according to claim 29 or 30, wherein
Ground connection is being connected to from described 1 or more element respectively by the bipolar junction transistor or the field effect transistor On the path of current potential, equipped with the bipolar junction transistor or the field effect transistor from OFF variation be ON when, capacity energy The capacitor detected by the touch panel.
34. a kind of device, the device as the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity, wherein
With acting surface, the acting surface generates the change for the physical quantity that the panel can be detected from the forward surface of described device Change, have:
In 1 or more the element that the acting surface is formed；And
Described 1 or more element is set to cause the physical quantity control unit of the physical quantity variation respectively；
The bipolar junction transistor and field effect transistor that the physical quantity control unit is connected with the connection of one or more subordinates are at least Each element control is connection by means of the circuit between collector and emitter by one, the bipolar junction transistor ON state to earthing potential and the OFF state from earthing potential cutting, the field effect transistor is by means of drain electrode and source electrode Between circuit, be the OFF shape for being connected to the ON state of earthing potential and being cut off from earthing potential by each element control State,
Ground connection is being connected to from described 1 or more element respectively by the bipolar junction transistor or the field effect transistor On the path of current potential, equipped with the bipolar junction transistor or the field effect transistor from OFF variation be ON when, capacity energy The capacitor detected by the touch panel.
35. a kind of device has as the device for the panel for acting on the sensor with detection physical quantity:
The face of being detected is arranged with 1 or more element for generating the physical quantity variation that can be detected from forward surface；
1 or more physical quantity control unit makes described 1 or more element difference in the state of in contact with or close to the panel Cause the physical quantity variation that the sensor can detect；And
Described 1 or more element when the panel described in the detected face contact, is pressed into the face by elastic component respectively Plate.
CN201780024053.9A 2016-02-17 2017-02-17 Device and card-type device Pending CN109923503A (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (17)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2016-028444 2016-02-17
JP2016028444 2016-02-17
US201662311611P 2016-03-22 2016-03-22
US62/311611 2016-03-22
JP2016057723A JP6031689B1 (en) 2015-09-21 2016-03-22 Device and card-type device
JP2016-057723 2016-03-22
US201662366615P 2016-07-25 2016-07-25
JP2016-145848 2016-07-25
US62/366615 2016-07-25
JP2016145848A JP6089194B1 (en) 2015-09-21 2016-07-25 Device and card-type device
JP2016-184911 2016-09-21
JP2016184911 2016-09-21
PCT/JP2016/077914 WO2017051833A1 (en) 2015-09-21 2016-09-21 Device, and card type device
JPPCT/JP2016/077914 2016-09-21
JP2016227383 2016-11-23
JP2016-227383 2016-11-23
PCT/JP2017/006018 WO2017142093A2 (en) 2016-02-17 2017-02-17 Device, and card-type device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
CN109923503A true CN109923503A (en) 2019-06-21

Family

ID=65814823

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN201780024053.9A Pending CN109923503A (en) 2016-02-17 2017-02-17 Device and card-type device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2017142093A1 (en)
CN (1) CN109923503A (en)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108681930A (en) * 2018-05-09 2018-10-19 广州东港安全印刷有限公司 A kind of electronic invoice platform
US11068764B2 (en) 2019-12-16 2021-07-20 Elan Microelectronics Corporation Smart card and control method thereof
CN113253828A (en) * 2020-02-07 2021-08-13 华为技术有限公司 Vibration feedback module, control method and equipment
TWI831596B (en) * 2023-02-03 2024-02-01 華南商業銀行股份有限公司 Mark trading system

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH11189708A (en) * 1997-12-26 1999-07-13 Tsutsunaka Plast Ind Co Ltd Resin composition for card
CN101751602A (en) * 2008-12-02 2010-06-23 Em微电子马林有限公司 Electronic card having control part
CN103270479A (en) * 2010-11-22 2013-08-28 吉田健治 Information input system, program, medium
EP2722739A1 (en) * 2012-10-22 2014-04-23 Cartamundi Turnhout N.V. System comprising a card and a device comprising a touch sensor
US20150199039A1 (en) * 2011-06-16 2015-07-16 Touchpac Holdings, Llc Input means for a touchscreen

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2012198725A (en) * 2011-03-19 2012-10-18 Pfu Ltd Information input device, information input method, and program
JP5825036B2 (en) * 2011-10-18 2015-12-02 凸版印刷株式会社 Information medium and method for reading information medium
KR101305412B1 (en) * 2012-01-09 2013-09-06 최영우 Touch stamp and system and method for authentication using the same
JP5733845B2 (en) * 2013-07-17 2015-06-10 信行 千葉 Input devices and programs
JP2016009291A (en) * 2014-06-24 2016-01-18 Ｔｏｕｃｈｃａｒｄ株式会社 Program, electronic apparatus, and content provision system

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH11189708A (en) * 1997-12-26 1999-07-13 Tsutsunaka Plast Ind Co Ltd Resin composition for card
CN101751602A (en) * 2008-12-02 2010-06-23 Em微电子马林有限公司 Electronic card having control part
CN103270479A (en) * 2010-11-22 2013-08-28 吉田健治 Information input system, program, medium
US20150199039A1 (en) * 2011-06-16 2015-07-16 Touchpac Holdings, Llc Input means for a touchscreen
EP2722739A1 (en) * 2012-10-22 2014-04-23 Cartamundi Turnhout N.V. System comprising a card and a device comprising a touch sensor

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108681930A (en) * 2018-05-09 2018-10-19 广州东港安全印刷有限公司 A kind of electronic invoice platform
US11068764B2 (en) 2019-12-16 2021-07-20 Elan Microelectronics Corporation Smart card and control method thereof
TWI734302B (en) * 2019-12-16 2021-07-21 義隆電子股份有限公司 Smart card and control method thereof
CN113253828A (en) * 2020-02-07 2021-08-13 华为技术有限公司 Vibration feedback module, control method and equipment
CN113253828B (en) * 2020-02-07 2023-09-08 华为技术有限公司 Vibration feedback module, control method and equipment
TWI831596B (en) * 2023-02-03 2024-02-01 華南商業銀行股份有限公司 Mark trading system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2017142093A1 (en) 2019-03-22

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN108351712A (en) device and card-type device
KR102168577B1 (en) Devices and card-type devices
US20210035203A1 (en) Data packet generator and implementations of same
US11705933B1 (en) Methods for monitoring state information of items
KR102154775B1 (en) Credit card form factor secure mobile computer and methods
US20190080127A1 (en) Device, and card type device
CN109923503A (en) Device and card-type device
JP6508557B2 (en) Sheet-like device
CN108027891A (en) Dynamic transaction card power management
CN105468963A (en) Data packet generator for generating passcodes
US20200252105A1 (en) Means for transmitting data in a unidirectional or bidirectional manner
CN105765615A (en) Communication device
McHugh et al. Near field communication: recent developments and library implications
US20220391867A1 (en) Communication device to sense one or more biometric characteristics of a user
US10460139B1 (en) System and method for unique identifier detection based on invisible light
JPWO2020009131A1 (en) Code generator
EP3044744A1 (en) Communication device
WO2017164262A1 (en) Thin plate–like device
AU2019329379B2 (en) System and method for unique identifier detection based on invisible light
CN108268919A (en) Dynamic transaction card antenna is installed
JP2005231117A (en) Seal and seal certification system
Partridge Associating Users and Devices using Attention-Correlated Communication

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PB01 Publication
PB01 Publication
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
WD01 Invention patent application deemed withdrawn after publication

Application publication date: 20190621

WD01 Invention patent application deemed withdrawn after publication